HomeMy WebLinkAbout11 - Pierce Manufacturing IncCITY OF NEWPORT BEACH
CITY COUNCIL STAFF REPORT
Agenda Item No. 11
February 9, 2010
TO: HONORABLE MAYOR AND MEMBERS OF THE CITY COUNCIL
FROM: Fire Department and General Services Department
Steve Lewis, 644 -3101, slewis(a)nbfd.net
Mark Harmon, 644 -3055, mharmon(aD_newportbeachca.gov
SUBJECT: Approval of the Contract to Purchase One (1) Ladder Truck and
Two (2) Fire Engines from Pierce Manufacturing Inc. of Appleton,
Wisconsin
RECOMMENDATION
City Council approve (1) the negotiated contract with Pierce Manufacturing Inc. from
Appleton, Wisconsin, for the purchase of one (1) new 100' heavy duty tiller ladder truck
in the amount of $1,066,824 including tax, and two (2) new 1250 GPM Triple
Combination pumpers in the amount of $1,032,806 including tax ($516,403 each); and
(2) a Budget Amendment in the amount of $346,019 to fund the purchase.
DISCUSSION
In March of 2007, the City Council approved the purchase of one (1) new 100' heavy
duty tiller ladder truck from American LaFrance. Subsequent to that approval, American
LaFrance had repeated time delays on the manufacturing of the truck. Within the next
year it was clear that American LaFrance was in financial difficulty. Once American
LaFrance filed for bankruptcy, we met with their management team to ascertain what
direction we would head. We had developed a strategy with American LaFrance in
regards to a timeline that we felt was appropriate. It became very clear within a short
period of time that American LaFrance was not going to be able to meet that timeline.
At this point, the Apparatus Committee, made up of employees from the General
Services Department and the Fire. Department, began a comprehensive and thorough
investigative process to locate a vendor that could meet the specifications we had
developed with American LaFrance. The Committee began the process without any
preconceived bias towards one vendor versus another. The Committee eventually
recommended that Pierce Manufacturing met all of the qualifications in regards to our
precise truck specifications, safety elements, and ability to perform the tasks necessary
for a truck in the unique terrain that exists here in Newport Beach.
The fiscal years 2008 -09, and 2009 -10, have each included funding for the purchase of
pumpers under the normal replacement cycle. Consequently, the Committee has been
looking at, and doing research on, pumpers for over a year. The Committee began
looking at current American LaFrance designs in the second half of calendar year 2008,
with the intention of purchasing another American LaFrance pumper. The City has eight
American LaFrance pumpers in frontline service at this time. However, when it became
apparent that American LaFrance was in financial trouble and would have difficulty
delivering the truck we ordered, the Committee began to work simultaneously on
looking at ladder trucks and researching pumpers. The same exhaustive procedure that
we used for looking at the trucks was used for the pumpers. To help the Committee
make the most appropriate recommendation, the same vendors were examined. It was
decided that Pierce Manufacturing Inc. could provide the best apparatus for the criteria
we were requesting. Our criteria included turning radius, water tank capacity,
equipment storage, height, and pump capacity /gallons per minute output.
At the November 24, 2009, Council Meeting, staff received approval to begin
negotiating with Pierce Manufacturing. The attached Purchase Agreement is the end
result of.those negotiations and delineates the responsibilities of Pierce Manufacturing
Inc. City Staff negotiated a discount of $20,449 off the purchase price by agreeing to
pay 20% within ten (10) days of City approval of purchase agreement.
Per the Purchase Agreement, Pierce Manufacturing Inc. shall make delivery of the
equipment within 300 calendar days from City issuance of the notice to proceed. If
Pierce does not make the deadline, they agree to the deduction of liquidated damages
in the sum of Two Hundred Dollars ($200) per day, per piece of equipment.
Pierce Manufacturing Inc. backs every piece of apparatus with a Performance Bond,
guaranteeing against loses for non completion of work. This is a no cost item to the City
and accompanies every piece of apparatus that Pierce Manufacturing Inc. builds.
Consequently, staff is requesting that Council approve the contract to have Pierce
Manufacturing Inc. construct one (1) ladder truck and two (2) 1250 GPM triple
combination pumpers.
FUNDING AVAILABILITY:
Funding from the cancelled purchase of the American LaFrance truck has been
encumbered and is available to be used toward the purchase of a new tiller truck. The
American LaFrance tiller truck was priced at $833,611, which included a $75,000
discount due to the company's late delivery on a previous purchase of three engines.
Consequently, since the cost of the Pierce ladder truck is $1,066,824, staff is requesting
a budget amendment in the amount of $233,213 to fund this purchase.
The FY 2009 -10 Budget included $920,000 of funding for both the pumpers discussed
above. The cost of the two Pierce engines is $1,032,806; staff is requesting a budget
amendment in the amount of $112,806 to fund the purchase.
Obviously, prices have risen since the original approval of the engines and trucks in the
prior years. The Replacement Fund has sufficient funds to purchase both the truck and
two engines; however, the Fire Department's contribution to the replacement fund will
need to rise in future years as the price of apparatus continues to escalate.
ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW:
No environmental review required. Purchase of equipment is not a project as defined by
CEQA.
Prepared by:
Steve Lewis, Fire Chief
Fire Department
WA-
Mike Pisani, Deputy Director
General Services Department
W'I/f�q
Mark Harmon, Director
General Services Department
Attachments:
Budget Amendment
Contract and Exhibits with Pierce Manufacturing Inc.
PURCHASE AGREEMENT
FOR TWO 1250 GPM TRIPLE COMBINATION PUMPERS AND
ONE 100' HEAVY DUTY TILLER LADDER TRUCK FROM
PIERCE MANUFACTURING INC.
This Purchase Agreement (the "Agreement") is entered into as of this
day of February, 2010 ( "Execution Date "), by and between the CITY OF NEWPORT
BEACH, a California municipal corporation and charter city ( "City "), and PIERCE
MANUFACTURING INC., a Wisconsin Corporation ( "Vendor "), whose principal place of
business is 2600 American Dr., Appleton, Wisconsin 54914.
RECITALS
A. City is a municipal corporation duly organized and validly existing under the laws
of the State of California with the power to carry on its business as it is now being
conducted under the statutes of the State of California and the Charter of City.
B. City requires two (2) new GPM Triple Combination Pumpers and one (1) new
100' Heavy Duty Tiller Ladder Truck (individually "Piece of Equipment" and
collectively the "Equipment ").
C. Vendor is a fire apparatus manufacturer and dealer.
E. The prince al members of Vendor for purposes of purchase shall be
and Kevin Newell.
F. City has solicited and received a proposal from Vendor, has evaluated the
expertise of Vendor, and desires to submit an order for the Equipment under the
terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement.
NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual representations, warranties
and covenants, and other terms and conditions as set forth herein, Vendor and City
(each a "Party" and together the "Parties ") agree as follows:
1. COMPENSATION
Total Compensation for Equipment, including all sales taxes, shall not exceed
Two Million Ninety Nine Thousand and Six Hundred Thirty One Dollars and
no /100 ($2,099,631.00) ( "Contract Price"), without prior written authorization.
Total. Compensation includes One Million Nine Hundred Thirty Thousand Six
Hundred= Ninety -Five Dollars and no /100 ($1,930,695.00) ( "Purchase Price ")
payable to the Vendor and One Hundred Sixty Eight Thousand Nine Hundred
Thirty Six Dollars and no /100 ($168,936.00) ( "Taxes ") payable directly to the
California State Board of Equalization as fully described on the Pricing Page
attached hereto as Exhibit A and incorporated herein by reference for the
Equipment, which is described more fully in the final proposals for Fire Truck
Specifications and Warranty Details in Exhibits B -1 and B -2 attached hereto
and incorporated herein by reference. Vendor agrees to accept this
compensation as full remuneration for delivery to City of the Equipment.
1.1 Payment Schedule: The City shall pay Vendor twenty percent (20 %) of
purchase price or Three Hundred Eighty Six Thousand One Hundred
Thirty Nine Dollars and no /100 ($386,139.00) within ten (10) days of City
receipt of the performance bond, as required under section 11, a copy of
which is attached hereto as Exhibit C and incorporated herein by
reference. The City shall pay Vendor remaining eighty percent of
purchase price, or One Million Five Hundred Forty Four Thousand Five
Hundred Fifty Six Dollars and no /100 ($1,544,556.00), no later than thirty
(30) days after City approval of the final invoice.
1.2 Taxes: Under the City's Direct Payment Exemption permit number SR
EAA 24- 089475 DP, the City will self - accrue its Use Tax obligation to the
California State Board of Equalization in the amount of One Hundred Sixty
Eight Thousand Nine Hundred Thirty Six Dollars and no /100
($168,936.00) within thirty (30) days of Equipment delivery to the City. If
only partial delivery of equipment is received, the City will only pay the
State Board of Equalization the amount of Use Tax due on the value of the
equipment delivered.
2. ADMINISTRATION
This Agreement will be administered by the General Services Department.
Deputy Director Mike Pisani, or his designee, shall be the Purchase
Administrator and shall have the authority to act for City under this Agreement.
The Purchase Administrator or his /her authorized representative shall represent
City in all matters pertaining to the services to be rendered pursuant to this
Agreement.
3. DELIVERY
Delivery to City of the Equipment shall be made within 300 calendar days from
City issuance of the notice to proceed. Time of delivery is of the essence in this
Agreement. City reserves the right to refuse any goods and to cancel all or any
part of the goods not conforming to applicable specifications, samples or
descriptions. Acceptance of any part of the order for goods shall not bind City to
accept future shipments nor deprive City of the right to return goods already
accepted at Vendor's expense. Over shipments and under shipments of goods
shall be only as agreed to in writing by City. Delivery shall not be deemed to be
complete until all goods have actually been received and accepted in writing by
the City.
3.1 Vendor shall submit all requests for extensions of time for delivery in
writing to the City Purchase Administrator not later than ten (10) calendar
days after the start of the condition that purportedly causes a delay. The
Purchase Administrator shall review all such requests and may, at his sole
Page 12
discretion, grant reasonable time extensions for unforeseeable delays that
are beyond Vendor's control.
3.2 The parties agree that it is extremely difficult and impractical to determine
and fix the actual damages that City will sustain should the Vendor fail to
complete the work called for in this Agreement. Should Vendor fail to
complete the work called for in this Agreement, Vendor agrees to the
deduction of liquidated damages in the sum of Two Hundred Dollars and
no /100 ($200.00) per day, per piece of Equipment, for every day beyond
the date scheduled for delivery provided in Section 3. Execution of this
Agreement shall constitute agreement by the City and Vendor that the
sum of Two Hundred Dollars and no /100 ($200.00) per day is the
minimum value of costs and actual damages caused by the failure of
Vendor to deliver the Equipment within the allotted time. Such sum is
liquidated damages and shall not be construed as a penalty, and may be
deducted from payments due the Vendor if such delay occurs.
4. ACCEPTANCE /PAYMENT
Unless otherwise agreed to in writing by City, acceptance shall not be deemed
complete unless in writing and until each piece of Equipment have actually been
received, inspected and tested to the satisfaction of City, and payment shall be
made in arrears after satisfactory acceptance.
5. NOTICES
All notices, demands, requests or approvals to be given under the terms of this
Agreement shall be given in writing, and conclusively shall be deemed served
when delivered personally, or on the third business day after the deposit thereof
in the United States mail, postage prepaid, first -class mail, addressed as
hereinafter provided. All notices, demands, requests or approvals from Vendor
to City shall be addressed to City at:
Attn: Mike Pisani
General Services Deputy Director
City of Newport Beach
3300 Newport Boulevard
PO Box 1768
Newport Beach, CA 92658
Phone: 949 - 644 -3101
Fax: 949 -673 -3056
Email: mmpisanionewportbeachca.gov
All notices, demands, requests or approvals from City to Vendor shall be
addressed to Vendor at:
Attention:'
Pierce Manufacturing, Inc.
Page 13
With a copy to:
2600 American Dr.
Appleton, WI 54914
Phone:
Fax:
Email:
Kevin Newell
South Coast Fire Equipment, Inc.
2020 South Baker Ave.
Ontario, CA 91761
� X11 t
a
6. GOVERNING LAW AND VENUE
This Agreement has been negotiated and executed in the State of California and
shall be governed by and construed under the laws of the state of California. In
the event of any legal action to enforce or interpret this Agreement, the sole and
exclusive venue shall be the Orange County Superior Court, located in Orange
County, California, and the parties hereto agree to and do hereby submit to the
jurisdiction of such court. Furthermore, the parties specifically agree to waive
any and all rights to request that an action be transferred for trial to another City.
7. AMENDMENTS
No alteration or variation of the terms of this Agreement shall be valid unless
made in writing and signed by the parties; no oral understanding or agreement
not incorporated herein shall be binding on either of the parties; and no
exceptions, alternatives, substitutes or revisions are valid or binding ion City
unless authorized by City in writing.
8. TAXES
The price quoted includes California state sales or use taxes.
9. ENTIRE AGREEMENT
This Agreement, when accepted by the Vendor either in writing or by the
shipment of any articles, goods, or other commencement of performance
hereunder, contains the entire Agreement between the parties with respect to all
matters herein, and there are no restrictions, promises, warranties, or
undertakings other than those set forth herein or referred to herein. No
exceptions, alternatives, substitutes or revisions are valid or binding on City
unless authorized by City in writing. Electronic acceptance of any additional
terms, conditions or supplemental agreements by any City employee or agent,
shall not be valid or binding on City unless accepted in writing by the Purchase
Administrator. The terms of this Agreement shall supersede any inconsistencies
between this Agreement and the Exhibits hereto.
10. WARRANTY
Vendor expressly warrants that the goods covered by this Agreement are: 1) free
of liens or encumbrances; 2) of merchantable quality and good for the ordinary
purposes for which they are used; and 3) fit for the particular purpose for which
they are intended. Acceptance of this order shall constitute an agreement upon
Vendor's part to indemnify, defend and hold City and its indemnities as identified
in paragraph 17 below, and as more fully described in paragraph 17, harmless
from liability, loss, damage and expense, including reasonable counsel fees,
incurred or sustained by City by reason of the failure of the goods to conform to
such warranties, faulty work performance, negligent or unlawful acts, and non-
compliance with any applicable state or federal codes, ordinances, orders, or
statutes, including the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) and the
California Industrial Safety Act. Such remedies shall be in addition to any other
remedies provided by law.
Vendor and/or manufacturer's warranty, as applicable, is attached hereto as part
of Exhibits B -1 and B -2, and incorporated in full by this reference. The
Warranty Period shall commence on the date the Equipment is delivered to the
City. All warranty repair work shall be conducted by a Vendor certified dealer in
the southern California region.
As of execution of Agreement the Vendor certified dealer for purposes of all
repairs and warranty work is: South Coast Fire Equipment, Inc., 2020 S. Baker
Ave., Ontario, CA 91761.
In the event that Vendor designates a different certified dealer for the southern
California region, Vendor shall provide City with written notice of such change
within ten (10) days of the change.
11. BONDING
Vendor shall obtain, provide and maintain at its own expense during the term of
this Contract: a Faithful Performance Bond in the amount of one hundred percent
(100 %) of the total amount to be paid by Vendor as set forth in this Agreement in
the form attached hereto as Exhibit C which is incorporated herein by this
reference.
The Faithful Performance Bond shall be issued by an insurance organization. or
surety (1) currently authorized by the Insurance Commissioner to transact business
of insurance in the State of California, (2) listed as an acceptable surety in the latest
revision of the Federal Register Circular 570, and (3) assigned a Policyholders'
Rating A (or higher) and Financial Size Category Class VII (or larger) in accordance
with the latest edition of Best's Key Rating Guide: Property - Casualty.
Page 15
The Vendor shall deliver, concurrently with execution of this Agreement, the
Faithful Performance Bond and a certified copy of the "Certificate of Authority" of
the Insurer or Surety issued by the Insurance Commissioner, which authorizes
the Insurer or Surety to transact surety insurance in the State of California.
12. ASSIGNEMENT OR SUBCONTRACTING
The terms, covenants, and conditions contained herein shall apply to and bind
the heirs, successors, executors, administrators and assigns of the parties.
Furthermore, neither the performance of this Agreement nor any portion thereof
may be assigned or sub - contracted by Vendor without the express written
consent of City. Any attempt by Vendor to assign or subcontract the
performance or any portion thereof of this Agreement without the express written
consent of City shall be invalid and shall constitute a breach of this Agreement.
13. NON- DISCRIMINATION
In the performance of this Agreement, Vendor agrees that it will comply with the
requirements of Section 1735 of the California Labor Code and not engage nor
permit any subcontractors to engage in discrimination in employment of persons
because of the race, religious creed, color, national origin, ancestry, physical
disability, mental disability, medical condition, marital status, or sex of such
persons. Vendor acknowledges that a violation of this provision shall subject
Vendor to all the penalties imposed for a violation of Section 1720 et seq. of the
California Labor Code.
14. TERMINATION
In addition to any other remedies or rights it may have by law, City has the right
to terminate this Agreement without penalty immediately with cause or after
seven (7) days written notice without cause, unless otherwise specified. Cause
shall be defined as any breach of this Agreement, any misrepresentation or fraud
on the part of the Vendor and /or filing of any petition in U.S. Bankruptcy Court or
entering Bankruptcy by Vendor. Exercise by City of its right to terminate the
Agreement shall relieve City of all further obligations.
15. CONSENT TO BREACH NOT WAIVER
No term or provision of this Agreement shall be deemed waived and no breach
excused, unless such waiver or consent shall be in writing and signed by the
party claimed to have waived or consented to such breach. Any consent by any
party to, or waiver of, a breach by the other, whether express or implied, shall not
constitute consent to, waiver of, or excuse for any other different or subsequent
breach.
M••' 0
16. REMEDIES NOT EXCLUSIVE
The remedies for breach set forth in this Agreement are cumulative as to one
another and as to any other provided by law, rather than exclusive; and the
expression of certain remedies in this Agreement does not preclude resort by
either party to any other remedies provided by law.
17. PERFORMANCE
Vendor shall perform all work under this Agreement, taking necessary steps and
precautions to perform the work to City's satisfaction. Vendor shall be
responsible for the professional quality, technical assurance, timely completion
and coordination of all documentation and other goods or services furnished by
the Vendor under this Agreement. Vendor shall perform all work diligently,
carefully, and in a good and workman -like manner; shall furnish all labor,
supervision, machinery, equipment, materials, and supplies necessary therefore;
shall at its sole expense obtain and maintain all permits and licenses required by
public authorities, including those of City required in its governmental capacity, in
connection with performance of the work; and, if permitted to subcontract, shall
be fully responsible for all work performed by subcontractors.
18. INDEMNIFICATION
To the fullest extent permitted by law, Vendor shall indemnify, defend and hold
harmless City, its City Council, boards and commissions, officers, agents,
volunteers, and employees (collectively, the "Indemnified Parties') from and
against any and all claims (including, without limitation, claims for bodily injury,
death or damage to property), demands, obligations, damages, actions, causes
of action, suits, losses, judgments, fines, penalties, liabilities, costs and expenses
(including, without limitation, attorney's fees, disbursements and court costs) of
every kind and nature whatsoever (individually, a Claim; collectively, "Claims "),
which may arise from or in any manner relate (directly or indirectly) to any breach
of the terms and conditions of this Agreement, any work performed or services
provided under this Agreement including, without limitation, defects in
workmanship or materials (including the negligent and /or willful acts, errors
and/or omissions of Vendor, its principals, officers, agents, employees, suppliers,
consultants, subcontractors, anyone employed directly or indirectly by any of
them or for whose acts they may be liable or any or all of them).
Notwithstanding the foregoing, nothing herein shall be construed to require
Vendor to indemnify the Indemnified Parties from any Claim arising from the sole
negligence or willful misconduct of the Indemnified Parties. Nothing in this
indemnity shall be construed as authorizing any award of attorney's fees in any
action on or to enforce the terms of this Agreement. This indemnity shall apply to
all claims and liability regardless of whether any insurance policies are
applicable. The policy limits do not act as a limitation upon the amount of
indemnification to be provided by the Vendor.
Page 17
19. BILLS AND LEINS
Vendor shall pay promptly all indebtedness for labor, materials and equipment
used in performance of the work. Vendor shall not permit any lien or charge to
attach to the goods, but if any does so attach, Vendor shall promptly procure its
release and, in accordance with the requirements of paragraph 17 above,
indemnify, defend, and hold City harmless and be responsible for payment of all
costs, damages, penalties and expenses related to or arising from or related
thereto.
20. INSURANCE
Vendor shall maintain in full force during the term of this Agreement the following
insurances and limits not less than those specified: (a) Worker's Compensation
and Employers' Liability complying with any statutory requirements; (b)
Comprehensive General Liability Insurance including a broad form Property
Damage endorsement with a $500,000 combined single limit each occurrence;
(c) Comprehensive Auto Liability (including the owned, non - owned, and hired
automobile hazards) with $500,000 combined single limit each occurrence; (d)
Contractual Liability with $500,000 combined single limit each occurrence. If the
City so desires, these limits may be increased or decreased.
21. CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP
Vendor agrees that if there is a change or transfer in ownership of Vendor's
business prior to completion of this Agreement, the new owners shall be required
under terms of sale or other transfer to assume Vendor's duties and obligations
contained in this Agreement and complete them to the satisfaction of City.
22. FORCE MAJEURE
Vendor shall not be assessed with liquidated damages or unsatisfactory
performance penalties during any delay beyond the time named for the
performance of this Agreement caused by any act of God, war, civil disorder,
employment strike or other cause beyond its reasonable control, provided that
Vendor gives written notice of the cause of the delay to City within 36 hours of
the start of the delay and Vendor avails himself of any available remedies.
23. CONFIDENTIALITY
Vendor agrees to maintain the confidentiality of all City and City - related records
and information pursuant to all statutory laws relating to privacy and
confidentiality that currently exist or exist at any time during the term of this
Agreement. All such records and information shall be considered confidential
and kept confidential by Vendor and Vendor's staff, agents and employees.
24. COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS
Vendor represents and warrants that services to be provided under this
Agreement shall fully comply, at Vendor's expense, with all standards, laws,
statutes, restrictions, ordinances, requirements, and regulations (collectively
"laws "), including, but not limited to those issued by City in its governmental
capacity and all other laws applicable to the services at the time services are
provided to and accepted by City. Vendor acknowledges that City is relying on
Vendor to ensure such compliance, and pursuant to the requirements of
paragraph 17 above, Vendor agrees that it shall defend, indemnify and hold City
and Indemnified Parties harmless from all liability, damages, costs and expenses
arising from or related to a violation of such laws.
25. FREIGHT (F.O.B. DESTINATION)
Vendor assumes full responsibility for all transportation, transportation
scheduling, packing, handling, insurance, and other services associated with
delivery of all products deemed necessary under this Agreement.
26. TERMS AND CONDITIONS
Vendor acknowledges that it has read and agrees to all terms and conditions
included in this Agreement.
27. SEVERABILITY
If any term, covenant, condition or provision of this Agreement is held by a court
of competent jurisdiction to be invalid, void or unenforceable, the remainder of
the provisions hereof shall remain in full force and effect and shall in no way be
affected, impaired or invalidated thereby.
28. ATTORNEYS FEES
In any action or proceeding to enforce or interpret any provision of this
Agreement, or where any provision hereof is validly asserted as a defense, each
party shall bear its own attorney's fees, costs and expenses.
29. EXECUTION AND COUNTERPARTS
This Agreement may be executed in multiple counterparts, each of which shall be
deemed an original Agreement, and all of which shall constitute one Agreement.
These counterparts may be transmitted by facsimile or e-mail with the originals to
be thereafter provided by the Parties. Such facsimiles or e-mail shall be deemed
original signatures.
30. SIGNATORIES AUTHORITY
Each and every one of the persons executing this Agreement expressly warrants
that he or she is authorized to do so on behalf of the entity for which he or she is
Page 19
executing this Agreement. The City and Vendor represent and warrant that this
Agreement is executed voluntarily, with full knowledge of its significance.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have caused this Agreement to be executed on
the day and year first written above.
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
OFFICE OF THE CITY ATTORNEY
By:
Mynette D. Beauchamp,
Assistant City Attorney
ATTEST:
0
Leilani I. Brown,
City Clerk
CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH,
A Municipal Corporation
By:
Keith D. Curry, Mayor
City of Newport Beach
VENDOR: Pierce Manufacturing, Inc.
By:
(Corporate Officer)
Title:
Print Name:
By:
Title:
(Financial Officer)
Page 110
Print Name:
Attachments: Exhibit A —
Pricing Page
Exhibit B -1 —
Final Proposals for Fire Truck Specifications and
Warranty Details: Two (2) Pierce 1250 GPM Triple
Combination Pumper
Exhibit B -2 —
Final Proposals for Fire Truck Specifications and
Warranty Details: One Pierce Tractor -drawn Arial
Ladder
Exhibit C —
Performance Bond
Page 110
CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH
BOND NO.
FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE BOND
The premium charges on this Bond is $
being at the rate of $
price.
thousand of the Contract
WHEREAS, the City of Newport Beach, State of California, has awarded to
PIERCE MANUFACTURING, INC. hereinafter designated as the "Principal," a contract for
two (2) new GPM Triple Combination Pumpers and one (1) new 100' Heavy Duty Tiller
Ladder Truck in strict conformity with the Contract on file with the office of the City Clerk of
the City of Newport Beach, which is incorporated herein by this reference.
WHEREAS, Principal has executed or is about to execute the Contract and the
terms thereof require the furnishing of a Bond for the faithful performance of the Contract.
NOW, THEREFORE, we, the Principal, and
duly authorized to transact business under the laws of the State of
California as Surety (hereinafter "Surety "), are held and firmly bound unto the City of
Newport Beach, in the sum of Two Million Ninety Nine Thousand and Six Hundred
Thirty One Dollars and no /100 ($2,099,631.00) lawful money of the United States of
America, said sum being equal to 100% of the estimated amount of the Contract, to be
paid to. the City of Newport Beach, its successors, and assigns; for which payment well
and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and administrators,
successors, or assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these present.
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the Principal, or the
Principal's heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns, fail to abide by, and
well and truly keep and perform any or all the work, covenants, conditions, and
agreements in the Contract Documents and any alteration thereof made as therein
provided on its part, to be kept and performed at the time and in the manner therein
specified, and in all respects according to its true intent and meaning, or fails to indemnify,
defend, and save harmless the City of Newport Beach, its officers, employees and agents,
as therein stipulated, then, Surety will faithfully perform the same, in an amount not
exceeding the sum specified in this Bond; otherwise this obligation shall become null and
void.
As a part of the obligation secured hereby, and in addition to the face amount
specified in this Performance Bond, there shall be included costs and reasonable
expenses and fees, including reasonable attorneys fees, incurred by the City, only in the
event the City is required to bring an action in law or equity against Surety to enforce the
obligations of this Bond.
Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time,
alterations or additions to the terms of the Contract or to the work to be performed
thereunder shall in any way affect its obligations on this Bond, and it does hereby waive
notice of any such change, extension of time, alterations or additions of the Contract or to
the work or to the specifications.
This Faithful Performance Bond shall be extended and maintained by the Principal
in full force and effect for one (1) year following the date of formal acceptance of the
Project by the City.
In the event that the Principal executed this bond as an individual, it is agreed that
the death of any such Principal shall not exonerate the Surety from its obligations under
this Bond.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed by the Principal
and Surety above named, on the day of 2010.
Name of Vendor (Principal)
Name of Surety
Address of Surety
Telephone
Authorized Signature/Title
Authorized Agent Signature
Print Name and Title
NOTARY ACKNOWLEDGMENTS OF VENDOR AND SURETY MUST BE ATTACHED
Page 12
EXHIBIT A
Exhibit A
Month
0
Date of Delivery 10•
Total Cash Flows
Net Present Value (NPV)
Proposed Total Price
Less: Discount
Sales Tax
Total Cost
20% Down Option
CF Engines
CF Ladder
Total
(192,004)
(840,802)
(198,225)
(868,599)
(390,229)
(1,709,402)
(1,032,806)
(1,066,824)
(2,099,631)
(1,022,368)
(1,056,041) (2,078,409)
960,019
991,125
1,951,144
(10,312)
(10,137)
(20,449)
83,099
85,836
168,936
1,032,806
1,066,824
2,099,631
'Amounts include Sales Tax of 8.75%
August 31, 2009
City of Newport Beach PERFORM. LIKE NO OTHER?
3300 Newport Blvd.
Newport Beach, CA 92658
Proposal for Furnishing Fire Apparatus
The undersigned is prepared to manufacture for you, upon an order being placed by you, for final
acceptance by Pierce Manufacturing, Inc. at its corporate office in Appleton, Wisconsin, the
apparatus and equipment herein name for the following prices.
Two (2) Pierce 1250 GPM Triple Combination Pumpers mounted on Arrow XT
chassis as per the enclosed proposal for a total sum of ... ..............................$ 935,019.00
If the City of Newport Beach desires the mounting of equipment, the amount of
equipment to be mounted will be installed up to the cost of $25,000.00 for both
pumpers. Since there is not a defined list of equipment, the tools will be installed
as per fire department locations ........................... ............................... 25.000.00
Fire Apparatus cost less tax $ 960,019.00
If the City of Newport Beach would desire to pay for the apparatus in full, with in
ten days of the purchase order acceptance as Pierce and the issuing of a 100%
performance bond, Pierce Manufacturing with discount the above amount by $44,468.00.
Sales tax is then determined on the discounted amount.
Said apparatus and equipment are to be built and shipped in accordance with the specifications
hereto attached, delays due to strikes, war or international conflict, failures to obtain chassis,
materials, or other causes beyond our control not preventing, within about 9 -10 months after
receipt of this order and the acceptance thereof at our office at Appleton, Wisconsin and delivered
to you at Newport Beach, California.
The specifications herein contained shall form a part of the final contract, and are subject to
changes desired by the purchaser, provided such alterations are interlined prior to the acceptance
by the company or the order to purchase, and provided such alternations do not materially affect
the cost of the construction of the apparatus.
The proposal for the fire apparatus conforms with all Federal Department of Transportation (DOT)
rules and regulations in effect at the time of initial purchase, and with all National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA) Guidelines for Automotive Fire Apparatus as published at the time of initial
purchase, except where modified by customer requirements. Any increased costs incurred by the
first party because of future changes in or additions to said DOT or NFPA standards will be passed
along to the customers as an addition to the price set forth above.
Unless accepted within thirty (30) days from date, the right is reserved to withdraw this proposition.
The proposed unit is a Pierce stock unit and subject to prior sale.
PIERCE MANUFACTURING, INC.
By: Jay W. Bressler
Sales Representative
August 31, 2009
City of Newport Beach
3300 Newport Blvd.
Newport Beach, CA 92658
PERFORM. LIKE NO OTHER?
Proposal for Furnishing Fire Apparatus
The undersigned is prepared to manufacture for you, upon an order being placed by you,
for final acceptance by Pierce Manufacturing, Inc. at its corporate office in Appleton,
Wisconsin, the apparatus and equipment herein name for the following prices.
One (1) Pierce 100' Heavy Duty Tiller mounted on an Arrow XT chassis
as per the enclosed proposal for a total sum of .............. ..............................$ 966,125.00
If the City of Newport Beach desires the mounting of equipment, the amount of
equipment to be mounted will be installed up to the cost of $25,000.00.
Since there is not a defined list of equipment, the tools will be installed as per
fire department locations .................................... ............................... 25,000.00
Fire Apparatus cost less tax $ 991,125.00
If the City of Newport Beach would desire to pay for the apparatus in full, with in
ten days of the purchase order acceptance as Pierce and the issuing of a 100%
performance bond, Pierce Manufacturing with discount the above amount by $49,467.00.
Sales tax is then determined on the discounted amount.
Said apparatus and equipment are to be built and shipped in accordance with the
specifications hereto attached, delays due to strikes, war or international conflict, failures
to ,obtain chassis, materials, or other causes beyond our control not preventing, within
=9 -10 months after receipt of this order and the acceptance thereof at our office at
Appleton, Wisconsin and delivered to you at Newport Beach, California.
The specifications herein contained shall form a part of the final contract, and are subject to
changes desired by the purchaser, provided such alterations are interlined prior to the
acceptance by the company or the order to purchase, and provided such alternations do
not materially affect the cost of the construction of the apparatus.
The proposal for the fire apparatus conforms with all Federal Department of Transportation
(DOT) rules and regulations in effect at the time of initial purchase, and with all National Fire
Protection Association (NFPA) Guidelines for Automotive Fire Apparatus as published at
the time of initial purchase, except where modified by customer requirements. Any
increased costs incurred by the first party because of future changes in or additions to said
DOT or NFPA standards will be passed along to the customers as an addition to the price
set forth above.
Unless accepted within thirty (30) days from date, the right is reserved to withdraw this
proposition. The proposed unit is a Pierce stock unit and subject to prior sale.
PIERCE MANUFACTURING, INC.
By: Jay W. Bressler
Sales Representative
EXHIBIT B -1
We are pleased to submit a proposal to the CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH for Two (2)
PierceO 1250 GPM Triple Combination Pumper. The following paragraphs will describe
in detail the apparatus proposed. Loose equipment not specifically requested will not be
provided.
PIERCE MANUFACTURING was incorporated in 1917. Since then we have been building
bodies with one philosophy, "BUILD THE FINEST'. Our skilled craftsmen take pride in their
work, which is reflected, in the final product. We have been building fire apparatus since the
early 'forties" giving Pierce Manufacturing over 50 years of experience in the fire apparatus
market. Our plant is located in Appleton, Wisconsin with over 757,000 total square feet of
floor space situated on approximately 97 acres of land. A multi - million dollar inventory of
parts is available to keep your unit in service long after it has left the factory.
QUALITY AND WORKMANSHIP
Pierce has set the pace for quality and workmanship in the fire apparatus field. Our tradition
of building the highest quality units with craftsmen second to none has been the rule right
from the beginning. We currently have a "Quality Achievement Supplier" program to insure
the vendors and suppliers that we utilize meet the high standards that we demand. That is
just part of our overall "Quality at the Source" program at Pierce. Another part of this
program is employing experts in their fields, like a Certified American Welding Society
Inspector to monitor our weld quality.
DELIVERY
The apparatus will be delivered under its own power to insure proper break -in of all
components while the apparatus is still under warranty.
INFORMATION
At time of delivery, complete operation and maintenance manuals covering the apparatus
will be provided. A permanent plate will be mounted in the driver's compartment specifying
the quantity and type of fluids required including engine oil, engine coolant, transmission,
pump transmission lubrication, pump primer and drive axle.
SAFETY VIDEO
At the time of delivery Pierce will also provide one 39- minute, professionally- produced
apparatus safety video, in DVD format. This video will address key safety considerations for
personnel to follow when they are driving, operating, and maintaining the apparatus,
including the following: vehicle pre -trip inspection, chassis operation, pump operation, aerial
operation, and safety during maintenance.
PERFORMANCE TESTS
A road test will be conducted with the apparatus fully loaded and a continuous run of no less
than ten (10) miles. During that time the apparatus will show no loss of power nor will it
overheat. The transmission drive shaft or shafts and the axles will run quietly and be free of
abnormal vibration or noise. The apparatus will meet NFPA 1901 acceleration requirements
and NFPA 1901 braking requirements. The apparatus when fully loaded will not have less
than 25% nor more than 50% on the front axle, and not less than 50% nor more than 75%
on the rear axle.
Page 1 of 96
ISO COMPLIANCE
Pierce Manufacturing operates a Quality Management System under the requirements of
ISO 9001. These standards sponsored by the "International Organization for
Standardization (ISO)" specify the quality systems that are established by the manufacturer
for design, manufacture, installation and service. A copy of the certificate of compliance
Number 32454 is included with this proposal.
SINGLE SOURCE MANUFACTURER
Pierce Manufacturing, Inc. provides an integrated approach to the design and manufacture
of our products that delivers superior apparatus and a dedicated support team. From our
headquarters, all chassis, cab and body systems are engineered, tested, and hand
assembled to the customer's exact specifications. Pierce® vehicles are also backed by a
network of sales and service organizations that are dedicated exclusively to the fire service
who are ready to help you 24 hours a day, 7 days a week with parts, service, and training.
Pierce's single source solution adds value by providing a fully engineered product that offers
durability, reliability, maintainability, performance, and a high level of quality.
NFPA 2009 STANDARDS
This unit will comply with the NFPA standards effective January 1, 2009, except for fire
department directed exceptions. These exceptions will be set forth in the Statement of
Exceptions.
Certification of slip resistance of all stepping, standing and walking surfaces will be
supplied with delivery of the apparatus.
A plate that is highly visible to the driver while seated will be provided. This plate will show
the overall height, length, and gross vehicle weight rating.
The manufacturer will have programs in place for training, proficiency testing and
performance for any staff involved with certifications.
An official of the company will designate, in writing, who is qualified to witness and certify
test results.
NFPA COMPLIANCY
Apparatus proposed by the bidder will meet the applicable requirements of the National
Fire Protection Association (NFPA) as stated in current edition at time of contract
execution. Fire department's specifications that differ from NFPA specifications will be
indicated in the proposal as "non- NFPA ".
TOTAL VEHICLE ASSESSMENT CERTIFICATION
The apparatus will be third -party, independent, audit - certified to the current edition of NFPA
1901 standards. The certification includes: all design, production, operational, and
performance testing of the apparatus.
PUMP TEST
The pump will be tested, approved, and certified at the manufacturer's expense. The test
Page 2 of 96
results and the pump manufacturers certification of hydrostatic test; the engine
manufacturer's certified brake horsepower curve; and the manufacturer's record of pump
construction details will be forwarded to the Fire Department.
GENERATOR TEST
If the unit has a generator, the generator will be tested, approved, and certified at the
manufacturer's expense. The test results will be provided to the Fire Department at the
time of delivery.
BREATHING AIR TEST
If the unit has breathing air, Underwriters Laboratories will draw an air sample from the air
system and certify that the air quality meets the requirements of NFPA 1989, Standard on
Breathing Air Quality for Fire and Emergency Services Respiratory Protection.
INSPECTION TRIP(S)
The bidder will provide three (3) factory inspection trip(s) for for a total of twelve customer
representative(s). The inspection trip(s) will be scheduled at times mutually agreed upon
between the manufacturer's representative and the customer. All costs such as travel,
lodging and meats will be the responsibility of the bidder.
CUSTOMER SERVICE WEBSITE
The Pierce Customer Service website will provide the dealer and customer access to
comprehensive information pertaining to the maintenance and service of the apparatus.
The website will consist of the following screens:
My Fleet Screen
The My Fleet screen will provide access to truck detail information on the major components
of the vehicle, warranty information, available vehicle photographs, vehicle drawings, sales
options, applicable vehicle software downloads, etc.
Parts Screens
The Parts screens will provide parts look -up capability of Pierce Manufacturing sourced
items, with the aid of digital photographs, part drawings and assembly drawings. The parts
search application will permit the searching of parts by item description or function group
(major system category). The parts application will provide the ability to submit
electronically a parts order, parts quote, or parts return request directly to Pierce
Manufacturing for processing.
Warranty Screen
The Warranty screens will provide dealers the ability to submit electronically warranty claims
directly to Pierce Manufacturing for reimbursement.
My Reports Screens
The My Reports screens will provide access to multiple dealer reports to allow the
dealership to maintain communication with the customer on the status of orders, claims, and
phone contacts.
Page 3 of 96
Technical Support Screens
The Technical Support screens will provide access to all currently published Operation and
Maintenance and Service Publications. Access to Pierce Manufacturing Service Bulletins
and Work Instructions, containing information on current service topics and
recommendations will be provided.
Training
ining
The Training screens will provide access to upcoming training classes offered by Pierce
Manufacturing.
Interactive electronic leaming modules (Operators Guides) covering the operation of major
vehicle components will be provided. Access to training manuals used in Pierce
Manufacturing training classes will be provided.
About Pierce
Access to Customer Service Articles, Corporate News, Quarterly Newsletters, and Key
Contacts within the Customer Service Department will be provided. The current Customer
Service Policy and Procedure Manua(, detailing the operation of the Customer Service
group will also be accessible.
The Search screen will provide search access for terms used on the website.
The customer will have limited access specific to their vehicle.
MAXIMUM OVERALL HEIGHT
The maximum overall height of the apparatus will be I I I inches.
MAXIMUM OVERALL LENGTH
The maximum overall length of the apparatus will be 360 inches.
APPROVAL DRAWING
A drawing of the proposed apparatus will be prepared and provided to the purchaser for
approval before construction begins. The Pierce sales representative will also be provided
with a copy of the same drawing. The finalized and approved drawing will become part of
the contract documents. This drawing will indicate the chassis make and model, location of
the lights, siren, homs, compartments, major components, etc.
A "revised" approval drawing of the apparatus will be prepared and submitted by Pierce to
the purchaser showing any changes made to the approval drawing.
DRAWING. PUMP OPERATOR'S PANEL
A detailed drawing to scale of the pump operator's panel will be provided for approval prior
to construction. This drawing will include all of the gauges and controls located on the pump
operator's panel.
Page 4 of 96
WARRANTY
The following warranty will be supplied with each bidders proposal and printed on the
company letterhead.
We warranty each piece of new fire or rescue apparatus to be free from defects in materials
or workmanship under normal use and service. Our obligation under this warranty is limited
to repairing or replacing, as the company may elect, any parts thereof which are returned to
us with transportation costs prepaid, and as to which examination is disclose to the
company's satisfaction to have been defective, provided such part, or parts will be returned
to us not later than three (3) years from delivery of the apparatus. Such defective part or
parts will be repaired or replaced free of charge and without charge for installation to the
original purchaser.
This warranty will not apply:
1) To normal maintenance and adjustments.
2) To any vehicle which has been repaired or altered outside of our factory in any way
so that, in our judgment, to affect the stability, nor which has been subject to misuse,
neglect, or accident, nor to any vehicle which will operate at any speed exceeding the
factory rated speed, or loaded beyond the factory rated load capacity.
This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied, all others
representations to the original purchaser and all other obligations or liabilities, including
liability for incidental or consequential damages on the part of the company. We neither
assume or authorize any other person to give or assume any other warranty or liability on
the company's behalf unless made or assumed in writing by the company.
CROSSMEMBERS WARRANTY
A one (1) year parts and labor warranty will be provided on all chassis frame crossmembers.
PERFORMANCE BOND
._ - /
A performance bond will rift be included. If requested, the following w�iilllapply:
The successful bidder will provide_ W0 O * Y} tcfof coOntnract,
, a performance bond, which guarantees performance of
all terms and conditions of the contract and of the Basic One (1) Year Limited Warranty
agreement. The performance bond will specifically cover the performance of the contract
according to its terms and conditions, as well as payment of all related bills and
encumbrances. This performance bond will be issued by a surety company who is listed by
the U.S. Treasury Department's list of approved sureties, as published in Circular 570, as of
the bid date. The performance bond will be issued in an amount equal to 100% of the
contract amount and will be dated concurrent to, or subsequent to, the date of the contract.
Notwithstanding any document or assertion to the contrary, any surety bond related to the
sale of a vehicle will apply only to the Basic One (1) Year Limited Warranty for such vehicle.
Any surety bond related to the sale of a vehicle will not apply to any other warranties that
Page 5 of 96
are included within this bid (OEM or otherwise) or to the warranties (if any) of any third party
of any part, component, attachment or accessory that is incorporated into or attached to the
vehicle.
Page 6 of 96
ARROW -XTTM CHASSIS
The Pierce Arrow -XT is the custom chassis developed exclusively for the fire service.
Chassis provided will be a new, tilt -type custom fire apparatus. The chassis will be
manufactured in the apparatus body builder's facility eliminating any split responsibility. The
chassis will be designed and manufactured for heavy -duty service, with adequate strength,
capacity for the intended load to be sustained, and the type of service required. The chassis
will be the manufacturer's heavy -duty line tilt cab.
SEATING CAPACITY
The seating capacity in the cab will be four (4).
WHEELBASE
The wheelbase of the vehicle will be 174.5 inches.
GVW RATING
The gross vehicle weight rating will be 42,000 lbs.
FRAME
The chassis frame will be built with two (2) steel channels bolted to five (5) cross members
or more, depending on other options of the apparatus. The side rails will have a 13.38" tall
web over the front and mid sections of the chassis, with a continuous smooth taper to 10.75"
over the rear axle. Each rail will have a section modulus of 25.992 cubic inches and a
resisting bending moment (rbm) of 3,119,040 inch - pounds over the critical regions of the
frame assembly, with a section modulus of 18.96 cubic inches with an rbm of 2,275,200
inch - pounds over the rear axle. The frame rails will be constructed of 120,000 psi yield
strength heat - treated .38" thick steel, with 3.50" wide flanges.
FRAME RAIL WARRANTY
Limited Warranty
Except as provided below, and provided the vehicle will have been placed in service within
60 days after delivery to the original purchaser as established by our original invoice, for a
period of 50 years, which is the estimated useful life of the vehicle, after delivery to the
original purchaser, Pierce Manufacturing Inc. ("Pierce ") warrants to the user that its chassis
frame rail manufactured by Pierce are free of defects in design, material, or workmanship.
This limited warranty will apply only if the vehicle is properly maintained and used in service
that is normal to the particular vehicle. Normal service means service that does not subject
the vehicle to stresses or impacts greater than normally result from the careful use of the
vehicle or chassis. If the buyer discovers a defect or nonconformity, it must notify Pierce in
writing within 30 days after the date of discovery. This limited warranty is not transferable by
the first user.
A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal.
FRAME REINFORCEMENT
In addition, a mainframe inverted "L" liner will be provided. It will be heat-treated steel
measuring 12.00" x 3.00" x .25 ". Each liner will have a section modulus of 7.795 cu, in.,
Page 7 of 96
yield strength of 110,000 psi, and rbm of 857,462 inch - pounds. Total rbm at wheelbase
center will be 3,976,502 pounds per rail.
The frame liner will be mounted inside of the chassis frame rail, beginning at the front edge
of the mainframe rail and extending to the rear cab crossmember.
FRONT NON DRIVE AXLE
The Oshkosh TAK -40 front axle will be of the independent suspension design with a ground
rating of 19,500 pounds.
Upper and lower control arms will be used on each side of the axle. Upper control ann
castings will be made of 100,000 -psi yield strength 8630 steel and the lower control arm
casting will be made of 55,000 -psi yield ductile iron.
The center cross members and side plates will be constructed out of 80,000 -psi yield
strength steel.
Each control arm will be mounted to the center section using elastomer bushings. These
rubber bushings will rotate on low friction plain bearings and be lubricated for life. Each
bushing will also have a flange end to absorb longitudinal impact loads, reducing noise and
vibrations.
There will be nine (9) grease fittings supplied, one (1) on each control arm pivot and one (1)
on the steering gear extension.
The upper control arm will be shorter than the lower arm so that wheel end geometry
provides positive camber when deflected below rated load and negative camber above rated
load.
Camber at load will be zero degrees for optimum tire life.
The kingpin bearing will be of tow friction design and be sealed for life.
Toe links that are adjustable for alignment of the wheel to the center of the chassis will be
provided.
The wheel ends must have little to no bump steer when the chassis encounters a hole or
obstacle.
The steering linkage will provide proper steering angles for the inside and outside wheel,
based on the vehicle wheelbase.
The axle will have a third party certified turning angle of 45 degrees. Front discharge, front
suction, or aluminum wheels will not infringe on this cramp angle.
WAR_ RANTY, FRONT NON DRIVE AXLE
The Oshkosh TAK -4 system will have a three (3) year parts and labor warranty. This
Page 8 of 96
warranty applies to the TAK -4 suspension components only. All steering linkages, pumps
etc., are covered under our standard chassis warranty (exception steer gears - see Steering
for warranty).
OIL SEALS
Oil seals with viewing window will be provided on the front axle.
SHOCK ABSORBERS
Heavy -duty telescoping shock absorbers (KONI) will be provided on the front suspension.
REAR AXLE
The rear axle will be a MentorTm, Model RS -24 -160, with a capacity of 24,000 pounds.
REAR AXLE WARRANTY
The MeritorTM two (2) year, unlimited mileage, parts and labor warranty will be provided
with this axle.
TOP SPEED OF VEHICLE
A rear axle ratio will be furnished to allow the vehicle to reach a top speed of 68 MPH.
OIL SEALS
Oil seals will be provided on the rear axle.
FRONT SUSPENSION
Front Oshkosh TAKATm independent suspension will be provided with a minimum ground
rating of 19,500 pounds.
The independent suspension system will be designed to provide maximum ride comfort.
The design will allow the vehicle to travel at highway speeds over improved road surfaces
and at moderate speeds over rough terrain with minimal transfer of road shock and vibration
to the vehicle's crew compartment.
Each wheel will have torsion bar type spring. In addition, each front wheel end will also
have energy absorbing jounce bumpers to prevent bottoming of the suspension.
The suspension design will be such that there is at least 10.00" of total wheel travel and a
minimum of 3.75" before suspension bottoms.
The torsion bar anchor lock system allows for simple lean adjustments, without the use of
shims. One can adjust for a lean within 15 minutes per side. Anchor adjustment design is
such that it allows for ride height adjustment on each side.
The independent suspension was put through a durability test that simulated 140,000 miles
of inner city driving.
REAR SUSPENSION
The rear springs will be Standens semi - elliptical, 3.00" x 52.00 ", 10 leaves with a ground
Page 9 of 96
rating of 24,000 pounds. Castings will be used for spring hangers with provisions for
lubrication. The grease fittings will be 90- degree type and will be accessible without
removing the wheels or cutting any sheet metal. The two (2) top leaves will wrap the
forward spring hanger pin and the top leaf will wrap the rear spring hanger pin on both the
front and rear suspensions.
Kaiser spring pins will be provided, with double "figure- eight" grease grooves and a layer of
electroless nickel plating, 1.0 mil thick, around the entire pin. The bushing that holds the
spring pin in place will also have a grease groove.
ANTI -LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
The vehicle will be equipped with a Wabco 4S4M, anti -lock braking system. The ABS will
provide a four (4) channel anti -look braking control on both the front and rear wheels. A
digitally controlled system that utilizes microprocessor technology will control the anti -lock
braking system. Each wheel will be monitored by the system. When any particular wheel
begins to lockup, a signal will be sent to the control unit. This control unit then will reduce
the braking of that wheel for a fraction of a second and then reapply the brake. This anti -
lock brake system will eliminate the lockup of any wheel thus helping to prevent the
apparatus from skidding out of control.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WARRANTY
The Wabco ABS system will come with a three (3) year or 300,000 mile parts and labor
warranty provided by Meritor Wabco Vehicle Control Systems.
BRAKES
The service brake system will be full air type.
The front brakes will be Knorr/Bendix disc type with a 17.00" ventilated rotor for improved
stopping distance.
The brake system will be certified, third party inspected, for improved stopping distance.
The rear brakes will be MeritorM 16.50" x 7.00" cam operated with automatic slack
adjusters.
ENGINE BRAKE
A Jacobs Engine Brake is to be installed with the controls located on the instrument panel
within easy reach of the driver.
The driver will be able to turn the engine brake system on/off and have a high and low
setting.
The engine brake will be installed in such a manner that when the engine brake is slowing
the vehicle the brake lights are activated.
The ABS system will automatically disengage the auxiliary braking device, when required
Page 10 of 96
AIR COMPRESSOR, BRAKE SYSTEM
The air compressor will be a Cummins/Wabco with 18.7 cubic feet per minute output.
BRAKE SYSTEM
The brake system will include:
- Bendix- Westinghouse dual brake treadle valve with vinyl covered foot surface
- One heated automatic moisture ejector on air dryer
- Total air system capacity of 4,362 cubic inches
- Two (2) air pressure gauges with red warning light and audible alarm, that activates when
air pressure falls below 60 psi
- MGM spring set parking brake system
- Parking brake operated by a Bendix - Westinghouse PP -1 control valve
- A parking "brake on" indicator light on instrument panel
- Bendix - Westinghouse SR -1 valve, in conjunction with a double check valve system, will
provide an automatic spring -brake application at 40 psi
- Bendix AD-9 air dryer with heater
BRAKE LINES
Wire braided reinforced rubber brake lines will be provided for the chassis air brake system,
up to the individual line coupler fittings, located in the chassis frame near the cab lock down.
The coupler fittings will be the separation point for all air lines going to the front of the
chassis and into the cab.
The only wire braided lines forward of the coupler fittings are the front brake lines that run
from the QR1 valve to the front air chambers.
The air lines going into the cab will be nylon, wrapped in loom.
The area where the nylon air lines run will be well protected inside the frame rails.
The brake lines will not be painted.
AIR INLET
One (1) air inlet with male coupling will be provided. It will allow station air to be supplied to
the apparatus brake system through a shoreline hose. The inlet will be located in the driver
side lower step well of cab. A check valve will be provided to prevent reverse flow of air.
The inlet will discharge into the 'Wet" tank of the brake system. A mating female coupling
Page II of 96
will also be provided with the loose equipment.
AIR TANK, ADDITIONAL
An additional air tank with 1454 cubic inch displacement will be provided to increase the
capacity of the air system. This tank will be dedicated for air horn use.
The output flow of the engine air compressor varies with engine RPM. Full compressor
output is only achieved at governed engine speed. Engine speed may be limited by
generators, pumps and other PTO driven options.
MANUAL MOISTURE EJECTOR(SI
Four (4) manual moisture ejectors will be installed in the brake system. The moisture ejector
will be remote mounted on the driver side of vehicle, as close to the edge of vehicle as
possible. A loop will be provided at the moisture ejector, to allow for ease of pulling the
drain. Each moisture ejector will have a label directly under the ejector, stating air tank
drain. Nylon tubing, .38" diameter will be routed from the air tank to the moisture ejector.
The nylon tubing will be cover with protective split loom. The moisture ejector(s) will be
provided on the primary, reserve and extra reservoirs(s).
ENGINE
The chassis will be powered by a Cummins electronic engine as described below:
- Model: ISL
- Number of Cylinders: Six (6)
- Bore and Stroke: 4.49"x 5.69"
- Displacement: 543 cubic inches
- Maximum Horsepower: 370 hp at 2100 rpm
- Torque: 1200 lb-ft at 1300 rpm
- Compression Ratio: 16.6:1
- Governed rpm: 2200
Standard equipment on the engine will include the following:
- Air Cleaner: Farr or equal
- Fuel Filters: Dual, with check valve, integrated water separator, and water in fuel sensor
- Coolant Filter: Spin -on with shut off valves on the supply and return line
- Governor: Limiting speed type
Page 12 of 96
- Injectors: Cam operated, unit type, clean tip
- Lube Oil Cooler
- Lube Oil Filter: Full flow
- Starting Motor: 12 -volt
- Turbocharger
- Charge Air Cooled
- Priming Pump
ENGINE WARRANTY
The engine will have a five (5) year or 100,000 mile warranty provided by Cummins. This
warranty will provide the same coverage for the Diesel Particulate Filter "DPF" that is an
integral component of the exhaust emissions system. Cummins will add a $100.00
deductible during the extended basic coverage period in years 3, 4, and 5. There will be no
deductible in the first 2 years of warranty.
CONTROLS AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
The following amber indicator lights will be located on the driver's side of the cab to denote
engine information:
- Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
- High Exhaust Temperature (HET)
A switch to initiate the diesel particulate filter regeneration cycle will be located on the
driver's side instrument panel.
ENGINE INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION
The fire apparatus manufacturer will provide a certification, along with a letter from the
engine manufacturer stating they approve of the engine installation in the bidder's chassis.
The certification will be provided at the time of delivery.
ENGINE AIR INTAKE
The air intake with an ember separator will be mounted high on the passenger side of the
cab, to the front of the crew cab door. The ember separator is designed to prevent road dirt
and recirculating hot air from entering the engine. The ember separator will be easily
accessible through a hinged stainless steel grille, with one (1) flush quarter turn latch.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The exhaust system will be stainless steel from the turbo to the inlet of the diesel particulate
filter and will be 4.00" in diameter. The exhaust system will include a diesel particulate filter
and a diesel oxidation catalyst to meet current EPA standards. The exhaust will terminate
horizontally ahead of the passenger side rear wheels. A tailpipe diffuser will be provided to
Page 13 of 96
reduce the temperature of the exhaust as it exits. An insulation wrap will be provided on the
exhaust pipe between the turbo and DPF inlet to minimize the transfer of heat to the cab.
Heat deflector shields will be provided to isolate chassis and body components from the
heat of the tailpipe diffuser.
FUEL SEPARATOR
The engine will be equipped with a Raoor in -line spin -on fuel and water separator in addition
to the engine fuel filters.
HIGH IDLE
A high idle switch will be provided, inside the cab, on the instrument panel, that will
automatically maintain a preset engine rpm. A switch will be installed, at the cab instrument
panel, for activation /deactivation.
The high idle will be operational only when the parking brake is on and the truck
transmission is in neutral. A green indicator light will be provided, adjacent to the switch.
The light will illuminate when the above conditions are met. The light will be labeled "OK to
Engage High Idle ".
COOLANT LINES
Silicone hoses will be used for all engine coolant1heater lines installed by Pierce
Manufacturing.
Hose clamps will be the stainless steel constant torque type to prevent coolant leakage.
They will expand and contract according to coolant system temperature thereby keeping a
constant clamping pressure on the hose.
RADIATOR
The radiator and the complete cooling system will meet or exceed NFPA and engine
manufacturer cooling system standards.
For maximum cooling performance, the radiator core will be made of copper fins having a
serpentine design, soldered to brass tubes. The tubes will be welded to brass headers
using the patented "Beta- Weld" process for increased strength, longer road life and solder -
bloom corrosion protection. The radiator core will have a minimum frontal area of 1396
square inches. Steel supply and return tanks will be bolted to the core headers and steel
side channels to complete the radiator assembly. The radiator will be compatible with
commercial antifreeze solutions.
The radiator will be mounted in such a manner as to prevent the development of leaks
caused by twisting or straining when the apparatus operates over uneven ground. The
radiator assembly will be isolated from the chassis frame rails with rubber isolators.
The radiator will include an integral deaeration tank, with
For visual coolant level inspection, the radiator will have a
will be equipped with a 15 psi pressure relief cap.
Page 14 of 96
a remote - mounted overflow tank.
built -in sight glass. The radiator
A drain port will be located at the lowest point of the cooling system and /or the bottom of the
radiator to permit complete flushing of the coolant from the system.
A heavy -duty fan will draw in fresh, cool air through the radiator. Shields or baffles will be
provided to prevent recirculation of hot air to the inlet side of the radiator.
CLUTCH FAN
A Horton fan clutch will be provided. The fan clutch will be automatic when the pump
transmission is in "Road" and "Pump" position.
FUELTANK
A 65- gallon fuel tank will be provided and mounted at the rear of the chassis. The tank will
be constructed of 12- gauge, hot rolled steel. It will be equipped with swash partitions and a
vent.
A .75" drain plug will be located in a low point of the tank for drainage.
A fill inlet will be located on the driver's side of the body and is covered with a hinged, spring
loaded, stainless steel door that is marked "Diesel Fuel Only ".
A .50" diameter vent will be installed from tank top to just below fuel fill inlet.
The fuel tank will meet all FHWA 393.67 requirements including a fill capacity of 95% of tank
volume.
All fuel lines will be provided as recommended by the engine manufacturer
FUEL COOLER
An air to fuel cooler will be installed in the engine fuel return line.
The fuel filler cap will have a retaining chain.
LABEL. FUEL DOOR
There will be a label provided, on the fuel door, to read "Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel Only ".
AUXILIARY FUEL PICKUP
A auxiliary fuel pickup will be provided in the chassis fuel tank.
TRANSMISSION
An Allison Gen IV, model EVS 3000P, electronic torque converting automatic
transmission will be provided.
Two (2) PTO openings will be located on left side and top of converter housing (positions 9
o'clock and 3 o'clock).
A transmission temperature gauge with red light and audible alarm will be installed on the
cab dash.
Page 15 of 96
TRANSMISSION SHIFTER
A six (6) -speed T- Handle shift module with the 4 + 2 "Mode" button will be mounted to right
of driver on console. Shift position indicator will be indirectly lit for after dark operation.
The Allison shifter will be a "double - digit' display model.
The transmission ratio will be: 1st - 3.51 to 1.00, 2nd - 1.91 to 1.00, 3rd - 1.43 to 1.00, 4th -
1.00 to 1.00, 5th - 0.75 to 1.00, 6th - 0.64 to 1.00, R - 4.80 to 1.00.
TRANSMISSION COOLER
A transmission oil cooler will be provided in the lower tank of the radiator.
TRANSMISSION WARRANTY
The transmission will have a five (5) yearlunlimited mileage warranty covering 100% parts
and labor. The warranty will be provided by Allison Transmission.
Note: The transmission cooler is not covered under any extended warranty you may be
getting on your Allison transmission. Please review your Allison transmission warranty for
coverage limitations.
DRIVELINE
Drivelines will be a heavy -duty metal tube and be equipped with.Spicer 1710 universal
joints.
The shafts will be dynamically balanced before installation.
A splined slip joint will be provided in each driveshaft,.slip joint will be coated with Glidecoat
or equivalent.
STEERING
Dual Sheppard M110 steering gears, with integral heavy -duty power steering, will be
provided. The power steering will incorporate a Vickers V20F three (3) -line hydraulic pump
with integral pressure and flow control.
The steering wheel will be:
- 18.00" in diameter
- Capable of tilting and telescoping
- Four (4) -spoke design
STEERING WARRANTY
The steering gear will have a three (3) year parts and labor warranty.
TIRES
The front tires will be Michelin 385/65R22.5 radials, 16 ply "Hiway Rib" XFE tread. The tires
will be mounted on Alcoa 22.50" x 12.25" polished aluminum disc -type wheels with a ten
(10) stud, 11.25' bolt circle.
Page 16 of 96
Rear tires will be four (4) Michelin 11R22.50 radials, 16 ply all- season XDN2 tread. The
tires will be mounted on Alcoa 22.50" x 8.25" polished aluminum disc wheels with a ten (10)-
stud 11.25" bolt circle.
LUG NUT COVERS
Chrome plated lug nut covers will be installed on all lug nuts.
WHEEL CHOCKS
There will be one (1) set(s) of folding Ziamatic SAC -44 -E, aluminum alloy, Quick -Choc
wheel blocks, with easy -grip handle provided.
WHEEL CHOCK BRACKETS
There will be one (1) set(s) of Ziamatic SQCH-44 -H horizontal mounting wheel chock
brackets provided for the Ziamatic SACA4 -E folding wheel chocks. The brackets will be
mounted one fore and aft of the rear wheels on the drivers side.
HUB COVERS (front)
Stainless steel hub covers will be provided on the front axle. An oil level viewing window will
be provided.
HUB COVERS (rear)
Stainless steel baby moon covers will be provided over the rear axle hubs.
LUG NUT COVERS
Stainless steel lug nut covers will be installed on all lug nuts.
MUD FLAPS
Mud flaps with a Pierce logo will be installed behind the front and rear wheels.
SPARE TIRE
A 315/80R22.50, spare tire to match the vehicle's front.tires will be provided, mounted on a
polished aluminum disc wheel.
SPARE TIRE
A spare tire, 11 R22.5, 16 ply, to match the vehicle's rear tires will be provided, mounted on a
polished aluminum disc wheel.
TIRE PRESSURE MANAGEMENT
There will be a VECSAFE LED tire alert pressure management system provided that will
monitor each tire's pressure. A chrome plated brass sensor will be provided on the valve
stem of each tire for a total of six (6) tires.
The sensor will calibrate to the tire pressure when installed on the valve stem for pressures
between 20 and 120 psi. The sensor will activate an integral battery operated LED when
the pressure of that tire drops 8 psi.
Page 17 of 96
Removing the cap from the sensor will indicate the functionality of the sensor and battery. If
the sensor and battery are in working condition, the LED will immediately start blinking.
CAB
The Arrow -XT cab will be designed specifically for the fire service and manufactured by
Pierce Manufacturing.
Construction of the cab will consist of 5052 -1132 .125' aluminum welded to extruded
aluminum framing.
The cab will be built by Pierce Manufacturing within our own facility located on our premises.
The cab will be 96.00" wide, with an interior width of 87.50 ".
The overall height (from the cab roof to the ground) will be approximately 103.00 ". The
overall height listed will be calculated based on a truck configuration with the lowest
suspension weight ratings, the smallest diameter tires for the suspension, no water weight,
no loose equipment weight and no personnel weight. Larger tires, wheels and suspension
will increase the overall height listed.
The floor to ceiling height inside the crew cab will be 54.00" in the center and 59.75' in the
outboard positions.
The crew cab floor will measure 44.50" from rear wall to the back side of engine tunnel.
The engine tunnel, at the rearward highest point (knee level), will measure 50.88" to the
back wall.
The crew cab will be of the totally enclosed design, with access doors constructed in the
same manner as the driver and passenger doors.
The cab will be a full tilt cab style. The engine will be easily accessible and capable of being
removed with the cab tilted. The cab will be capable of tilting 45 degrees and 90 degrees
with crane assist.
The cab will have three (3) -point rubber mounting and will be tilted by a hydraulic pump
connected to two (2) cab lift cylinders. The cab will then be locked down by a two (2) -point
automatic locking mechanism that actuates after the cab has been lowered.
The cab access steps will be 23.25' wide, crew cab will be 21.25" wide x 8.00" minimum
depth and will be the half- height style door, blistered inward at the bottom.
The lower exposed step area at each door location will be trimmed with aluminum treadplate
and have a grip strut insert in the bottom step.
The inside cab steps will not exceed 18.00" high
Page 18 of 96
The crew cab entrance will be a one (1) step design to the cab floor, for easy access.
A 20.00", slip resistant, handrail will be provided adjacent to all door openings to assist
entrance into the cab.
A chrome handrail will be provided on the inside each front cab door, for ease of entry.
The cab doors openings will be 37.00" wide x 58.50" high.
The crew cab door openings will be 34.25" wide x 57.00" high for easy entry, and located on
the side of the cab.
The cab and crew cab doors will be constructed of extruded aluminum with a nominal
material thickness of ,125 ". The exterior skins will be constructed from .090" aluminum.
All cab and crew cab entry doors will contain a conventional roll down window.
Flush mounted, chrome plated paddle type door handle will be provided on the exterior of
the cab doors.
All interior cab door handles will also have flush paddle handles
The cab doors will be provided with both interior (rotary knob) and exterior (keyed) locks as
required by FMVSS 206. The locks will be capable of activating when the doors are open or
closed. The doors will remain locked if locks are activated when the doors are opened, then
closed.
The door hinge will be a stainless steel piano type with a .25" pin.
There will be double automotive type rubber seals around the perimeter of the door framing
and door edges to ensure a weather tight fit.
Full height polished stainless steel scuffpiates will be installed on the inside of all cab doors.
Cab door panels will be removable without disconnecting door and window mechanisms.
Engine hood side walls will be constructed of .50" aluminum, top will be constructed of .19"
aluminum and will be tapered at top to allow for more driver and passenger elbow room.
The engine hood will be insulated for protection from heat and sound. The noise insulation
keeps the DBA level within the limits stated in the current NFPA series 1900 pamphlet.
There will be access, 15.00" wide x 1125" high at the rear of the engine tunnel to access
the engine fluid checks.
Full circular inner fender liners, in the wheel wells, will be provided.
Page 19 of 96
Bright aluminum treadplate will be overlayed on the outside rear wall of the crew cab except
for areas that are not typically visible when the cab is lowered.
A curved, safety glass windshield will be provided, with over 2,754 square inches of clear
viewing area.
The cab windshield will have bright trim inserts in the rubber molding holding the glass in
place.
All cab glass will be tinted.
Economical windshield replacement glass will be readily available from local auto glass
suppliers.
Two (2) smoked Lexan sunvisors, 8.75" x 31.00" long, will be provided. The sunvisors will
be located above the windshield with one (1) mounted on each side of the cab.
Two (2) Electric windshield wipers with washer will be provided that meet FMVSS and SAE
requirements.
The washer reservoir will be able to be filled without raising the cab.
A glove box with a drop -down door will be installed in the front dash panel in front of the
officer's position.
CAB INTEGRITY CERTIFICATION
Pierce manufacturing will provide a cab crash test certification with this proposal. The
certification states that the cab must meet or exceed the requirements below.
- European Occupant Protection Standard ECE Regulation No.29
- SAE J2422 Cab Roof Strength Evaluation - Quasi-Static Loading Heavy Trucks
- SAE J2420 COE Frontal Strength Evaluation - Dynamic Loading Heavy Trucks
- Roof Crush
The cab will be subjected to a roof crush force of 100,000 lbs. This value will be 450% of
the ECE 29 criteria, which must be equivalent to the front axle rating up to a maximum of 10
metric tons.
- Side Impact
The cab will be subjected to dynamic preload with a 13,275 lb moving barrier is slammed
into the side of the cab at 5.5 mph, striking with an impact of 13,000 ft -lbs of energy. This
test will closely represent the forces a cab will see in a rollover incident.
- Frontal Impact
The cab will withstand a frontal force produced from 65,200 ft -lbs of energy using a swing-
Page 20 of 96
bob type platen
The same cab will withstand all tests without any measurable intrusion into the survival
space of the occupant area.
CAS DOOR DURABILITY CERTIFICATION
Robust cab doors help protect occupants. Cab doors will survive a 200,000 cycle door slam
test where the slamming force exceeds 20 G's of deceleration. The bidder will certify that
the sample doors similar to those provided on the apparatus have been tested and have met
these criteria without structural damage, latch malfunction, or significant component wear.
CAB MODIFICATION
The engine tunnel will be designed to provide maximum occupant space, and required
clearance to the engine and related components. The engine tunnel will include a
modification on the passenger side to accommodate the Turbo and related components.
CAB FLOOR
The cab and crew cab floor areas will be covered with PolydampT" acoustical floor mat
consisting of a black pyramid rubber facing and closed cell foam decoupler.
The top surface of the material has a series of raised pyramid shapes evenly spaced, which
offer a superior grip surface. Additionally, the material has a .25" thick closed cell foam (no
water absorption) which offers a sound dampening material for reducing sound levels.
CREW CAB WINDOWS
On each side of the crew cab, a window with tinted glass will be provided.
The rear wall of the crew cab will have two (2) windows, each being 11.29" wide x 17.95"
high.
WINDOW TINT
Crew cab windows will be tinted with 44% light transmission tint. The following windows are
included:
- Crew cab side windows
- Crew cab door, roll -up windows
- Rear opera windows (if applicable).
SHELVING
There will be two (2) shelves provided in the EMS compartment. Each shelf will be
constructed of 0.090" aluminum with a 1.25" up- turned lip. Shelving will be infinitely
adjustable by means of a threaded tightener sliding in a track.
The location will be in the EMS compartment.
Page 21 of 96
ELECTRIC OPERATED CAB DOOR WINDOWS
All four (4) cab doors will be equipped with electric operated windows with flush
mounted automotive style switches.
The driver's side lower instrument panel will also have three (3) controls, officer's door
window and both crew cab door windows.
ELECTRIC WINDOW DURABILITY CERTIFICATION
Cab window roll -up systems can cause maintenance problems if not designed for long
service life. The window regulator design will complete 30,000 complete up -down cycles
and still function normally when finished. The bidder will certify that sample doors and
windows similar to those provided on the apparatus have been tested and have met these
criteria without malfunction or significant component wear.
The steering wheel will have an emblem containing the fire apparatus manufacturer's logo
and customer name. The emblem will have three (3) rows of text for the customer's
department name. There will be a maximum of eight (8) characters in the first row, eleven
(11) characters in the second row and eleven (11) characters in the third row.
The first row of text will be: Newport
The second row of text will be: Beach
The third row of text will be: Fire Dept.
SUNVISORS
Two (2) vinyl sunvisors will be provided, one (1) above each windshield.
FENDER CROWNS
Stainless steel fender crowns will be installed at the cab wheel openings. The fender
crowns will have a radius outside corner that will allow the fender crown to extend out further
than the standard width crown, thus extending beyond the sidewall of the front tires and
allow the crew cab doors to open fully.
CAB DOOR INTERIOR PANELS
A brushed stainless steel scuffplate will be provided on the lower interior section of cab and
crew cab doors.
STRIPE (On Paint Break)
There will be a gold leaf stripe provided on the paint break in place of chrome molding. The
stripe will be on both sides of the cab and on the cab face with shield.
MAP BOX
A map box with three (3) bins, open.from top, will be installed on the center dash. The map
box will be divided into three (3) bins, each being 12.00" wide x 4.00" deep x 8.00" high.
The map box will be constructed of .125" aluminum and will be painted to match the cab
Page 22 of 96
interior.
MAP POCKET
Installed on each front door will be a map pocket. The pocket will be 13.50" wide x 14.00"
high x 1.50" deep and constructed of stainless steel.
CAB LIFT
A hydraulic cab lift system will be provided consisting of an electric powered hydraulic pump,
dual lift cylinders, and necessary hoses and valves.
The hydraulic pump will have a manual override for backup in the event of electrical failure.
Lift controls will be on a panel located on the pump panel or front area of the body in a
convenient location.
In addition to the panel controls, a 15' remote control will be provided for raising and
lowering the cab. The remote control will be stored in the cab. The receptacle for the
remote control will be located next to the master controls on the panel.
Cab will be locked down by a two (2) -point automatic spring - loaded hook mechanism that
actuates after the cab has been lowered.
The hydraulic cylinders will be equipped with a velocity fuse that protects the cab from
accidentally descending when the control is located in the tilt position.
A redundant mechanical stay arm will automatically be engaged once the cab has been fully
raised. Before lowering the cab, this device must be disengaged using the stay arm control
located near the cab raise /lower switch.
INTERLOCK CAB LIFT TO PARKING BRAKE
The cab lift system will be interlocked to the parking brake. The cab tilt mechanism will be
active only when the parking brake is set and the ignition switch is in the on position, if the
parking brake is released the cab tilt mechanism will be disabled.
MIRRORS
Ramco, model #6001CCR, polished aluminum 9.25" x 13.50" mirrors, with a convex section,
will be mounted on each side of the front cab corner.
The flat glass in each mirror will be adjustable with remote controls that are convenient to
the driver.
The convex section in each mirror will be adjusted manually.
BUMPER
A one (1) piece, ten (10) gauge, 304 -26 type polished stainless steel bumper, minimum of
10.00" high, will be attached to a bolted modular extension frame constructed of 50,000 psi
tensile steel "C" channel mounted directly behind it to provide adequate support strength.
Page 23 ' of 96
The bumper will be extended 16.00" from front face of cab
Documentation will be provided, upon request to show that the options selected have been
engineered for ft -up and approval for this modular bumper extension. A chart will be
provided to indicate the option locations and will include, but not be limited to the following
options: air horns, mechanical sirens, speakers, hose trays (with hose capacities), winches,
fights, discharge, and suction connections.
LIFT AND TOW MOUNTS
Mounted to the frame extension will be lift and tow mounts. The lift and tow mounts will be
designed and positioned to adapt to certain tow truck lift systems.
The lift and tow mounts with eyes will be painted the same color as the frame.
HOSE TRAY
A hose tray, constructed of aluminum, will be placed in the center of the bumper extension.
The tray will have a capacity of 20' of 5.00" double jacket cotton - polyester hose.
Black rubber grating will be provided at the bottom of the tray. Drain holes are also
provided.
GRAVEL PAN
A gravel pan, constructed of bright aluminum treadplate, will be furnished between the
bumper and cab face.
The gravel pan will be properly supported from the underside to prevent flexing and vibration
of the aluminum treadplate.
HOSE HOLD DOWN STRAP
There will be one (1) hose tray(s) that will have a pair of 2.00" wide black nylon strap(s), with
Velcro fasteners, provided. The strap(s) will be used to secure the hose in the tray.
TOW HOOKS
No tow hooks are to be provided. This truck will be equipped with a lift and tow package
with integral tow eyes.
CAB INTERIOR
The wrap- around style high impact ABS plastic cab dash fascia will be designed to provide
unobstructed visibility to instrumentation. The dash layout will provide the driver with a quick
reference to gauges that allows more time to focus on the road. The center console will
include an easily removable cover for the defroster, two (2) cup holders located one (1) each
side at the rear of the console, and two (2) 12 volt power sources (cigar lighter style).
The officer side dash and center console will be a flat faced design to provide easy
maintenance and will be constructed out of painted aluminum.
Page 24 of 96
The engine tunnel will be padded and covered with 46 ounce leather grain vinyl resistant to
oil, grease and mildew. The upper door liners will be constructed of an aluminum backing
covered with padded upholstry.
The headliner will be installed in both forward and rear cab sections. Headliner material will
be vinyl. A sound barrier will be part of its composition. Material will be installed on
aluminum sheet and securely fastened to interior cab ceiling.
Forward portion of cab headliner will provide easy access for servicing electrical wiring or for
other maintenance needs without removing the entire unit.
CAB INTERIOR UPHOLSTERY
The cab interior upholstery will be dark silver gray.
INTERIOR PAINT (Cab)
A rich looking interior will be provided by painting all the metal surfaces inside the cab gray,
Vinyl texture paint.
GRAB HANDLE
A black rubber covered grab handle will be mounted on the lower portion of the driver's side
cab entrance to assist in entering the cab. The grab handle will be securely mounted to the
post area between the door and steering wheel column.
A long rubber grab handle will be mounted on the dash board in front of the officer.
DRIVER SEAT
A Seats Inc. #911 Magnum 100 "knee- action" air -ride style seat with high -back will be
provided in the cab for the driver.
The seat will have 3.00" of height adjustment, in addition to the "knee- action" suspension.
The driver's seat will be furnished with three (3) -point shoulder type seat belt. The seat belt
will be furnished with automatic retractor. Extension will be provided with the seat belt so
the male end can be easily grasped and the female end easily located while sitting in a
normal position.
OFFICER SEAT
A Seats Inc. #911 fixed companion high back style seat will be provided in the cab for the
officer.
The officer's seat will be furnished with three (3) -point shoulder type seat belt. The seat belt
will be furnished with automatic retractor. Extension will be provided with the seat belt so
the male end can be easily grasped and the female end easily located while sitting in a
normal position.
Page 25 of 96
There will be one (1) fold up seat provided at the passenger side outboard position in the
crew cab.
The seat will be constructed of a heavy grade vinyl over foam rubber and will have the
bottom covered with brushed stainless steel for a pleasant appearance when the seat is in
the up position.
The seat will be furnished with a three - point, shoulder type seat belt. The seat belt will be
furnished with automatic retractors.
FORWARD FACING DRIVER SIDE OUTBOARD SEAT
There will be one (1) fold up seat provided at the driver side outboard position in the crew
cab.
The seat will be constructed of a heavy grade vinyl over foam rubber and will have the
bottom covered with brushed stainless steel for a pleasant appearance when the seat is in
the up position.
The seat will be furnished with a three - point, shoulder type seat belt. The seat belt will be
furnished with automatic retractors.
EMS COMPARTMENT
A forward facing EMS compartment will be provided in the crew cab at the center position.
The compartment will be 38.00" wide x 30.00" high x 22.63" deep with two (2) Gortite roll up
doors, non - locking, with white finish. The clear door opening of the compartment will be
approximately 21.00" high x 17.00" wide.
The compartment will be constructed of smooth aluminum, and painted to match the cab
interior.
COMPARTMENT LIGHT
There will be one (1) On Scene Solutions strip light installed on the left side of the
compartment opening.. The lights will be controlled by an automatic door switch.
This storage compartment will be compliant per NFPA standard for automotive fire
apparatus.
RADIO COMPARTMENT
A radio compartment will be provided under the officer's seat.
The inside compartment dimensions will be 14.50" deep x 14.50" across x 9.00" high
A drop -down door with a chrome plated lift and turn latch will be provided for access.
Page 26 of 96
The compartment will be constructed of smooth aluminum and painted to match the cab
interior.
SEAT UPHOLSTERY
All Seats Inc. 911 seat upholstery will be gray woven with black Imperial 1200 material.
SHOULDER HARNESS HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
All seating positions furnished with three (3) -point shoulder type seat belts will include a
height adjustment. This adjustment will optimize the belts effectiveness and comfort for the
seated firefighter.
SEAT BELTS
All seating positions in the cab and crew cab will have red seat belts.
SEAT BELT ANCHOR STRENGTH
Seat belt attachment strength is regulated by Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
and should be validated through testing. Each seat belt anchor design will withstand
3000 lbs of pull on both the lap and shoulder belt in accordance with FMVSS 571.210
Seat Belt Assembly Anchorages. The bidder will certify that each anchor design was
pull tested to the required force and met the appropriate criteria.
SEAT MOUNTING STRENGTH
Seat attachment strength is regulated by Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards and
should be validated through testing. Each seat mounting design will be tested to withstand
20 G's of force in accordance with FMVSS 571.207 Seating Systems. The bidder will certify
that each seat mount and cab structure design was pull tested to the required force and met
the appropriate criteria.
SEAT BELT MONITORING SYSTEM
A seat belt monitoring system (SBMS) will be provided. The SBMS will be capable of
monitoring up to ten (10) sensors indicating the status of each seating position in the cab
with green and red LED indicators as follows:
Seat Occupied
Buckled
Green
Seat Occupied
Unbuckled
Red
No Occupant
Buckled
Red
No Occupant
Unbuckled
Not Illuminated
The SBMS will include an audible alarm that will be activated when a red illumination
condition exists and the parking brake is released, or a red illumination condition exists and
the transmission is not in park.
HELMET HOLDER
There will be four (4) Zico UHH -1 helmet holder bracket(s) provided in the cab. The
brackets will provide quick access and secure storage of the helmet(s). The bracket
location(s) will be determined at time of final inspection at Pierce mfg.
Page 27 of 96
AIR BOTTLE MOUNTING BRACKET
A total of two (2) 45 degree mounting bracket will be in the crew cab.
Each mounting bracket will be designed to hold one (1) Ziamatic SCBA holders
The bracket will be mounted on the rear facing seat risors.
CAB WARRANTY
Limited Warranty
Except as provided below, and provided the vehicle will have been placed in service within
60 days after delivery to the original purchaser as established by our original invoice, for a
period of ten (10) years after delivery to the original purchaser or the first 700,000 miles of
use, whichever first occurs, Pierce Manufacturing Inc. ( "Pierce ") warrants to the user that its
custom fire and /or rescue vehicle cab are free of defects in design or workmanship in the
cab tubular support and mounting supports and other cab structural components identified in
Pierce specifications. This limited warranty will apply only if the vehicle is property
maintained and used in service which is normal to the particular vehicle. Normal service
means service which does not subject the vehicle to stresses or impacts greater than
normally result from the careful use of the vehicle or chassis. If the buyer discovers a defect
or nonconformity it must notify Pierce in writing within 30 days after the date of discovery..
This limited warranty is not transferable by the first user.
A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT LIGHTS
Two (2) engine compartment lights will be installed under the engine hood, with an integral
switch. The lights will have a .125' diameter hole in its lens to prevent moisture retention.
CAB INTERIOR LIGHTING
Auxiliary lights will be provided in the cab and consisting of:
- Two (2) Weldon, Model 8081, red /clear dome light located, one (1) on the officer side and
one (1) on the driver side, controlled by the following:
Clear forward light controlled by the door switch and the lens switch.
Red rearward light controlled by the lens switch.
- Two (2) Adjustable Map Lights: With switches mounted on the cab ceiling.
CREW CAB INTERIOR LIGHTING
Auxiliary lights will be provided in the crew cab and consist of
.
- Four (4) Weldon, Model 8081, Red /Clear dome lights located two (2) each side, controlled
by the following:
Clear forward tights controlled by the door switch and the tens switch.
Red rearward lights controlled by the lens switch.
Page 28 of 96
- A courtesy light at each door opening, controlled by automatic door switches
STEP LIGHTS
For reduced overall maintenance costs compared to incandescent lighting, there will
be four (4) Ritar, Model M27HW2, LED, step lights provided. The lights will be
installed at each cab and crew cab door, one (1) per step, in the driver side front
doorstep, driver side crew cab doorstep, passenger side front doorstep and passenger
side crew cab doorstep.
The lights will be activated when the adjacent door is opened.
CAB DEFROSTER
There will be a 41,000 BTU/hr defroster in the cab located under the engine tunnel.
The defroster ventilation will be built into the design of the cab dash instrument panel and
will be easily removable for maintenance.
The defroster will have a three (3) speed blower, and temperature controls accessible to the
driver and officer.
The defroster ducts will be designed to provide maximum defrosting capabilities for the front
cab windows.
CAB /CREW CAB HEATER
Two (2) auxiliary heaters with 32,000 BTU /hr each will be provided in the cab. The heaters
will have a three (3) speed blower, and temperature controls accessible to the driver and
officer. There will also be louvers located below the rear facing seat riser and below the
driver and officer positions for airflow.
The heaters will be mounted, one (1) within each rear facing seat riser.
CAB DEFROSTER CERTIFICATION
Visibility during inclement weather is essential to safe apparatus performance. The
defroster system will clear the required windshield zones in accordance with SAE
J381 Windshield Defrosting Systems Test Procedure and Performance Requirements
- Trucks, Buses, and Multipurpose Vehicles. The bidder will certify that the defrost
system design has been tested in a cold chamber and passes the SAE J381 criteria.
CAB HEATER CERTIFICATION
Good cab heat performance and regulation provides a more effective working environment
for personnel, whether in-transit, or at a scene. The cab heaters will warm the cab 75 F
from a cold -soak, within 30 minutes when tested using the coolant supply methods found in
SAE J381. The bidder will certify that a substantially similar cab has been tested and has
met these criteria.
AIR CONDITIONING
An air conditioning system will be furnished inside the cab and crew cab.
Page 29 of 96
The system will be centrally mounted on the cab.
The air conditioner refrigerant will be R-1 34A, installed by a certified technician.
INTERIOR CAB INSULATION
The cab and crew cab walls will be insulated with 2.00" insulation where possible and the
roof with 1.00" insulation to aid in cooling.
The insulation will be covered with a vinyl liner or a metal panel painted to match the interior.
An additional red warning light will be installed to the side of the exterior air conditioning
housing. The light will match the upper zone lighting package to meet NFPA requirements.
No change orders will be allowed for this option. This option will be allowed for orders with a
12 month leadtime from the time the order is submitted to Pierce.
CAB INSTRUMENTATION
The cab instrument panel will consist of gauges, an LCD display, telltale indicator lights,
alarms, control switches, and a diagnostic panel. The function of instrument panel controls
and switches will be identified by a label adjacent to each item. Actuation of the headlight
switch will illuminate the labels in low light conditions. Telltale indicator lamps will not be
illuminated unless necessary. The cab instruments and controls will be conveniently located
within the forward cab section directly forward of the driver. Gauges and switch panels will
be designed to be removable for ease of service and low cost of ownership.
GAUGES
The gauge panel will include the following nine (9) ivory gauges with chrome bezels to
monitor vehicle performance:
Voltmeter gauge (Volts)
Low volts (11.8 VDC)
Amber caution indicator on the information center with intermittent alarm.
Amber caution light on gauge assembly.
High volts (15 VDC)
Amber caution indicator on the information center with intermittent alarm.
Amber caution light on gauge assembly.
Very low volts (11.3 VDC)
Red warning indicator on the information center with a steady alarm.
Amber caution light on gauge assembly.
Very high volts (16 VDC)
Red warning indicator on the information center with a steady alarm.
Amber caution light on gauge assembly.
Tachometer (RPM)
Speedometer (Primary (outside) MPH, Secondary (inside) Km /H)
Fuel level gauge (Empty - Full in fractions)
Low fuel (118 full)
Page 30 of 96
Amber caution indicator on the information center with intermittent alarm.
Amber caution light on gauge assembly.
Very low fuel (1/32) fuel
Red warning indicator on the information center with a steady alarm.
Amber caution light on gauge assembly.
Engine oil pressure gauge (PSI)
Low oil pressure to activate engine warning lights and alarms
Red warning indicator on the information center with a steady alarm.
Amber caution light on gauge assembly.
Front air pressure gauge (PSI)
Low air pressure to activate warning lights and alarm.
Red warning indicator on the information center with a steady alarm.
Amber caution light on gauge assembly.
Rear air pressure gauge (PSI)
Low air pressure to activate warning lights and alarm.
Red warning indicator on the information center with a steady alarm.
Amber caution light on gauge assembly.
Transmission oil temperature gauge (Fahrenheit)
High transmission oil temperature activates warning lights and alarm.
Amber caution indicator on the information center with intermittent alarm.
Amber caution light on gauge assembly.
Engine coolant temperature gauge (Fahrenheit)
High engine temperature activates an engine warning light and alarm.
Amber caution indicator on the information center with intermittent alarm.
Amber caution light on gauge assembly.
All gauges will perform prove out at initial power -up to ensure proper performance.
INDICATOR LAMPS
To promote safety, the following telltale indicator lamps will be integral to the gauge
assembly and are located above and below the center gauges. The indicator lamps will be
"dead- front" design that is only visible when active. The colored indicator lights will have
descriptive text or symbols.
The following amber telltale lamps will be present:
Low coolant
Trac Intl (traction control) (where applicable)
Check engine
Check trans (check transmission)
Aux brake overheat (Auxiliary brake overheat)
Air rest (air restriction)
Caution (triangle symbol)
Water in fuel
DPF (engine diesel particulate filter regeneration)
Trailer ABS (where applicable)
Wait to start (where applicable)
HET (engine high exhaust temperature) (where applicable)
ABS (antilock brake system)
MIL (engine emissions system malfunction indicator lamp) (where applicable)
Page 31 of 96
Side roll fault (where applicable)
Front air bag fault (where applicable)
The following red telltale lamps will be present:
Warning (stop sign symbol)
Seat belt
Parking brake
Stop engine
Rack down
The following green telltale lamps will be provided:
Left turn
Right turn
Battery on
The following blue telltale lamp will be provided:
High beam
ALARMS
Audible steady tone warning alarm: A steady audible tone alarm will be provided whenever
a warning message is present.
Audible pulsing tone caution alarm: A pulsing audible tone alarm (chime /chirp) will be
provided whenever a caution message is present without a warning message being present
Alarm silence: Any active audible alarm will be able to be silenced by holding the ignition
switch at the top position for 3 -5 seconds. For improved safety, silenced audible alarms will
intermittently chirp every 30 seconds until the alarm condition no longer exists. The
intermittent chirp will act as a reminder to the operator that a caution or warning condition
still exists. Any new warning or caution condition will enable the steady or pulsing tones
respectively.
INDICATOR LAMP AND ALARM PROVE -OUT
A system will be provided which automatically tests telltale indicator lights and alarms
located on the cab instrument panel. Telltale indicators and alarms will perform prove -out at
initial power -up to ensure proper performance.
CONTROL SWITCHES
For ease of use, the following controls will be provided immediately adjacent to the cab
instrument panel within easy reach of the driver.
Emergency master switch: A molded plastic push button switch with integral indicator
lamp will be provided. Pressing the switch will activate emergency response lights
and siren control. A green lamp on the switch provides indication that the emergency
master mode is active. Pressing the switch again disables the emergency master
mode.
Headlight / Parking light switch: A three (3)- position maintained rocker switch will be
provided. The first switch position will deactivate all parking lights and the headlights.
The second switch position will activate the parking lights. The third switch position
Page32 of96
will activate the headlights.
Panel backlighting intensity control switch: A three (3) position momentary rocker
switch will be provided. The first switch position decreases the panel backlighting
intensity to a minimum level as the switch is held. The second switch position is the
default position that does not affect the backlighting intensity. The third switch position
increases the panel backlighting intensity to a maximum level as the switch is held.
The following standard controls will be integral to the gauge assembly and are located below
the right hand gauges. All switches have backlit labels for low light applications.
High idle engagement switch: A two (2) position momentary rocker switch with
integral indicator lamp will be provided. The first switch position is the default switch
position. The second switch position will activate and deactivate the high idle function
when pressed and released. The OK TO ENGAGE HIGH IDLE indicator lamp must
be active for the high idle function to engage. A green indicator lamp integral to the
high idle engagement switch will indicate when the high idle function is engaged.
OK to high idle indicator lamp: A green indicator light will be provided next to the high
idle activation switch to indicate that the interlocks have been met to allow high idle
engagement.
The following standard controls will be provided adjacent to the cab gauge assembly within
easy reach of the driver. All switches will have backlit labels for low light applications.
Ignition switch: A three (3) position maintained /maintained/momentary rocker switch
will be provided. The first switch position will deactivate vehicle ignition. The second
switch position will activate vehicle ignition. The third momentary position will disable
the Command Zone audible alarm if held for 3-5 seconds. A green indicator lamp will
be activated with vehicle ignition.
Engine start switch: A two (2) position momentary rocker switch will be provided. The
first switch position is the default switch position. The second switch position will
activate the vehicle's engine. The switch actuator is designed to prevent accidental
activation.
4 -way .hazard switch: A two (2) position maintained rocker switch will be provided.
The first switch position will deactivate the 4 -way hazard switch function. The second
switch position will activate the 4 -way hazard function. The switch actuator will be red
and includes the international 4 -way hazard symbol.
Heater and defroster controls
Turn signal arm: A self - canceling turn signal with high beam headlight and windshield
wipertwasher controls will be provided. The windshield wiper control will have high,
low, and intermittent modes.
Page 33 of 96
Parking brake control: An air actuated push /pull park brake control valve will be
provided.
Chassis horn control: Activation of the chassis horn control will be provided through
the center of the steering wheel.
CUSTOM SWITCH PANELS
The design of cab instrumentation will allow for emergency lighting and other switches to be
placed within easy reach of the operator thus improving safety. There will be positions for
up to four (4) switch panels in the overhead console on the driver's side, up to four (4) switch
panels in the engine tunnel console facing the driver, up to four (4) switch panels in the
overhead console on the officer's side and up to two (2) switch panels in the engine tunnel
console facing the officer. All switches will have backlit labels for low light applications.
DIAGNOSTIC PANEL
A diagnostic panel will be accessible while standing on the ground and located inside the
driver's side door left of the steering column. The diagnostic panel will allow diagnostic tools
such as computers to connect to various vehicle systems for improved troubleshooting
providing a lower cost of ownership. Diagnostic switches will allow engine and ABS systems
to provide blink codes should a problem exist. The diagnostic panel will include the
following:
Engine diagnostic port
Transmission diagnostic port
ABS diagnostic port
Roll sensor diagnostic port
Command Zone USB diagnostic port
Engine diagnostic switch (blink codes flashed on check engine telltale indicator)
ABS diagnostic switch (blink codes flashed on ABS telltale indicator)
Diesel particulate filter regeneration switch (where applicable)
Diesel particulate filter regeneration inhibit switch (where applicable)
CAB LCD DISPLAY
A digital 4 row by 50 character dot matrix display will be integral to the gauge panel. The
display will be capable of showing simple graphical images as well as text. The display will
be split into three (3) sections. Each section will have a dedicated function. The upper left
section will display the outside ambient temperature. The upper right section will display
odometer, trip mileage, PTO hours, fuel consumption, and other configuration speck
information. The bottom section will display INFO, CAUTION, and WARNING messages.
Text messages will automatically activate to describe the cause of an audible caution or
warning alarm. The LCD will be capable of displaying multiple text messages should more
than one caution or warning condition exist.
- High Air Restriction Warning Indicator Light: LCD message with amber warning indicator
and audible alarm.
Page 34 of 96
WIPER CONTROL
For simple operation and easy reach, the windshield wiper control will be an integral part of
the directional light lever located on the steering column. The wiper control will include high
and low wiper speed settings, a one (1) speed intermittent wiper control with six (6) second
interval and windshield washer switch. The control will have a "return to park" provision,
which allows the wipers to re -turn to the stored position when the wipers are not in use.
WINDSHIELD WIPER DURABILITY CERTIFICATION
Visibility during inclement weather is essential to safe apparatus performance. Windshield
wipers will survive a 3 million cycle durability test in accordance with section 6.2 of SAE
J198 Windshield Wiper Systems - Trucks, Buses and Multipurpose Vehicles. The bidder will
certify that the wiper system design has been tested and that the wiper system has met
these criteria.
- A dash mounted air restriction gauge will be provided, in the cab instrument panel. The
gauge will be a Farr, model 3781 -325, filter minder with black bezel.
- Officer Speedometer, A Class I digital display speedometer will be provided on the officer
side overhead position.
RADIO WITH CD PLAYER
A Panasonic AM /FMNVeatherband stereo radio with compact disc player will be installed.
The compact disc stereo radio will be mounted in switch panel per layout.
The quantity and location of the speakers will be one (1) pair of 5.25" speakers located in
the cab.
The type and location of the antenna will be a roof - mounted rubber antenna located in an
open space, on the cab roof.
This radio will be installed without remote control
RADIO ANTENNA MOUNTS
There will be six (6) antenna - mounting bases, model MATM, with 17 feet of coax cable and
weatherproof cap provided for a two -way radio or cell phone installation.
One (1) of the mounts will be located on the cab roof, just to the rear of the officer seat and
the additional mount(s) will be located directly to the left, in the following positions cab roof.
The cables will be routed to the seat box on the officer side with enough cable for the
customer to route to the instrument panel if needed.
SWITCH PANELS
The emergency light switch panel will have a master switch for ease of use plus individual
switches for selective control. Each switch panel will contain eight (8) membrane -type
switches each rated for one million (1,000,000) cycles. Panels containing less than eight (8)
Page 35 of 96
switch assignments will include non - functioning black appliques. Documentation will be
provided by the manufacturer indicating the rated cycle life of the switches. The switch
panel(s) will be located in the "overhead" position above the windshield on the driver side
overhead to allow for easy access.
The switches will be membrane -type and also act as an integral indicator light. For quick,
visual indication the entire surface of the switch will be illuminated white whenever
backlighting is activated and illuminated red whenever the switch is active. For ease of use,
a 2 -ply, scratch resistant laser engraved Gravoply label indicating the use of each switch will
be placed in the center of the switch. The label will allow light to pass through the letters for
ease of use in low light conditions.
ELECTRICAL POWER CONTROL SYSTEM
The primary power distribution will be located forward of the officer's seating position and be
easily accessible while standing on the ground for simplified maintenance and
troubleshooting. Additional electrical distribution centers will be provided throughout the
vehicle to house the vehicle's electrical power, circuit protection, and control components.
The electrical distribution centers will be located strategically throughout the vehicle to
minimize wire length. For ease of maintenance, all electrical distribution centers will be
easily accessible. All distribution centers containing fuses, circuit breakers.andlor relays will
be easily accessible.
Distribution centers located throughout the vehicle will contain battery powered studs for
supplying customer installed equipment thus providing a lower cost of ownership.
Circuit protection devices., which conform to SAE standards, will be utilized to protect
electrical circuits. All circuit protection devices will be rated per NFPA requirements to
prevent wire and component damage when subjected to extreme current overload. General
protection circuit breakers will be Type -1 automatic reset (continuously resetting). When
required, automotive type fuses will be utilized to protect electronic equipment. Control
relays and solenoid will have a direct current rating of 125% of the maximum current for
which the circuit is protected per NFPA.
COMMAND ZONE CONTROL SYSTEM
A solidstate electronics based control system will be utilized to achieve advanced operation
and control of the vehicle components. A fully computerized vehicle network will consist of
electronic modules located near their point of use to reduce harness lengths and improve
reliability. The control system will comply with SAE J1939 -11 recommended practices.
The control system will operate as a master -slave system whereas the main control module
instructs all other system components. The system will contain patented Mission Critical
software that maintains critical vehicle operations in the unlikely event of a main controller
error. The system will utilize a Real Time Operating System (RTOS) fully compliant with
OSEK/VDXTTM specifications providing a lower cost of ownership.
For increased reliability and simplified use the control system modules will include the
following attributes:
Page 36 of 96
Green LED indicator light for module power
Red LED indicator light for network communication stability status
Control system self test at activation and continually throughout vehicle operation
No moving parts due to transistor logic
Software logic control for NFPA mandated safety interlocks and indicators
Integrated electrical system load management without additional components
Integrated electrical load sequencing system without additional components
Customized control software to this vehicle's configuration
Factory and field reprogrammable to accommodate changes to the vehicles operating
parameters
Complete operating and troubleshooting manuals
USB connection to the main control module for advanced troubleshooting
To assure long life and operation in a broad range of environmental conditions, the
Command Zone control system modules will meet the following specifications:
Module circuit board will meet SAE J771 specifications.
Operating temperature from 40C to +70C
Storage temperature from 40C to +70C
Vibration to 50g
IP67 rated enclosure (Totally protected against dust and also protected against the effect of
temporary immersion between 15 centimeters and 1 meter)
Operating voltage from 8 volts to 16 volts DC
The main controller will activate status indicators and audible alarms designed to provide
warning of problems before they become critical.
CIRCUIT PROTECTION AND CONTROL DIAGRAM
Copies of all job - specific, computer network input and output (1 /0) connection will be
provided with each chassis. The Sheets will indicate the function of each module
connection point, circuit protection information (where applicable), wire numbers, wire colors
and load management information.
on -board information center will include the followir
Text description of active warning or caution alarms
Simplified warning indicators
Amber caution light with intermittent alarm
Red warning light with steady tone alarm
All control system modules, with the exception of the main control module, will contain on-
board visual diagnostic LEDs that assist in troubleshooting. The LEDs will be enclosed
within the sealed, transparent module housing near the face of the module. One LED for
each input or output will be provided and will illuminate whenever the respective input or
output is active. Color coded labels within the modules will encompass the LEDs for ease of
identification. The LED indicator lights will provide point of use information for reduced
troubleshooting time without the need for an additional computer.
Page 37 of 9b
ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
An advanced, Windows- based, diagnostic software program will be provided for this control
system. The software will provide troubleshooting tools to service technicians equipped with
an IBM compatible computer.
The service and maintenance software will be easy to understand and use, have the ability
to view system input/output (1 /0) information, and include a USB cable for connection from a
computer to the vehicle.
INDICATOR LIGHT AND ALARM PROVE -OUT SYSTEM
A system will be provided which automatically tests basic indicator lights and alarms located
on the cab instrument panel.
VOLTAGE MONITOR SYSTEM
A voltage monitoring system will be provided to indicate the status of the battery system
connected to the vehicle's electrical load. The system will provide visual and audible
warning when the system voltage is below or above optimum levels.
The alarm will activate if the system falls below 11.8 volts DC for more than two (2) minutes.
DEDICATED RADIO EQUIPMENT CONNECTION POINTS
There will be three (3) studs provided in the primary power distribution center located in front
of the officer for two-way radio equipment.
The studs will consist of the following:
12 -volt 40 -amp battery switched power
12 -volt 60 -amp ignition switched power
12 -volt 60 -amp direct battery power
There will also be a 12 -volt 100 -amp ground stud located in or adjacent to the power distribution
center.
ENHANCED SOFTWARE
The Command Zone control system will include the following software enhancements:
All perimeter lights and scene lights (where applicable) will be deactivated when the parking
brake is released
Cab and crew cab dome lights will remain on for 10 seconds for improved visibility after the
doors close. The dome lights will dim after 10 seconds or immediately if the vehicle is put
into gear.
Cab and crew cab perimeter lights will remain on for 10 seconds for improved visibility after
the doors close. The dome lights will dim after 10 seconds or immediately if the vehicle is
put into gear.
EMI /RFI PROTECTION
To prevent erroneous signals from crosstalk contamination and interference, the electrical
system will meet, at a minimum, SAE J551/2, thus reducing undesired electromagnetic and
radio frequency emissions. An advanced electrical system will be used to insure radiated
and conducted electromagnetic interference (EMI) or radio frequency interference (RFI)
Page 38 of 96
emissions are suppressed at their source.
The apparatus will have the ability to operate in the electromagnetic environment typically
found in fire ground operations to ensure clean operations. The electrical system will meet,
without exceptions, electromagnetic susceptibility conforming to SAE J1113125 Region 1,
Class C EMR for 10KHz -1GHz to 100 Volts/Meter. The vehicle OEM, upon request, will
provide EMC testing reports from testing conducted on an entire apparatus and will certify
that the vehicle meets SAE J551/2 and SAE J1113/25 Region 1, Class C EMR for 10KHz-
1 GHz to 100 Volts /Meter requirements. Component and partial (incomplete) vehicle testing
is not adequate as overall vehicle design can impact test results and thus is not acceptable
by itself.
EMIIRFI susceptibility will be controlled by applying appropriate circuit designs and
shielding. The electrical system will be designed for full compatibility with low -level control
signals and high - powered two -way radio communication systems. Harness and cable
routing will be given careful attention to minimize the potential for conducting and radiated
EMIIRFI susceptibility.
INFORMATION CENTER
An information center employing a 7" diagonal color LCD display will be encased in an
ABS plastic housing.
The information center will have the following specifications:
- Operate in temperatures from -40 to 185 degrees F
- An Optical Gel will be placed between the LCD and protective lens
- Five weather resistant user interface switches
- Black enclosure with gray decal
- Sunlight Readable
- Linux operating system
- Minimum of 400nds rated display
OPERATION
The information center will be designed for easy operation for everyday use.
The page button will cycle from one screen to the next screen in a rotating fashion.
A video button will allow a NTSC signal into the information center to be displayed on
the LCD. Pressing any button while viewing a video feed will return the information
center to the vehicle information screens.
A menu button will provide access to maintenance, setup and diagnostic screens.
All other button labels will be specific to the information being viewed. .
GENERAL SCREEN DESIGN
Where possible, background colors will be used to provide "At a Glance" vehicle
information. If information provided on a screen is within acceptable limits, a green
Page 39 of 96
background will be used. If a caution or warning situation arises the following will
occur:
- An amber background /text color will indicate a caution condition.
- A red background /text color will indicate a warning condition.
Every screen will include the following:
- Exterior Ambient Temperature
- Time (12 or 24 hour mode)
- Text Alert Center:
- The information center will utilize an "Alert Center" to display text messages
for audible alarm tones. The text messages will be written to identify the
item(s) causing the audible alarm to sound. If more then one (1) text
message occurs, the messages will cycle every second until the problem($)
have been resolved. The background color for the "Alert Center" will change
.to indicate the severity of the "warning" message. If a warning and a caution
condition occur simultaneously, the red background color will be shown for all
alert center messages.
- Button Labels: A label for each button will exist. The label will indicate the
function for each active button for each screen. Buttons that are not utilized
on specific screens will have a button label with no text.
PAGE SCREENS
The Information center will include the following screens:
Load Manager Screen: A list of items to be load managed will be provided.
The list will provide:
- Description of the load
- Individual load shed priority: The lower the priority number the earlier
the device will be shed should a low voltage condition occur.
- Load Status: The screen will indicate if a load has been shed
(disabled) or not shed.
"At a Glance" color features are utilized on this screen
Do Not Move Truck: The Do Not Move Truck screen will indicate the
approximate location and type of item that is open or is not stowed for travel.
The actual status of the following devices will be indicated:
- Driver Side Cab Door
- Passenger's Side Cab Door
- Driver Side Crew Cab Door
- Passenger's Side Crew Cab Door
Driver Side Body Doors
Passenger's Side Body Doors
Rear Body Door(s)
- Ladder Rack (if applicable)
- Deck Gun (if applicable)
Light Tower (if applicable)
- Hatch Door (if applicable)
Page 40 of 96
- Stabilizers (if applicable)
- Steps (if applicable)
- Any other device that is opened, extended, or deployed that creates
a hazard or is likely to cause damage to the apparatus if the
apparatus is moved, will cause an "Alert Center" message if the
parking brake is disengaged.
Chassis Information: The following information will be shown:
- Engine RPM
- Fuel Level
- Battery Voltage
- Engine Coolant Temperature
- Engine Oil Pressure
"At a Glance" color features are utilized on this screen
Active Alarms List: This screen will show a list of all active text messages. The
list items text will match the text messages shown in the "Alert Center". The
date and time the message occurred is displayed with each message in the
list.
MENU SCREENS
The following screens will be available through the Menu button:
View System Information: A detailed list of vehicle information:
- Battery Volts
- Pump Hours
- Transmission Oil Temperature
- Pump Engaged
- Engine Coolant Level
- Engine Oil Level
- Oil level will only be shown when the engine is not running
- Power Steering Level
Set daytime and nighttime Display Brightness:
- Brightness: Increase and decrease
- Default setting button
Configure Video Mode:
- Set Video Contrast
- Set Video Color
- Set Video Tint
Set Startup Screen:
- Choose the screen that will be active at vehicle power -up
Set Date & Time:
- 12 or 24 hour format
Page 41 of 96
- Set time
- Set date
View Active Alarms:
- Shows a list of all active alarms
- Date and time of the occurrence is shown with each alarm
- Silence alarms
All alarms are silenced
System Diagnostics:
- Module type and ID number
- Module version
- Module diagnostics information:
- Input or output number
- Circuit number connected to that input or output
- Circuit name (item connected to the circuit)
- Status of the input or output
- Power and Constant Current module diagnostic information
Button functions and button labels may change with each screen.
VEHICLE DATA RECORDER
A vehicle data recorder (VDR) will be provided. The VDR will be capable of reading and
storing vehicle information. The VDR will be capable of operating in a voltage range from
8VDC to 16VDC. The VDR will not interfere with, suspend, or delay any communications
that may exist on the CAN data link during the power up, initialization, runtime, or power
down sequence. The VDR will continue operation upon termination of power or at voltages
below 8VDC for a minimum of 1 Orris.
The vehicle data recorder will be
and(or CAN inputs:
Vehicle Speed -
Acceleration -
Deceleration -
Engine Speed -
Engine Throttle Position -
ABS Event -
Seat Occupied Status -
Seat Belt Buckled Status -
Master Optical Warning Device Switch -
Time -
Date -
capable of recording the following data via hardwired
MPH
MPH /sec
MPH /sec
RPM
% of Full Throttle
OnlOff
Yes /No by Position (7 -12 Seating Capacity)
Yes /No by Position (7 -12 Seating Capacity)
On /Off
24 Hour Time
Year/Month /Day
INTERCOM SYSTEM
A four (4) position David Clark, Model U3800, intercom system with radio interface at two (2)
positions will be provided.
Page 42 of 96
- Driver position will have radio interface capability
- Officer position will have radio interface capability
- Two (2) crew cab positions, located at both forward facing seats, will have intercom only
The following components will be supplied with this system:
- One (1) -U3800 Intercom Unit (2 Crew)
- One (1) -U3815 Radio Interface Module (Officer)
-One (1) -U3811 Radio Interface Modules (Driver)
- One (1) -U3805 Radio Cord Junction Module
- One (1) -H3441 Single Ear Headset (Driver)
- Three (3) -H3442 Headsets (Officer, crew)
- One (1) -C3820 Power Cable.
- Three (3) -C3821 Radio Interface Cord
- One (1) -C3402 Jumper Cord
- Two (2)- C38 -12 Jumper Cord
- Three (3)- 1835213-17 MS Connectors
- One (1) -09271 P -13 Cable (20 feet)
- Four (4) Headset Hangar Hooks
All necessary cables and connectors
RADIO INTERFACE
Due to the combination of the mobile radio and the brand of intercom system, a mobile radio
interface adapter is not required for this application.
CAB ROOF COVERING
Horizontal cab roof surfaces will be covered with bright aluminum treadplate. Edges and
fastening screws will be properly caulked to prevent water from leaking under aluminum.
Front and side warning lights will not be mounted on top of treadplate. The treadplate will
extend and terminate next to the warning lights.
Page 43 of 96
BATTERY SYSTEM
Five (5) 12 volt, Exide Model 31A950X1 W batteries that include the following features will be
provided:
- 950 CCA, cold cranking amps
- 190 amp reserve capacity
- High cycle
- Group 31
- Rating of 4750 CCA at 0 degrees Fahrenheit
- 950 minutes of reserve capacity
- SAE Posts
Each battery case will be a black polypropylene material with a vertically ribbed container for
increased vibration resistance. The cover will be manifold vented with a central venting
location to allow a 45 degree tilt capacity.
The inside of each battery will consist of a "maintenance free" grid construction with poly
wrapped separators and a flooded epoxy bottom anchoring for maximum vibration
resistance.
ISOLATED BATTERY
One (1) 12 volt, Exide Model 31A950X1W battery will be provided for voltage sensitive
components. A battery isolator appropriately suited for the group 31 battery capacity will be
supplied.
BATTERY SYSTEM
A single starting system will be provided.
An ignition switch and starter button will be located on the instrument panel.
MASTER BATTERY SWITCH
A master battery switch, to activate the battery system, will be provided inside the cab within
easy reach of the driver.
An indicator light will be provided on the instrument panel to notify the driver of the status of
the battery system.
BATTERY COMPARTMENTS
Batteries will be stored in well - ventilated compartments that are located under the cab and
bolted directly to the chassis frame. The compartments will include formed fit heavy -duty
roto- molded polyethylene battery tray inserts. The batteries will be mounted inside of the
roto - molded trays. The battery hold -downs will be of a non - corrosive material. All bolts and
nuts will be stainless steel.
Heavy -duty battery cables will be used to provide maximum power to the electrical system.
Cables will be color - coded.
Page 44 of 96
Battery terminal connections will be coated with anti - corrosion compound. Battery solenoid
terminal connections will be encapsulated with semi - permanent rubberized compound.
There will be a door in the crew cab floor to provide access to the battery terminals.
JUMPER STUDS
One (1) set of battery jumper studs with plastic color -coded covers will be installed on the
bottom of the driver's side battery box. This will provide for easy jumper cable access. A
tag will be provided for positivelnegative terminals.
BATTERY CHARGER
A Newmar model PT-40, three stage battery charger, will be provided. A bar graph
indicating the state of charge will be included.
The vehicle battery output will be capable of supplying up to 40 amps for charging the
batteries.
The battery charger will be wired to the 120 -volt shoreline to activate automatically when the
power is connected.
Battery charger will be located in the front left body compartment, mounted high in the
compartment.
The battery charger indicator will be located on the driver's seat riser.
ALTERNATOR
A Leece - Neville, model 4890JB, alternator will be provided. It wilt have a rated output
current of 320 amps, as measured by SAE method J56. The alternator will feature an
integral, self diagnostic regulator and rectifier. The atemator will be connected to the power
and ground distribution system with heavy -duty cables sized to carry the full rated alternator
output.
SPARE CIRCUIT
There will be four (4) pair of wires, including a positive and a negative, installed on the
apparatus.
The above wires will have the following features:
The positive wire will be connected directly to the battery power.
The negative wire will be connected to ground.
Wires will be protected to 15 amps at 12 volts DC.
Power and ground will terminate two in the center dash and one on the officer's
side and one at the rear.
Termination will be with 15 amp, power point plug with rubber cover.
Wires will be sized to 125% of the protection.
This circuit(s) may be load managed when the parking brake is set
Page 45 of 96
SPARE CIRCUIT
There will be one (1) pair of wires, including a positive and a negative, installed on the
apparatus.
The above wires will have the following features:
The positive wire will be connected directly to the battery power.
The negative wire will be connected to ground.
Wires will be protected to 15 amps at 12 volts DC.
Power and ground will terminate to be determined.
Termination will be with heat shrinkable butt splicing.
The circuits selected above will be controlled by a switch in the following locations:
a switch in the driver's side switch panel
no additional switch location
Wires will be sized to 125% of the protection.
This circuit(s) may be load managed when the parking brake is set.
ELECTRONIC LOAD MANAGER
An electronic load management (ELM) system will be provided that monitors the vehicles
12 -volt electrical system, automatically reducing the electrical load in the event of a low
voltage condition, and automatically restoring the shed electrical loads when a low voltage
condition expires. This ensures the integrity of the electrical system.
For improved reliability and ease of use, the load manager system will be an integral part of
the vehicle's solid state control system requiring no additional components to perform load
management tasks. Load management systems which require additional components will
not be allowed.
The system will include the following features:
System voltage monitoring.
A shed load will remain inactive for a minimum of five minutes to prevent the load
from cycling on and off.
Sixteen available electronic load shedding levels.
Priority levels can be set for individual outputs.
High Idle will not be.controlled by the load manager.
If enabled:
"Load Man HAdle On" will display on the information center.
Hi -Idle will not activate until 30 seconds after engine start up.
Individual switch "on" indicator to flash when the particular load has been shed.
The information center indicates system voltage.
The information center includes a "Load Manager" screen indicating the following:
Load managed items list, with priority levels and item condition.
Individual load managed item condition:
Page 46 of 96
ON = not shed
SHED = shed
SEQUENCER
A sequencer will be provided that automatically activates and deactivates vehicle loads in a
preset sequence thereby protecting the atemator from power surges. This sequencer
operation will allow a gradual increase or decrease in alternator output, rather than loading
or dumping the entire 12 volt load to prolong the life of the alternator.
For improved reliability and ease of use, the load sequencing system will be an integral part
of the vehicle's solid state control system requiring no additional components to perform
load sequencing tasks. Load sequencing systems which require additional components will
not be allowed.
Emergency light sequencing will operate in conjunction with the emergency master light
switch. When the emergency master switch is activated, the emergency lights will be
activated one by one at half- second intervals. Sequenced emergency light switch indicators
will flash while waiting for activation.
When the emergency master switch is deactivated, the sequencer will deactivate the
warning light loads in the reverse order.
Sequencing of the following items will also occur, in conjunction with the ignition switch, at
half - second intervals:
Cab Heater and Air Conditioning
Crew Cab Heater (if applicable)
Crew Cab Air Conditioning (if applicable)
Exhaust Fans (ff applicable)
Third Evaporator (if applicable)
AMP DRAW REPORT
The bidder will provide, at the time of bid and delivery, an itemized print out of the expected
amp draw of the entire vehicle's electrical system.
The manufacturer of the apparatus will provide the following:
1) Documentation of the electrical system performance tests.
2) A written load analysis, which will include the following:
A) The nameplate rating of the alternator.
B) The alternator rating under the conditions specked per:
Applicable NFPA 1901 or 1906 (Current Edition).
C) The minimum continuous load of each component that is specified per:
Applicable NFPA 1901 or 1906 (Current Edition).
D) Additional loads that, when added to the minimum continuous load, determine the
Page 47 of 96
total connected load.
E) Each individual intermittent load
All of the above listed items will be provided by the bidder per the applicable NFPA 1901 or
1906 (Current Edition).
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
Exterior lighting will meet or exceed Federal Department of Transportation, Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards and National Fire Protection Association requirements in effect at
time of proposal.
Front headlights will be halogen, rectangular shape, one (1) pair mounted in each front trim
housing.
The LED directional lights will wrap- around on the outside corners of the trim housing. The
headlight and LED directional lights will be in the same assembly.
Five (5) LED clearance and marker lights will be installed across the leading edge of the
cab.
WARNING LIGHTS (Cab Face)
Four (4) Whelan Model 60 *02F *R Super LED lights will be installed on the cab face, above
the headlights, mounted in common bezels matching the headlight bezel.
The outside flashing LEDs will be red Super LED /red lens.
The inside steady burning LEDs will be red Super LED /red lens.
All of these lights will be activated by the same switch in the cab.
To meet NFPA requirements, the inside lights will be disabled if clear when the parking
brake is applied.
BACK -UP ALARM
An ECCO, Model SA917 -PM2, solid -state electronic audible back -up alarm that actuates
when the truck is shifted into reverse will be provided. The device will sound at 60 pulses
per minute and automatically adjust its volume to maintain a minimum five (5) dBA above
surrounding environmental noise levels.
MANUAL. FIRE APPARATUS PARTS
Two (2) custom parts manuals for the complete fire apparatus will be provided in hard copy
with the completed unit.
One (1) compact disc (CD) will also be provided that will include all of the information from
the above manual.
The manual.will contain the following
Page 48 of 96
- Job number
- Part numbers with full descriptions
- Table of contents
- Parts section sorted in functional groups reflecting a major system, component, or
assembly
- Parts section sorted in Alphabetical order
- Instructions on how to locate a parts
The manual will be specifically written for the chassis and body model being purchased. It
will not be a generic manual for a multitude of different chassis and bodies.
SERVICE PARTS INTERNET SITE
The service parts information included in this manual is also available on the Pierce website.
The website offers additional functions and features not contained in this manual, such as
digital photographs and line drawings of select items. The website also features electronic
search tools to assist in locating parts quickly.
MANUALS. CHASSIS SERVICE
Two (2) chassis service manuals containing parts and service information on major
components will be provided with the completed unit.
One (1) compact disk (CD) will also be provided that will include all of the information from
the above manual.
The manuals will contain the following sections:
- Job number
- Table of contents
- Troubleshooting
- Front Axle /Suspension
- Brakes
- Engine
- Tires
- Wheels
- Cab
- Electrical, DC
- Air Systems
- Plumbing
- Appendix
The manual will be specifically written for the chassis model being purchased. It will not be
a generic manual for a multitude of different chassis and bodies.
MANUALS. CHASSIS OPERATION
Two (2) chassis operation manuals will be provided.
Page 49 of 96
One (1) compact disk (CD) will also be provided that will include all of the information from
the above manual.
COMMAND ZONE WARRANTY
The Command Zone modules, membrane switches, and display(s) will be warranted against
defective materials or workmanship for a period of five (5) years from the date of delivery to
the original purchaser. The warranty will also include a standard repair time for covered
components.
A copy of the fire apparatus manufacturer's warranty will be included with the bid.
ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS
Two (2) electrical wiring diagrams, prepared for the model of chassis and body, will be
provided.
Page 50 of 96
WATER TANK
Booster tank will have a capacity of 500 gallons and be constructed of polypropylene plastic
by United Plastic Fabricating, Incorporated.
Tank joints and seams will be nitrogen welded inside and out.
Tank will be baffled in accordance with NFPA bulletin 1901 requirements.
Baffles will have vent openings at both the top and bottom to permit movement of air and
water between compartments.
Longitudinal partitions will be constructed of .38" polypropylene plastic and will extend from
the bottom of the tank through the top cover to allow for positive welding.
Transverse partitions will extend from 4.00" off the bottom of the tank to the underside of the
top cover.
All partitions will interlock and will be welded to the tank bottom and sides.
Tank top will be constructed of .50° polypropylene. It will be recessed .38" and will be
welded to the tank sides and the longitudinal partitions.
Tank top will be sufficiently supported to keep it rigid during fast filling conditions.
Construction will include 2.00" polypropylene dowels spaced no more than 30.00" apart and
welded to the transverse partitions. Two (2) of the dowels will be drilled and tapped (.50"
diameter, 13.00" deep) to accommodate lifting eyes.
A.sump that is 8.00" long x 8.00" wide x 6.00" deep will be provided at the bottom of the
water tank.
Sump will include a drain plug and the tank outlet.
Tank will be installed in a fabricated cradle assembly constructed of structural steel.
Sufficient crossmembers will be provided to properly support bottom of tank.
Crossmembers will be constructed of steel bar channel or rectangular tubing.
Tank will "float" in cradle to avoid torsional stress caused by chassis frame flexing. Rubber
cushions, .50" thick x 3.00" wide, will be placed on all horizontal surfaces that the tank rests
on.
Stops or other provision will be provided to prevent an empty tank from bouncing
excessively while moving vehicle.
Mounting system will be approved by the tank manufacturer.
Page 51 of 96
Fill tower will be constructed of .50" polypropylene and will be a minimum of 8.00" wide x
14.00" long.
Fill tower will be furnished with a .25" thick polypropylene screen and a hinged cover.
An overflow pipe, constructed of 4.00" schedule 40 polypropylene, will be installed
approximately halfway down the fill tower and extend through the water tank and exit to the
rear of the rear axle.
WATER TANK WARRANTY
The tank will have a lifetime warranty.
If the tank manufacturer determines that the tank problem has rendered the truck out -of-
service, the tank manufacturer will dispatch a service technician WITHIN 48 HOURS (2
DAYS) to repair the tank (This time period is for the United States and Canada only).
HOSE BED
The hose body will be fabricated of .125" -5052 aluminum with a 38,000 psi tensile strength.
The hose body width will be a minimum of 68.00" inside.
The interior of the hose bed will be unpainted with a DA finish.
The upper and rear edges of side panels will have a double break for rigidity.
The upper inside area of the beavertails will be covered with brushed stainless steel to
prevent damage to the painted surface when the hose is removed.
The flooring of the hose bed will be removable aluminum grating with the top surface
corrugated to aid in hose aeration. The grating slats will be a minimum of .50" x 4.50" with
spacing between slats for hose ventilation.
Hose bed will accommodate 1000' of 3 ", 1000' of 2.5 ", 200' of 1.75" and 8 ".wide for long
tools.
Three (3) adjustable hosebed dividers will be used to separate the hose.
Each divider will be constructed of a .125" brushed aluminum sheet fitted and fastened into
a slotted, 1.50" diameter radiused extrusion along the top, bottom, and rear edge.
Partition will be fully adjustable by sliding in tracks, located at the front and rear of the hose
bed.
Divider will be held in place by tightening bolts, at each end.
Acorn nuts will be installed on all bolts in the hose bed which have exposed threads.
Page 52 of 96
HOSE RESTRAINT
The hose in the hosebed will be restrained by black nylon velcro straps at the top of the
hosebed and a black nylon web strap netting at the top and rear of the hosebed. The
netting will include quick release fasteners.
BACKBOARD COMPARTMENT
One (1) backboard compartment will be fabricated of bright aluminum treadplate and
mounted to the underside of the bright aluminum treadplate hose bed cover, passenger's
side. Compartment(s) size will be 76 x 4 x 20 and will have a bright aluminum treadplate
drop -down door at the rear.
HOSE BED COVER
A two (2) section hose bed cover, constructed of .125" bright aluminum treadplate, will be
furnished. The cover will be hinged with full length stainless steel piano hinge. The sides
will be slanted down.
The cover will be reinforced so that it can support the weight of a man walking on the cover_
If access to water tank fill tower is blocked by the hose bed cover, then a hinged door will be
provided in it so that tank may be filled without raising cover doors,
Chrome grab handles and gas filled cylinders will be provided to assist in opening and
closing the cover. A handrail is provided at the rear, in the center of the support, to assist in
opening the cover.
RUNNING BOARDS
Running boards will be fabricated of. 125" bright aluminum treadplate.
Each running board will be supported by a welded 2.00" square tubing and channel
assembly, which will be bolted to the pump compartment substructure.
Running boards will be 12.75' deep and spaced .50" away from the pump panel.
A splashguard will be provided above the running board treadplate.
TAILBOARD
Rear step will also be constructed of .125' bright aluminum treadplate and spaced .50" from
the body, as well as supported by a structural steel assembly.
The rear tailboard will be 16.00" deep.
The exterior side will be flanged down and in.
Flanges will not be notched.
Entire rear surface between the beavertails will be covered with smooth aluminum.
Page 53 of 96
Inside surface of each beavertail in the hose bed area will be covered with stainless steel to
protect the paint finish.
The remaining inside surface of the beavertails will be covered with bright aluminum
treadplate.
TOW BAR
A taw bar will be installed under the tailboard at center of truck.
Tow bar will be fabricated of 1.00" CRS bar rolled into a 3.00" radius.
Tow bar assembly will be constructed of .38" structural angle. When force is applied to the
bar, it will be transmitted to the frame rail.
Tow bar assembly will be designed and positioned to allow up to a 30- degree upward
angled pull of 17,000 pounds, or a 20,000 -pound straight horizontal pull in line with the
centerline of the vehicle.
Tow bar design will have been fully tested and evaluated using strain gauge testing and
finite element analysis techniques.
COMPARTMENTATION
Body and compartments will be fabricated of .125 ", 5052 -1-132 aluminum with a tensile
strength range of 31,000 to 38,000 psi.
Side compartments will be an integral assembly with the rear fenders.
Circular fender liners will be provided for prevention of rust pockets and ease of
maintenance.
Compartment flooring will be of the sweep out design with the floor higher than the
compartment door lip.
The compartment door opening will be framed by flanging the edges in 1.75" and bending
out again .75" to form an angle.
Drip protection will be provided above the doors by means of bright aluminum extrusion,
formed bright aluminum treadplate or polished stainless steel.
The top of the compartment will be covered with bright aluminum treadplate rolled over the
edges on the front, rear and outward side. These covers will have the comers "TIG" welded.
Side compartment covers will be separate from the compartment tops.
Front facing compartment walls will be covered with bright aluminum treadplate.
All screws and bolts which protrude into a compartment will have acorn nuts on the ends to
Page 54 of 96
prevent injury.
UNDERBODY SUPPORT SYSTEM
Due to the severe loading requirements of this pumper a method of body and compartment
support suitable for the intended load will be provided.
The backbone of the support system will be the chassis frame rails which is the strongest
component of the chassis and is designed for sustaining maximum loads.
The support system will include .375" thick steel vertical angle supports bolted to the chassis
frame rails with .625" diameter bolts.
Attached to the bottom of the steel vertical angles will be horizontal angles, with gussets
welded to the vertical members, which extend to the outside edge of the body.
A steel frame will be mounted on the top of these supports to create a "floating substructure°
which will result in a 500 pound equipment support rating per lower compartment.
The °floating substructure" will be separated from the horizontal members with neoprene
elastomer isolators. These isolators will reduce the natural flex stress of the chassis from
being transmitted to the body.
Isolators will have abroad load range, proven viability in vehicular applications, be of a fail
safe design and allow for all necessary movement in three (3) transitional and rotational
modes.
The neoprene isolators will be installed in a modified "V" three (3) -point mounting pattern to
reduce the natural flex of the chassis being transmitted to the body.
A design with body compartments hanging on the chassis in an unsupported fashion will not
be acceptable.
AGGRESSIVE WALKING SURFACE
All exterior surfaces designated as stepping, standing, and walking areas will comply with
the required average slip resistance of the current NFPA standards.
LOUVERS
All body compartments will have a minimum of one (1) set of louvers stamped into a wall to
provide the proper airflow inside the compartment and to prevent water from dripping into
the compartment. These louvers will be formed into the metal and not added to the
compartment as a separate plate.
TESTING OF BODY DESIGN
Body structural analysis has been fully tested. Proven engineering and test techniques such
as finite element analysis, stress coating and strain gauging have been performed with
special attention given to fatigue, life and structural integrity of the cab, body and
substructure.
Page 55 of 96
Body will be tested while loaded to its greatest in- service weight
The criteria used during the testing procedure will include:
- Raising opposite comers of the vehicle tires 9.00" to simulate the twisting a truck may
experience when driving over a curb.
- Making a 90 degree turn, while driving at 20 mph to simulate aggressive driving conditions.
- Driving the vehicle at 35 mph on a "washboard" road.
- Drving the vehicle at 55 mph on a smooth road.
- Accelerating the vehicle fully, until reaching the approximate speed of 45 mph on rough
pavement.
Evidence of actual testing techniques will be made available upon request.
BODY WARRANTY
Except as provided below, and provided the vehicle will have been placed in service within
60 days after delivery to the original purchaser as established by our original invoice, for a
period of ten (10) years after delivery to the original purchaser or the first 100,000 miles of
use, whichever first occurs, Pierce Manufacturing Inc. ( "Pierce") warrants to the user that its
second generation body and /or heavy duty rescue body are free of defects in design and
workmanship in body tubular support, mounting structures and other structural components
identified in Pierce specifications. This limited warranty will apply only if the vehicle is
properly maintained and used in service which is normal to the particular vehicle. Normal
service means service which does not subject the vehicle to stresses or impacts greater
than normally result from the careful use of the vehicle or chassis. If the buyer discovers a
defect or nonconformity it must notify Pierce in writing within 30 days after the date of
discovery. This limited warranty is not transferable by the first user.
A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal.
COMPARTMENTATION. DRIVER'S SIDE
A full height, roll -up door compartment ahead of the rear wheels will be provided. The
interior dimensions of this compartment will be 49.00" wide x 58.25" high x 25.88" deep in
the lower 26.00" of the compartment and 12.00" deep in the remaining upper portion. The
height of the compartment will be measured from compartment floor to the bottom edge of
the door roll. The depth of the compartment will be calculated with the compartment door
closed. The compartment interior will be fully open from the compartment ceiling to the
compartment floor and designed so that no permanent dividers are required between the
upper and lower sections. The clear door opening of this compartment will be 43.25" wide x
58.25" high.
Closing of the door will not require releasing, unlocking, or unlatching any mechanism and
Page 56 of %
will easily be accomplished with one hand
A roll -up door compartment over the rear wheels will be provided. The interior dimensions
of this compartment will be 66.50" wide x 25.38" high x 12.00" deep. The height of the
compartment will be measured from compartment floor to the bottom edge of the door roll.
The depth of the compartment will be calculated with the compartment door closed. The
clear door opening of this compartment will be 58.25" wide x 25.12" high.
Closing of the door will not require releasing, unlocking, or unlatching any mechanism and
will easily be accomplished with one hand.
A full height, roll -up door compartment behind the rear wheels will be provided. The interior
dimensions of this compartment will be 31.50" wide x 58.25" high x 25.88" deep in the lower
26.00" of the compartment and 12.00" deep in the remaining upper portion. The height of
the compartment will be measured from compartment floor to the bottom edge of the door
roll. The depth of the compartment will be calculated with the compartment door closed.
The compartment interior will be fully open from the compartment ceiling to the compartment
floor and designed so that no permanent dividers are required between the upper and lower
sections. The clear door opening of this compartment, will be 28.75" wide x 58.25" high.
Closing of the door will not require releasing, unlocking, or unlatching any mechanism and
will easily be accomplished with one hand.
COMPARTMENTATION, PASSENGER' SIDE
A full height, vertically hinged, single door compartment ahead of the rear wheels will be
provided. The interior dimensions of this compartment will be 27.50" wide x 67.63" high x
12.00" deep. The depth of the compartment will be calculated with the compartment door
closed. The compartment interior will be fully open from the compartment ceiling to the
compartment floor and designed so that no permanent dividers are required between the
upper and lower section. The clear door opening of this compartment will be 23.00" wide x
63.00" high.
A positive door holder will be furnished with this compartment.
A horizontally hinged, single lift -up door compartment over the rear wheels will be provided.
The interior dimensions of this compartment will be 66.50" wide x 32.88" high x 12.00" deep.
The depth of the compartment will be calculated with the compartment door closed. The
clear door opening of this compartment will be 59.50" wide x 28.25" high.
The lift -up door will be furnished with two (2) gas - charged cylinders to assist in the opening
of the door and to maintain the door in an open position. There will be a field adjustable,
three - position bracket mounted on the vertical side door opening that will allow the door to
be held open at 870, 90 °, or 93 °. Closing of the door will not require releasing, unlocking, or
unlatching any mechanism.
A vertically hinged, double door compartment behind the rear wheels will be provided. The
interior dimensions of this compartment will be 47.50" wide x 67.63" high x 12.00" deep. A
Page 57 of 96
section of this compartment will be 25.88" deep x 26.00" height directly behind the rear
wheels. The depth of the compartment will be calculated with the compartment door closed.
The compartment interior will be fully open from the compartment ceiling to the compartment
floor and designed so that no permanent dividers are required between the upper and lower
sections. The clear door opening of this compartment will be 46.00" wide x 63.00" high.
A positive door holder will be furnished with this compartment.
ROLL -UP DOOR, SIDE COMPARTMENTS
All roll -up door(s) will be of an anodized satin finish, double faced, aluminum construction
and manufactured by A&A Manufacturing (Gortite).
Lath sections will be an interlocking rib design and will be individually replaceable without
complete disassembly of door.
Between each slat at the pivoting joint will be a PVC inner seal to prevent metal to metal
contact and prevent dirt or moisture from entering the compartments. Seals will allow door to
operate in extreme temperatures ranging from plus 180 to minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit.
Side, top and bottom seals will be provided to resist ingress of dirt and weather and be
made of Santoprene.
All hinges, barrel clips and end pieces will be nylon 66. All nylon components will withstand
temperatures from plus 300 to minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit. Hardened plastic will not be
acceptable.
A polished stainless steel lift bar will be provided for opening door. Lift bar will be located at
the bottom of door and have latches on the outer extrusion of the doors frame. A ledge will
be supplied over lift bar for additional area to aid in closing the door.
Door(s) will be constructed from an aluminum box section. The exterior surface of each slat
will be flat. The interior surfaces will be concave to provide strength and prevent loose
equipment from jamming the door from inside.
To conserve space in the compartment(s), the spring roller assembly will not exceed 3.00" in
diameter. A roll -up door that retracts below the compartment ceiling (garage door style) will
not acceptable.
The header for the roll -up door assembly will not exceed 4.00 ".
A heavy -duty magnetic switch will be used for control of "open compartment door" warning
lights.
All mechanical components of the door will be warranted to be free from defects in materials
and workmanship for the lifetime of the vehicle. All parts covered under this warranty will be
to the original owner.
Page 58 of 96
COMPARTMENTATION. REAR
A vertically hinged, double door compartment above the rear tailboard will be provided.
Interior dimensions of this compartment will be 40.00" wide x 40.63" high x 25.88" deep.
Depth of the compartment will be calculated with the compartment door closed.
A louvered, removable access panel will be furnished on the back wall of the compartment.
Rear compartment will be open into the rear side compartments.
Clear door opening of this compartment will be 34:50" wide x 36.00" high.
Each of the vertically hinged compartment doors will be provided with a positive door holder.
DOORS. REAR COMPARTMENT
All hinged compartment doors will be lap style with double panel construction and fabricated
of .09" 50521134 aluminum. Doors will be a minimum of 1.50" thick with a full interior panel.
To provide additional door strength, a "C" section reinforcement will be installed between the
outer and interior panels.
Doors will be provided with a closed cell rubber gasket around the surface that laps onto the
body. A second heavy -duty automotive rubber molding with a hollow core will be installed
on the door framing that seals onto the interior pan, to ensure a weather resisting
compartment.
All compartment doors will have polished stainless steel continuous hinge with a pin
diameter of .1875 ", that is bolted or screwed on with stainless steel fasteners. A strip of
dielectric isolation tape will be provided between the hinge and the doorjamb.
All door lock mechanisms will be fully enclosed within the door panels to prevent fouling of
the lock in the event equipment inside shifts into the lock area.
Doors will be latched with recessed, polished stainless steel "D" ring handles and Eberhard
106 locks.
To prevent corrosion caused by dissimilar metals, compartment door handles will not be
attached to outer door panel with screws. A rubber gasket will be provided between the "D"
ring handle and the door.
PULL -OUT TRAY
There will be three (3) slide -out trays with 2.00" sides and a capacity of 500 pounds
provided. Capacity rating will be in the extended position.
Slides will be General Device ball bearing type for ease of operation and years of
dependable service.
Automatic locks will be provided for both the "in" and "out" positions. The trip mechanism for
it will be located at the front of the tray for ease of use with a gloved hand.
Page 59 of.96
Tray location will be two on the driver's side fore and aft of rear wheels and one in the right
rear compartment.
Heavy -duty steel angle iron assembly will support the body under the compartment floor. It
will be attached to the chassis frame for load transfer and to reduce stress on body.
Pac Trac equipment mounting system will be installed on the walls of one (1)
compartment(s), driver's side over wheel compartment.
PARTITION, TRANSVERSE REAR COMPARTMENT
Two (2) partitions will be bolted in place to separate driver and passenger side rear
compartments from the rear tailboard compartment.
ADJUSTABLE SHELVES
There will be seven (7) shelves, with a minimum capacity of 215 pounds provided. The shelf
construction will consist of .125" pan - shaped aluminum with 2.00" sides. Each shelf will be
infinitely adjustable by means of a threaded fastener, which slides in a track.
The location will be two in D3, one in D2, one in D1, one P2,1`1 and R1.
MOUNTING TRACKS
There will be six (6) sets of tracks for mounting shelf(s) in all compartments. These tracks
will be installed vertically to support the adjustable shelf(s).
RUB RAIL
Bottom edge of the side compartments will be trimmed with a bright aluminum extruded rub
rail,
Trim will be 2.12" high with 1.38" flanges turned outward for rigidity
The rub rails will not be an integral part of the body construction, which allows replacement
in the event of damage.
BODY FENDER CROWNS
Stainless steel fender crowns will be provided around the rear wheel openings.
A rubber welting will be installed between the body and the crown to seal the seam and
restrict moisture from entering.
A dielectric barrier will be provided between the fender crown fasteners (screws) and the
fender sheet metal to prevent corrosion.
HARD SUCTION HOSE
Hard suction hose will not be required.
Page 60 or 96
HANDRAILS
The handrails will be 1.25" diameter anodized aluminum extrusion, with a ribbed design, to
provide a positive gripping surface.
Chrome plated end stanchions will support the handrail. Plastic gaskets will be used
between end stanchions and any painted surfaces.
Drain holes will be provided in the bottom of all vertically mounted handrails.
- Four (4) handrails will be provided, two above each side pump panel.
- One (1) vertical handrail will be provided on the driver's body, on the front bulkhead door
frame.
- One (1) vertical handrail, not less than 29.00" long, will be located on each rear
beavertail.
- One (1) full width horizontal handrail will be provided below the hose bed at the rear
of the apparatus.
AIR BOTTLE STORAGE (Single bottle)
A total of four (4) air bottle compartments will be provided and located fore and aft each rear
wheel. The air bottle compartment will be in the form of a round tube, 7.63" diameter, and
will be of adequate depth to accommodate different size air bottles. The flooring will be
rubber lined and have a drain hole. A stainless steel door with a chrome - plated latch will be
provided to contain the air bottle. A dielectric barrier will be provided between the door
hinge, hinge fasteners and the body sheet metal.
EXTENSION LADDER
There will be a 24', two (2) section, aluminum, Duo- Safety, Series 900 -A extension ladder
provided.
ROOFLADDER
There will be a 14' aluminum, Duo - Safety, Series 775-A roof ladder provided.
LADDER STORAGE
The ladders will be stored between the water tank and the passenger's side compartments.
The ladders will extend into the pump compartment just to the rear of the water pump
discharges.
The ladder storage area will be enclosed as practical by means of sheet metal to protect the
ladders from road dirt. The ladders that extend into the pump house will also be enclosed.
A black rubber boot will be provided to enclosed the ladders in the gap between the pump
house and the body.
Each ladder will be stored vertically in a separate stainless steel storage trough. Each
stainless steel trough will be lined with Dura -Surf nylon slides.
Page 61 of 96
A bright aluminum treadplate enclosure will be provided at the rear of the body to properly
contain the ladders This enclosure will extend to the rear of the side body compartments.
The enclosure will also include a vertically hinged smooth aluminum door with a "D" handle
latch to access the ladders.
FOLDING LADDER
One (1) 10' aluminum, Series 585 -A Duo - Safety folding ladder will be installed in the pike
pole /folding ladder compartment.
PIKE POLE, 8'
One (1) pike pole, Fire Hooks Unlimited, Model GBH -10, 10' long Gator Back Hook, will be
provided and located in the compartment.
PIKE POLE, 8'
One (1) pike pole, Fire Hooks Unlimited, Model GBH -6, V long Gator Back Hook, will be
provided and located in the pike pole compartment.
PIKE POLE 8 FT. PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT
NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, Section 5.8.3 requires one (1) 8 ft or longer pike pole mounted in
a bracket fastened to the apparatus.
The pike pole is not on the apparatus as manufactured. The fire department will provide
and mount the pike pole.
PIKE POLE, 6'
One (1) pike pole 6' long with a Nupla Featherlight fiberglass handle will be provided and
located in the compartment.
PIKE POLESIFOLDING LADDER COMPARTMENT
A compartment will be provided, recessed below the water tank tee at the rear of body, on
the driver's side.
The compartment will be equipped with two (2) pvc tubes for storage of two (2) straight
handled pike poles and (1) stainless steel trough for storage of (1) folding ladder.
A stainless steel door will be provided at the rear with a lift and turn latch.
REAR STEPS
Bright aluminum treadplate comer steps will be provided at the rear. All steps will provide
adequate surface for stepping.
Page 62 of 96
PUMP
Pump will be a Waterous CM, 1250 gpm, two (2) stage midship mounted centrifugal type.
Pump will be the class'W'type.
Pump will deliver the percentage of rated discharge at pressures indicated below:
- 100% of rated capacity at 150 psi net pump pressure.
- 70% of rated capacity at 200 psi net pump pressure.
- 50% of rated capacity at 250 psi net pump pressure.
Pump body will be close - grained gray iron, bronze fitted, and will be horizontally split in two
(2) sections for easy removal of the entire impeller shaft assembly (including wear rings).
Pump will be designed for complete servicing from the bottom of the truck, without disturbing
the pump setting or apparatus piping.
Pump case halves will be bolted together on a single horizontal face to minimize a chance of
leakage and facilitate ease of reassembly. No end flanges will be used.
Discharge manifold of the pump will be cast as an integral part of the pump body assembly
and will provide a minimum of three (3) 3.50" openings for flexibility in providing various
discharge outlets for maximum efficiency.
The three (3) 3.50" openings will be located as follows: one (1) outlet to.the right of the
pump, one (1) outlet to the left of the pump, and one (1) outlet directly on top of the
discharge manifold.
Impeller shaft will be stainless steel, accurately ground to size. It will be supported at each
end by sealed, anti- friction ball bearings for rigid precise support.
Bearings will be protected from water and sediment by suitable stuffing boxes, flinger rings,
and oil seals. No special or sleeve type bearings will be used.
Pump will be equipped with a self- adjusting, maintenance-free, mechanical shaft seal.
The mechanical seal will consist of a flat, highly polished, spring fed carbon ring that rotates
with the impeller shaft. The carbon ring will press against a highly polished stainless steel
stationary ring that is sealed within the pump body.
In addition, a throttling ring will be pressed into the steel chamber cover, providing a very
small clearance around the rotating shaft in the event of a mechanical seal failure. The
pump performance will not deteriorate, nor will the pump lose prime, while drafting if the seal
fails during pump operation.
Wear rings will be bronze and easily replaceable to restore original pump efficiency and
eliminate the need to replace the entire pump casing due to wear.
Page 63 of 96
PUMP TRANSMISSION
The pump transmission will be made of a three (3) piece, aluminum, horizontally split casing.
Power transfer to pump will be through a high strength Morse HY-VO silent drive chain. By
the use of a chain rather than gears, 50% of the sprocket will be accepting or transmitting
torque, compared to two (2) or three (3) teeth doing all the work.
Drive shafts will be 2.35" diameter hardened and ground alloy steel and supported by ball
bearings. The case will be designed to eliminate the need for water cooling.
AIR PUMP SHIFT
Pump shift engagement will be made by a two (2) position sliding collar, actuated
pneumatically (by air pressure), with a three (3) position air control switch located in the cab.
A manual back -up shift control will also be located on the driver's side pump panel.
Two (2) indicator lights will be provided adjacent to the pump shift inside the cab. One (1)
green light will indicate the pump shift has been completed and be labeled "pump engaged ".
The second green light will indicate when the pump has been engaged, and that the chassis
transmission is in pump gear. This indicator light will be labeled "OK to pump ".
Another green indicator light will be installed adjacent to the hand throttle on the pump panel
and indicate either the pump is engaged and the road transmission is in pump gear, or the
road transmission is in neutral and the pump is not engaged. This indicator light will be
labeled "blaming: Do not open throttle unless light is on ".
The pump shift control in the cab will be illuminated to meet NFPA requirements.
TRANSMISSION LOCK -UP
The direct gear transmission lock -up for the fire pump operation will engage automatically
when the pump shift control, in the cab, is activated.
AUXILIARY COOLING SYSTEM
A supplementary heat exchange cooling system will be provided to allow the use of water
from the discharge side of the pump for cooling the engine water. The heat exchanger will
be cylindrical type and will be a separate unit. The heat exchanger will be installed in the
pump or engine compartment with the control located on the pump operator's control panel.
Exchanger will be plumbed to the master drain valve.
TRANSFER VALVE
Transfer valve design will be of the latest ball type, of all bronze construction and .
incorporate a hydraulically balanced seal assembly, minimizing leakage around the ball and
assuring maximum pump efficiency.
Transfer valve will operate smoothly and without sticking, even when exposed to sandy or
dirty water.
Transfer valve will be operated electrically with a control switch mounted on the pump
operator's control panel, with two (2) indicator lights which will indicate "pressure" or
Page 64 of 96
"volume ".
Transfer valve will have the abil@ to change from series (pressure) operation to parallel
(volume) operation without reduci g the operating speed of the engine regardless of the
operating pressure of the pump, th s maintaining an effective fire stream at the nozzle at all
times.
A manual override will be provid
override system operates with ft
(driver's) side pump panel.
INTAKE RELIEF VALVE
An Elkhart relief valve will be instal
Relief valve will have a. working rar
Outlet will terminate below the I
adapter and will have a "do not ca{
Control will be located behind an a
RELIEF VALVE
A Waterous adjustable relief valve,
in the event of electrical malfunction. The manual
use of a removable hand crank located at the left
on the suction side of the pump preset at 125 psig.
of 75 psig to 250 psig.
imerails with a 2.50" National Standard hose thread
warning tag.
door at the right (passenger's) side pump panel.
designed for fire service, will be provided.
Valve will be positive, quick acting, and include an instantaneous ontoff control. When in the
off position, the relief valve will functionally be removed from the system. When turned back
to the on position, the relief valve will again monitor and maintain the previous pressure
setting.
Control for adjusting pressure will a elliptical shaped for positive grip.
An easily removable pilot valve st ainer will be provided and be accessible from the pump
operator's panel.
Two (2) indicator lights will be furn�shed, showing the position of the relief valve (amber for
open and green for closed).
PRIMER
An electric pump priming system 'll be furnished with the apparatus. It will consist of a
rotary vane priming pump, driven b a 12 volt electric motor.
All rotating parts of the pump will
or laminated phenolic.
Pump cylinder will be made of
corrosion resistance and long life.
made of corrosion resistant aluminum, stainless steel,
alloy, hard anodized and Teflon coated, for
Page 65 of 96
The primer will be built by the manufacturer of the fire pump.
A control located at the pump control panel will operate the primer.
When dry, the pump system will be capable of taking suction through 20 feet of hard suction
hose and discharging water in not more than the time allowed by current NFPA 1901
standard. Also, rated capacity of the pump will be achieved at the lift stated in current NFPA
1901 standard table.
THERMAL RELIEF VALVE
A Waterous Overheat Protection Manager (OPM) will be mounted on the water pump. The
OPM will consist of a valve that opens and discharges to the ground when the water in the
pump reaches 140 F and a warning light that is triggered when the water in the pump
reaches 180 F. The warning light will act as an additional protection device if the
temperature in the pump keeps rising after the valve opens. The warning light with a test
switch will be mounted on the pump operator panel.
PUMP WARRANTY
A Waterous five (5) year warranty will be provided for the pump.
PUMP MANUALS
Two (2) pump manuals from the pump manufacturer will be furnished in compact disc format
with the apparatus. The manuals will cover pump operation, maintenance, and parts.
PLUMBING
All inlet and outlet plumbing, 3.00" and smaller, will be plumbed with either stainless steel
pipe or synthetic rubber hose reinforced with high - tensile polyester braid. If hose is used, it
must have a minimum burst rating of 1,000 psi and be equipped with high pressure
couplings. Larger inlets and outlets will be threaded or welded black iron pipe. Small
diameter secondary plumbing such as drain lines will be stainless steel, brass or hose.
Where vibration or chassis flexing may damage or loosen piping or where a coupling is
required for servicing, the piping will be equipped with victaulic or rubber couplings.
All lines to drain through either a master drain valve or will be equipped with individual drain
valves. All individual drain lines for discharges will be extended with a hose to drain below
the chassis frame.
All water carrying gauge lines will be of flexible polypropylene tubing.
PUMP PLUMBING WARRANTY
Except as provided below, and provided the vehicle will have been placed in service
within sixty (60) days after delivery to the original purchaser as established by our
original invoice, for a period ending on the first to occur of the expiration of ten years
or 100,000 miles of vehicle use after delivery to the original purchaser, Pierce
'Manufacturing Inc. (?'Pierce ") warrants to the user that the stainless steel piping that is
3.00" and smaller in diameter in its first Fire and Rescue Apparatus vehicles will be
Page 66 of 96
free of structural failures caused by defective design, workmanship, or perforation
caused by corrosion. This limited warranty will apply only if the vehicle is properly
maintained and used in service which is normal to the particular vehicle. Normal
service means service which does not subject the vehicle to stresses or impacts
greater than normally result from the careful use of the vehicle or chassis. If the buyer
discovers a defect or nonconformity it must notify Pierce in writing within thirty (30)
days after the date of discovery. This limited warranty is not transferable by the first
user.
Pierce's obligation under this warranty is limited to repairing or replacing without
charge, as Pierce may elect, the stainless steel piping or components which Pierce
determines to have failed due to defective design, workmanship, or perforation caused
by corrosion.
A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal
MAIN PUMP INLETS
A 6.00" pump manifold inlet will be provided on the passenger's side of the vehicle only.
The suction inlet will include a removable die cast zinc screen that is designed to provide
cathodic protection for the pump, thus reducing corrosion in the pump.
The main pump inlets will have National Standard Threads with a long handle chrome cap.
The cap will be the Pierce VLH, which incorporates a Pierce exclusive thread design to
automatically relieve stored pressure in the line when disconnected.
VALVES
All ball valves will be Akron Brass. The Akron valves will be the 8000 series heavy -duty
style with a stainless steel ball and a simple two -seat design. No lubrication or regular
maintenance is required on the valve.
Valves will have a ten (10) year warranty.
INLET (Left side)
On the left side pump panel will be one (1) 2.50" auxiliary suction, terminating in 2.50"
National Standard Hose Thread. The auxiliary suction will be provided with a strainer,
chrome swivel and plug.
INLET (Right side)
On the right side pump panel will be one (1) 2.50" auxiliary suction, terminating in 2.50"
National Standard Hose Thread. The auxiliary suction will be provided with a strainer,
chrome swivel and plug.
Inlet valve location will be outside the pump panel.
ANODE. INLET
A pair of sacrificial zinc anodes will be provided in the water pump inlets to protect the pump
Page 67 of 96
from corrosion.
INLET CONTROL
Control for the side auxiliary inlet(s) will be located at the inlet valve.
INLET (Front)
A 4.00" Inlet front inlet with die cast zinc screens will be provided using 5.00" welded black
iron pipe and a 5.00" butterfly valve. Only radiused elbows will be used in the piping, no
mitered joints.
Drains are furnished in all the low points of piping and have 314" ball valve with a handwheel
control.
A bleeder valve will be located at the threaded connection.
The front suction will be located on the passenger side of the bumper extension.
CONTROL. FRONT INLET
The front suction will be gated with an electric operated control located at the pump
operators panel. The controller will be an Akron Navigator Model 9313, which will allow the
valve to be gated for ease of operation. The controller will have individual red, yellow and
green lights to show the valve position.
A manual override will be provided on the valve and located behind a stainless steel access
door, located on the passenger side pump panel.
A manual override switch will be provided next to the stainless steel access door. The
switch will cut off power to the valve, making turning the manual override on the valve much
easier.
Manual override will be in an easily accessible location.
INTAKE RELIEF VALVE
An intake relief valve, preset at 125 psig, will be installed on the inlet side of the
valve.
Relief valve will have a working range of 75 psig to 250 psig.
Outlet will terminate below the framerails.
The front inlet will have National Standard hose threads with a long handle chrome plated
cap.
The cap wilt be the Pierce VLH, which incorporates a Pierce exlusive thread design to
automatically relieve stored pressure in the line when disconnected.
The front suction will have a 4.00" swivel with National Standard hose threads and a long
Page 68 of 96
handle chromed plated cap.
The swivel will have a smooth surface chrome finish
INLET BLEEDER VALVE
A .75" bleeder valve will be provided for each side gated inlet. The valves will be located
behind the panel with a swing style handle control extended to the outside of the panel. The
handles will be chrome plated and provide a visual indication of valve position. The swing
handle will provide an ergonomic position for operating the valve without twisting the wrist
and provides excellent leverage. The water discharged by the bleeders will be routed below
the chassis frame rails.
TANK TO PUMP
The booster tank will be connected to the intake side of the pump with heavy duty piping
and a quarter turn 3.00" full flow line valve with the control remotely located at the operator's
panel. Tank to pump line will run straight (no elbows) from the pump into the front face of
the water tank and angle down into the tank sump. A rubber coupling will be included in this
line to prevent damage from vibration or chassis flexing.
A check valve will be provided in the tank to pump supply line to prevent the possibility of
"back filling" the water tank.
TANK REFILL
A 1.50" combination tank refill and pump re- circulation line will be provided, using a quarter -
turn full flow ball valve controlled from the pump operator's panel.
DISCHARGE OUTLETS (Left Side)
There will be two (2) discharge outlets with a 2.50" valve on the left side of the apparatus,
terminating with a male 2.50" National Standard hose thread adapter.
DISCHARGE OUTLETS (Right Side)
There will be two (2) discharge outlets with a 2.50" valve on the right side of the apparatus,
terminating with a male 2.50" National Standard hose thread adapter.
DISCHARGE CAPS
Chrome plated, rocker lug, caps with chains will be furnished for all side discharge outlets.
The caps will be the Pierce VLH, which incorporates a Pierce exclusive thread design to
automatically relieve stored pressure in the line when disconnected.
OUTLET BLEEDERS
A .75" bleeder valve will be provided for each outlet 1.50" or larger. Automatic drain valves
are acceptable with some outlets if deemed appropriate with the application.
The valves will be located behind the panel with a swing style handle control extended to the
outside of the side pump panel. The handles will be chrome plated and provide a visual
indication of valve position. The swing handle will provide an ergonomic position for
Page 69 of 96
operating the valve without twisting the wrist and provides excellent leverage. Bleeders will
be located at the bottom of the pump panel. They will be properly labeled identifying the
discharge they are plumbed in to. The water discharged by the bleeders will be routed
below the chassis frame rails.
ELBOWS, LEFT SIDE OUTLETS
The 2.50" discharge outlets, located on the left side pump panel, will be furnished with a
2.50 "(F) National Standard hose thread x 2.50 "(M) National Standard hose thread, chrome
plated, 45 degree elbow.
The elbow will be the Pierce VLH, which incorporates a Pierce exclusive thread design to
automatically relieve stored pressure in the line when disconnected.
ELBOWS. RIGHT SIDE OUTLETS
The 2.50" discharge outlets, located on the right side pump panel, will be furnished with a
2.50 "(F) National Standard hose thread x 2.50 "(M) National Standard hose thread, chrome.
plated, 45 degree elbow.
The elbow will be the Pierce VLH, which incorporates a Pierce exclusive thread design to
automatically relieve stored pressure in the line when disconnected.
There will be two (2) adapters with 2.50" FNST x 1.50" MNST threads and a 1.50" chrome
plated cap installed on one each side.
DISCHARGE DRAIN VALVES
Provide a manual style drain in all low plumbing points that would normally have automatic
drains.
DISCHARGE OUTLET CONTROLS
The discharge outlets will incorporate a quarter -turn ball valve with the control located at the
pump operator's panel. The valve operating mechanism will indicate the position of the
valve.
If a handwheel control valve is used, the control will be a minimum of a 3.9" diameter
chrome plated handwheel with a dial position indicator built in to the center of the
handwheel.
DELUGE RISER
A 3.00" deluge riser will be installed above the pump in such a manner that a monitor can be
mounted and used effectively. Piping will be rigidly braced and installed securely so no
movement develops when the line is charged. The riser will be gated and controlled at the
pump operator's panel with a handwheel control.
TELESCOPIC PIPING
The deluge riser piping will include a 18.00" Task Force Model XG18 Extend -A-Gun
extension.
Page 70 of 96
This extension will be telescopic to allow the deluge gun to be raised 18.00" increasing the
range of operation.
A position sensor will be provided on the telescopic piping that will activate the "do not move
vehicle" light inside the cab when the monitor is in the raised position.
MONITOR
An Akron Model 3423 monitor will be properly installed on the deluge riser. This monitor will
include both a fixed mounting base and a portable base with two (2) clappered 2.5" inlets.
The monitor will be unpainted.
NOZZLE. DELUGE
Akron model #2499 Quad Stacked pyrolite deluge tips will be provided.
The tip sizes will be 1.375 ", 1.50 ", 1.75 ", and 2.001'
.
This will include an Akron 3488 pyrolite stream shaper.
The deluge riser will have male National Pipe Threads for mounting the monitor.
CROSSLAY HOSE BEDS, 1.50"
Two (2) crosslays with 1.50" outlets will be provided. Each bed to be capable of carrying
250' of 1.75" single stack and will be plumbed with 2.00" i.d. pipe and gated with a 2.00"
quarter turn ball valve.
Outlets to be equipped with a 1.50" National Standard hose thread 90 degree swivel located
in the hose bed so that hose may be removed from either side of apparatus.
The crosslay controls will be at the pump operator's panel.
The center crosslay dividers will be fabricated of .25" aluminum and will provide adjustment
from side to side. The divider will be unpainted with a brushed finish. The remainder of the
crosslay bed will be painted job color.
Vertical scuffplates, constructed of stainless steel, will be provided at the front and rear ends
of the bed on each side of vehicle.
Crosslay bed flooring will consist of removable perforated brushed aluminum.
CROSSLAY HOSE BEDS, 2.50"
One (1) crosslay with 2.50" outlets will be provided. Each bed will be capable of
carrying 200' of 2.5" single stack and will be plumbed with 2.50" W. pipe and gated
with a 2.50" quarter turn ball valve.
The outlets will be equipped with a 2.50" National Standard hose thread 90 degree
swivel located in the hose bed so that hose may be removed from either side of
Page 71 of 96
apparatus.
The crosslay controls will be at the pump operator's panel
The center crosslay dividers will be fabricated of .25" aluminum and will provide
adjustment from side to side. The divider will be unpainted with a brushed finish. The
remainder of the crosslay bed will be painted job color.
Stainless steel vertical scuffplates will be provided at hose bed ends (each side of
vehicle). Bottom of hose bed ends (each side) will also be equipped with a stainless
steel scuffplate.
Crossley bed flooring will consist of removable perforated brushed aluminum.
CROSSLAY COVER
A hinged aluminum treadplate cover will be installed over the crosslay hose beds. It will
include a latch at each end of the cover to hold it securely in place, a chrome grab handle at
each end for opening and closing the cover and a foam rubber gasket where the cover
comes into contact to a painted surface.
CROSSLAY 8.00" LOWER THAN STANDARD
The crosslays will be lowered 8.00" from standard.
CROSSLAY COVER
A black vinyl cover with Velcro fasteners along each side and bottom will be provided over
the ends of the crosslay hose beds. A bar will be provided on the bottom to accommodate a
Velcro loop to positively hold the base.
FOAM CONCENTRATE PROPORTIONING SYSTEM
A Hypro FoamPro®, Model 2001, foam system will be provided as the means for the
proportioning of foam concentrate into the water stream. The FoamPro is an electronic, fully
automatic, variable speed, direct injection, discharge side foam proportioning system..
This system will be capable of handling Class "A" foam concentrates, as well as most
Class 'B" foam concentrates.
The foam system will be plumbed to three (3) discharges. The discharges capable of
dispensing foam will be three crosslays.
The foam proportioning system operation will be based on a direct measurement of water
flows, and remain consistent within the specified flow and pressure. The system will be
equipped with a digital electronic control display on the pump panel. Incorporated within the
control display will be a microprocessor, which receives input from the system flow meter
while also monitoring the foam concentrate pump output. The microprocessor will compare
the values of the water flow versus the foam flow, to ensure the proportion rate is accurate.
One (1) paddle wheel will be installed to monitor all foam discharges
Page 72 of 96
Push button control for the form proportioning rate will allow a ratio from 0.1% to 3.096 in
0.1% increments.
The rated capacity of this system will be 85 gpm at 3.0% and 500 gpm at 0.5 %.
A 2.5 gpm @150 psi, positive displacement foam pump will be powered by a 1/2 hp 12 vdc
electric motor.
One (1) check valve will be installed in the plumbing to prevent foam from contaminating the
water pump. The check valve will be approved by the foam system manufacturer.
FOAM TANK
The foam tank will be an integral portion of the polypropylene water tank. The cell will have
a capacity of 20 gallons of foam with the intended use of Class "A" foam. The brand of foam
stored in this tank will be TBD. The foam cell will not reduce the capacity of the water tank.
The foam cell will have a screen in the fill dome and a breather in the lid.
FOAM TANK DRAIN
The foam tank drain will be a 1.00" drain valve located inside the pump compartment
accessible through a door on the passenger's side pump panel.
PUMP COMPARTMENT
The pump compartment will be separate from the hose body and compartments so that
each may flex independently of the other. It will be a fabricated assembly of steel tubing,
angles and channels which supports both the fire pump and the side running boards.
The pump compartment will be mounted on the chassis frame rails with rubber biscuits in a
four point pattern to allow for chassis frame twist.
Pump compartment, pump, plumbing and gauge panels will be removable from the chassis
in a single assembly.
PUMP CONTROL PANELS (Side Control)
All pump controls and gauges will be located at the left (driver's) side of the apparatus and
properly marked.
The pump panel on the right (passenger's) side is removable with lift and turn type
fasteners. The left (driver's) side is fastened with screws.
The control panels will be 45.00" wide.
The gauge and control panels will be two (2) separate panels for ease of maintenance.
Polished stainless steel trim collars will be installed around all inlets and outlets.
All push /pull valve controls will have 114 turn locking control rods with polished chrome
Page 73 of 96
plated zinc tee handles. Guides for the push /pull control rods will be chrome plated zinc
castings securely mounted to the pump panel. Push/pull valve controls will be capable of
locking in any position. The control rods will pull straight out of the panel and will be
equipped with universal joints to eliminate binding.
The identification tag for each valve control will be recessed in the face of the tee handle.
All discharge outlets will have color coded identification tags, with each discharge having its
own unique color. Color coding will include the labeling of the outlet and the drain for each
corresponding discharge.
All line pressure gauges will be mounted in individual chrome plated castings with the
identification tag recessed in the casting below the gauge. All remaining identification tags
will be mounted on the pump panel in chrome plated bezels. Mounting of the castings and
identification bezels will be done with a threaded peg cast on the back side of the bezel or
screws.
PUMP PANEL CONFIGURATION
The pump panel configuration will be neat and orderly.
PUMP AND GAUGE PANEL
The pump and gauge panels will be constructed of stainless steel with a brushed finish. A
polished aluminum trim molding will be provided on both sides of the pump panel.
PUMP PANEL GAUGES AND CONTROLS
The following will be provided on the pump and gauge panels in a neat and orderly fashion:
- Engine Oil Pressure Gauge: With visual and audible warning
- Engine Water Temperature Gauge: With visual and audible warning
- Tachometer. Electric
- Master Pump Drain Control
- Voltmeter
- Engine Throttle
- Check Transmission Warning Indicator Light
- Stop Engine Warning Indicator Light
- Check Engine Warning Indicator Light.
- Pump Hourmeter
- Fuel Gauge
Page 74 of 96
AIR HORN SWITCH
An air hom control switch will be provided at the pump operators control panel. This switch
will be red and properly labeled and put within easy reach of the operator in the electrical
switch panel.
RADIO SPEAKER
A University model radio speaker will be provided and mounted at the pump panel. Wiring
will not be necessary.
GANGES. VACUUM and PRESSURE
The pump vacuum and pressure gauges will be silicone filled and manufactured by Class 1,
Inc.
The gauges will be a minimum of 4.50" in diameter and will have white faces with black
lettering, with a pressure range of 30.00 " -0 -800#.
The pump pressure and vacuum gauges will be installed adjacent to each other at the pump
operators control panel.
Test port connections will be provided at the pump operator's panel. One will be connected
to the intake side of the pump, and the other to the discharge manifold of the pump. They
will have 0.25 in. standard pipe thread connections and polished stainless steel plugs. They
will be marked with a label.
PRESSURE GAUGES
The individual "line" pressure gauges for the discharges will be interlube filled and
manufactured by Class 1.
The gauges will be a minimum of 3.50" in diameter and will have white faces with black
lettering.
Gauges will be compound type with a vacuum /pressure range of 30.00" -0 -800#.
The individual pressure gauge will be installed as dose to the outlet control as practical.
WATER LEVEL GAUGE
An electric water level gauge will be provided on the operators panel that registers water
level by means of five (5) brightly colored incandescent lights. The water level indicators will
be as follows:
- Full = Green
- 3/4 = Yellow
- 1/2 = Yellow
- 1/4 = Yellow
- Refill = Red
To further alert the pump operator, the refill light will start flashing when the water level drops
Page 75 of 96
below the 1/4 mark.
The level measurement will be based on the sensing of the electrical conductivity of the
water in the tank.
The display will be constructed of a solid plastic material to reduce vibrations that can cause
broken wires and loose electronic components. The encapsulated design will provide
complete protection from water and environmental elements.
The gauge light bulbs will be rated for 15,000 hours. The bulbs will be easily replaced by
unscrewing the colored lens cover.
The cover plate panel bezel will be of a chrome plated die cast design. The overlay graphics
will be on the inside surface of the composite overlay to provide protection from wear. The
composite overlay will be scratch resistant and immune to cleaning solvents and UV light
weathering.
The water level probe will be constructed of chemical resistant, PVC plastic with a 3.00"
diameter anodized flange. The internal wire connectors and electronics will be fully
encapsulated to protect against water, dirt, and vibration. The probe system will not contain
moving parts or mechanical switching.
WATER LEVEL GAUGE, ADDITIONAL
An Ernst sight tube water level indicator will be mounted on the driver side pump panel.
FOAM LEVEL GAUGE
An electronic foam level gauge will be provided on the operator's panel that registers foam
level by means of five colored LED lights. The lights will be durable, ultra- bright five LED
design viewable through 180 degrees. The foam level indicators will be as follows:
-100% = Green
- 75% = Yellow
- 50% = Yellow
- 250/0 = Yellow
- Refill = Red
The light will flash when the level drops below the given level indicator to provide an eighth
of a tank indication. To further alert the pump operator, the lights will flash sequentially
when the foam tank is empty.
The level measurement will be based on the sensing of head pressure of the fluid in the
tank.
The display will be constructed of a solid plastic material with a chrome plated die cast bezel
to reduce vibrations that can cause broken wires and loose electronic components. The
encapsulated design will provide complete protection from foam and environmental
elements. An industrial pressure transducer will be mounted to the outside of the tank. The
Page 76 of 96
display will be able to be calibrated in the field and will measure head pressure to accurately
show the tank level.
LIGHT SHIELD
Illumination will be provided by On Scene Solutions, model Night Stick, LED lights for
controls, switches, essential instructions, gauges, and instruments necessary for the
operation of the apparatus and the equipment provided on it. External illumination will be a
minimum of five (5) foot - candles on the face of the device. Internal illumination will be a
minimum of four (4) footlamberts.
Lights will be installed under a stainless steel shield. A light will come on above the pump
panel light switch when the parking brake is set. This is to afford the operator some
illumination when first approaching the control panel. A pump engaged indicator will come
on at the operator's panel when the pump is shifted into gear from inside the cab. The
remaining lights to be actuated from a switch located on the pump panel.
ADDITIONAL LIGHT SHIELD
An additional On Scene Solutions, model Night Stick, LED light shield will be provided
above passenger's side pump panel. The pump panel will be illuminated by Night Stick,
LED lights installed under the light shield.
The lights will be operated from a switch on the pump panel.
ELECTRICAL HARNESSING INSTALLATION
All 12 -volt wiring and harnessing installed by the apparatus manufacturer will conform to
specification PM -QA W -101: Pierce manufacturing Wiring Harness Specification.
To ensure rugged dependability, all wiring harnesses installed by the apparatus
manufacturer will conform to the following specifications:
SAE J1128 - Low tension primary cable
SAE J1292 - Automobile, truck, truck - tractor, trailer and motor coach wiring
SAE J163 - Low tension wiring and cable terminals and splice clips
SAE J2202 - Heavy duty wiring systems for on- highway trucks
NFPA 1901 - Standard for automotive fire apparatus
FMVSS 302 - Flammability of interior materials for passenger cars, multipurpose passenger
vehicles, trucks and buses
SAE J1939 - Serial communications protocol
SAE J2030 - Heavy -duty electrical connector performance standard
SAE J2223 - Connections for on board vehicle electrical wiring harnesses
NEC - National Electrical Code
SAE J561 - Electrical terminals - Eyelet and spade type
SAE J928 - Electrical terminals - Pin and receptacle type A
Wiring will be run in loom or conduit where exposed, and have grommets or other edge
protection where wires pass through metal. Wiring will be color, function and number coded.
Wire colors will be integral to each wire insulator and run the entire length of each wire.
Page 77 of 96
Harnessing containing multiple wires and uses a single wire color for all wires will not be
allowed. Function and number codes will be continuously imprinted on all wiring harness
conductors at 2.00" intervals. All wiring installed between the cab and into doors will be
protected by an expandable rubber boot to protect the wiring. Exterior exposed wire
connectors will be positive locking, and environmentally sealed to withstand elements such
as temperature extremes, moisture and automotive fluids. Electrical wiring and equipment
will be installed utilizing the following guidelines:
(1) All wire ends not placed into connectors will be sealed with a heat shrink end cap.
Wires without a terminating connector or sealed end cap will not be allowed.
(2) All holes made in the roof will be caulked with silicon (no exception). Large fender
washers, liberally caulked, will be used when fastening equipment to the underside of
the cab roof.
(3) Any electrical component that is installed in an exposed area will be mounted in a
manner that will not allow moisture to accumulate in it. Exposed area will be defined as
any location outside of the cab or body.
(4) For low cost of ownership, electrical components designed to be removed for
maintenance will be quickly accessible. For ease of use, a coil of wire will be provided
behind the appliance to allow them to be pulled away from the mounting area for
inspection and service work.
(5) Corrosion preventative compound will be applied to non- waterproof electrical
connectors located outside of the cab or body. All non - waterproof connections will
require this compound in the plug to prevent corrosion and for easy separation of the
plug.
(6) Any lights containing non - waterproof sockets in a weather - exposed area will have
corrosion preventative compound added to the socket terminal area.
(7) All electrical terminals in exposed areas will have DOW 1890 protective Coating applied
completely over the metal portion of the terminal.
(8) Rubber coated metal clamps will be used to support wire harnessing and battery cables
routed along the chassis frame rails.
(9) Heat shields will be used to protect harnessing in areas where high temperatures exist.
Harnessing passing near the engine exhaust will be protected by a heat shield.
(110) All braided wire harnesses will have a permanent label attached for easy identification
of the harness part number and fabrication date.
01) All standard wiring entering or exiting the cab will be routed through sealed bulkhead
connectors to protect against water intrusion into the cab.
BATTERY CABLE INSTALLATION
All 12 -volt battery cables and battery cable harnessing installed by the apparatus
manufacturer will conform to the following requirements:
SAE J1127 - Battery Cable
SAE J561 - Electrical terminals, eyelets and spade type
SAE J562 - Nonmetallic loom
SAE J836A - Automotive metallurgical joining
SAE J1292 - Automotive truck, truck- tractor, trailer and motor coach wiring
NFPA 1901 - Standard for automotive fire apparatus
Page 78 of 96
Battery cables and battery cable harnessing will be installed utilizing the following guidelines:
(1) All battery cables and battery harnesses will have a permanent label attached for easy
identification of the harness part number and fabrication date.
(2) Splices will not be allowed on battery cables or battery cable harnesses.
(3) For ease of identification and simplified use, battery cables will be color coded. All
positive battery cables will be red in color or wrapped in red loom the entire length of the
cable. All negative battery cables will be black in color.
(4) For ease of identification, all positive battery cable isolated studs throughout the cab and
chassis will be red in color.
(5) For increased reliability and reduced maintenance, all electrical buss bars located on the
exterior of the apparatus will be coated to prevent corrosion.
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT INSTALLATION
All lighting used on the apparatus will be, at a minimum, a two (2) wire light grounded
through a wired connection to the battery system. Lights using an apparatus metal structure
for grounding will not be allowed.
An operational test will be conducted to ensure that any equipment that is permanently
attached to the electrical system is properly connected and in working order. The results of
the tests will be recorded and provided to the purchaser at time of delivery.
STEP LIGHTS
Four (4) Ri -Tar, Model M27HW2 Super LED, step lights will be provided. One (1) step light
will be provided on each side, on the front compartment face and two (2) step lights at the
rear to illuminate the tailboard.
These step lights will be actuated with the pump panel light switch.
All other steps on the apparatus will be illuminated per the current edition of NFPA 1901.
REAR FIIAVSS LIGHTING
The rear stop /tail and directional lighting will consist of the following:
Two (2) Whalen model 60ROOBRR red LED stopltail lights.
Two (2) Whelen, Model 60AOOTAR, amber LED populated arrow turn light.
These lights will be installed at the rear of the truck in a polished housing.
Four (4) red reflectors will be provided.
A Weldon, Model 23882 - 2600 -00, license plate bracket will be mounted on the driver's side
above the warning lights. A Weldon, Model 9186-23882 -30, step lamp will illuminate the
license plate.
Two (2) Whelen, Model: 6000OVCR, LED backup lights will be provided.
Page 79 of 96
REAR ID /MARKER DOT LIGHTING
The three (3) identification lights located at the rear wilt be installed per the following:
As close as practical to the vertical Centerline.
Centers spaced not less than six (6) inches or more than twelve (12) inches
apart.
Red in color.
All at the same height.
One (1) Truck Lae model 1505OR LED ID bar
The outside clearance lights located at the rear will be installed per the following:
To indicate the overall width of the vehicle.
At least one (1) each side of the vertical Centerline.
All at the same height.
As near the top as practical.
To be visible from the rear and the side.
Four (4) RI-Tar red Model M27 LED lights
Per FMVSS 108 and CMVSS 108 requirements.
LIGHTING BEZEL
Two (2) Whalen, model CAST4V, four (4) light aluminum housings will be provided for the
rear stop/tail, directional, scene lights and warning.
CORNERING /SCENE LIGHTS
There will be one (1) pair of Whelen 600 halogen lights with flanges and 15 degree forward
lens provided on the apparatus.
The lights will be provided one each side of bumper extension.
The halogen lights will be wired so they activate and cancel with the directional lights, and
include a delay, cancel with the 4 -way flashers and activate by a switch in the cab.
These lights will also activate with the other side scene light on the apparatus.
MAP LIGHT
One (1) map light with goose neck with a switch control on base of light will be installed
passenger's side adjacent to the "A" post. The light will be a Sunnex, Model 742 with a
20.00" long flexible neck that exits the top of the chassis mount.
LIGHT. INTERMEDIATE
There will be one (1) pair, of Truck -Lite, Model: 60115Y, amber, LED, turn signal, marker
lights furnished, one (1) each side, horizontally in the rear fender panel.
A stainless steel trim will be included with this installation.
"DO NOT MOVE APPARATUS" INDICATOR
A flashing red indicator light, located in the driving compartment, will be illuminated
Page 80 of 96
automatically per the current NFPA requirements. The light will be labeled "Do Not Move
Apparatus If Light Is On ".
The same circuit that activates the Do Not Move Apparatus indicator will activate a steady
tone alarm when the parking brake is released.
DO NOT MOVE TRUCK MESSAGES
Messages will be displayed on the gauge panel LCD located forward of the steering wheel
directly in front of the driver whenever the Do Not Move Truck light is active. The messages
will designate the item or items not in the stowed for vehicle travel position (parking brake
disengaged).
The following messages will be displayed (where applicable)
Do Not Move Truck
DS Cab Door Open (Driver Side Cab Door Open)
PS Cab Door Open (Passenger's Side Cab Door Open)
DS Crew Cab Door Open (Driver Side Crew Cab Door Open)
PS Crew Cab Door Open (Passenger's Side Crew Cab Door Open)
DS Body Door Open (Driver Side Body Door Open)
PS Body Door Open (Passenger's Side Body Door Open)
Rear Body Door Open.
DS Ladder Rack Down (Driver Side Ladder Rack Down)
PS Ladder Rack Down (Passenger Side Ladder Rack Down)
Deck Gun Not Stowed
Any other device that is opened, extended, or deployed that creates a hazard or is likely to
cause major damage to the apparatus if the apparatus is moved will be displayed as a
caution message after the parking brake is disengaged.
COMPARTMENT LIGHTING
There will be seven (7) compartments with On Scene Solutions LED compartment light
strips. The strips will be centered vertically along each side of the door framing. The
compartments with these strip lights will be located all compartments.
Opening the compartment door will automatically turn the compartment lighting on.
Page 81 0f96
PUMP COMPARTMENT LIGHT
A. pump compartment light will be provided
accessible through a door on the pump panel.
inside the right side pump enclosure and
A .125' weep hole will be provided in each light lens, preventing moisture retention.
PERIMETER SCENE LIGHTS, CAB
There will be a Truck -Lite, model 60, grommet mount weatherproof light provided for
each cab door. Lighting will be designed to provide illumination on areas under the
driver, officer, and crew cab riding area eats, which will be activated automatically
when the exit doors are opened and by the same means as the body perimeter lights.
The lighting will be capable of providing illumination at a minimum level of two (2) foot -
candles on ground areas within 30.00" of the edge of the apparatus in areas which
personnel climb in or out of the apparatus or descend from the apparatus to the ground
level.
PERIMETER SCENE LIGHTS, BODY
There will be a total of four (4) Truck -Lite, model 60, grommet mount, weatherproof lights
provided on the apparatus. Two (2) lights will be provided under the rear step area and two
(2) lights will be provided under the pump panel running boards. The lights will be spaced
one (1) each side of apparatus and have a clear lens. The perimeter scene lights will be
activated by a parking brake.
The lighting will be capable of providing illumination at a minimum level of two (2) foot -
candies on ground areas within 30.00" of the edge of the apparatus in areas designed for
personnel to climb onto the apparatus or descend from the apparatus to the ground level.
SIDE SCENE LIGHTS
one (1) pair of Whelan, Model 810CAOZR, 8 -32 degree surface mount halogen scene lights
with chrome trim ring will be provided one each side high between the front and rear doors.
The lights will be controlled by:
From the first switch feature, a control at the driver side switch panel and a contol at the
officer side switch panel
From the second switch feature, there is no control of this option
From the third switch feature, there is no control of this option
12 VOLT LIGHTING
two (2) lights, Havis - Shields, Magnafire 3000 Model: 31, 70 watt, 12VDC, floodlights with
switch, will be installed, two on the right side of the pump compartment.
A pull up pole, side mount will be installed for each light head.
These lights will be load managed when the parking brake is set.
These lights will not be connected to the Do Not Move Truck indicator.
Page 82 of 96
12 VOLT LIGHTING
There will be two (2) lights, Kwik -Raze model 631, 70W, non telescoping, 12V Magnafire
light will be provided mounted on the left high side compartments4.
These lights will be controlled from the following:
From the first switch feature, a control at the driver side switch panel.
From the second switch feature, there is no control of this option.
From the third switch feature, there is no control of this option.
These lights may be load managed when the parking brake is set.
DECK LIGHTS
Two (2) 6.00" Unity AG deck lights with swivel mount will be provided at the rear of the hose
bed, one (1) each side.
One (1) light will be furnished with a 160,000 candle power halogen spot bulb and the other
will be furnished with a 6,000 candle power halogen flood bulb.
CAB SPOTLIGHTS
Two (2) Unity Model 325 spotlights, one (1) each side at front of cab, will be provided. The
spotlights will be furnished with 160,000 candle power halogen bulbs.
HAND HELD LIGHT
There will be four (4) Streamlight LiteBox lights with an orange thermoplastic body provided.
The location will be in the cab.
AIR HORN SYSTEM
Two (2) Grover air horns will be provided and located, in the front bumper, recessed one
each side. The horn system will be piped to the air brake system wet tank utilizing .38"
tubing. A pressure protection valve will be installed in -line to prevent loss of air, in the air
brake system.
AIR HORN CONTROL
The air horn will be actuated by a chrome push button switch located on the officer side of
the engine tunnel and by a foot switch on the driver's side.
Siren head will be located on a swivel bracket mounted on the headliner so that it is
accessible to both the driver and officer. The swivel bracket will be capable of rotating a
minimum of 180 degrees.
SPEAKER
There will be one (1) speaker provided. Each speaker will be a Whelen, Model SA314A,
100 -watt, cast aluminum with natural finish. Each speaker will be pre -wired to the
instrument panel.
The speaker(s) will be recessed in the front bumper on the driver's side
Page 83 of 96
MECHANICAL SIREN, (Auxiliary)
A Federal Q28 siren will be furnished. A siren brake button will be installed on the switch
panel.
The mechanical siren will be recessed in the front bumper on the right side. The siren will
be property supported using the bumper framework.
SWITCHES, MECHANICAL SIREN
The mechanical siren will be actuated by one (1) foot switch located on the driver's side and
a push button switch on the officer's side of cab.
WARNING LIGHTS
A 72.00" Whelen Freedom model FN * *QLED lightbar will be mounted on the cab roof.
The lightbar will include the following:
Two (2) red flashing forward facing LED modules.
Two (2) clear flashing forward facing LED modules.
Two (2) red flashing front comer LED modules.
One (1) red flashing driver side facing LED module.
One (1) red flashing officer side facing LED module.
One (1) GTT model 795 LED Opticomn' with National standard.
All the lenses will be clear.
Two (2) switches located in the cab on the switch panel will control this lightbar.
One (1) switch for the warning lights.
One (1) switch for the traffic light controller.
The clear warning lights and the traffic light controller will be turned off when the parking
brake is set.
WARNING LIGHTS (CAB ROOF SIDES)
Two (2) 24" Whelen, Model: Freedom Mini LED lightbars will be mounted on the roof, one
(1) on each side, over the crew cab doors.
Each lightbar will include the following:
Two (2) red flashing corner LED modules.
Two (2) red flashing LED light.
These lightbars will be controlled by the roof light switch.
Each lightbar will be furnished with a Gear lens.
HEADLIGHT FLASHER
The high beam headlights will flash alternately between the left and right side, with a control
switch located on the cab instrument panel.
Page 84 of 96
The flashing will automatically cancel when the headlight switch is activated or when the
parking brake is set.
SIDE ZONE LOWER LIGHTING
Six (6) Whelen model 60 *02F *R flashing "Super" LED lights will be located at the following
positions:
Two (2) lights, one (1) each side on the front cab corner - red Super LED /red lens
each side.
Two (2) lights, behind the crew cab doors - red Super LED /rd lens each side.
Two (2) lights, N/A - red Super LED /red lens each side.
The lights will be controlled by a lighted switch on the cab instrument panel.
These lights will be installed N /A.
SIDE WARNING LIGHTS
one (1) pair of Whelen, Model 500FPLF *R, LED lights will be provided. The lights will be
located above the front wheels. The color of the lights will be red. These lights will be
provided in addition to the NFPA minimum.
These lights will be activated with the Side Zone Lower lights.
REAR ZONE LOWER LIGHTING
Two (2) Whelen model 60 *02F *R, LED, red Super LED /red lens lights will be located at the
rear of the apparatus required to meet or exceed the lower level optical warning and optical
power requirements of NFPA.
Each light will be mounted in a housing.
WARNING LIGHTS (Rear of Truck)
Two (2) Whelen, Model: RB6T "P, warning lights will be provided at the rear of the truck,
located one (1) on each side.
One (1) switch located in the cab on the switch panel will control these lights.
The color of the lights will be driver side dome amber and passenger side dome red.
The rear warning lights will be mounted on stainless steel brackets with all wiring totally
enclosed. These brackets will also support the clearance /marker lights.
TRAFFIC DIRECTING LIGHT
There will be one (1) Whelen model TAL85 46.81" long x 2.84" high x 2.24" deep,
amber LED traffic directing light installed at the rear of the apparatus.
The Whelen model TACTLDI control head will be included with this installation.
The auxillary warning mode will be activated with the control head only.
Page 85 of 96
This traffic directing light will be surface mounted over the rear door, at the rear of the
apparatus as high as practical.
The traffic directing light control head will be located within a heavy duty swivel
bracket centered between the driver and passenger.
This swivel bracket will enable the driver access as well as the passenger.
110 VOLT INTERIOR RECEPTACLE
Receptacle will be a NEMA 5 -15, 120 volt, 15 amp, three (3) wire duplex household type
connected to the shoreline.
There will be one (1) receptacle provided.
in the EMS cab compartment.
KUSSMAUL AUTO EJECT FOR SHORELINE
one (1) shoreline receptacle will be provided to operate the dedicated 120 -volt circuits on
the truck without the use of the generator.
The shoreline receptacle (s) will be provided with a NEMA 5 -20, 120 volt, 20 amp, straight
blade Kussmaul Super auto eject plug with a yellow weatherproof cover. The cover is
spring loaded to close, preventing water from entering when the shoreline is not connected.
The unit is completely sealed to prevent road dirt contamination.
A solenoid wired to the vehicle's starter is energized when the engine is started. This
instantaneously drives the plug from the receptacle.
An internal switch arrangement will be provided to disconnect the load prior to ejection to
eliminate arcing of the connector contacts.
The shoreline will be connected to battery charger.
A mating connector body will also be supplied with the loose equipment.
The shoreline receptacle will be located in the driver side lower step well of cab.
TRAINING
There will be two (2) days of training provided at the Fire Department for operation, use and
maintenance of the apparatus.
There will be one (1) day of training provided for service technicians at the Fire Department
for maintenance, trouble shooting and repair of the apparatus.
- 36" Hooligan tool
Page 86 of 96
- 51" Council Crowbar
- Firehooks 24" bolt cutters BC -24
- 48" Nupla Scoop Shovel steel
- 48" Nupla Round Point shovel
- One Council 81b. Fiberglas sledge hammer
- One 20' x 4" Snap Tile TPX 400 PSI yellow soft suction hose
- Two Red Head 146 -2 spanner and hydrant wrench sets.
Pike poles, ladders, handlights, and wheels chocs will be mounted by Pierce
LOOSE EQUIPMENT
The following equipment will be furnished with the completed unit-
- One (1) bag of chrome, stainless steel, or cadmium plated screws, nuts, bolts and
washers, as used in the construction of the unit.
NFPA REQUIRED LOOSE EQUIPMENT PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT
The following loose equipment as outlined in NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, section 5.8.2
and 5.8.3 will be provided by the fire department. All loose equipment will be installed
on the apparatus before placed in emergency service, unless the fire department
waives NFPA section 4.21.
- 800 It (60 m) of 2 %d' (65 mm) or larger fire hose.
- 400 ft (120 m) of 1'/" (38 mm), 1'/." (45 mm), or 2" (52 mm) fire hose.
- One (1) handline nozzle, 200 gpm (750 Umin) minimum.
- Two (2) handline nozzles, 95 gpm (360 Umin) minimum.
- One (1) playpipe with shutoff and 1" (25 mm), 1 1/8" (29 mm), and 1%:' (32 mm) tips.
- One (1) SCBA complying with NFPA 1981, Standard on Open - Circuit Self- Contained
Breathing Apparatus for Fire and Emergency Services, for each assigned seating
position, but not fewer than four (4), mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus or
stored in containers supplied by the SCBA manufacturer.
- One (1) spare SCBA cylinder for each SCBA carried, each mounted in a bracket
fastened to the apparatus or stored in a specially designed storage space(s).
- One (1) first aid kit.
- Four (4) combination spanner wrenches mounted in bracket(s) fastened to the
apparatus-
- Two (2) hydrant wrenches mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus.
Page 87 of 96
- Four (4) ladder belts meeting the require
Service Life Safety Rope and System Comps
- One (1) double female 2Y2' (65 mm) adapt4
a bracket fastened to the apparatus.
- One (1) double male 2'f" (65 mm) adapter
bracket fastened to the apparatus.
- One (1) rubber mallet, for use on suction
fastened to the apparatus.
- Two (2) salvage covers each a minimum se
of NFPA 1983, Standard on Fire
(if equipped with an aerial device).
National Hose threads, mounted in
National Hose threads, mounted in a
connections, mounted in a bracket
of12ft x 14 ft (3.7 m x 4.3 m).
- One (1) traffic vest for each seating positio, each vest to comply with ANSI/ISEA
207,
Standard for High Visibility Public Safety Vests, and have a five -point breakaway
feature that includes two at the shoulders, two at the sides, and one at the front.
- Five (5) fluorescent orange traffic cones not (less than 28" (711 mm) in height, each
equipped with a 6" (152 mm) retro - reflective white band no more than 4" (152 mm)
from the top of the cone, and an additional 4" (102 mm) retro- reflective white band 2"
(51 mm) below the 6'(152 mm) band.
- Five (5) illuminated warning devices such
fluorescent orange traffic cones have illuminai
- One automatic external defibrillator (AED).
- If the supply hose carried does not use
female adapter and double male adapter, s
carried mounted in brackets fastened to the
highway flares, unless the five (5)
capabilities.
ass couplings, an additional double
to fit the supply hose carried, will be
- If none of the pump intakes are valved, a host appliance that is equipped with one or
more gated intakes with female swivel connegtion(s) compatible with the supply hose
used on one side and a swivel connection with pump intake threads on the other side
will be carried. Any intake connection larger than 3 in. (75 mm) will include a pressure
relief device that meets the requirements of 16.6.6.
- If the apparatus does not have a 2' /z" Natiq'nal Hose (NH) intake, an adapter from
2'/" NH female to a pump intake will be carried, mounted in a bracket fastened to the
apparatus if not already mounted directly to the intake.
- If the supply hose carried has other than 2'/
carried to allow feeding the supply hose from
the hose to connect to a 2'h" NH female
apparatus if not already mounted directly to th
Page 8
National Hose (NH) threads, adapters will be
2'/z" NH thread male discharge and to allow
stake, mounted in brackets fastened to the
discharge or intake.
of 46
NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, section 5.7.2 requires a minimum of 20 ft of suction hose or 15 ft
of supply hose.
Hose is not on the apparatus as manufactured. The fire department will provide suction or
supply hose.
- One (1) extinguisher, 10 pound, CO2
DRY CHEMICAL EXTINGUISHER
There will be One (1) extinguisher, 20 pound, dry chemical extinguisher(s) provided.
WATER. EXTINGUISHER
There will be One (1) extinguisher, 2.50 gallon pressurized water extinguisher(s).
AXE, FLATHEAD, PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT
NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, Section 5.8.3 requires one (1) flathead axe mounted in a bracket
fastened to the apparatus.
The axe is not on the apparatus as manufactured. The fire department will provide and
mount the axe:
- Two (2) pickhead axes: Fiberglass handles and pick covers
PAINT
The exterior custom cab and body painting procedure will consist of a seven (7) step
finishing process as follows:
1. Manual Surface Preparation - All exposed metal surfaces on the custom cab and body
will be thoroughly cleaned and prepared for painting. Surfaces that will not be painted
include all chrome plated, polished stainless steel, anodized aluminum and bright aluminum
treadplate. Each imperfection on the exterior metal surface will be removed or filled and
then sanded smooth for a smooth appearance. All seams will be sealed before painting.
2. Chemical Cleaning and Treatment - The metal surfaces will be properly cleaned using a
high pressure and high temperature cleaning system. Surfaces are chemically cleaned to
remove all dirt, oil, grease and metal oxides to ensure the subsequent coatings bond well.
An ultra pure water final rinse will be applied to all metal surfaces at the conclusion of the
metal treatment process.
3. Primer /Surfacer Coats - A two (2) component urethane primer /surfacer will be hand
applied to the chemically treated metal surfaces to provide a strong corrosion protective
base coat and to smooth out the surface.
4. Hand Sanding - The primer /surfacer coat will be lightly sanded to an ultra smooth finish.
Page 89 of 96
5. Seater Primer Coat - A two (2) component sealer primer coat will be applied over the
sanded primer.
6.' Topcoat Paint - Urethane base coat will be applied to opacity for correct color matching.
7. Clearcoat - Two (2) coats of an automotive grade two (2) component urethane will be
applied. Lap style doors will be clear coated to match the body. Roll -up doors will not be
dear coated and the standard roll -up door warranty will apply.
All removable items such as brackets, compartment doors, door hinges, trim, etc. will be
removed and painted separately to insure paint behind all mounted items. Body assemblies
that cannot be finish painted after assembly will be finish painted before assembly.
The cab will be two -tone, with the upper section painted white along with a shield design on
the cab face and lower section of the cab and body painted red.
PAINT - ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT
Contractor will meet or exceed all current State (his) regulations concerning paint
operations. Pollution control will include measures to protect the atmosphere, water and
soil. Controls will include the following conditions:
- Topcoats and primers will be chrome and lead free
- Metal treatment chemicals will be chrome free. The wastewater generated in the
metal treatment process will be treated on -site to remove any other heavy metals.
- Particulate emission collection from sanding operations will have a 99.99% efficiency
factor.
- Particulate emissions from painting operations will be collected by a dry filter or water
wash process. If the dry filter means is used, it will have an efficiency rating of
98.00%. Water wash systems will be 99.97% efficient.
- Water from water wash booths will be reused. Solids will be removed mechanically
on a continual basis to keep the water clean.
- Paint wastes are disposed of in an environmentally safe manner. They are used as
fuel in kilns used in the cement manufacturing process - thereby extracting energy from
a waste material.
- Empty metal paint containers will be cleaned, crushed and recycled to recover the
metal-
- Solvents used in cleanup operations will be collected, recycled on -site, or sent off -site
for distillation and returned for reuse_ Residue from the distillation operation will be
used as fuel in off -site cement kilns.
Page 90 of 96
Additionally, the finished apparatus will not be manufactured with or contain products that
have ozone depleting substances. Contractor will, upon demand, present evidence that his
manufacturing facility meets the above conditions and that it is in compliance with his State
EPA rules and regulations.
PAINT CHASSIS FRAME ASSEMBLY
The chassis frame assembly will be painted black before the installation of the cab and
body, and before installation of the engine and transmission assembly, air brake lines,
electrical wire harnesses, etc. Components that are included with the chassis frame
assembly will be painted black are frame rails, cross members, axles, suspension, steering
gear, fuel tank, body substructure supports, miscellaneous mounting brackets, etc.
WARRANTY - PAINT AND CORROSION
Limited Warranty
Except as provided below, and provided the vehicle has been placed in service within 60
days after delivery to the original purchaser as established by our original invoice, for a
period of ten (10) years after delivery to the original purchaser, Pierce Manufacturing Inc.
( "Pierce') warrants to the user that its cab and body are free of blistering, peeling, corrosion,
or any other adhesion defect caused by defective manufacturing methods or paint material
selection for exterior surfaces of the cab and body of the vehicle. This limited warranty will
apply only if the vehicle is properly maintained and used in service which is normal to the
particular vehicle. Normal service means service which does not subject the vehicle to
stresses or impacts greater than normally result from the careful use of the vehicle or
chassis. If the buyer discovers a defect or nonconformity it must notify Pierce in writing
within 30 days after the date of discovery. This limited warranty is not transferable by the
first user, and is applicable to the vehicle in the following percentage costs of warranty
repair, if any:
Topcoat Durability &
Integrity of Coating System:
Corrosion:
Appearance:
Adhesion, Blistering /Bubbling
Dissimilar Metal and
Gloss, Color Retention &
Crevice
Cracking
0 -72 months 100%
0-36 months 100%
0 -36 months 100%
73 -96 months 50%
37 -84 months 50%
37-48 months 50%
97 -120 months 25%
85 -120 months 25%
49-72 months 25%
73 -120 months
10%
This limited warranty applies only to cab and body exterior paint. Paint on the vehicle's
undercarriage, cab and body interior is warranted only under the Pierce Basic One Year
Limited Warranty.
In addition to the foregoing, and subject to all of the terms and conditions of this Limited
Warranty, except cost allocations, Pierce warrants its cab and body exterior paint for a
period of ten (10) years against corrosion perforation.
Page 91 of 96
A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal
This warranty text is an illustration only. For actual details, refer to the warranty document.
A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal.
PAINT. COMPARTMENT INTERIOR
The compartment interior will be painted with a gray spatter finish for ease of cleaning and
to make it easier to touch up scratches and nicks.
REFLECTIVE BAND
A 6.00" white reflective band will be provided across the front of the vehicle and along the
sides of the body.
The reflective band provided on the cab face will be at the headlight level.
CHEVRON STRIPING, REAR
There will be alternating chevron striping located on the rear - facing vertical surface of
the apparatus. The entire rear surface, excluding the rear compartment door, will be
covered_
The colors will be red and yellow diamond grade.
Each stripe will be 6.00" in width.
This will meet the requirements of NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, which states that 50% of the
rear surface will be covered with chevron striping.
REFLECTIVE STRIPE, CAB DOORS
A 6.00" x 16.00" white reflective stripe will be provided across the interior of each cab door.
The stripe will be located approximately 1.00" up from the bottom, on the door panel.
This stripe will meet the NFPA 1901 requirement.
LETTERING
The lettering will be totally encapsulated between two (2) layers of clear vinyl.
CrOLDSTAROLAM)NAT)ON WARRANTY
Limited Warranty
Except as provided below, for a period of three (3) years after delivery to.the original
purchaser, Pierce Manufacturing Inc. ('Pierce ") warrants to the user that each Goldstar®
lamination sold by it will be free from defects in material and workmanship. This limited
warranty will apply only if the vehicle on which such Goldstar® lamination is affixed or
installed is properly maintained and used in service which is normal to the particular vehicle.
Normal service means service which does not subject the vehicle to stresses or impacts
greater than normally result from a careful use of the vehicle. If the buyer discovers a defect
or nonconformity it must notify Pierce in writing within 30 days after date of discovery. This
Page 92 of 96
limited warranty is not transferable by the first user.
A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal.
LETTERING
Forty -one (41) to sixty (60) genuine gold leaf lettering, 3.00" high, outlining and shading will
be provided,
LETTERING
A quantity of ten (10) letters, 9.00" high N/A reflective will be installed on on the cab roof.
UNDERCOATING. CAB & BODY
The underside of the apparatus will be undercoated with an asphalt petroleum based
material, dark in color.
The undercoating material utilized on the apparatus will be formulated to resist corrosion
and deaden unwanted sound or road noise.
Coating texture will appear firm, flexible, and resistant to abrasion. Minimum dry film
thickness will be in the range of 8.00 to 12.00 mils.
The material will be applied to the following areas:
Body and cab wheel well fender liners, on the back side only.
Underside of body and cab sheet metal, and structural components.
Underside and vertical sides of all sheet metal compartmentaticn, including support
angles.
Structural support members under running boards, rear platforms, battery boxes,
walkways, etc.
Inside surfaces of the pump heat enclosure, (when installed).
Steel components used in construction of commercial or custom chassis cabs.
Page 93 of 96
EXHIBIT B -2
Newport Beach 100' HD TDA 8/31/09
We are pleased to submit a proposal to you for a Pierce® Tractor -Drawn Aerial Ladder per your request for
quotation. The following paragraphs will describe in detail the apparatus proposed. Loose equipment not
specifically requested will not be provided.
PIERCE MANUFACTURING was incorporated in 1917. Since then we have been building bodies with one
philosophy, "BUILD THE FINEST ". Our skilled craftsmen take pride in their work, which is reflected, in the
final product. We have been building fire apparatus since the early "forties" giving Pierce Manufacturing over
50 years of experience in the fire apparatus market. Our plant is located in Appleton, Wisconsin with over
757,000 total square feet of floor space situated on approximately 97 acres of land. A $7 million dollar
inventory of parts is available to keep your unit in service long after it has left the factory.
QUALITY AND WORKMANSHIP
Pierce has set the pace for quality and workmanship in the fire apparatus field. Our tradition of building the
highest quality units with craftsmen second to none has been the rule right from the beginning. We currently
have a "Quality Achievement Supplier" program to insure that the vendors and suppliers that we utilize meet the
high standards that we demand. That is just part of our overall "Quality at the Souroe" program at Pierce.
Another part of this program is employing experts in their fields, like a Certified American Welding Society
Inspector to monitor our weld quality.
DELIVERY
The apparatus will be delivered under its own power to insure proper Breakin of all components while the
apparatus is still under warranty.
INFORMATION
At time of delivery, complete operation and maintenance manuals covering the apparatus will be provided. A
permanent plate will be mounted in the driver's compartment specifying the quantity and type of fluids required
including engine oil, engine coolant, transmission, pump transmission lubrication, pump primer and drive axle.
SAFETY VIDEO
At the time of delivery Pierce will also provide one 39- minute, professionally- produced apparatus safety video,
in DVD format. This video will address key safety considerations for personnel to follow when they are
driving, operating, and maintaining the apparatus, including the following: vehicle pre -trip inspection, chassis
operation, aerial operation, and safety during maintenance.
PERFORMANCE TESTS
A road test will be conducted with the apparatus fully loaded and a continuous run of no less than ten (10)
miles. During that time the apparatus will show no loss of power nor will it overheat. The transmission drive
shaft or shafts and the axles will run quietly and be free of abnormal vibration or noise. The apparatus will meet
NFPA 1901 acceleration requirements and NFPA 1901 braking requirements. The apparatus when fully loaded
will not have less than 25% nor more than 50% on the front axle and not less than 50% nor more than 75% on
the rear axle.
COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE
Certification of insurance coverage will be enclosed.
ISO COMPLIANCE
Pierce Manufacturing operates a Quality Management System under the requirements of ISO 9001. These
standards sponsored by.the "International Organization for Standardization (ISO)" specify the quality systems
that are established by the manufacturer for design, manufacture, installation and service. A copy of the
Page 1 of 92
certificate of compliance Number 32454 is included with this proposal.
SINGLE SOURCE MANUFACTURER
Pierce Manufacturing, Inc. provides an integrated approach to the design and manufacture of our products that
delivers superior apparatus and a dedicated support team. From our headquarters, all chassis, cab, body and
aerial systems are engineered, tested and hand assembled to the customer's exact specifications. Pietce4D
vehicles are also backed by a network of sales and service organizations that are dedicated exclusively to the
fire service who are ready to help you 24 hours a day, 7 days a week with parts, service and training. Pierce's
single source solution adds value by providing a fully engineered product that offers durability, reliability,
maintainability, performance and a high level of quality.
NFPA 2009 STANDARDS
This unit will comply with the NFPA standards effective January 1, 2009, except for fire department directed
exceptions. These exceptions will be set forth in the Statement of Exceptions.
Certification of slip resistance of all stepping, standing and walking surfaces will be supplied with delivery of
the apparatus.
A plate that is highly visible to the driver while seated will be provided. This plate will show the overall
height, length, and gross vehicle weight rating.
The manufacturer will have programs in place for training, proficiency testing and performance for any staff
involved with certifications.
An official of the company will designate, in writing, who is qualified to witness and certify test results.
NFPA COMPLIANCY
Apparatus proposed by the bidder will meet the applicable requirements of the National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA) as stated in current edition at time of contract execution. Fire department's
specifications that differ from NFPA specifications will be indicated in the proposal as "non- NFPA ".
INSPECTION CERTIFICATE
A third party inspection certificate for the aerial device will be fumisbed upon delivery of the aerial
device. The certificate will be Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Type 1 and will indicate that the aerial
device has been inspected on the production line and after final assembly.
The following tests will be conducted:
- Magnetic particle inspection will be conducted on every structural weld to assure the integrity of
the weldments and to detect any flaws or weaknesses. Magnets will be placed on each side of the
weld while iron powder is placed on the weld itself. The powder will detect any crack that may
exist. This test will conform to ASTM E709 and be performed prior to assembly of the aerial
device.
- With aluminum structural components, visual inspection will be performed on aluminum
surfaces (non - magnetic). A liquid penetrant test will be performed on any suspected defective
area. This test will conform to ASTM E165 and be performed prior to assembly of the aerial
device.
- Ultrasonic inspection will be used to detect any flaws in pins, bolts and other critical mounting
components.
Page 2 of 92
Functional tests, load tests, stability tests, and visual structural examinations will be performed. These
tests will determine any unusual deflection, noise, vibration, or instability characteristics of the unit.
TOTAL VEHICLE ASSESSMENT CERTIFICATION
The apparatus will be third -party, independent, audit - certified through Underwriters Laboratory (UL) to
the current edition of NFPA 1901 standards. The certification includes: all design, production,
operational and performance testing of the apparatus.
GENERATOR TEST
If the unit has a generator, the generator will be tested, approved, and certified by Underwriters
Laboratories at the manufacturer's expense. The test results will be provided to the Fire Department at
the time of delivery.
BREATHING AIR TEST
If the unit has breathing air, Underwriters Laboratories will draw an air sample from the air system and certify
that the air quality meets the requirements of NFPA 1989, Standard on Breathing Air Quality for Fire and
Emergency Services Respiratory Protection.
DELIVERY
Said apparatus and equipment will be built and shipped in accordance with the specifications hereto. Delays
due to strikes, war or international conflict, failures to obtain chassis, materials, or other causes beyond our
control not preventing, within about Delivered from Pierce Manufacturing to South Coast Fire Equipment,
Ontario, Ca working days after receipt of this order and the acceptance thereof at our office at Appleton,
Wisconsin, and to be delivered to you at South Coast Fire Equipment Ontario, Ca.
The specifications herein contained will form a part of the final contract and are subject to changes desired by
the purchaser, provided such aherations are interlined prior to the acceptance by the company of the order to
purchase, and provided such alterations do not materially affect the cost of the construction of the apparatus.
The proposal for fire apparatus conforms with all Federal Department of Transportation (DOT) rules and
regulations in effect at the time of bid and with all National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Guidelines for
Automotive Fire Apparatus as published at the time of bid, except as modified by customer specifications. Any
increased costs incurred by first party because of future changes in or additions to said DOT or NFPA standards
will be passed along to the customers as an addition to the price set forth above.
Unless accepted within 30 days from date, the right is reserved to withdraw this proposition.
INSPECTION TRIP(S)
The bidder will provide three (3) factory inspection trip(s) for 3 Trips for 3 people each trippre con, Mid and
Final customer representative(s). The inspection trip(s) will be scheduled at times mutually agreed upon
between the manufacturers representative and the customer. All costs such as travel, lodging and meals will be
the responsibility of the bidder.
PRODUCT CHANGES AND IMPROVEMENTS
Our components and processes, as described in this proposal document, are as accurate as known at the time of
bid submission, but are subject to change for the purpose of product or process improvements, or changes in
industry standards providing the change does not affect the meaning or definition of the bid specifications.
APPROVAL DRAWING
A drawing of the proposed apparatus will be prepared and provided to the purchaser for approval before
construction begins. The Pierce sales representative will also be provided with a copy of the same drawing.
The finalized and approved drawing will become part of the contract documents. This drawing will indicate
Page 3 of 92
the chassis make and model, location of the lights, siren, horns, compartments, major components, etc
A "revised" approval drawing of the apparatus will be prepared and submitted by Pierce to the purchaser
showing any changes made to the approval drawing.
DIAGRAM. ELECTRICAL DC CIRCUITS
Three (3) sets of diagrams of the body and chassis DC electrical system will be provided with the completed
apparatus.
WARRANTY
We warranty each piece of new fire or rescue apparatus to be free from defects in materials or workmanship
under normal use and service. Our obligation under this warranty is limited to repairing or replacing, as the
company may elect, any parts thereof which are returned to us with transportation costs prepaid, and as to
which examination is disclose to the company's satisfaction to have been defective, provided such part, or parts
will be returned to us not later than three (3) years from delivery of the apparatus. Such defective part or parts
will be repaired or replaced free of charge and without charge for installation to the original purchaser.
This warranty will not apply: -
1) To normal maintenance and adjustments.
2) To any vehicle which has been repaired or altered outside of our factory in any way so that, in our
judgment, to affect the stability, nor which has been subject to misuse, neglect, or accident, nor to any
vehicle which will operate at any speed exceeding the factory rated speed, or loaded beyond the factory
rated load capacity.
This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied, all others representations to the original
purchaser and all other obligations or liabilities, including liability for incidental or consequential damages on
the part of the company. We neither assume or authorize any other person to give or assume any other warranty
or liability on the company's behalf unless made or assumed in writing by the company.
WARRANTY I YEAR CUSTOM CHASSIS
Each piece of new fire or rescue apparatus will be warranted to be free from defects in materials or
workmanship under normal use and service. Each manufacturer will supply, as a part of their bid
package, a copy of the warranty or warranties that they propose to provide, and in no case will it be less
than one (t) year on the entire apparatus.
All other warranties, as outlined in these specifications will be provided in writing as a part of the bid
package.
Failure to provide the warranties as outlined throughout these specifications will be cause for rejection of the
bid package.
CROSSMEMBERS WARRANTY
A one (1) year parts and labor warranty will be provided on all chassis frame crossmembers.
BID BOND
A bid bond will not be included. .J ` Q22Ss� efir
A and as security for the bid in the form 6rT5 ah' bond to accomp ' ' .
This bid bond will be issued by a Surety is listed on the U.S. Treasury ents list of
acceptableetres —m pttt tmis d in Department Circular 57 . 11 be issued by an authorized
Page 4 of 92
representative of the Surety C 4 any and will be ac anied by a certifi
wer of attom dated or
�p
ore the d of bid. Th td bon ill include I g which assures [ -
e bidderlprinci 1 give a
bo or bonds may specified in biddin r contrac ocuments, th g
d and sufficie for the
faith perform f the contract inct i e Basic One Y invited
ty, an or th rompt
payme of labo material famished ' e prosecution of th tract.
Notwiths 'ng any do ent or er don to th contrary, y sure bond relate o sale of a v cle '
apply y to Basic On 1) ear Limited W ty such vehic Any s
ety bon relate the sale
a v cle will no ply to ther warranties that cluded within
(OEM or a e) or to the
w ties (if any) any ud p of any part po t, attachment cessory that ' orporated into
or attached to the vela . In the e t of adict.on r inconsis ncy
een provi ' and any
other document or , this provt ' n prevail.
PERFORMANCE BOND Bone iY21�1t� Zl)1'ry \Qf��171n
Pierce Manufacturing will provide, of contract, and along ykh-a��
rr•, a performance bond, which guarantees performance of all terms and conditions of the contract
and of the Basic One (1) Year Limited Warranty agreement. The performance bond will specifically cover the
performance of the contract according to its terms and conditions, as well as payment of all related bills and
encumbrances. This performance bond will be issued by a surety company who is listed by the U.S. Treasury
Department's list of approved sureties, as published in Circular 570, as of the bid date. The performance bond
will be issued in an amount equal to 100% of the contract amount and will be dated concurrent to, or subsequent
to, the date of the contract
Notwithstanding any document or assertion to the contrary, any surety bond related to the sale of a vehicle will
apply only to the Basic One (1) Year Limited Warranty for such vehicle. Any surety bond related to the sale of
a vehicle will not apply to any other warranties that are included Within this bid (OEM or otherwise) or to the
warranties (if any) of any third party of any part, component, attachment or accessory that is incorporated into
or attached to the vehicle. In the event of any contradiction or inconsistency between this provision and any
other document or assertion, this provision will prevail.
ARRO W-XTr'^r TRACTOR CHASSIS
The Pierce Arrow -XT is the custom chassis developed exclusively for the fire service. Chassis provided will be
a new, tilt -type custom fire apparatus. The chassis will be manufactured in the apparatus body builder's facility
eliminating any split responsibility. The chassis will be designed and manufactured for heavy -duty service,
with adequate strength, capacity for the intended load to be sustained, and the type of service required The
chassis will be the manufacturer's heavy -duty line tilt cab.
SEATING CAPACITY
The seating capacity in the cab will be four (4).
WHEELBASE
The wheelbase of the vehicle will be 149 ".
GVW RATING
The gross vehicle weight rating will be 72,600.
FRAME
The chassis frame will be built with two (2) steel channels bolted to five (5) cross members or more, depending
on other options of the apparatus. The side rails will have a 13.38" tall web over the front and mid sections of
the chassis, with a continuous smooth taper to 10.75" over the rear axle. Each rail will have a section modulus
of 25.992 cubic inches and a resisting bending moment (rbm) of 3,119,040 inch- pounds over the critical regions
of the frame assembly, with a section modulus of 18.96 cubic inches with an rbm of 2,275,200 inch- pounds over
Page 5 of 92
the rear axle. The frame rails will be constructed of 120,000 psi yield strength heat-treated .38" thick steel, with
3.50" wide flanges.
FRAME RAIL WARRANTY
Limited Warranty
Except as provided below, and provided the vehicle will have been placed in service within 60 days after
delivery to the original purchaser as established by our original invoice, for a period of 50 years, which is the
estimated useful life of the vehicle, after delivery to the original purchaser, Pierce Manufacturing Inc. ( "Pierce")
warrants to the user that its chassis frame rail manufactured by Pierce are free of defects in design, material, or
workmanship. This limited warranty will apply only if the vehicle is properly maintained and used in service
that is normal to the particular vehicle. Normal service means service that does not subject the vehicle to
stresses or impacts greater than normally result from the careful use of the vehicle or chassis. If the buyer
discovers a defect or nonconformity, it must notify Pierce in writing within 30 days after the date of discovery.
This limited warranty is not transferable by the fast user.
A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal.
FRAME REINFORCEMENT
In addition, a mainframe inverted "L" liner will be provided. It will be heat - treated steel measuring 12.00" x
3.00" x .25 ". Each liner will have a section modulus of 7.795 cu. in., yield strength of 110,000 psi, and rbm of
857,462 inch- pounds. Total rbm at wheelbase center will be 3,976,502 pounds per rail.
The frame liner will be mounted inside of the chassis frame rail, beginning at the front edge of the mainframe
rail and extending to the rear cab crossmember.
FRONT NON DRIVE AXLE
The Oshkosh TAX 40 front axle will be of the independent suspension design with a ground rating of 22,800
pounds.
Upper and lower control arms will be used on each side of the axle. Upper control arm castings will be Made of
100,000 -psi yield strength 8630 steel and the lower control arm casting will be made of 55,000 -psi yield ductile
iron.
The center cross members and side plates will be constructed out of 80,000 -psi yield strength steel.
Each control arm will be mounted to the center section using elastomer bushings. These rubber bushings will
rotate on low friction plain bearings and be lubricated for life. Each bushing will also have a flange end to
absorb longitudinal impact loads, reducing noise and vibrations.
There will be nine (9) grease fittings supplied, one (1) on each control arm pivot and one (1) on the steering
gear extension.
The upper control arm will be shorter than the lower arm so that wheel end geometry provides positive camber
when deflected below rated load and negative camber above rated load.
Camber at load will be zem degrees for optimum tire life.
The kingpin bearing will be of low friction design and be sealed for life.
Too links that are adjustable for alignment of the wheel to the center of the chassis will be provided
Page 6 of 92
The wheel ends will have little to no bump steer when the chassis encounters a hole or obstacle
The steering linkage will provide proper steering angles for the inside and outside wheel, based on the vehicle
wheelbase.
The axle will have a third party certified turning angle of 45 degrees. Front discharge, front suction, or
aluminum wheels will not infringe on this cramp angle.
WARRANTY, FRONT NON DRIVE AXLE
The Oshkosh TAK-4 system will have a three (3) year parts and labor warranty. This warranty applies to the
TAK-4 suspension components only. All steering linkages, pumps etc., are covered under our standard chassis
warranty (exception steer gears - see Steering for warranty).
OIL SEALS
Oil seals with viewing window will be provided on the front axle.
SHOCK ABSORBERS
Heavy -duty telescoping shock absorbers (KONI) will be provided on the front suspension.
REAR AXLE
The rear axle will be a MeritorTM, Model RS -30 -185, with a capacity of 31,000 pounds.
REAR AXLE WA_RRANTy
The MeritorTM two (2) year, unlimited mileage, parts and labor warranty will be provided with this axle.
TOP SPEED OF VEHICLE
A rear axle ratio will be furnished to allow the vehicle to reach a top speed of 68 MPH.
OIL SEALS
Oil seals will be provided on the rear axle.
FRONT SUSPENSION
Front Oshkosh TAK -4r independent suspension will be provided with a minimum ground rating of 22,800
pounds.
The independent suspension system will be designed to provide maximum rick comfort. The design will allow
the vehicle to Navel at highway speeds over improved road surfaces and at moderate speeds over rough terrain
with minimal transfer of road shock and vibration to the vehicle's crew compartment.
Each wheel will have torsion bar type spring. In addition, each front wheel end will also have energy absorbing
jounce bumpers to prevent bottoming of the suspension.
The suspension design will be such that there is at least 10.00" of total wheel travel and a minimum of 3.75'
before suspension bottoms.
The torsion bar anchor lock system allows for simple lean adjustments, without the use of shims. One can
adjust for a lean within 15 minutes per side. Anchor adjustment design is such that it allows for ride height
adjustment on each side.
The independent suspension was put through a durability test that simulated 140,000 miles of inner city driving.
REAR SUSPENSION
Page 7 of 92
Rear suspension will be a Hendrickson FMX 312 EX, air ride with a ground rating of 31,000 pounds. The
suspension will have the following features:
- Heavy -duty shock absorbers to protect air springs from overextension
- Heavy -duty torque rods and bushings
- Premium, heavy -duty rubber bushings require no lubrication
- Integrated stabilizer design results in greater stability
- Low spring rate air springs for excellent ride quality
- Dual height control valves to maintain level vehicle from side to side
FIFTH WHEEL
The fifth wheel will be designed to allow the tiller trailer to pivot fore & aft and be rotated. A fifth wheel
lockout system will be provided to limit motion during aerial operations. The fifth wheel will also be capable of
full operation up to a 14 degree breakover angle. The fifth wheel lockout system, when activated, will prevent
movement between the upper and lower plates of the fifth wheel assembly. In the normal road travel condition
the cylinder mounted solenoid valves will be open and will allow transfer of oil between the front and rear pair
of cylinders. When the stabilizers are in their proper supporting position and as the aerial leaves the boom
support, the solenoid valves will close. The closed valves will allow no oil to be transferred and the fifth wheel
assembly will become rigid. A fill and a gauge port will be provided on the top of the trailer goose neck for
maintenance.
FENDER PANELS
The chassis behind the cab will be assembled with fender panels over the wheels, running boards and steps for
access to the turntable and decking over the frame rails. The fender panels will be fabricated of .125' -5052
aluminum with a 38,000 psi tensile strength. Fender design will be provided for prevention of rust pockets and
ease of maintenance. The area over the frame rails between the cab and fifth wheel will be covered with
aluminum treadplate to serve as a walkway area. The walkway area will be properly reinforced with a steel
Substructure attached to the frame rails. Running boards will be installed on each side directly behind the cab
for access to the walkway area behind the cab and the turntable. The running boards will be covered with
aluminum treadplate.
ANTI -LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
The vehicle will be equipped with a Wabco, model XS4M, anti -lock braking system. The A13S will provide a
four (4) channel anti-lock braking control on both the front, rear and tiller wheels. A digitally controlled system
that utilizes microprocessor technology will control the anti-lock braking system. Each wheel will be monitored
by the system. When any particular wheel begins to lockup, a signal will be sent to the control unit. This
control unit then will reduce the braking of that wheel for a fraction of a second and then reapply the brake.
This anti -lock brake system will eliminate the lockup of any wheel thus helping to prevent the apparatus from
skidding out of control.
ANTI -LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WARRANTY
The Wabco ABS system will come with a three (3) year or 300,006 mile parts and labor warranty provided
by Meritor Wabco Vehicle Control Systems.
BRAKES
The service brake system will be full air type.
Page 8 of 92
The front brakes will be Knorr/Bendix disc type with a 17.00" ventilated rotor for improved stopping distance.
The brake system will be certified, third party inspected, for improved stopping distance.
The rear brakes will be MeritorT°r 16.50" x 8.63" cam operated with automatic slack adjusters.
ENGINE BRAKE
A Jacobs Engine Brake is to be installed with the controls located on the instrument panel within easy reach of
the driver.
The driver will be able to turn the engine brake system on/off and have a high, medium and low setting.
The engine brake will be installed in such a manner that when the engine brake is slowing the vehicle the brake
lights are activated.
The ABS system will automatically disengage the auxiliary braking device, when required.
AIR COMPRESSOR, BRAKE SYSTEM
The air compressor will be a Bendix BA -921 with 15.8 cubic feet per minute output at 1250 RPM.
BRAKE SYSTEM
The brake system will include:
- Bendix- Westinghouse dual brake treadle valve with vinyl covered foot surface
- Heated automatic moisture ejector on air dryer
- Total air system capacity of 5,198 cubic inches
Two (2) air pressure gauges with a red warning light and an audible alarm, that activates when air pressure
falls below 60 psi
- MGM spring set parking brake system
- Parking brake operated by a Bendix - Westinghouse PP -1 control valve
- A parking "brake on" indicator light on instrument panel
- Bendix- Westinghouse SR -1 valve, in conjunction with a double check valve system, providing automatic
spring brake application at 40 psi
- Wabco System Saver 1200 air dryer
BRAKE LINES
Color -coded nylon brake lines will be provided. The lines will be wrapped in a heat protective loom in the
chassis areas that are subject to excessive heat.
AIR INLET /OUTLET
One (1) air inleUOUtlet will be installed with the female coupling located in the driver side lower step well of
cab. This system will tie into the "wet" tank of the brake system and include a check valve in the inlet line and
an 85 psi pressure protection valve in the outlet line. The air outlet will be controlled by a needle valve.
.Page 9 of 92
A mating male fitting will be provided with the loose equipment.
The air inlet will allow a shoreline air hose to be connected to the vehicle. This will allow station air to be
supplied to the brake system of the vehicle to insure constant air pressure.
AIR TANK, ADDITIONAL
An additional air tank with 1454 cubic inch displacement will be provided to increase the capacity of the air
system. This tank will be dedicated for air horn use.
The output flow of the engine air compressor varies with engine RPM. Full compressor output is only achieved
at governed engine speed Engine speed may be limited by generators, pumps and other PTO driven options.
ALL WHEEL LOCK -UP
An additional all wheel lock -up system will be installed which applies air to the front brakes only. The standard
spring brake control valve system will also be used for the rear.
ENGINE
The chassis will be powered by a Detroit Diesel electronically controlled engine as described below:
- Model: Series 60,14.01, (955 cubic inches)
- Maximum Horsepower. 515 bhp at I g00 rpm
- Peak Torque: 1650 lb-ft at 1200 rpm
- Governed Speed: 2000 rpm
- Bore and Stroke: 5.24" x 6.61"
- Number of Cylinders: Six (6)
- Compression Ratio: 17.25:1
Standard equipment on the engine will include the following:
- Governor: Limiting speed type
- Injectors: Cam operated, unit type, clean tip
- Starting Motor: 12 -volt
- Turbocharger
- Air To Air Aftercooled
- Lobe Oil Cooler
- Lube Oil Filter' Full flow
- Air Cleaner: Farr or equal
- Fuel Filters: Dual, with check valve
Page 10 of 92
- Coolant Filter: Spin -on with shut off valves on the supply and rearm line (precharged with coolant inhibitor)
ENGINE WARRANTY
The engine will come with a five (5) year or 100,000 mile warranty provided by the Detroit Diesel
Corporation.
CONTROLS AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
The following amber indicator Iights will he located on the driver's side of the cab to denote engine information
- Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
- High Exhaust Temperature (BET)
- Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
A switch to initiate the diesel particulate filter regeneration cycle will be located on the driver's side instrument
panel.
ENGINE ]INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION
The fire apparatus manufacturer will provide a certification, along with a letter from the engine manufacturer
stating they approve of the engine installation in the bidder's chassis. The certification will be provided at the
time of bid.
ENGINE AIR INTAKE
The air intake with an ember separator will be mounted high on the passenger side of the cab, to the from of the
crew cab door. The ember separator is designed to prevent road dirt and recirculating hot air from entering the
engine. The ember separator will be easily accessible through a hinged stainless steel grille, with one (1) flush
quarter turn latch.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The exhaust system will be stainless steel from the turbo to the inlet of the diesel particulate filter and will be
5.00" in diameter. The exhaust system will include a diesel particulate filter and a diesel oxidation catalyst to
meet current EPA standards. The exhaust will terminate horizontally ahead of the passenger side rear wheels.
A tailpipe diffuser will be provided to reduce the temperature of the exhaust as it exits. An insulation wrap will
be provided on the exhaust pipe between the turbo and DPF inlet to minimize the transfer of heat to the cab.
Heat deflector shields will be provided to isolate chassis and body components from the heat of the tailpipe
diffuser.
ENGINE SHUTDOWN W FSET
An emergency engine shutdown, by means of incorporating a flapper over the engine air intake, will be
provided with a pneumatic push -to- activate control inside the cab. A protective guard will be supplied to avoid
unnecessary activation.
The push -to- active control inside the cab can also be used to release the emergency shutdown, without having to
tilt the cab.
.FUEL SEPARATOR
The engine will be equipped with a Racor in -line spin -on fuel and water separator in addition to the engine fuel
filters.
ENGINE HEATER
A 1000 watt, 120 volt, immersion type engine heater will be installed with the AC power inlet located to the
rear of the driver's door.
Page l 1 of 92
A LED warning light and buzzer will be provided on the cab instrument panel to indicate water in the fuel
system.
HIGH IDLE
A high idle switch will be provided, inside the cab, on the instrument panel, that will automatically maintain a
preset engine rpm. A switch will be installed, at the cab instrument panel, for activation/deactivation.
The high idle will be operational only when the parking brake is on and the truck transmission is in neutral. A
green indicator light will be provided, adjacent to the switch. The light will illuminate when the above
conditions are met. The light will be labeled "OK to Engage High Idle ".
COOLANT LINES
Silicone hoses will be used for all engine coolant/heater lines installed by Pierce Manufacturing.
Hose clamps will be the stainless steel constant torque type to prevent coolant leakage. They will expand and
contract according to coolant system temperature thereby keeping a constant clamping pressure on the hose.
RADIATOR
The radiator and the complete cooling system will meet or exceed NFPA and engine manufacturer cooling
system standards.
For maximum cooling performance, the radiator core will be made of copper fns having a serpentine design,
soldered to brass tubes. The tubes will be welded to brass headers using the patented 'Beta- Weld" process for
increased strength, longer road life and solder -bloom corrosion protection. The radiator core will have a
minimum frontal area of 1396 square inches. Steel supply and return tanks will be bolted to the core headers
and steel side channels to complete the radiator assembly. The radiator will be compatible with commercial
antifreeze solutions.
The radiator will be mounted in such a manner as to prevent the development of leaks caused by twisting or
straining when the apparatus operates over uneven ground. The radiator assembly will be isolated from the
chassis frame rails with rubber isolators.
The radiator will include an integral deaeration tank, with a remote - mounted overflow tank. For visual coolant
level inspection, the radiator will have a built -in sight glass. The radiator will be equipped with a 15 psi
pressure relief cap.
A drain port will be located at the lowest point of the cooling system and/or the bottom of the radiator to permit
complete flushing of the coolant from the system.
A heavy -duty fan will draw in fresh, cool air through the radiator. Shields or battles will be provided to prevent
recirculation of hot air to the inlet side ofthe radiator.
CLUTCH FAN
A Horton fan clutch will be provided. The fan clutch will be automatic when the pump transmission is in
"Road" and "Pump" position.
FUEL TANK
A 65- gallon fuel tank will be provided and mounted at rear of chassis. The tank will be constructed of 12-
gauge, hot rolled steel. It will be equipped with swash partitions and a vent.,
A.75" drain plug will be provided in a low point of the tank for drainage
Page 12 of 92
A fill inlet will be located on the driver's side rear of the chassis on the vertical portion of the fender skirting
area. The inlet will be covered with a hinged, spring loaded, stainless steel door that is marked "Diesel Fuel
Only ".
A .50" diameter vent will be provided running from top of tank to just below fuel fill inlet.
The tank will meet all FHWA 393.67 requirements including a fill capacity of 95% of tank volume.
All fuel lines will be provided as recommended by the engine manufacturer.
AUXILIARY FUEL PUMP
An auxiliary electric fuel pump will be added to the fuel line for priming the engine. A switch located on the
cab instrument panel will be provided to operate the pump.
FUEL SHUTOFF
A shutoff valve will be installed in the fuel line, near the filter.
FUEL COOLER
An air to fuel cooler will be installed in the engine fuel return line.
TRANSMISSION
An Allison Gen IV, model EVS 4000P, electronic, torque converting, automatic transmission will be provided.
Two (2) PTO openings will be located on left side and top of converter housing (positions 8 o'clock and 1
o'clock).
A transmission temperature gauge with red light and buzzer will be installed on the cab instrument panel.
TRANSMISSION SHIFTER
A six (6 )-speed push button shift module will be mounted to right of driver on console. Shift position indicator
will be indirectly lit for after dark operation.
The transmission ratio will be: Ist - 3.51 to 1.00, 2nd - 1.91 to 1.00, 3rd - 1.43 to 1.00, 4th - 1.00 to 1.00, 5th -
0.75 to 1.00, 6th - 0.64 to 1.00, R - 4.80 to 1.00.
TRANSMISSION COOLER
A transmission oil cooler will be provided in the lower tank of the radiator.
TRANSMLSSION WARRANTY
The transmission will have a five (5) year /unlimited mileage warranty covering 100% parts and labor. The
warranty will be provided by Allison Transmission,
Note: The transmission cooler is not covered under any extended warranty you may be getting on your Allison
transmission. Please review your Allison transmission warranty for coverage limitations.
SYNTHETIC FLUID ONLY TAG
A tag will be located at the transmission fill point labeled "Synthetic Fluid Only ".
TRANSMISSION FLUID
The transmission will be provided with TranSynd, or TES 295 (generic synthetic fluid) equivalent heavy duty
synthetic transmission fluid.
Page 13 of 92
DRIVELINE
Drivelines will be a heavy -duty metal tube and be equipped with Spicer 1810 universal joints.
The shafts will be dynamically balanced before installation.
A splined slip joint will be provided in each driveshaft, slip joint will be coated with Glidecoat or equivalent
STEERING
Dual Sheppard MI 10 steering gears, with integral heavy -duty power steering, will be provided. The power
steering will incorporate a Vickers V20F three (3)-line hydraulic pump with integral pressure and flow control.
The steering wheel will be:
- 18.00" in diameter
- Capable of tilting and telescoping
- Four (4) -spoke design
STEERING WARRANTY
The steering gear will have a three (3) year parts and labor warranty.
TIRES
Front titres will be Michelin 4251651122.50 radials, 20 ply "all position" XZY 3 tread. The tires will be mounted
on Alcoa 2150" x 12.25" polished aluminum disc -type wheels with a ten (10) stud, 11.25' bolt circle.
Rear tires will be four (4) Michelin 315/80R22.50 radials, 20 ply XDN2 Grip "traction" tread. The tires will be
mounted on Alcoa 22.50" x 9.00" polished aluminum disc wheels with a ten (10) -stud 1125" bolt circle.
LUG NUT COVERS
Chrome plated lug nut covers will be installed on all lug nuts.
WHEEL CHOCKS
There will be two (2) set(s) of folding Ziamatic SAC -44 -E, alunintun alloy, Quick -Choc wheel blocks, with
easy -grip handle provided-
WHEEL CHOCK BRACKETS
There will be two (2) set(s) of Ziamatic SQCH -44 -H horizontal mounting wheel chock brackets provided for
the Ziamatic SAC -44 -E folding wheel chocks. The brackets will be mounted TBA.
HUB COVERS (front)
Stainless steel hub covers will be provided on the front axle. An oil level viewing window will be provided.
HUB COVERS Mier Axle)
Stainless steel hub covers will be provided on the tiller trailer axle. An oil level viewing window will be
provided.
HUB COVERS (rear)
A pair of stainless steel high hat hub covers will be provided on rear axle hubs.
MUD FLAPS
Mud flaps with a Pierce logo will be installed behind the front and rear wheels.
MUD FLAPS
Mud flaps will be installed behind the tiller trailer wheels of the apparatus.
Page 14 of 92
TIRE PRESSURE MANAGEMENT
There will be a VECSAFE LED tire alert pressure management system provided that will monitor each tire's
pressure. A chrome plated brass sensor will be provided on the valve stem of each tire for a total of eight (8)
tires.
The sensor will calibrate to the tire pressure when installed on the valve stem for pressures between 20 and I20
psi. The sensor will activate an integral battery operated LED when the pressure of that tire drops 8 psi.
Removing the cap from the sensor will indicate the functionality of the sensor and battery. If the sensor and
battery are in working condition, the LED will immediately start blinking.
CAB
The Arrow -XT cab will be designed specifically for the fire service and manufactured by the chassis builder.
Construction of the cab will consist of 5052-H32.125" aluminum welded to extruded aluminum framing.
The cab will be built by the apparatus manufacturer in a facility located on the manufaeturees premises. (no
exceptions)
The cab will be 96.00" wide, with an interior width of 87.50 ".
The forward cab section will have an overall height (from the cab roof to the ground) of approximately 103.00 ".
The crew cab section will have a 10.00" raised roof, with an overall cab height of approximately 113.00 ". The
overall height listed will be calculated based on a truck configuration with the lowest suspension weight ratings,
the smallest diameter tires for the suspension, no water weight, no loose equipment weight and no personnel .
weight. Larger tires, wheels and suspension will increase the overall height listed.
The floor to ceiling height inside the crew cab will be 64.00" in the center and 69.75' in the outboard positions.
The crew cab floor will measure 44.50" from rear wall to the back side of engine tunnel.
The engine tunnel, at the rearward highest point (knee level), will measure 50.88" to the back wall.
The crew cab will be of the totally enclosed design, with access doors constructed in the same manner as the
driver and passenger doors.
The cab will be a full tilt cab style. The engine will be easily accessible and capable of being removed with the
cab tilted. The cab will be capable of tilting 45 degrees and 90 degrees with crane assist.
The cab will have tbree (3)-point rubber mounting and will be tilted by a hydraulic pump connected to two (2)
cab till cylinders. The cab will then be locked down by a two (2) -point automatic locking mechanism that
actuates after the cab has been lowered.
The cab access steps will be 23.25' wide, crew cab will be 21.50" wide x 8.00" minimum depth and will be the
half - height style door, blistered inward at the bottom.
The lower exposed step area at each door location will be trimmed with aluminum treadplate and have a grip
strut insert in the bottom step,
The inside cab steps will not exceed 18.00" high.
Page 15 of 92
The crew cab entrance will be a one (1) step design to the cab floor, for easy access.
A 20.00 ", slip resistant, handrail will be provided adjacent to all door openings to assist entrance into the cab.
A chrome handrail will be provided inside each front cab door, for ease of entry.
The cab doors will be 37.00" wide x 58.50" high.
The crew cab doors will be 34.25' wide x 67.00" high for easy entry, and located on the side of the cab.
The cab and crew cab doors will be constructed of extruded aluminum with a nominal material thickness of
.125'. The exterior skins will be constructed from .090" aluminum.
All cab and crew cab entry doors will contain a conventional roll down window.
Flush mounted, chrome plated paddle type door handle will be provided on the exterior of the cab doors.
All interior cab door handles will also have flush paddle handles.
The cab doors will be provided with both interior (rotary knob) and exterior (keyed) locks as required by
FMVSS 206. The locks will be capable of activating when the doors are open or closed. The doors will remain
locked if locks are activated when the doors are opened, then closed.
The door hinge will be a stainless steel piano type with a .25" pin.
There will be double automotive type rubber seals around the perimeter of the door framing and door edges to
ensure a weather tight fit.
Full height polished stainless steel scuffplates will be installed on the inside of all cab doors.
Cab door panels will be removable without disconnecting door and window mechanisms.
Engine hood side walls will be constructed of .50" aluminum, top will be constructed of .19" aluminum and will
be tapered at top to allow for more driver and passenger elbow room
The engine hood will be insulated for protection from heat and sound. The noise insulation keeps the DBA
level within the limits stated in the current NFPA series 1900 pamphlet. There will be access, 15.00" wide x
11.25' high; at the rear of the engine tunnel to access the engine fluid checks.
Full circular inner fender liners, in the wheel wells, will be provided.
Bright aluminum treadplate will be overlayed on the outside rear wall of the crew cab except for areas that are
not typically visible when the cab is lowered.
A curved, safety glass windshield will be provided, with over 2,754 square inches of clear viewing area-
The cab windshield will have bright trim inserts in the rubber molding holding the glass in place.
All cab glass will be tinted.
Economical windshield replacement glass will be readily available from local auto glass suppliers.
Page 16 of 92
Two (2) smoked Lexan sunvisors, 8.75' x 31.00" long, will be provided. The sunvisors will be located above
the windshield with one (1) mounted on each side of the cab.
Two (2) Electric windshield wipers with washer will be provided that meet FMVSS and SAE requirements.
The washer reservoir will be able to be filled without raising the cab.
A glove box with a drop-down door will be installed in the front dash panel in front of the officer's position.
CAB INTEGRITY CERTIFICATION
Pierce manufacturing will provide a cab crash test certification with this proposal. The certification states that
the cab must meet or exceed the requirements below:
- European Occupant Protection Standard ECE Regulation No.29
- SAE 12422 Cab Roof Strength Evaluation - Quasi -Static Loading Heavy Trucks
- SAE 12420 COE Frontal Strength Evaluation - Dynamic Loading Heavy Trucks
- Roof Crush
The cab will be subjected to a roof crush force of 100,000 lbs. This value will be 450% of the ECE 29 criteria,
which must be equivalent to the front axle rating up to a maximum of 10 metric tons.
- Side Impact
The cab will be subjected to dynamic preload with a 13,275 lb moving barrier is slammed into the side of the
cab at 5.5 mph, striking with an impact of 13,000 ft-lbs of energy. This test will closely represent the forces a
cab will see in a rollover incident.
- Frontal Impact
The cab will withstand a frontal force produced from 65,200 ft -lbs of energy using a swing -bob type platen.
The same cab will withstand all tests without any measurable intrusion into the survival space of the occupant
area.
CAB DOOR DU ABD3TY CERTIFICATION
Robust cab doors help protect occupants. Cab doors will survive a 200,000 cycle door slam test where the
slamming force exceeds 20 G's of deceleration. The bidder will certify that the sample doors similar to those
Provided on the apparatus have been tested and have met these criteria without structural damage, latch
malfunction, or significant component wear.
CAB MODIFICATION
The engine tunnel will be designed to provide maximum occupant space, and required clearance to the engine
and related components. The engine tunnel will include a modification on the passenger side to accommodate
the Turbo and related components.
CAB FLOOR
The cab and crew cab floor areas will be covered with Polydamp= acoustical floor mat consisting of a black
Pyramid rubber facing and closed cell foam decoupler.
The top surface of the material has a series of raised pyramid shapes evenly spaced, which offer a superior grip
surface. Additionally, the material has a .25" thick closed cell foam (no water absorption) which offers a sound
dampening material for reducing sound levels.
Page 17 of 92
CREW CAB WINDOWS
On each side of the crew cab, a window with tinted glass will be provided.
The rear wall of the crew cab will have two (2) windows, each being 1 1.29" wide x 17.95" high.
WINDOW TINT
Crew cab windows will be tinted with 44% light transmission tint. The following windows are included:
- Crew cab side windows
- Crew cab door, roll -up windows
- Rear opera windows (if applicable)
ELECTRIC OPERATED CAB DOOR WINDOWS
All four (4) cab doors will be equipped with electric operated windows with flush mounted automotive
style switches.
The drivers side lower instrument panel will also have four (4) controls, one (1) for each door window.
ELECTRIC WINDOW DUR BD1TY CERTIFICATION
Cab window roll-up systems can cause maintenance problems if not designed for long service life. The window
regulator design will complete 30,000 complete up -down cycles and still function normally when finished. The
bidder will certify that sample doors and windows similar to those provided on the apparatus have been tested
and have met these criteria without malfunction or significant component wear.
ELECTRIC CAB DOOR LOCKS
The front driver and officer doors will have a door lock master switch. The master switches will control
all cab door locks.
The rear cab doors will have the standard manual lock control
There will be one (1) concealed switch located in an easily accessible chassis specific location that will
unlock all the doors.
The lock system will include two (2) key FOBS that allow for keyless entry into the vehicle. The key FOB
system will use code hopping technology for high security and be FCC part 15 compliant.
KEY PAD FOR ELECTRIC DOOR LOCKS
For improved convenience, the cab door locks will include a Trimark keypad entry system to provide complete
keyless entry to the cab. There will be two (2) keypads provided, located one each side of the cab behind the
front cab doors. The keypads will include visual and audio feedback to confirm activation and acknowledge
correct entry code. For enhanced night time use, the keypads will be lighted. For increased security, the system
will allow over 3000 possible code combinations.
LOGO AND CUSTOMER DESIGNATION ON HORN BUTTON
The steering wheel will have an emblem containing the fire apparatus manufacturer's logo and customer name.
The emblem will have three (3) rows of text for the customer's department name. There will be a maximum of
eight (8) characters in the first row, eleven (1 l) characters in the second row and eleven (11) characters in the
third row.
Page 18 of 92
The fust row of text will be: COSTA MESA
The second row of text will be: FIRE
The third row of text will be: DEPARTMENT
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
Provided on each side of the cab, below the cab floor, to the rear of the crew cab access doors, will be a storage
comparhnent. The compartments will be 11.50" wide x 14.00" deep x 18.00" high.
The doors will be of the single pan construction with one (1) D -ring latch. Chain with a clear plastic covering
will be used as a door stop.
FENDER CROWNS
Stainless steel fender crowns will be installed at the cab wheel openings. The fender crowns will have a radius
outside corner that will allow the fender crown to extend out further than the standard width crown, thus
extending beyond the sidewall of the front tires and allow the crew cab doors to open fully.
CAB DOOR INTERIOR PANELS
A brushed stainless steel scuffplate will be provided on the lower interior section of cab and crew cab doors.
CAB DOOR INTERIOR PANELS
A full height stainless steel scuffplate will be provided on the cab and crew cab interior doors.
STRIPE (On Paint Break)
There will be a gold leaf stripe provided on the paint break in place of chrome molding. The stripe will be on
both sides of the cab and on the cab face with shield.
PB X
A map box with six (6) bins, open from top, will be installed. The map box will be divided into six (6) bins,
each bin will slant 30 degrees from horizontal. The map box will be constructed of .125' aluminum and will be
painted to match the cab interior. Two (2) rows of three (3) slots will measure 12.00" long x 3.00" wide.
MAP POCKET
Installed on each front door will be a map pocket. The pocket will be 13:50" wide x 14.00" high x 1.50" deep
and constructed of stainless steel.
CAB LIFT
A hydraulic cab lift system will be provided consisting of an electric powered hydraulic pump, dual lift
cylinders, and necessary hoses and valves,
The hydraulic pump will have a manual override for backup in the event of electrical failure.
Lift controls will be on a panel located on the pump panel or front area of the body in a convenient location.
Cab will be locked down by a two (2) -point automatic spring- loaded hook mechanism that actuates after the cab
has been lowered.
The hydraulic cylinders will be equipped with a velocity fuse that protects the cab from accidentally descending
when the control is located in the tilt position.
A redundant mechanical stay arm will automatically be engaged once the cab has been fully raised. Before
Page 19 of 92
lowering the cab, this device must be disengaged using the stay arm control located near the cab raise/lower
switch.
INTERLOCK, CAB LIFT TO PARKING BRAKE
The cab lift system will be interlocked to the parking brake. The cab tilt mechanism will be active only when
the parking brake is set and the ignition switch is in the on position, if the parking brake is released the cab tilt
mechanism will be disabled.
MIRRORS
A Velvac, model 2010, west coast mirror will be mounted on each side of the front cab door. Mirror
dimensions wit] be 7.00" wide x 16.00" high, and will be heated and motorized. The shell will be bright
annealed stainless steel.
Both mirrors will be heated and have a remote control that is convenient to the driver.
BUMPER
A one (1) piece, ten (10) -gauge 304 -2B polished stainless steel bumper, minimum of 10.00" high, will be
attached to the front of the chassis frame.
A 9.00" formed steel channel will be mounted directly behind bumper for additional strength
LIFT AND TOW MOUNTS
Mounted to the flame extension will be lift and tow mounts. The lift and tow mounts will be designed and
positioned to adapt to certain tow truck lift systems.
The lift and tow mounts with eyes will be painted the same color as the frame.
GRAVELPAN
A gravel pan, constructed of bright aluminum treadplate, will be furnished between the bumper and cab face
TOW HOOKS
No tow books are to be provided. This truck will be equipped with a lift and tow package with integral tow
eyes.
CAB INTERIOR
The cab dash fascias will be a flat faced design to provide easy of maintenance and will be constructed out of
painted aluminum.
The engine tunnel will be padded and covered with 46 ounce leather grain vinyl resistant to oil, grease and
mildew.
The headliner will be installed in both forward and rear cab sections. Headliner material will be vinyL 'A sound
barrier will be part of its composition. Material will be installed on aluminum sheet and securely fastened to
interior cab ceiling.
Forward portion of cab headliner will provide easy access for servicing electrical wiring or for other
maintenance needs without removing the entire unit.
CAB INTERIOR UPHOLSTERY
The cab interior upholstery will be dark silver gray.
INTERIOR PAINT (Cab)
Page 20 of 92
A rich looking interior will be provided by painting all the metal surfaces inside the cab gray, vinyl texture
paint.
GRAB FIANDLE
A black rubber covered grab handle will be mounted on the lower portion of the driver's side cab entrance to
assist in entering the cab. The grab handle will be securely mounted to the post area between the door and
steering wheel column.
A long rubber grab handle will be mounted on the dash board in front of the officer.
DRIVER SEAT
A Seats Inc. 9911 "scissors- action" air -ride high -back style seat will be provided in the cab for the driver.
The driver's seat will be furnished with three (3)-point shoulder type seat belt. The seat belt will be furnished
with automatic retractor. Extension will be provided with the seat belt so the male end can be easily grasped
and the female end easily located while sitting in a normal position.
The seat back will be removable for ease of access to components located behind the driver seat.
OFFICER SEAT
A Seats Inc. #911 fixed companion high back style seat will be provided in the cab for the officer.
The officer's seat will be furnished with three (3)-point shoulder type seat belt. The seat belt will be famished
with automatic retractor. Extension will be provided with the seat belt so the male end can be easily grasped
and the female end easily located while sitting in a normal position.
FORWARD FACING PASSENGER SIDE OUTBOARD SEAT
There will be one (1) fold up seat provided at the passenger side outboard position in the crew cab.
The seat will be constructed of a heavy grade vinyl over foam tubber and will have the bottom covered with
brushed stainless steel for a pleasant appearance when the seat is in the up position.
The seat will be furnished with a three- point, shoulder type seat belt. The seat belt will be furnished with
automatic retractors.
FORWARD FACING DRIVER SIDE OUTBOARD SEAT
There will be one (1) forward facing, Seats Incorporated 911 fold -up SCBA style seat provided at the driver
side outboard position in the crew cab. The SCBA cavity will be adjustable front to rear in 0.50" increments to
accommodate different size SCBA bottles.
Moving the SCBA cavity will be accomplished by unbolting, relocating and reboiting in the desired location.
The seat will be furnished with a three three- point, shoulder type seat belt. The seat belt will be furnished with
automatic retractors. Extensions will be provided with the seat belt so the male end can be easily grasped and
the female end easily located while sitting in a normal position.
RADIO COMPARTMENT
A radio compartment will be provided under the officer's seat.
The inside compartment dimensions will be 14.50" deep x 14.50" across x 9.00" high.
A drop -down door with a chrome plated lift and turn latch will he provided for access.
Page 2l of 92
The compartment will be concocted of smooth aluminum and painted to match the cab interior
SEAT UPHOLSTERY
All Seats Inc. 911 seat upholstery will be gray woven with black Imperial 1200 material.
AIR BOTTLE HOLDERS
All SCBA type seats in the cab will have a "Hands- Free" auto clamp style bracket in its backrest. For efficiency
and convenience, the bracket will include an automatic spring clamp that allows the occupant to store the SCBA
bottle by simply pushing it into the seat back. For protection of all occupants in the cab, in the event of an
accident, the inertial components within the clamp will constrain the SCBA bottle in the seat and will exceed
the NFPA standard of 9G. Bracket designs with manual restraints (belts, straps, buckles) that could be
inadvertently left unlocked and allow the SCBA to move freely within the cab during an accident, will not be
acceptable.
There will be a quantity of one (1) SCBA brackets.
SHOULDER HARNESS HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
All seating positions furnished with three (3)-point shoulder type seat belts will include a height adjustment
This adjustment will optimize the belts effectiveness and comfort for the seated firefighter.
SEAT BELTS
All seating positions in the cab and crew cab will have red seat belts.
SEAT BELT ANCHOR STRENGTH
Seat belt attachment strength is regulated by Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards and should be
validated through testing. Each seat belt anchor design will withstand 3000 lbs of pull on both the lap
and shoulder belt in accordance with FMVSS 571.210 Seat Belt Assembly Anchorages. The bidder will
certify that each anchor design was pull tested to the required force and met the appropriate criteria.
SEAT MOUNTING STRENGTH
Seat attachment strength is regulated by Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards and should be validated
through testing. Each seat mounting design will be tested to withstand 20 G's of force in accordance with
FMVSS 571.207 Seating Systems. The bidder will certify that each seat mount and cab structure design was
pull tested to the required force and met the appropriate criteria
SEAT BELT MONUORING SYSTEM
A seat belt monitoring system (SBMS) will be provided. The SBMS will be capable of monitoring up to ten
(10) sensors indicating the status of each seating position in the cab with green and red LED indicators as
follows:
Seat Occupied Buckled Green
Seat Occupied Unbuckled Red
No Occupant Buckled Red
No Occupant Unbuckled Not Illuminated
The SBMS will include an audible alarm that will be activated when a red illumination condition exists and the
parking brake is released, or a red illumination condition exists and the transmission is not in park.
HELMET HOLDER
There will be two (2) Zico UHH -1 helmet holder bracket(s) provided in the cab. The brackets will provide
quick access and secure storage of the helmet(s). The bracket locatiou(s) will be determined at time of final
Page 22 of 92
inspection at Pierce mfg
CAB WARRANTY
Limited Warranty
Except as provided below, and provided the vehicle will have been placed in service within 60 days after
delivery to the original purchaser as established by our original invoice, for a period of ten (10) years after
delivery to the original purchaser or the first 100,000 miles of use, whichever first occurs, Pierce
Manufacturing Inc. ( "Pierce ") warrants to the user that its custom fire and/or rescue vehicle cab are free of
defects in design or workmanship in the cab tubular support and mounting supports and other cab structural
components identified in Pierce specifications. This limited warranty will apply only if the vehicle is properly
maintained and used in service which is normal to the particular vehicle. Normal service means service which
does not subject the vehicle to stresses or impacts greater than normally result from the careful use of the
vehicle or chassis. If the buyer discovers a defect or nonconformity it must notify Pierce in writing within 30
days after the date of discovery. This limited warranty is not transferable by the first user.
A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT LIGHT
An engine compartment light will be installed under the engine hood, of which the switch is an integral ]rut.
Light will have a. 125" diameter hole in its lens to prevent moisture retention.
CAB INTERIOR LIGHTING
Auxiliary lights will be provided in the cab and consisting of:
- Two (2) Weldon, Model 8091, red/clear dome light located, one (1) on the officer side and one (1) on the
driver side, controlled by the following:
Clear forward light controlled by the door switch and the lens switch.
Red rearward light controlled by the lens switch.
- Two (2) Adjustable Map Lights: With switches mounted on the cab ceiling.
CREW CAB INTERIOR LIGHTING
Auxiliary lights will be provided in the crew cab and consist of:
- Two (2) Weldon, Model 8081, Red/Clear dome lights located one (1) each side, controlled by the following:
Clear forward fight controlled by the door switch and the lens switch.
Red rearward light controlled by the lens switch.
- A courtesy light at each door opening, controlled by automatic door switches
STEP LIGHTS
For reduced overall maintenance costs compared to incandescent lighting, there will be four (4) Ritar,
Model M27HW2, LED, step fights provided. The lights will be installed at each cab and crew cab door,
one (1) per step, in the driver side front doorstep, driver side crew cab doorstep, passenger side front
doorstep and passenger side crew cab doorstep.
The lights will be activated when the adjacent door is opened.
CAB DEFROSTER
There will be a 41,000 BTU/hr defroster in the cab located under the engine tunnel.
Page 23 of 92
The defroster ventilation will be built into the design of the cab dash instrument panel and will be easily
removable for maintenance.
The defroster will have a three (3) speed blower, and temperature controls accessible to the driver and officer.
The defroster ducts will be designed to provide maximum defrosting capabilities for the front cab windows.
CAS /CREW CAB HEATER
Two (2) auxiliary heaters with 32,000 BTU/hr each will be provided in the cab. The heaters will have a three
(3) speed blower, and temperature controls accessible to the driver and officer. There will also be louvers
located below the rear facing seat riser and below the driver and officer positions for airflow.
The heaters will be mounted, one (1) within each rear facing seat riser.
CC" DEFROSTER CERTIFICATION
Visibility during inclement weather is essential to safe apparatus performance. The defroster system will
clear the required windshield zones in accordance with SAE J381 Windshield Defrosting Systems Test
Procedure and Performance Requirements - 7Yucks, Buses, and Multipurpare Vehicles. The bidder 1" 11
certify that the defrost system design has been tested in a cold chamber and passes the SAE J381 criteria
CAB HEATER CERTIFICATION
Good cab heat performance and regulation provides a more effective working environment for personnel,
whether in- transit, or at a scene. The cab heaters will warm the cab 75 F from a cold -soak, within 30 minutes
when tested using the coolant supply methods found in SAE J381. The bidder will certify that a substantially
similar cab has been tested and has met these criteria.
AIR CONDITIONING HOUSINGS
The housings protecting the air conditioning units on either side of the cab will be fabricated from smooth
aluminum and painted to match the exterior of the cab roof, in place of the standard 4 -way aluminum.
AIR CONDITIONING
A high performance, customized air conditioning system will be furnished inside the cab and crew cab.
A 19.1 cubic inch compressor will be installed on the engine.
The air conditioning system will be capable of cooling the average cab temperature from 100 degrees
Fahrenheit to 78 degrees Fahrenheit within 30 minutes at 50% relative humidity. The cooling
performance test will be nm only after the cab has been heat soaked at 100 degrees Fahrenheit for a
minimum of 4 hours.
A combination condensor and evaporator with a BTU rating sufficient to meet the performance
specification will be installed on each side of the cab roof.
The evaporator unit will have a BTU rating sufficient to meet and exceed the performance specifications.
Adjustable air outlets will be strategically located on the evaporator cover as follows:
Two (2) will be directed towards the drivers location
Two (2) will be directed towards the officers location
Eight (8) will be directed towards the crew cab area
The air conditioner refrigerant will be R- 134A, installed by a certified technician.
The air conditioner will be controlled by a single electronic control panel. For ease of operation, the
Page 24 of 92
control panel will include variable adjustment for temperature and fan control and be conveniently
located on the dash in clear view of the driver. The control panel will include robust knobs for both fan
speed and temperature adjustment.
INTERIOR CAB INSULATION
The cab will be insulated with 1.50" insulation in the ceiling and side walls, 2.00" in the rear wall, and
1.00" insulation on the slant of a raised roof to reduce beat transfer into the cab.
The insulation will be covered with a vinyl liner or a metal panel painted to match the interior.
An additional red warning light will be installed to the side of the exterior air conditioning housing. The light
will match the upper zone lighting package to meet NFPA requirements.
CAB INSTRUMENTATION
The cab instrument panel will include gauges, telltale indicator lamps, control switches, alarms, and a
diagnostic panel. The function of the instrument panel controls and switches will be identified by a label
adjacent to each item. Actuation of the headlight switch will illuminate the labels in low light conditions.
Telltale indicator lamps will not be illuminated unless necessary. The cab instruments and controls will be
conveniently located within the forward cab section, forward of the driver. The gauge assembly and switch
panels are designed to be removable for ease of service and law cost of ownership.
GAUGES
The gauge panel will include the following nine (9) black faced gauges with black bezels to monitor vehicle
performance:
Vohmeter gauge (volts):
Low volts (11.8 VDC)
Amber telltale light on indicator light display with steady tone alarm
High volts (15.5 VDC)
Amber telltale light on indicator light display with steady tone alarm
Engine Tachometer (RPM)
Speedometer MPH
Fuel level gauge (Empty - Full in fractions):
Low fuel (1/8 full)
Amber telltale light on indicator light display with steady tone alarm
Engine Oil pressure Gauge (PSI)
Low oil pressure to activate engine warning lights and alarms
Red telltale light on indicator light display with steady tone alarm
Front Air Pressure Gauges (PSI)
Low air pressure to activate warning lights and alarm
Red telltale light on indicator light display with steady tone alarm
Rear Air Pressure Gauges (PSI)
Low air pressure to activate warning lights and alarm
Red telltale light on indicator light display with steady tone alarm
Transmission Oil Temperature Gauge (Fahrenheit):
High transmission oil temperature activates warning lights and alarm
Amber telltale light on indicator light display with steady tone alarm
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge (Fahrenheit):
High engine temperature activates an engine warning light and alarms
Red telltale light on indicator light display with steady tone alarm
MICATOR LAMPS
Page 25 of 92
To promote safety, the following telltale indicator lamps will be located on the instrument panel in clear view of
the driver. The indicator lamps will be "dead - front" design that is only visible when active. The colored
indicator lights will have descriptive text or symbols.
The following amber telltale lamps will be present:
Low coolant
Trac cntl (traction control) (where applicable)
Check engine
Check trans (check transmission)
Air rest (air restriction)
Driver door open
Passenger door open
Tower (tower raised) (where applicable)
DPF (engine diesel particulate filter regeneration)
HET (engine high exhaust temperature) (where applicable)
ABS (antilock brake system)
MIL (engine emissions system malfunction indicator lamp) (where applicable)
Regen inhibit (engine emissions regeneration inhibit) (where applicable)
Trans temp (transmission temperature)
Side roll fault (where applicable)
Front air bag fault (where applicable)
Aux brake overheat (auxiliary brake overheat) (where applicable)
The following red telltale lamps will be present:
Ladder rack down
Parking brake
Stop engine
The following green telltale lamps will be present:
Left turn
Right turn
Battery on
Ignition
Aux brake (auxiliary brake engagedxwhere applicable)
The following blue telltale lamps will be present:
High beam
ALARMS
Audible steady tone warning alarm: A steady audible tone alarm will be provided whenever a warning message
is present.
INDICATOR LAMP AND ALARM PRO VE -OUT
A system will be provided which automatically tests telltale indicator lights and alarms located on the cab
instrument panel. Telltale indicators and alarms will perform prove-out when the ignition switch is held in the
up position for 3 -5 seconds to ensure proper performance.
CONTROL SWITCHES
For ease of use, the following controls will be provided immediately adjacent to the cab instrument panel within
easy reach of the driver. All switches will have backlit labels for low light applications.
Headlight/Parking light switch: A three (3) position maintained rocker switch will be provided. The
fast switch position will deactivate all parking and headlights. The second switch position will
activate the parking lights. The third switch will activate the headlights..
Panel backlighting intensity control switch: A variable voltage control switch will bs provided. The
Page 26 of 92
switch moved in the up direction increases the panel backlighting intensity to a maximum and the
switch moved in a down direction decreases the panel backlighting intensity to a minimum level.
Ignition switch: A three (3) position maintained(maintained/momentary rocker switch will be
provided. The fast switch position will deactivate vehicle ignition. The second switch position will
activate vehicle ignition. The third momentary position will perform prove -out on the telltale
indicators and alarms when the ignition switch is held in the up position for 3 -5 seconds to ensure
proper performance. A green indicator lamp is activated with vehicle ignition.
Engine start switch: A two (2) position momentary rocker switch will be provided. The fast switch
position is the default switch position. The second switch position will activate the vehicle's engine.
The switch actuator is designed to prevent accidental activation.
Hazard switch will be incorporated into the steering column.
Heater and defroster controls.
Turn signal arm: A self - canceling turn signal with high beam headlight controls.
Windshield wiper control will have high, low, and intermittent modes.
Parking brake control: An air actuated push/pull park brake control.
Chassis horn control: Activation of the chassis horn control will be provided through the center of the
steering wheel.
CUSTOM SWITCH PANELS
The design of cab instrumentation will allow for emergency lighting and other switches to be placed within easy
reach of the operator thus improving safety. There will be positions for up to three (3) switch panels in the
overhead console on the driver's side, up to five (5) switch panels in the engine tunnel console, and up to three
(3) switch panels in the overhead console on the officer's side. All switches have backlit labels for low light
applications.
High idle engagement switch: A maintained rocker switch with integral indicator lamp will be
provided. The switch will activate and deactivate the high idle function. The OK TO ENGAGE
HIGH IDLE indicator lamp must be active for the high idle function to engage. A green indicator
lamp integral to the high idle engagement switch will indicate when the high idle function is engaged.
OK to high idle indicator lamp: A green indicator light will be provided next to the high idle
activation switch to indicate that the interlocks have been met to allow high idle engagement.
Diesel particulate filter regeneration switch (where applicable)
Diesel particulate filter regeneration inhibit switch (where applicable)
DIAGNOSTIC PANEL
A diagnostic panel will be accessible while standing on the ground and will be located inside the driver's side
door left of the steering column. The diagnostic panel will allow diagnostic tools such as computers to connect
to various vehicle systems for improved troubleshooting providing a lower cost of ownership. Diagnostic
switches will allow engine and ABS systems to provide blink codes should a problem exist. The diagnostic
panel will include the following:
Engine diagnostic port
Transmission and ABS diagnostic port
Page 27 of 92
Roll sensor diagnostic port
Engine diagnostic switch (blink codes flashed on check engine telltale indicator)
ABS diagnostic switch (blink codes flashed on ABS telltale indicator).
Air Restriction Indicator (electronic with indicator light).
WIPER CONTROL
Wiper control will consist of a two (2) -speed individual windshield wiper control with intermittent feature and
windshield washer controls. The control will also have a "return to park" provision, which allows the wipers to
return to the stored position when the wipers are not in use.
WINDSHIELD WIPER DURABILITY CERTIFICATION
Visibility during inclement weather is essential to safe apparatus performance. Windshield wipers will survive
a 3 million cycle durability test in accordance with section 6.2 of SAE J198 Windshield Wiper Systems - Trucks
Buses and Multipurpose Vehicles. The bidder will certify that the wiper system design has been tested and that
the wiper system has met these criteria.
- Ammeter.
HOURMETER - AERIAL DEVICE
A hourmeter for the aerial device will be provided and located within the cab display or instrument panel.
AERIAL MASTER
There will be a master switch for the aerial operating electrical system provided.
LABEL, EMERGENCY LIGHT SWITCHES
The emergency light switch labels will have the "NFPA" text omitted. Each switch will be labeled for its
normal function (example: Roof Light, Front Warning, etc.).
RADIO WITH CD PLAYER
A Panasonic AMIFM/Weatherband stereo radio with compact disc player and a jack for a MP -3 player will be
installed.
The compact disc stereo radio will be mounted within reach of the driver.
The quantity and location of the speakers will be one (I) pair of 5.25" speakers located in the cab and one (1)
pair of 5.25' speakers located in the crew cab.
The type and location of the antenna will be a roof - mounted rubber antenna located in an open space, on the cab
roof
This radio will be installed without remote control.
SWIVEL MOUNT
There will be one (1) Johnny Ray, Model 203 swivel mount bracket(s) provided for the fire department's radio
equipment. The swivel mount bracket(s) will be located at center of ceiling.
RADIO ANTENNA MOUNT
An antenna - mounting base, Model MATM, with 17 feet of coax cable and weatherproof cap will be provided
for a two -way radio. The mount will be located on the cab roof just to the rear of the officer seat. The cable
will be routed to the seat box on the officer side with enough cable for customer to route to the instrument panel
if needed.
Page 28 of 92
SWITCH PANELS
The built -in emergency light switch panel will have a master switch plus individual switches for selective
control. The switch panel will be located in the "overhead" position above the windshield on the driver's side to
allow for easy access. Switches will be rocker type with an indicator light, of which is an integral part of the
switch.
ELECTRICAL POWER CONTROL SYSTEM
A compartment will be provided in or under the cab to house the vehicles electrical power and signal circuit
protection and control components. The power and signal protection and control compartment will contain
circuit protection devices and power control devices. Power and signal protection and control components will
be protected against corrosion, excessive heat, excessive vibration, physical damage and water spray.
Serviceable components will be readily accessible.
Circuit protection devices, which conform to SAE standard, will be utilized to protect each circuit. All circuit
protection devices will be sized to prevent wire and component damage when subjected to extreme current
overload. General protection circuit breakers will be Type -I automatic reset (continuously resetting) and
conform to SAE J553 or 1258. PTO power circuits will be protected by Type III manual reset non - cycling
circuit breakers conforming to SAE J553 or J258 which remain open until manually reset. When required,
automotive type fuses conforming to SAE 1554, J 1284, J1888 or J2077 will be utilized to protect electronic
equipment.
Power control relays and solenoids will have a direct current (dc) rating of 125 percent of the maximum current
for which the circuit is protected.
Visual status indicators will be supplied to identify control safety interlocks and vehicle status. In addition to
visual status indicators, audible alarms designed to provide early warning of problems before they become
critical will be used.
VOLTAGE MONITOR SYSTEM
A voltage monitor system will be provided to indicate the status of each battery system connected to the
vehicles electrical load. The monitor system will provide visual and audio warning when the system voltage is
above or below optimum levels.
POWER AND GROUND STUD
A 12 -volt power stud and a grounding stud will be provided in the electrical component compartment for 2 -way
radio equipment.
EMI/RFI PROTECTION
The electrical system proposed will include means to control undesired electromagnetic and radio frequency
emissions. State of the art electrical system design and components will be used to insure radiated and
conducted EMI (electromagnetic interference) and RFI (radio frequency interference) emissions are suppressed
at their source.
The apparatus proposed will have the ability to operate in the electromagnetic environment typically found in
fire ground operations. The contractor will be able to demonstrate the EMI and RFI testing has been done on
similar apparatus and certifies that the vehicle proposed meets SAE J551 requirements.
EMIIRFI susceptibility will be controlled by applying immune circuit designs, shielding, twisted pair wiring
and filtering. The electrical system will be designed for full compatibility with low level control signals and
high powered 2 -way radio communication systems. Harness and cable routing will be given careful attention to
Page 29 of 92
minimize the potential for conducting and radiated EMI -RFI susceptibility.
INFORMATION CENTER
An information center employing a T' diagonal color LCD display will be encased in an ABS plastic
housing.
The information center will have the following specifications:
- Operate in temperatures from 40 to 185 degrees F
- An Optical Gel will be placed between the LCD and protective lens
- Five weather resistant user interface switches
- Black enclosure with gray decal
- Sunlight Readable
- Linux operating system
- Minimum of 400nits rated display
OPERATION
The information center will be designed for easy operation for everyday use.
The page button will cycle from one screen to the next screen in a rotating fashion.
A video button will allow a NTSC signal into the information center to be displayed on the LCD.
Pressing any button while viewing a video feed will reMm the information center to the vehicle
information screens.
A menu button will provide access to maintenance, setup and diagnostic screens.
All other button labels will be specific to the information being viewed.
GENERAL SCREEN DESIGN
Where possible, background colors will be used to provide "At a Glance" vehicle information. If
information provided on a screen is within acceptable limits, a green background will be used. If a
caution or warning situation arises the following will occur:
- An amber background/text color will indicate a caution condition.
- A red background/text color will indicate a warning condition.
Every screen will include the following:
- Exterior Ambient Temperature
- Time (12 or 24 hour mode)
- Text Alert Center:
- The information center will utilize an "Alert Center" to display text messages for audible
alarm tones. The text messages will be written to identify the item(s) causing the audible
alarm to sound. If more then one (1) text message occurs, the messages will cycle every
second until the problem(s) have been resolved. The background color for the "Alert Center"
will change to indicate the severity of the "waming" message. If a warning and a caution
condition occur simultaneously, the red background color will be shown for all alert center
messages.
- Button Labels: A label for each button will exist. The label will indicate the function for
each active button for each screen. Buttons that are not utilized on specific screens will have
a button label with no text.
PAGE SCREENS
The Information center will include the following screens: '
Page 30 of 92
Load Manager Screen: A list of items to be load managed will be provided. The list will
provide: ,
Description of the load
Individual load shed priority: The lower the priority number the earlier the device
will be shed should a low voltage condition occur.
- Load Status: The screen will indicate if a load has been shed (disabled) or not shed.
"At a Glance" color features are utilized on this screen
Do Not Move Truck: The Do Not Move Truck screen will indicate the approximate location
and type of item that is open or is not stowed for travel. The actual status of the following
devices will be indicated:
- Driver Side Cab Door
- Passenger's Side Cab Door
- Driver Side Crew Cab Door
- Passenger's Side Crew Cab Door
- Driver Side Body Doors
- Passenger's Side Body Doors
- Rear Body Door(s)
- Ladder Rack (if applicable)
- Deck Gun (if applicable)
- Light Tower (if applicable)
- Hatch Door (if applicable)
- Stabilizers (if applicable)
- Steps (if applicable)
- Any other device that is opened, extended, or deployed that creates a hazard or is
likely to cause damage to the apparatus if the apparatus is moved, will cause an
"Alert Center" message if the parking brake is disengaged.
Chassis Information: The following information will be shown:
- Engine RPM
- Fuel Level
- Battery Voltage
- Engine Coolant Temperature
- Engine Oil Pressure
"At a Glance" color features are utilized on this screen
Active Alarms List: This screen will show a list of all active tent messages. The list items tent
will match the text messages shown in the "Alert Center'. The date and time the message
occurred is displayed with each message in the list
MENU SCREENS
The following screens will be available through the Menu button:
View System Information: A detailed list of vehicle information:
- Battery Volts
- Pump Hours
- Transmission Oil Temperature
- Pump Engaged
- Engine Coolant Level
- Engine Oil Level
- Oil level will only be shown when the engine is not running
Page 31 of 92
- Power Steering Level
Set daytime and nighttime Display Brightness:
- Brightness: Increase and decrease
- Default setting button
Configure Video Mode:
- Set Video Contrast
- Set Video Color
- Set Video Tint
Set Startup Screen:
- Choose the screen that will be active at vehicle power -up
Set Date & Time:
- 12 or 24 hour format
- Set time
- Set date
View Active Alarms:
- Shows a list of all active alarms
- Date Date and time of the occurrence is shown with each alarm - Silence alarms
- All alarms are silenced
System Diagnostics:
- Module type and ID number
- Module version
- Module diagnostics information:
- Input or output number
- Circuit number connected to that input or output
- Circuit name (item connected to the circuit)
- Status of the input or output
- Power and Constant Current module diagnostic information
Button functions and button labels may change with each screen.
VEHICLE DATA RECORDER
A vehicle data recorder (VDR) will be provided. The VDR will be capable of reading and storing vehicle
information. The VDR will be capable of operating in a voltage range from 8VDC to 16 VDC. The VDR will
not interfere with, suspend, or delay any communications that may exist on the CAN data link during the power
up, initialization, runtime, or power down sequence. The VDR will continue operation upon termination of
Power or at voltages below 8VDC for a minimum of lOms.
The vehicle data recorder will be capable of recording the following data via hardwired and/or CAN inputs:
Vehicle Speed - Mpg
Acceleration - MPWsec
Deceleration - . MPH/sec
Engine Speed - RPM
Engine Throttle Position - % of Full Throttle
ABS Event- On/Off
Seat Occupied Status - Yes/No by Position (7 -12 Seating Capacity)
Page 32 of 92
Seat Belt Buckled Status -
Master Optical Warning Device Switch
Time -
Date -
YesMo by Position (7 -12 Seating Capacity)
On/Off
24 Hour Time
Year/MondvDay
INTERCOM SYSTEM
A ten (10) position, David Clark, model U3800, intercom system with radio interface at three (3) positions will
be provided. The driver, officer, six (6) crew cab, turntable, and tiller cab locations will have intercom
capability. The driver, officer, and turntable will have radio interface capability.
- Driver position will have radio interface capability.
- Officer position will have radio interface capability.
- Turntable position will have radio interface capability.
- Six (6) Crew will have intercom only
- One (1) Tiller Cab will have intercom only
The following components will be supplied with this system:
- One (1) -U3800 Intercom Unit (2 Crew).
- Two (2 )-U3806 Dual Headset Intercom Stations (4 Crew).
- One (1 )-U38IS Radio Interface Module (Officer).
- One (1 )-U3811 Radio Interface Module (Driver).
- One (1)- U3815A Radio Interface Module (pump panel).
- One (I )-U3801 Intercom Only Single Headset Module (Tiller Cab).
- Two (2)-C3023 Headset Belt Station (Turntable, Tiller Cab).
- Seven (7)-H3342. Headsets. (Officer, 6 Crew).
- One (1) -H3341 Single Ear Headsets. (Driver/Tumtable).
- One (1) -U3805 Radio Cord Junction Module.
- Eight (8) Headset Hangar Hooks
All necessary cables and connectors will be provided.
RADIO INTERFACE
Due to the combination of the mobile radio and the brand of intercom system, a mobile radio interface adapter
is not required for this application.
CAB ROOF COVERING
Horizontal cab roof surfaces will be covered with bright aluminum treadplate. Edges and fastening screws will
Page 33 of 92
be properly caulked to prevent water from leaking under aluminum. Front and side warning lights will not be
mounted on top of treadplate. The treadplate will extend and terminate next to the warning lights.
BATTERY SYSTEM
Six (6) 12 volt, Deka Model 1131 XMF batteries that include the following features will be provided:
-1000 CCA (cold cranking amps)
- 185 reserve capacity
- High cycle
- Maintenance free
- Group 31
- Rating of 6000 CCA at 0 degrees Fahrenheit
- 1110 minutes of reserve capacity
- Threaded posts
BATTERY SYSTEM
A single starting system will be provided.
An ignition switch and starter button will be located on the instrument panel.
MASTER BATTERY SWITCH
A master battery switch, to activate the battery system, will be provided inside the cab within easy reach of the
driver.
An indicator light will be provided on the instrument panel to notify the driver of the status of the battery
system.
BATTERY COMPARTMENTS
Batteries will be placed on non - corrosive mats and be stored in well - ventilated compartments located under the
cab. The battery hold -downs will be of a non - corrosive material. All bolts and nuts will be stainless steel.
Heavy -duty battery cables will be used to provide maximum power to the electrical system. Cables will be
color- coded.
Battery terminal connections will be coated with anticorrosion compound. Battery solenoid terminal
connections will be encapsulated with semi - permanent rubberized compound.
There will be a door in the crew cab floor to provide access to the battery terminals.
JUMPER STUDS
One (1) set of battery jumper studs with plastic color -coded covers will be installed on the front side of battery
box on the driver's side. This will allow enough room for easy jumper cable access. A tag will be provided for
positive/negative terminals.
BATTERY CHARGER
A Newmar model PT-40, three stage battery charger, will be provided. A Newmar DC Volt Meter, model DCV
indicating the state of charge will be included.
The vehicle battery output will be capable of supplying up to 40 amps for charging the batteries.
The battery charger will be wired to the 120 -volt shoreline to activate automatically when the power is
connected.
Page 34 of 92
Battery charger will be located in the front left body compartment, mounted Compartment behind cab.
The battery charger indicator will be located on the driver's seat riser.
CHARGING INDICATOR
A green indicator light, remote mounted next to the battery charger receptacle, will be provided. The light will
indicate when the battery charging receptacle is active.
DUAL ALTERNATORS
A pair of Leece - Neville 270 amp alternators will be provided. They will have a rated output current of 540
amps, as measured by SAE method J56. The alternators will feature an integral, fail -safe regulator and rectifier.
The alternators will be connected to the power and ground distribution system with heavy -duty cables sized to
carry the full rated alternator output.
RADIO ANTENNA MO NTS
There will be three (3) antenna mounting bases, Model MATM with 25 feet of coax cable and weatherproof
caps provided.
The mounts will be located cab roof.
The cable will be routed across roof behind ligbtbar.
SPEAKERS
There will be one (1) radio speakers with volume control provided. Wiring will be routed from the speakers
and volume control to Flush mount in tiller cab drivers side. Speakers will be located N /A.
SPARE CIRCUIT
There will be four (4) pair of wires, including a positive and a negative, installed on the apparatus.
The above wires will have the following features:
The positive wire will be connected directly to the battery power.
The negative wire will be connected to ground.
Wires will be protected to 15 amps at 12 volts DC.
Power and ground will terminate 2 at rear forward facibg seats and 2 at dash at Driver and
Officer.
Termination will be with 15 amp, power point plug with rubber cover.
Wires will be sized to 125% of the protection.
This circuit(s) may be load managed when the parking brake is set.
SPARE CIRCUIT
There will be two (2) pair of wires, including a positive and a negative, installed on the apparatus.
The above wires will have the following features:
The positive wire will be connected directly to the battery power.
The negative wire will be connected to ground.
Wires will be protected to 15 amps at 12 volts DC.
Power and ground will terminate 2 on back of engine doghouse.
Termination will be with 15 amp, power point plug with rubber cover.
Page 35 of 92
Wires will be sized to 125% of the protection.
This circuit(s) may be load managed when the parking brake is set.
SPARE CIRCUIT
There will be four (4) pair of wires, including a positive and a negative, installed on the apparatus.
The above wires will have the following features:
The positive wire will be connected directly to the battery power.
The negative wire will be connected to ground.
Wires will be protected to 15 amps at 12 volts DC.
Power and ground will terminate at base of each rear facing EMS Compartment.
Termination will be with six (6) position terminal strip.
Wins will be sized to 125% of the protection.
This circuits) may be load managed when the parking brake is set.
SPARE CIRCUIT
There will be two (2) pair of wires, including a positive and a negative, installed on the apparaamS.
The above wires will have the following features:
The positive wire will be connected directly to the battery power.
The negative wire will be connected to ground.
Wires will be protected to 20 amps at 12 volts D4
Power and ground will terminate Behind each seat driver and officer.
Termination will be with six (6) position terminal strip.
'Wires will be sized to 125% of the protection.
This circuit(s) may be load managed when the parking brake is set.
ELECTRONIC LOAD MANAGEMENT
A Kussmaul electronic load management (ELM) system will be provided that monitors the vehicles 12 -volt
electrical system, and automatically reduces the electrical load in the event of a low voltage condition and by
doing so, ensures the integrity of the electrical system.
The BLM will monitor the vehicles voltage while at the scene (parking brake applied). It will sequentially shut
down individual electrical loads when the system voltage drops below a preset value. Ten (10) separate
electrical loads will be controlled by the load manager. The ELM will sequentially re- energize electrical loads
as the system voltage recovers.
The (ELM) will also include a sequencer function which will be used to enable channels 1 -5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10.
The (ELM) will sequentially re- energize electrical loads as the system voltage recovers.
SEOUENCER
A warning light sequencer will be provided that automatically turns the emergency lights on and off in a preset
sequence.
The sequencer will be wired in conjunction with the emergency master light switch.
When the switch is activated the lights will be turned on in sequence one by one at 1/2 second intervals thereby
Page 36 of 92
protecting the alternator from power surges. When turned off the same process will deactivate the warning
lights in sequence to allow a gradual decrease in alternator output, rather than dumping the load.
AMP DRAW REPORT
The bidder will provide, at the time of bid and delivery, an itemized print out of the expected amp draw of the
entire vehicle's electrical system.
The manufacturer of the apparatus will provide the following:
1) Documentation of the electrical system performance tests.
2) A written load analysis, which will include the following:
A) The nameplate rating of the alternator.
B) The alternator rating under the conditions specified per.
Applicable NFPA 1901 or 1906 (Current Edition).
C) The minimum continuous load of each component that is specified per:
Applicable NFPA 1901 or 1906 (Current Edition).
D) Additional loads that, when added to the minimum continuous load, determine the total connected
load.
E) Each individual intermittent load. -
All of the above listed items will be provided by the.bidder per the applicable NFPA 1901 or 1906 (Current
Edition).
EXTERIOR LIGHTIN
Exterior lighting will meet or exceed Federal Department of Transportation, Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards and National Fire Protection Association requirements in effect at time of proposal.
Front headlights will be halogen, rectangular shape, one (1) pair mounted in each front trim housing.
The LED directional lights will wrap -around on the outside corners of the trim housing. The headlight and
LED directional lights will be in the same assembly.
Five (5) LED clearance and marker lights will be installed across the leading edge of the cab.
WARNIN G LIGHTS (Cab )Face]
Two (2) pair of Whelen model 60 "OOF'R LED lights will be installed on the cab face, above the headlights,
mounted in a common bezel.
The outer LEDS will be required for NFPA and will meet or exceed the NFPA required light output for the
front lower zone.
The color of these LEDs will be red Super LED /red lens.
The inner LEDs will be additional ligbting.
The color of these lights will be red Super LED /red lens.
Both sets of lights will be activated by the same switch in the cab.
BACK -DP ALARM
An ECCO, Model SA917 -PM2, solid -state electronic audible back -up alarm that actuates when the truck is
Page 37 of 92
shifted into reverse will be provided. The device will sound at 60 pulses per minute and automatically adjust its
volume to maintain a minimum five (5) dBA above surrounding environmental noise levels.
MANUAL, FIRE APPARATUS PARTS
Two (2) custom parts manuals for the complete fire apparatus will be provided in hard copy with the completed
unit.
One (1) compact disc (CD) will also be provided that will include all of the information from the above manual.
The manual will contain the following:
- lob number
- Part numbers with full descriptions
- Table of contents
- Parts section sorted in functional groups reflecting a major system, component, or assembly
- Parts section sorted in Alphabetical order
- Instructions on how to locate a parts
The manual will be specifically written for the chassis and body model being purchased. It will not be a generic
manual for a multitude of different chassis and bodies.
SERVICE PARTS INTERNET SITE
The service parts information included in this manual is also available on the Pierce website. The website
offers additional functions and features not contained in this manual, such as digital photographs and line
drawings of select items. The website also features electronic search tools to assist in locating parts quickly.
MANUALS. CHASSIS SERVICE
Two (2) chassis service manuals containing parts and service information on major components will be
provided with the completed unit.
One (1) compact disk (CD) will also be provided that will include all of the information from the above manual.
The manuals will contain the following sections:
- lob number
- Table of contents
- Troubleshooting
- Front Axle/Suspension
- Brakes
- Engine
- Tires
- Wheels
- Cab
- Electrical, DC
- Air Systems
- Plumbing
- Appendix
The manual will be specifically written for the chassis model being purchased. It will not be a generic manual
for a multitude of different chassis and bodies.
MANUALS. CHASSIS OPERATION
Pagc38 of92
Two (2) chassis operation manuals will be provided.
One (1) compact disk (CD) will also be provided that will include all of the information from the above manual
COMMAND ZONE WARRANTY
The Command Zone modules, membrane switches, and display(s) will be warranted against defective materials.
or workmanship for a period of five (5) years from the date of delivery to the original purchaser. The warranty
will also include a standard repair time for covered components.
A copy of the fire apparatus manufacturer's warranty will be included with the bid.
ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS
Two (2) electrical wiring diagrams, prepared for the model of chassis and body, will be provided.
HOSE RESTRAINT
The hose in the hosebed will be restrained by black nylon velcro straps at the top of the hosebed. The straps
will be installed at the top of the hosebed side sheets.
TOW EYES
Two (2) rear painted "tow" eyes will be located at the rear of the apparatus and will be mounted directly to the
torque box. The inner and outer edges of the tow eyes will be radiused.
COMPARTMENTATION
Body and compartments will be fabricated of .125', 5052 -1-132 aluminum with a tensile strength range of 31,000
to 38,000 psi. Side compartments will be an integral assembly with the rear fenders. Circular fender liners will
be provided for prevention of rust pockets and ease of maintenance. Compartment flooring will be of the sweep
out design with the floor higher than the compartment door lip. The compartment door opening will be framed
by flanging the edges in 1.75" and bending out again .75" to form an angle. Drip protection will be provided
above the doors by means of bright aluminum extrusion or formed bright aluminum treadplate. The top of the
compartment will be covered with bright aluminum treadplate rolled over the edges on the front, rear and
outward side. These covers will have the comers "TIG" welded. Side compartment covers will be separate
from the compartment tops. All screws and bolts which protrude into a compartment will have acorn nuts on.
the ends to prevent injury.
AGGRESSIVE WALKING SURFACE
All exterior surfaces designated as stepping, standing, and walking areas will comply with the required average
slip resistance of the current NFPA standards,
LOUVERS
All body compartments will have a minimum of one (1) set of louvers stamped into a wall to provide the proper
airflow inside the compartment and to prevent water from dripping into the compartment. These louvers will be
formed into the metal and not added to the compartment as a separate plate.
BODY WARRANTY
A copy of the fire apparatus manufacturer's warranty will be included with the bid. The warranty will state that
the body will be free of structural failures caused by defective design or workmanship for a warranty period of
ten (10) years from the date the new vehicle is first delivered or 100,000 miles, whichever occurs first and that
defective parts, under the warranty, will be repaired or replaced without charge to the original purchaser.
TRACTOR RESERVOIR COMPARTMENT
A compartment will be provided ahead of the tractor fifth wheel.
Page 39 of 92
The compartment will be 30.00" wide x 37.75" high x 8.00" deep. The door opening will be 25.50" wide x
31.25" high. The transverse section will be 19.38" wide x 15.50" high.
The compartment will be fabricated out of smooth aluminum painted job color. Bright aluminum treadplate
will be provided on the top of the compartment.
The compartment will be furnished with a vertically hinged, lap style compartment door on each side that have
a D handle latch and positive door hold open device.
COMPARTMENTATION. DRIVER SIDE
Driver side compartmentation will consist of the following:
T'wo (2) compartments will be provided in the front body section on the driver side. Each compartment
will be full- height.
The forward compartment will be 47.13" wide x 55.63" high x 24.50" deep with a door opening of
39.00" wide x 47.75" high.
The rear compartment will be 44.50" wide x 55.63" high x 24.50" deep with a door opening of 39.00"
wide x 47.75" high.
The upper 38.75" of each compartment will be transverse to the passenger side front compartmentation.
Both compartments will have roll-up doors.
Two (2) compartments will be provided in the center body section on the driver side. Each compartment
will be full- height.
The forward compartment will be 47.13" wide x 55.63" high x 24.50" deep with a door opening of
39.00" wide x 47.75" high.
The upper 38.75" of the forward compartment will be transverse to the passenger side front
compartmentation.
The rear compartment will be 44.50" wide x 55.63" high x 24.50" deep with a door opening of 39.00"
wide x 47.75" high.
Both compartments will have roll -up doors. -
Two (2) compartments will be provided in the rear body section on the driver side.
The forward compartment will be 69.00" wide x 49.63" high x 24.50" deep, with a door opening of
63.50" wide x 45.75" high. This compartment will be located ahead of the rear wheels.
The rearward compartment will be 49.00" wide x 49.63" high x 12.00" deep with a door opening of
43.50" wide x 45.75" high. This compartment will be located behind the rear wheels.
Both compartments will have roll -up doors.
Passenger side compartmentation will consist of the following:
Page 40 of 92
Two (2) compartments will be provided in the front body section on the passenger side. Each
compartment will be full- height.
The forward compartment will be 47.13" wide x 55.63" high x 24.50" deep with a door opening of
39.00" wide x 47.75" high.
The rear compartment will be 44.50" wide x 55.63" high x 24.50" deep with a door opening of 39.00"
wide x 47.75" high.
The upper 38.75" of each compartment will be transverse to the driver side front compartmentation.
Both compartments will have roll -up doors.
Two (2) compartments will be provided in the center body section on the passenger side. Each
compartment will be full- height.
The forward compartment will be 47.13" wide x 55.63" high x 24.50" deep with a door opening of
39.00" wide x 47.75' high.
The upper 38.75' of the forward compartment will be transverse to the driver side front
compartmemation.
The rear compartment will be 44.50" wide x 55.63" high x 24.50" deep with a door opening of 39,00"
wide x 47.75" high.
Both compartments will have roll -up doors.
Two (2) compartments shall be provided in the rear body section on the passenger side.
The forward compartment shall be 69.00" wide x 24.13" high x 24.50" deep, with a door opening of
63.50" wide x 18.75' high. This compartment shall be located ahead of the rear wheels.
The rearward compartment shall be 49.00" wide x 49.63" high x 12.00" deep with a door opening of
43.50" wide x 45.75' high. This compartment shall be located behind the rear wheels.
Both compartments shall have roll -up doors.
ROLL -UP DOOR
Twelve (12) compartment doors will be installed on the side compartments, double faced, aluminum
construction, painted one color to match the lower portion of the body and manufactued by A&A
Manufacturing (Gortite).
Lath sections will be an interlocldng rib design and will be individually replaceable without complete
disassembly of door.
Between each slat at the pivoting joint will be a PVC inner seal to prevent metal to metal contact and
prevent dirt or moisture from entering the compartments. Seals will allow door to operate in extreme
temperatures ranging from plus 180 to minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit. Side, top and bottom seals will be
provided to resist ingress of dirt and weather and be made of Santoprene.
All hinges, barrel clips and end pieces will be nylon 66. All nylon components will withstand
temperatures from plus 300 to minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit. Hardened plastic will not be acceptable.
Page 41 of 92
A polished stainless steel lift bar with locking key latches sball be provided for each roll -up door. The
keys sball be model #751 to match all compartment doors and cab doors. will be provided for opening
door. Lift bar will be located at the bottom of door and have latches on the outer extrusion of the doors
frame. A ]edge will be supplied over lift bar for additional area to aid in closing the door.
Doors will be constructed from an aluminum box section. The exterior surface of each slat will be flat
The interior surfaces will be concave to provide strength and prevent loose equipment from jamming the
door from inside.
To conserve space in the compartments, the spring roller assembly will not exceed 3.00" in diameter. A
roll -up door that retracts below the compartment ceiling (garage door style) will not acceptable.
The header for the roll -up door assembly will not exceed 4.00 ".
A heavy -duty magnetic switch will be used for control of "open compartment door" warning lights.
All mechanical components of the door will be warranted to be free from defects in materials and
workmanship for the lifetime of the vehicle. All parts covered trader this warranty will be to the original
owner.
Except as provided below, and provided the vehicle has been placed in service within 60 days after
delivery to the original purchaser as established by our original invoice, for a period of six (6) years after
delivery to the original purchaser, A &A Manufacturing Inc. ("A&A ") warrants to the user that its roll up
doors (if painted) are free of blistering, peeling, bubbling, or any other adhesion defect caused by
defective manufacturing methods or paint material selection for exterior surfaces.of the roll up doors.
This limited warranty will apply only if the vehicle is properly maintained and used in service which is
normal to the particular vehicle. Normal service means service, which does not subject the vehicle to
stresses or impacts greater than normally result from the careful use of the vehicle. If the buyer
discovers a defect or nonconformity, the buyer must notify Pierce in writing within 30 days after the date
of discovery. This limited warranty is not transferable by the first user and is applicable to the vehicle in
the following percentage costs of warranty repair, if any:
Months Adhesion Blistering Bubbling Corrosion Cracking Glass Color Retention
0 to 12
100%
100%
100%
100%
1000/0
100%
1000/0
13 to 24
100%
1000/0
100%
100%
l00%
100%
100%
25 to 36
100%
1000/0
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
37 to 48
5001a
500/0
50%
50%
100%
100%
1000/0
49 to 60
25%
25%
25%
25%
50%
50%
500/0
61 to 72
25%
25%
25%
25%
50%
50%
50 01c.
In addition, the door will also be warranted against corrosion perforation for a period of ten (10) years
DOOR GUARD
Twelve (12) compartment doors will include a guard/drip pan designed to protect the roll-up door from damage
when in the retracted position and contain any water spray. The guard will be fabricated from stainless steel
and installed at each roll up door.
KEYED LOCK(S)
A keyed lock will be furnished for Twelve (12) compartment doors. The compartmentation, to have a keyed
lock, will be All roll up doors.
Page 42 of 92
DOOR FRAME SCUFFPLATE
Thirteen (13) scuflplates will be provided for the lower door frame(s) all roll ups and rear ladder compartment.
Each scuffplate will be brushed stainless steel with a .38" lip down.
PULL -OUT TRAY
There will six (6) slide -out trays, without sides, and a capacity of 500 pounds provided. Capacity rating will be
in the extended position.
Slides will be General Device ball bearing type for ease of operation and years of dependable service.
Automatic locks will be provided for both the "in" and "out" positions. The trip mechanism for it will be
located at the front of the tray for ease of use with a gloved hand.
Tray location will be D3, D4, D5 and P3, 134, P5.
Heavy -duty steel angle iron assembly will support the body under the compartment floor. It will be attached to
the chassis frame for load transfer and to reduce stress on body.
PULL-OUT TRAY
There will be two (2) slide -out trays with 2.00" sides and a capacity of 500 pounds provided. Capacity rating
will be in the extended position.
Slides will be General Device ball bearing type for ease of operation and years of dependable service.
Automatic locks will be provided for both the "in" and "out' positions. The trip mechanism for it will be
located at the front of the tray for ease of use with a gloved hand.
Tray location will be TBD.
Heavy -duty steel angle iron assembly will support the body under the compartment floor. It will be attached to
the chassis frame for load transfer and to reduce stress on body.
PULL-OUT ADJUSTABLE HEIGHT TRAY
There will be two (2) slide -out trays with 2.00" sides and a capacity of 500 pounds provided. Capacity rating
will be in the extended position.
Slides will be Jonathan brand with ball bearings for ease of operation and years of dependable service.
Tray location will be To be determined
Automatic locks will be provided for both the "in" and "out'. positions. The trip mechanism for it will be
located at the fiont of the tray for ease of use with a gloved hand
Each tray will be adjustable up and down within the compartment.
TWO (2)-WAY UTILITY TRAY
There will be two (2) slide -out trays provided.
The capacity rating will be 500 pounds minimum in the extended position.
Interior tray dimensions will be 85.00" long x 4.00" deep x as wide as possible for the compartment
Page 43 of 92
Tray will slide out to either side of the vehicle; two - thirds (2/3) of its length.
The vertical location of the tray within the compartment will be adjustable.
The construction will consist of .188" thick aluminum for the tray bottom, and special aluminum extrusions for
the trey sides, end, and hacks.
Comers will be welded to form a rigid unit.
Tray will be supported with a minimum of six (6) ball bearing rollers; each rated for a minimum 500 pound
load.
Automatic locks will be provided for both the in and out tray positions.
to be determined.
CABINET
one (1) cabinet(s) with motion latch aluminum drawers will be provided.
Each cabinets will include four (4) drawers.
The cabinet(s) will have two (2) drawers that are 3.00" tall and two (2) drawers that are 6.00" tall. The drawers
will be stacked one above the other, starting with the 6.00" drawers on the bottom.
The color of the cabinet(s) will be grey.
Tlie location of the cabinet(s) will be Compartment D -6 Drivers side next to air kwik and next to divider.
PARTITION VERTICAL COMPARTMENT
Two (2) partitions will be bolted in D -5 /P-5. Each partition will be the full vertical height of the compartment.
FLOOR EXTENSION
There will be a compartment floor extension provided.
frame rails to within an inch of the compartment door.
1.00" return flange.
A total of one (1) will be provided and located D -6 P -6.
The floor extension will extend from the area over the
The floor extension will have a 2.00" vertical lip and a
TROUGH. STORAGE
A trough shall be provided to store a stokes basket in above compartment D -2. The trough shall be
approximately 80.00" long x 1.00" high x 25.00" wide. The trough shall transverse from one side of the body to
the other.
The trough shall be fabricated from smooth aluminum and have a treadplate, drop down door on each end.
ADJUSTABLE SHELVES
There will be six (6) shelves, with a minimum capacity of 215 pounds provided. The shelf construction will
consist of. 125" pan- shaped aluminum with 2.00" sides. Each shelf will be infinitely adjustable by means of a
threaded fastener, which slides in a track.
The location will be to be determined.
Page 44 of 92
MOUNTING TRACKS
There will be twelve (12) sets of tracks for mounting sbelf(s) in 1 set tracks in each compartment. These tracks
will be installed vertically to support the adjustable shelf(s).
RUB RAIL
Bottom edge of the side compartments will be trimmed with a bright aluminum extruded rub rail.
Trim will be 2.12" high with 1.38" flanges turned outward for rigidity.
The rub rails will not be an integral part of the body construction, which allows replacement in the event of
damage.
BODY FENDER CROWNS
Stainless steel fender crowns will be provided around the rear wheel openings. These fender crowns must be
wide enough to prevent splashing onto the body from the 315/801122.5 tires on a 30,000it rear axle.
A rubber welting will be provided between the body and the crown to sea] the seam and restrict moisture from
entering.
A dielectric barrier will be provided between the fender crown fasteners (screws) and the fender sheet metal to
prevent corrosion.
AR BOTTLE STORAGE BIN
A storage bin will be provided for storage of ten (10) air bottles. This storage bin will be installed P -2. Each
separate air bottle storage compartment will be 7.50" square x 23.00" deep. The storage bin will be formed out
of aluminum and the flooring lined with rubber.
EXTENSION LADDER
There will be two (2) 35', two (2) section, aluminum, Duo- Safety, Series 1200 -A extension ladder(s) provided.
ADDED EXTENSION LADDER
There will be a 30', two (2) section, aluminum, Duo -Safety Series 1200A extension ladder provided.
EXTENSION LADDERS AERIAL, PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT
NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, section 8.7.2 requires two (2) extension ladders.
The extension ladders are not on the apparatus as manufactured There will be extension ladder(s) provided
and installed by the fire department. The ladder(s) will be a.
ROOF LADDER
There will be one (1) 16' aluminum, Duo - Safety, Series 875 -A roof ladder(s) provided.
ADDED ROOF LADDER
There will be one (1) 20'roof, aluminum, Series 875 -A provided.
FOLDING LADDER, AERIAL
There will be a 12' aluminum, Duo - Safety, Series 585 -A folding ladder provided.
GROUND LADDER STORAGE
The ground ladders will be stored within the torque box and be removable from the rear. Ladders will be
enclosed to prevent road dirt and debris from fouling or damaging the ladders. The ladders will rest in full -
length stainless steel slides and are arranged in such a manner that any one (1) ladder can be removed without
Page 45 of 92
having to move or remove any other ladder. A Gortite roll -up door will be provided at the rear, double faced,
aluminum construction, painted one color to match the lower portion of the body and manufactured by A&A
Manufacturing (Gortite). The latching mechanism will consist of a full length lift bar lock with latches on the
outer extrusion of the door Game.
A door guard will be provided to prevent tools inside the torque box from damaging the roll -up door.
An aluminum treadplate box, for a model 17 Lil' Giant ladder, will he mounted above body with stoakesabove
D -2 and P -2. A velcm strap with footman loops will secure the ladder.
One (1) 10' aluminum, Series 585 -A Duo -Safety folding ladder will be installed in a U- shaped trough inside the
ladder storage compartment.
One Model 10102 Little Giant folding ladder will be provided. The stored dimensions will be 55.00" high x
24.50" wide x 8.00" deep. The weight will be 35 pounds.
PIKE POLES
There will be one (1) 12 foot pike pole(s) with fiberglass I -beam handles provided. The puce pole(s) will be
stored in tubular holders located in the ground ladder storage compartment.
PIKE POLES FT
There will be one (1) 8 foot pike pole(s) with fiberglass I beam handles provided. The pike pole(s) will be
stored in tubular holders located in the ground ladder storage compartment.
PIKE POLE 6 FT'
There will be one (1) 6 foot pike pote(s) with fiberglass I beam handles provided. The pike pole(s) will be
stored in tubular holders located in the ground ladder storage compartment.
PIKE POLE 3 FT
There will be one (1) 3 foot pike pole(s) with fiberglass shaft and "D" handles shipped loose.
- two (2) 10 foot Nupla Ventilation Hook(s): Fiberglass w / "D" handle
ROPE TIE DOWNS
two (2) pair of rope tie downs will be provided at the tiller trailer gooseneck area. Equal quantities will be
provided on each side.The tie downs will be rated for a maximum 6000 pounds.
ELECTRICAL
All 12 -volt electrical equipment installed by the apparatus manufacturer will conform to modern automotive
practices. All wiring will be high temperature type. Wiring will be run in loom, where exposed, and have
grommets where wire passes through sheet metal. Automatic reset circuit breakers will be provided which
conform to SAE Standards. Wiring will be color, function and number coded. Function and number codes will
be continuously imprinted on all wiring harness conductors at 2.00" intervals. Exterior exposed wire connectors
will be positive locking, and environmentally sealed to withstand elements such as temperature extremes,
moisture and automotive fluids.
Electrical wiring and equipment will be installed utilizing the following guidelines:
(1) All holes made in the roof will be caulked with silicon. Large fender washers, liberally caulked, will be
used when fastening equipment to the underside of the cab roof.
(2) Any electrical component that is installed in an exposed area will be mounted in a manner that will not
Page 46 of 92
allow moisture to accumulate in it Exposed area will be defined as any location outside of the cab or body.
(3) Electrical components designed to be removed for maintenance will not be fastened with nuts and bolts.
Metal screws will be used in mounting these devices. Also a coil of wire will be provided behind the appliance
to allow them to be pulled away from mounting area for inspection and service work.
(4) Corrosion preventative compound will be applied to all terminal plugs located outside of the cab or body.
All non - waterproof connections will requite this compound in the plug to prevent corrosion and for easy
separation (of the plug).
(5) AU lights that have their sockets in a weather exposed area will have corrosion preventative compound
added to the socket terminal area.
(6) All electrical terminals in exposed areas will have silicon (1890) applied completely over the metal portion
of the terminal. All emergency light switches will be mounted on a separate panel installed in the cab. A
master warning light switch and individual switches will be provided to allow pre - selection of emergency lights.
The light switches will be "rocker" type with an internal indicator light to show when switch is energized. All
switches will be properly identified and mounted in a removable panel for ease in servicing. Identification of
the switches will be done by either printing or etching on the switch panel. The switches and identification will
be illuminated.
All lights and reflectors, required to comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard # 108, will be
furnished. Rear identification lights will be recessed mounted for protection. Lights and wiring mounted in the
rear bulkheads will be protected from damage by installing a false bulkhead inside the rear compartments.
An operational test will be conducted to ensure that any equipment that is permanently attached to the electrical
system is properly connected and in working order.
The results of the tests will be recorded and provided to the purchaser at time of delivery.
STEP LIGHTS
There will be a total of sixteen (16) Ri -Tar, Model M27 -06HW2 Super LED step lights provided for
access to the tiller cab and turntable.
The step lights will be actuated by the aerial master switch in the cab.
All other steps on the apparatus will be illuminated per the current edition of NFPA 1901.
REAR FMVSS LIGHTING
The rear stopitail and directional LED lighting will consist of the following:
Two (2) Whelan model 60ROOXRR red LED stoptlad lights.
Two (2) Whelen model 6OA00TAR amber LED arrow turn lights.
Each light will be installed separately at the rear with a flange.
Four (4) red reflectors will be provided.
A Weldon, Model 23882 - 2600 -00, license plate bracket will be mounted on the driver's side above the warning
lights. A Weldon, Model 9186 - 23882 -30, step lamp will illuminate the license plate.
Two (2) Peterson, Model M -392, backup lights will be provided
Page 47 of 92
REAR ID/MARKER DOT LIGHTING
The three (3) identification lights located at the rear will be installed per the following:
Ri -Tar, Model M27, LED
As close as practical to the vertical centerline.
Centers spaced not less than six (6) inches or more than twelve (12) inches apart.
Red in color.
All at the same height.
The four (4) clearance lights located at the rear will be installed per the following:
Ri -Tar, Model M27, LED
To indicate the overall width of the vehicle.
One (1) each side of the vertical centerline.
All at the same height.
As near the top as practical.
To be visible from the rear and the side.
One (1) each side, facing the side.
One (1) each side, facing the rear.
Per FMVSS 108 and CMVSS 108 requirements.
MAP LIGHT
One (1) map light with goose neck with switch control on base of light will be provided. Each map light will be
a Sunnex, model 742, with red lens and be located pass side dash by A pillar. Each map light will be provided
with an 20.00" long flexible neck that exits the top of the chassis mount.
MARKER LIGHTS
There will be 12 lights of Truck -Lite, model 35200, LED, marker lights installed on this apparatus.
The marker lights will be wired to the running lights of the vehicle.
The lights will he located where required to meet DOT. These lights will be installed either recessed or with
metal flanges to protect them from most damage.
Yellow lights will be installed in any location forward of the rear most point of the vehicle. A single red light
will be installed at the rear most point only.
MARKER LIGHTS
There will be one (1) pair of amber and red LED marker lights with rubber arm, located at rear sides.
The amber lens will face the front and the red lens will face the rear of the truck.
These lights will be activated with the running lights of the vehicle.
"DO NOT MOVE APPARATUS" INDICATOR
A Whelen Model L32LRF red LED indicator beacon, located in the driving compartment, will be illuminated
automatically per the current NFPA requirements. The light will be labeled "Do Not Move Apparatus If Light
Is On ".
The same circuit that activates the Do Not Move Apparatus indicator will activate chassis electric horn
intermittently when the parking brake is released.
OPEN DOOR INDICATOR LIGHT
Two (2) red indicator lights will be provided and located in clear view of the driver, warning of an open
Page 48 of 92
passenger or equipment compartment door
One (1) light will indicate status of doors on the driver's side of the vehicle and the other light will indicate the
status of the passenger side and rear compartment doors.
COMPARTMENT LIGHTING
There will be 14 compartments with On Scene Solutions LED compartment light strips. The compartments
with these strip lights will be located all roll up door compartments. Two (2) strip lights will be installed
vertically, one (1) each side of the compartment door opening. The lights will be sized to accomodate the
compartment door opening.
The remaining compartments will include 6.00" diameter Truck -Lite, Model: 79384, lights in each enclosed
compartment. Each light will have a number 1076 one filament, two wire bulb.
Opening the compartment door, will automatically turn the compartment lighting on.
PERIMETER SCENE LIGHTS, CAB
There will be a Truck -Lite, model 60, grommet mount weatherproof light provided for each cab door.
Lighting will be designed to provide illumination on areas under the driver, officer, and crew cab riding
area exits, which will be activated automatically when the exit doors are opened and by the same means
as the body perimeter lights.
The lighting will be capable of providing illumination at a minimum level of two (2) foot - candles on ground
areas within 30.00" of the edge of the apparatus in areas which personnel climb in or out of the apparatus or
descend from the apparatus to the ground level.
PERIMETER SCENE LIGHTS, BODY
There will be two (2) Truck -Lite model 60 lights provided under the rear step area. The lights will be spaced
one (1) each side of apparatus and have a clear lens. The perimeter scene lights will be activated by a rocker
switch in cab and a switch at the rear of the body.
The lighting will be capable of providing illumination at a minimum level of two (2) foot - candles on ground
areas within 30.00" of the edge of the apparatus in areas designed for personnel to climb onto the apparatus or
descend from the apparatus to the ground level.
SCENE LIGHTS
one (1) pair of Whelen, Model 60'000 +U, halogen scene lights will be installed at rear of tiller cab.
These lights will have 26 degree internal optics.
The lights will be controlled by the following:
From the fast switch feature, a control at the driver side switch panel
From the second switch feature, a control from a switch in the tillerman's cab.
From the third switch feature, there is no control of this option.
From the fourth switch feature, there is no control of this option
These lights ivill be installed with a flange.
SIDE SCENE LIGHTS
one (1) pair of Whelen, Model 60F000'U scene lights will be installed side of crew cab I each side.
.These lights will have a 26 degree internal optics to redirect light downward.
Page 49 of 92
The lights will be controlled by the following:
From the fast switch feature, a control at the driver side switch panel
From the second switch feature, there is no control of this option
From the third switch feature, there is no control of this option
From the fourth switch feature, there is no control of this option
These lights will be installed with a flange.
SIDE SCENE LIGHTS
two (2) pairs of Zico, Model• ZQL -SS -LED, LED scene lights with bright stainless steel housing will be
installed In tiller axles fenderwell.
The lights will be controlled by NIA.
SCENE LIGHTS
One (1) pair of Weldon 3010 Series rectangular scene lights will be installed on the rear exterior wall of the
tractor cab. The lights will have a clear lens 26 degree internal optics. The lights will be controlled by the aerial
master switch.
CENTERING LIGHT
Two (2) lights will be provided on the cab roof to aid the tillerman in centering the tiller trailer with the tractor
One (1) Weldon Model 9186- 1500 -50 green LED light will be installed on the tractor roof as far rearward on
the cab as practical that will be used by the tillemrw to center the tiller trailer with the tractor.
One (1) Weldon Model 9186- 1500 -10 red LED light will be installed centered on the cab roof.
Both of the lights will be provided on 12" brackets.
The light will be activated with the ignition switch.
WORK LIGHTS
Two (2) Collins, Model FX -12, deck lights will be provided at the rear of the apparatus. Each light will be a
spot/floodlight. Each light will have a 100 watt H -2 spot bulb and a 55 watt H -2 flld bulb.
CAB SPOTLIGHTS
Two (2) Unity Model 325 spotlights, one (1) each side at front of cab, will be provided. The spotlights will be
furnished with 160,000 candle power halogen bulbs.
HAND HELD LIGHT
There will be four (4) Streamlight LiteBox lights with an orange thermoplastic body provided. The location
will be TBD.
_CHARGER, BASE (hand held)
The apparatus manufacturer will furnish and install a Streamlight, model 45071, orange, charging base for each
of the customer installed hand held lights. The number of hand held lights being installed by the customer will
be four (4) lights. The charging bases will be located TBD.
SIDE AND REAR VISION SYSTEM
A backup camera system, model ZON323 -1-4AV with additional camera(s) will be provided.
Page 50 of 92
There will be three (3) cameras provided in the following locations: one (1) camera integrated into the
passenger side cab mirror, one (1) camera integrated into the driver side cab mirror, and one (1) camera located
at the rear of the truck.
The camera images will be displayed in the cab on a 7" LCD color monitor with integral camera switcher. The
LCD will be located in view of the driver on the overhead panel.
An additional 7" LCD color monitor will be provided in the tiller cab to view only the rear camera.
Components will include:
Two (2) integrated cameras in the Ramco mirrors
One (1) rear vision color camera kit.
Two (2) 7" LCD color monitors with integrated switcher.
All necessary automated control hardware and wiring
AIR HORN SYSTEM
Two (2) Grover air horns will be provided and located, in the front bumper, recessed Inside frame rails. The
horn system will be piped to the air brake system wet tank utilizing .38" tubing. A pressure protection valve
will be installed in -line to prevent the loss of air, in the air brake system.
AIR HORN CONTROL
The air horns will be actuated by a foot switch on the officer's side and by the horn button in the steering wheel.
The driver will have the option to control the air horns or the chassis horns from the horn button by means of a
selector switch located on the instrument panel.
ELECTRONIC SIREN
A "Code 3 ", model 3692, electronic siren with noise canceling microphone will be provided.
Siren head will be located on a swivel bracket mounted on the headliner so that it is accessible to both the driver
and officer. The swivel bracket will be capable of rotating a minimum of 180 degrees.
Siren will be actuated by a foot switch on the officer's side and by the horn button in the steering wheel. The
driver will have the option to control the siren or the chassis horns from the horn button by means of a selector
switch.
SPEAKER
There will be two (2) speakers, Code -3 Model PB 100C with chrome finish, recessed in the front bumper.
Connection will be connected to the siren amplifier.
The speaker(s) will be recessed in either side of the front bumper.
MECHAMCAL SIREN. (Auxiliary)
A Federal Q213 siren will be furnished. A siren brake button will be installed on the switch panel.
The mechanical siren will be recessed in the front bumper in the center. The siren will be properly supported
using the bumper framework.
The mechanical siren will be actuated by a chrome push button located on the officerside of the engine tunnel
and by the horn button in the steering wheel.
The driver will have the option to control the siren or the chassis horn from the horn button by means of a
Page 51 of 92
selector switch located on the instrument panel.
LIGHTBAR
One (1) 88.00" Whelen, Model: Freedom LED lightbar will be mounted on the cab roof.
This lightbar will include the following:
Two (2) red flashing forward facing LED modules.
Two (2) clear flashing forward facing LED modules.
Two (2) red flashing front comer LED modules.
One (1) red flashing driver side facing LED module.
One (1) red flashing officer side facing LED module.
One (1) switch located in the cab on the switch panel will control this lightbar.
The lens color will be clear.
To meet NFPA requirements, all clear lights will be deactivated when the parking brake is applied.
HEADLIGHT FLASHER
The high beam headlights will flash alternately between the left and right side, with a control switch located on
the cab instrument panel.
The flashing will automatically cancel when the headlight switch is activated or when the parking brake is set.
SIDE ZONE LOWER LIGHTING
Six (6) Whelen model 60 *02F *R flashing "Super" LED lights will be located at the following positions:
Two (2) lights, one (1) each side on the front cab comer - red Super LED /red lens each side.
Two (2) lights, Cab sides behind rear doors - red Super LED /rd leas each side.
Two (2) lights, N/A - red Super LED/red lens each side.
The lights will be controlled by a lighted switch on the cab instrument panel.
These lights will be installed N /A.
REAR ZONE LOWER LIGHTING
Two (2) Whelen model 60 *02F *R flashing "Super" LED warning lights will be located at the rear of the
apparatus, required to meet or exceed the lower level optical warning and optical power requirements of NFPA.
The color of these lights will be red Super LED/red lens.
One (1) switch in the cab on the switch panel will control these lights.
These lights will be installed with a flange.
WARNING LIGHTS (Rear of Hose Bed)
Two (2) Whelen MCFLED2* LED warning lights will be provided at the rear of the truck, located one (1) each
side.
One (1) of these lights will be all red LED with red lens.
One (1) of these lights will be all amber LED with amber lens.
The location shall be either side at rear of tiller cab
Page 52 of 92
These lights will be activated by a lighted switch on the instrument panel
LIGHT. REAR UPPER ZONE. BLOCKING
There will be a pair of Whelen 6E series halogen flashing lights provided at the rear of apparatus at a level of
62.00" or higher. The lights will have amber lenses.
The flash pattern will be controlled by an electronic flasher. The halogen flashing lights will be activated
whenever the rear upper zone switch is on and the parking brake is set.
TRAFFIC DIRECTING LIGHT
There will be one (1) Whelen model TAL65 36.01" long x 2.84" high x 2.24" deep, amber LED traffic
directing light installed at the rear of the apparatus.
The Whelea model TACTLDI control head will be included with this installation.
The auxiliary warning mode will be activated with the control head only.
This traffic directing light will be surface mounted with a treadplate box at the rear of the apparatus as high as
practical.
The traffic directing light control head will be located within a heavy duty swivel bracket centered
between the driver and passenger.
This swivel bracket will enable the driver access as well as the passenger.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM GENERAL DESIGN for ALTERNATING CURRENT
The following guidelines will apply to the 120/240 VAC system installation:
General
Any fixed line voltage power source producing alternating current (ac) line vohage will produce electric power
at 60 cycles plus or minus five (5) cycles.
Except where superseded by the requirements of NFPA 1901, all components, equipment and installation
procedures will conform to NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (herein referred to as the NEC).
Line voltage electrical system equipment and materials included on the apparatus will be listed and installed in
accordance with the manufacturers instructions. All products will be used only in the manner for which they
have been listed.
Groundine
Grounding will be in accordance with Section 250-6 "Portable and Vehicle Mounted Generators" of the NEC.
Ungrounded systems will not be used. Only stranded or braided copper conductors will be used for grounding
and bonding.
An equipment grounding means will be provided in accordance with Section 250-91 (Grounding Conductor
Material) of the NEC.
The grounded current carrying conductor (neutral) will be insulated from the equipment grounding conductors
and from the equipment enclosures and other grounded parts. The neutral conductor will be colored white or
gray in accordance with Section 200 -6 (Means of Identifying Grounding Conductors) of the NEC.
In addition to the bonding required for the low voltage return current, each body and driving or crew
Page 53 of 92
compartment enclosure will be bonded to the vehicle frame by a copper conductor. This conductor will have a
minimum amperage rating of l 15 percent of the nameplate current rating of the power source specification label
as defined in Section 310 -15 (amp capacities) of the NEC. A single conductor properly sized to meet the low
voltage and line voltage requirements will be permitted to be used.
All power source system mechanical and electrical components will be sized to support the continuous duty
nameplate rating of the power source.
Operation
Instructions that provide the operator with the essential power source operating instructions, including the.
power -up and power -down sequence, will be permanently attached to the apparatus at any point where such
operations can take place.
Provisions will be made for quickly and easily placing the power source into operation. The control will be
marked to indicate when it is correctly positioned for power source operation. Any control device used in the
drive train will be equipped with a means to prevent the unintentional movement of the control device from its
set position.
A power source specification label will be permanently attached to the apparatus near the operator's control
station. The label will provide the operator with the information detailed in Figure 19 -4.10.
Direct drive (PTO) and portable generator installations will comply with Article 445 (Generators) of the NEC.
Overcurrent protection
The conductors used in the power supply assembly between the output terminals of the power source and the
main over current protection device will not exceed 144 inches. (3658 mm) in length.
For fixed power supplies, all conductors in the power supply assembly will be type THIiW, THW, or use
stranded conductors enclosed in nonmetallic liquid tight flexible conduit rated for a minimum of 194 degrees
Fahrenheit (90 degrees Celsius).
For portable power supplies, conductors located between the power source and the line side of the main
overcurrem protection device will be type SO or type SEO with suffix WA flexible cord rated for 600 -volts at
194 degrees Fahrenheit (90 degrees Celsius).
WiLing Methods
Fixed wiring systems will be limited to the following:
- Metallic or nonmetallic liquid tight flexible conduit rated at not less than 194 degrees Fahrenheit (90
degrees Celsius)
or
- Type SO or Type SEO cord with a WA suffix, rated at 600 volts at not less than 194 degrees Fahrenheit
(90 degrees Celsius)
Electrical cord or conduit will not be attached to chassis suspension components, water or fuel lines, air or air
brake lines, fire pump piping, hydraulic lines, exhaust system components, or low voltage wiring. In addition
the wiring will be run as follows:
- Separated by a minimum of 12 inches (3 05 mm), or properly shielded, from exhaust piping
Page 54 of 92
- Separated from fuel lines by a minimum of six (6) inches (152 mm) distance.
Electrical cord or conduit will be supported within six (6) inches (152 mm) of any junction box and at a
minimum of every 24 inches (6 10 mm) of continuous run. Supports will be made of nonmetallic materials or
corrosion protected metal. All supports will be of a design that does not cut or abrade the conduit or cable and
will be mechanically fastened to the vehicle.
Wiring Identification
All line voltage conductors located in the main panel board will be individually and permanently identified.
The identification will reference the wiring schematic or indicate the final termination point. When prewirmg
for future power sources or devices, the unterminated ends will be labeled showing function and wire size.
Wet Locations
All wet location receptacle outlets and inlet devices, including those on hardwired remote power distribution
boxes, will be of the grounding type provided with a wet location cover and installed in accordance with
Section 210 -7 'Receptacles and Cord Connections" of the NEC.
All receptacles located in a wet location will be not less than 24 inches (610 mm) from the ground. Receptacles
on off -road vehicles will be a minimum of 30 inches (762 mm) from the ground.
The face of any wet location receptacle will be installed in a plane from vertical to not more than 45 degrees off
vertical. No receptacle will be installed in a face up position.
Dry Locations
All receptacles located in a dry location will be of the grounding type. Receptacles will be not less than 30
inches (762 mm) above the interior floor height.
All receptacles will be marked with the type of line voltage (120 -volts or 240 - volts) and the current rating in
amps. If the receptacles are direct current, or other than single phase, they will be so marked.
Listing
All receptacles and electrical inlet devices will be listed to UL 498, Standard for Safety Attachment Plugs and
Receptacles, or other appropriate performance standards. Receptacles used for direct current voltages will be
rated for the appropriate service.
Electrical System Testing
The wiring and associated equipment will be tested by the apparatus manufacturer or the installer of the line
voltage system.
The wiring and permanently connected devices and equipment will be subjected to a dielectric voltage
withstand test of 900 volts for one (1) minute. The test will be conducted between live parts and the neutral
conductor, and between five parts and the vehicle frame with any switches in the circuit(s) closed. This test will
be conducted after all body work has been completed.
Electrical polarity verification will be made of all permanently wired equipment and receptacles to determine
that connections have been properly made.
Operational Test mgr Current NFPA 1901 Standards
The apparatus manufacturer will perform the following operation test and ensure that the power source and any
devices that are attached to the line voltage electrical system are properly connected and in working order. The
test will be witnessed and the results certified by Underwriters Laboratories.
Page 55 of 92
The prime mover will be started from a cold start condition and the line voltage electrical system loaded to 100
percent of the nameplate rating.
The power source will be operated at 100 percent of its nameplate voltage for a minimum of two (2) hours
unless the system meets category certification as defined in the current NFPA 1901 standard.
Where the line voltage power is derived from the vehicle's low voltage system, the minimum continuous
electrical load as defined in the current NFPA 1901 standard will be applied to the low voltage electrical system
during the operational test.
GENERATOR
The apparatus will be equipped with a complete electrical power system. 7be generator will be a Harrison
Model 15.0 TGM 15.0 kW Hydraulic unit. The wiring and generator installation will conform to the present
National Electrical Codes Standards of the National Fire Protection Association. The installation will be
designed for continuous operation without overheating and undue stress on components.
Generator Performance
- Continuous Duty Rating: 15,000 watts
- Nominal Volts: 120/240
- Amperage: 125 @ 120 volts, 62.5 @ 240 volts
- Phase: Single
- Cycles: 6o hertz
- Engine Speed at Engagement: Idle
- RPM range: 925 to 3,000 (hydraulic pump)
Generator Dimensions
- The dimensions were not available when this option was created. This option will be updated when the
dimensions become available.
-Weight: 455 pounds (dry)
The output of the generator will be controlled by an internal hydraulic system. An electrical instrument gauge
panel will be provided for the operator to monitor and control all electrical operations and output.
The generator will be driven by a transmission power take off unit, through a hydraulic pump and motor.
The generator will include an electrical control inside the cab. The hydraulic engagement supply will be
operational at any time (no interlocks).
An elecu ic/hydraulic valve will supply hydraulic fluid to the clutch engagement unit provided on the chassis .
PTO drive.
Generator Instruments and Controls
To properly monitor the generator performance a digital meter panel will be furnished and mounted next to the
Page 56 of 92
circuit breaker panel. The meter will indicate the following items:
- Voltage
- Amperage for both lines
-Frequency
- Generator nm hours
- Over current indication
- Over temperature indication
- "Power On" indication
- Two (2) fuse holders with two (2) amp fines (for indicator light protection)
The meter and indicators will be installed new eye level in the compartment. Instruments will be flush mounted
in an appropriate sized weatherproof electrical enclosure. All instruments used will be accurate within +/- two
(2) percent.
Generator Wiring:
The system will be installed by highly qualified electrical technicians to assure the required level of safety and
protection to the fire apparatus operators. The wiring, electrical fixtures and components will be to the highest
industry quality standards available on the domestic market. The equipment will be the type as designed for
mobile type installations subject to vibration, moisture and severe continuous usage. The following electrical
components will be the minimum acceptable quality standards for this apparatus:
Wiring:
All electrical wiring will be fine stranded copper type. The wire will be sized to the load and circuit breaker
rating; ten (10) gauge on 30 amp circuits, 12 gauge on 20 amp circuits and 14 gauge on 15 amp circuits. The
cable will be run in comer areas and extruded aluminum pathways built into the body for easy access.
Load Center:
The main load center will be a Clutter Hammer with circuit breakers rated to load demand.
Circuit Breakers:
Individual breakers will be provided for all on -line equipment to isolate a tripped breaker from affecting any
other on -tine equipment.
GENERATOR LOCATION
The generator will be mounted in the area above the goose neck of
the tiller trailer. The flooring in this area will be either reinforced
or constructed, in such a manner, that it will handle the additional
weight of the generator.
GENERATOR COVER
An aluminum treadplate surround will be provide to conceal the generator. Adequate louvers or knock -outs
will be provided for cooling the generator.
GENERATORSTART
Page 57 of 92
A switch will be located on the cab instrument panel to engage the generator.
CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL
The circuit breaker panel will be located to be determined.
120 VOLT LIGHTING
The apparatus will be equipped with a telescoping bottom raise Fire Research Model FC530 -S75 quartz tube
floodlight. The telescoping pole will be as long as is practical to 6t in the location it is mounted.
The light fixture will be a single 750 watt, 120 volt Focus light that draws 6.3 amps.
The lamp head will swivel 360 degrees left or right and tilt up and down. All wiring used up to the junction box
will be a minimum of 14 gauge 3 wire cable that is properly supported and protected from damage.
A total of Two (2) will be provided One each side back of cab use 4" off set brackets for these lights
120 VOLT LIGHTING
The apparatus will be equipped with a top mount non - telescoping Fire Research Model FC570 with a Focus
light head, model S75 quartz tube flood light Each light head will be 120 volt, 750 watts, with a 6.3 amp draw
and have an output of 21,000 lumens. The light head will swivel 360 degrees left or right and tilt up and down.
All wiring to the circuit breaker box will be a minimum of 14 gauge 3 wire cord that is properly supported and
protected from damage.
A total of Four (4) will be provided abhove D -3 and D-6 and above P -3 and P-6.
REMOTE SWITCH (Ouartz Light)
A remote on/off actuation switch, with a 12VDC, green indicator light, will be provided to actuate a 120/240
volt solenoid switch for each quartz light.
The two (2) switches will be located driver side and officer side switch panels. The switches will control the
lights On Overhead.
COMMAND LIGHT
A Command Light Knight 2, Model KL475, with backlight and "auto park"
will be provided.
The light will be provided with six (6) 750 watt 230 volt lamps. The light will
be actuated by 12 volts.
An indicator light will be provided in the cab for warning when the light is not
in the nested position.
At the top of the light tower will be a blue strobe light
The dimensions of the light in the nested position will be 47.00" long x 23.50"
wide x 11.25' high. The light will extend 87.50" from the bottom surface to
the top of the light
The weight of the light tower will be approximately 145 pounds
The handheld controller with 12' of cord will be installed TBD.
Page 58 of 92
A total of N/A will be provided.
The light tower will be installed TBD.
120 VOLT LIGHTING: TIP OF LADDER
Two (2), Kwik -Raze 736, Magnafire 3000, 750 watt, 120 volt light(s), demountable will be provided at the tip
of the ladder. The light(s) will be located on the driver and passenger side.
Light(s) will be 120 volts.
Light(s) will be switched at the lighthead and turntable.
ELECTRIC CORD REEL
Furnished with the 120 volt AC electrical system will be a Hannay, series 16001 cord reel. The reel will be
provided with a 12 -volt electric rewind switch, that is guarded to prevent accidental operation and labeled for its
intended use. The switch will be protected with a fuse and installed at a height not to exceed 72 inches above
the operators standing position.
The exterior finish of the reel(s) will be painted #269 gray from the reel manufacturer..
A Nylatron guide to be provided to aid in the payout and loading of the reel. A ball stop will'be provided to
prevent the cord from being wound on the reel.
A label will be provided in a readily visible location adjacent to the reel. The label will indicate current rating,
current type, phase, voltage and total cable length.
A total of two (2) cord reels will be provided above gooseneck in front of body.
The cord reel will be configured with three (3) conductors.
CORD
Provided for electric distribution will be two (2) lengths, one for each reel, of 200 feet of yellow 1013 electrical
cord, weather resistant 105 degree C to -50 degree C, 600 volt jacketed SOOW cord. A Hubbell LS -20, 20
amp, 120 volt, twist lock connector body will be installed on the end of the cord.
PORTABLE JUNCTION BOX
There will be four (4) 120 vac 20 amp twist lock receptacles provided in a portable junction box. The junction
box will be of weatherproof construction and have flip up lids lined with soft neoprene rubber at each outlet
opening.
A Hubbell L5-20,20 amp, 120 volt, twist lock connector body.
A total of two (2) will be provided.
REEL ENCLOSURE
An aluminum treadplate enclosure will be installed over the reel. The enclosure will be provided with a
stainless steel hinge that will allow the cover to be opened.
A captive roller assembly will be provided through the side sheet to assist with the pay out of the cord. A ball
stop will be provided on the cord to stop the cord at the roller assembly
Page 59 of 92
A total of two (2) will be installed On gooseneck.
JUNCTION BOX HOLDER
There will bean aluminum junction box holder installed adjacent to the cord reel. A total of two (2) will be
installed.
with Electric reel.
20 AMP RECEPTACLE
Wired to the power supply will be two (2) receptacles that are a 120 volt 20 amp three wire twist -lock NEMA
L5 -20 type with weather resisting cover located Fenderwell area 1 each side.
KUSSMAUL AUTO EJECT FOR SHORELINE
two (2) shoreline receptacles will be provided to operate the dedicated 120 -volt circuits on the truck without the
use of the generator.
The shoreline receptacle (s), model 4091- 159 -30 -120, will be provided with a 120 volt, 30 amp, 3 pin Kussmaul
Super auto eject plug with a red weatherproof cover. The cover is spring loaded to close, preventing water from
entering when the shoreline is not connected.
The unit is completely sealed to prevent road dirt contamination.
A solenoid wired to the vehicle's starter is energized when the engine is started. This instantaneously drives the
plug from the receptacle.
A novel plug detector closes and opens the 120 volt A.C. circuit after the mating connector is inserted and
before the connector is ejected..
The shoreline will be connected to Batt Charger and Eng Heater.
A mating connector body will also be supplied with the loose equipment.
The shoreline receptacle will be located in the driver side lower step well of cab.
FOUR M-SECTION 100 FOOT TRACTOR -DRAWN AERIAL LADDER
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS
The ladder will be constructed to meet all of the requirements as described in the current NFPA 1901 standards.
The aerial device will be a true ladder type device; therefore ladders attached to booms will not be considered.
These capabilities will be established in an unsupported configmation.
All structural load supporting elements of the aerial device that are made of a ductile material will have a design
stress of not more than 50% of the minimum yield. strength of the material based on the combination of the live
load and the dead load. This 2:1 structural safety factor meets the current NFPA 1901 standard.
All structural load supporting elements of the aerial device that are made of non - ductile material will have a
design stress of not more than 20% of the minimum ultimate strength of the material, based on the combination
of the rated capacity and the dead load. This 5:1 safety factor meets the current NFPA 1901 standard.
Page 60 of 92
Wire ropes and attaching systems used to extend and retract the fly sections will have a 5:1 safety factor based
on the ultimate strength under all operating conditions. The factor of safety for the wire rope will remain above
2:1 during any extension or retraction stall. The minimum ratio of the diameter of wire rope used to the
diameter of the sheave used will be 1:12. Wire ropes will be constructed of seven (7) strands over an inner wire
core for increased flexibility. The wire rope will be galvanized to reduce corrosion.
The aerial device will be capable of sustaining a static load one and one -half times its rated tip load capacity
(live load) in every position in which the aerial device can be placed when the vehicle is on a firm level surface.
The aerial device will be capable of sustaining a static load one and one -third times its rated tip load capacity
(live load) in every position the aerial device can be placed when the vehicle is on a slope of five degrees
downward in the direction most likely to cause overturning.
With the aerial device out of the cradle and in the fully extended position at zero degrees elevation, a test load
will be applied in a horizontal direction normal to the centerline of the ladder. The turntable will not rotate and
the ladder will not deflect beyond what the product specification allows.
All welding of aerial components, including the aerial ladder sections, turntable, pedestal, and outriggers, will
be in compliance with the American Welding Society standards. All welding personnel will be certified, as
qualified under AWS welding codes.
All material and welds will have a structural safety factor of 2:1. This will be derived from taking into account
structure weight, payload, wind load, ice load, nozzle reactions, and dynamics.
The aerial device will be capable of operating with the maximum rated tip load in either of the two (2)
following conditions:
- Conditions of high wind up to 50 mph
- Conditions of icing, up to a coating of .25" over the entire aerial structure
All of the design criteria must be supported by the following test data (no exception)
- Strain gage testing of the complete aerial device
- Analysis of deflection data taken while the aerial device was under test load
The following standards for materials are to be used in the design of the aerial device:
- Materials are to be certified by the mill that manufactured the material
- Materials that are certified or recertified by vendors other than the mill will not be acceptable
- Material testing that is performed after the mill test will be for verification only and not with the intent
of changing the classification
- All welded structural components for the ladder will be traceable to their mill lots.
LADDER CONSTRUCTION
The ladder is comprised of four sections and will extend to a nominal height of 100 feet above the ground at 75
degrees.
Page 61 of 92
The ladder will have the capability to support a minimum of 500 pounds at the tip in the unsupported
configuration, based upon 360 degree rotation, up to full extension and from -5 degrees to +75 degrees.
The ladder will be constructed of high strength low alloy steel, minimum 70,000 pounds per square inch yield,
with full traceability on all structural members.
Each section will be trussed diagonally, vertically and horizontally using welded steel tubing.
All critical points are reinforced for extra rigidity and to provide a high strength -to- weight ratio.
All ladder rungs are round and welded to each section utilizing "K" bracing for torsional rigidity.
The inside width dimensions of the ladder will be:
- Base Section 39.00"
- Lower Mid Section 32.25'
- Upper Mid Section 26.62"
- Fly Section 21.38"
The height of the handrails above the centerline of the rungs will be:
- Base Section 26.75'
- Lower Mid Section 22.87'
- Upper Mid Section 20.25'
- Fly Section 17.50"
The ladder will be designed to provide continuous egress for firefighters and civilians from an elevated position
to the ground. The end of the fly section will be constructed in a manner that aids personnel in climbing off the
ladder.
The egress section will be designed to maintain the rated load of the aerial device. It will be bolted on for easy
replacement.
Each rung will be covered with a secure, heavy -duty, fiberglass pultrusion that incorporates an aggressive, no-
slip coating.
The rung covers will be glued to each rung, and will be easily replaceable should the rung cover become
damaged.
Each rung cover edge will have 2.00" of photo - luminescent, aggressive, no-slip coating to assist in providing a
light source for each rung during low light conditions.
The photo - luminescent coating will remain visible for up to 20 hours after exposure to light.
The use of electrically powered lighting or tape to light the rungs will riot be allowed. (no exception)
Page 62 of 92
Under no circumstances will the rung covers be fastened to the rungs using screws or rivets. (no exception)
The rung covers will have a 10 -year, limited warranty.
TURNTABLE
The upper turntable assembly will connect the aerial ladder to the turntable bearing. The steel stntcture will
have a mounting position for the aerial elevation cylinders, ladder connecting pins, and upper turntable
operators position. The turntable platform will be rectangular- shaped and approximately 96.00" wide by
72.00" long.
The turntable will be a 1.00" thick steel deck, coated with an non -skid, chemical resistant material in the
walking areas. The stepping surfaces will meet the skid - resistance requirements of the current NFPA 1901
standard.
The turntable is lighted for nighttime operation with a minimum of two (2) work lights activated by the aerial
master switch.
The turntable handrails will be a minimum 42.00" high and will not increase the overall travel height of the
vehicle. The handrails will be constructed from 1.25' diameter extruded 6063 -T6 aluminum with a slip
resistant knurled surface. The handrails will be anodized to resist corrosion.
ELEVATION SYSTEM
Two (2) double acting lift cylinders will be utilized to provide smooth precise elevation from 5 degrees below
horizontal to 75 degrees above horizontal.
The lift cylinders will have a 6.00" internal diameter (bore), a .375' wall thickness, a 4.50" diameter cylinder
rod and a 33.38" stroke.
The lift cylinders will be equipped with integral holding valves located on the cylinder to prevent the unit from
falling should the charged lines be severed at any point within the hydraulic system. (no exception)
They also will have spherical bushings at each end to reduce pin wear.
Both raising and lowering functions are influenced by flow compensation which maintains ladder tip speed
within approximately 10% regardless of load, angle or extension.
Ladder tip speed is automatically decelerated at angles above 60 degrees reducing "tip- lash ".
The pivot pins will be stainless steel and 2.25' in diameter. Each elevation pin will be stainless steel with a
greaseless ladder pivot pin.
EXTENSION/RETRACTION SYSTEM
A full hydraulic powered extension and retraction system will be provided using two (2) hydraulic cylinders and
wire ropes.
Each set is capable of operating the ladder in the event of a failure to the other.
The extension cylinder will have a 3.00" internal diameter (bore), 1.75' diameter rod and a 134:00" stroke.
Extension and retraction will be internally limited within the cylinders, eliminating excess strain on wire ropes,
sheaves and the ladder structure.
Page 63 of 92
Each of the cylinders, wire ropes and sheave assemblies will be completely independent of the other, so as to
provide a safety factor wherein a failure of one assembly will not affect the function and operation of the other.
The extension cylinders are equipped with counter balance valves to synchronize the cylinders for smoother
operation and prevent the unit from retracting should the charged lines be severed at any point within the
hydraulic system. The cylinders will also have internal deceleration valves, to cushion the movement of the
cylinder when approaching full extension or retraction. All extensionfretraction pins will have a corrosion -
preventative, QPQ black finish.
The reeling of the wire rope will be such as to provide synchronized, simultaneous movement of all sections to
full extension.
The extension/retraction wire ropes will be 7 -flex galvanized with stainless steel threaded ends, and will possess
the following characteristics:
Lower Mid Section .50 diameter, 26,200# breaking strength
Upper Mid Section .38" diameter, 14,880# breaking strength
Fly Section .31" diameter, 10,380# breaking strength
Wear pads made of polymer material will be used between the telescoping sections for maximum weight
distribution, strength and smoothness of operation.
Adjustment screws are provided on the wear pads to permit proper side alignment.
All sheaves will be plastic and greaseless and all sheave pins and pivot pins will be stainless steel. (no
exception)
ROTATION SYSTEM
A 46.00" diameter, external tooth, monorace, slowing ring bearing will be used for the rotation system. The
gear teeth will be a stub tooth form.
The bearing race will have sealed 1.00" ball bearings.
The bearing will provide 360 degree continuous rotation.
The turntable will be bolted to the bearing using 36 SAE Grade 8,.875" diameter bolts.
To secure the bearing to the base support 36 Grade 8, .875' diameter bolts will be used.
The turntable base and the torque box bearing plate will be machined to fit the bearing thereby Providing even
distribution of forces.
A hydraulically driven, planetary gear box with a drive speed reducer will be used to provide infinite and
minute rotation control throughout the entire rotational travel.
The gearbox will have a torque rating of 130,000 pounds per square inch.
A spring applied, hydraulically released disc type swing brake will be furnished to provide positive braking of
the turntable assembly.
Page 64 of 92
0
Provisions will be made for auxiliary operation of the system in case of prime mover failure.
The hydraulic system is equipped with pressure relief valves which will limit the rotational torque to a non-
destructive power.
ROTATION INTERLOCK
A permanently installed prevention mechanism will be provided as part of the rotation system to prevent the
rotation of the aerial device to the side in which the stabilizers have not been fully deployed or are short jacked
The mechanism will allow full and unrestricted use of the aerial in the 180 degree area on the side(s) where the
stabilizers have been fully deployed.
The system will also have a manual override to comply with NFPA 1901.
This will consist of a switch located in the lower control station so that activation will require two (2) persons
(one at an aerial device control location and one at the lower control station).
SYSTEMS THAT PERMIT THE AERIAL TO ROTATE TO THE "SHORT JACK" SIDE WITHOUT
AUTOMATICALLY STOPPING THE ROTATION AND /OR WITHOUT ACTUATION OF THE
"MANUAL OVERRIDE" SHALL NOT BE ACCEPTED. SYSTEMS THAT ONLY INCLUDE AN ALARM
ARE NOT CONSIDERED AN INTERLOCK AND SHALL NOT BE ACCEPTED.
LOAD CAPACITIES
The following load capacities will be established with the stabilizers at full horizontal extension and placed in
the down position to level the truck and to relieve the weight from the tires and axles. Capacities will be based
upon full extension and 360 degree rotation.
A load chart, visible at the operator's station, will be provided. The load chart will show the recommended safe
load at any condition of the aerial device's elevation and extension. (no exception)
50 MPH WIND CONDITIONS/WATERWAY DRY
Degrees of
Elevation
_5 tc 9
10 to 19
20 to 29
30 to 39
40 to 49
50 to 59
60 to 69
70 to 75
Egress
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
flY
- -
-
-
250
500
750
Upper Mid
_
250
250
500
1000
1000
Lower Mid
-
250
250
500
750
1000
1000
Base
250
250
500
750
1000
1000
1000
50 MPH WIND CONDMON ATERWAY CHARGED
Degrees of
Elevation
-5 to 9
10 to 19
20 to 29
30 to 39
40 to 49
50 to 59
60 to 69
70 to 75
Egress
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
Fly
250
500
750
Upper Mid
-
250
500
750
1000
Lower Mid
-
250
500
750
1000
1000
Page 65 of 92
Base 250 500 750 1000 1000 1000
Reduced loads at the tip can be redistributed in 250 lb. increments to the fly, mid, or base sections as
needed.
BOOM SUPPORT
A heavy -duty boom support will be provided for support of the ladder in the travel position. On the base
section of the ladder, a stainless steel scuf Eplate will be provided where the ladder comes into contact with the
boom support. In the stowed position, the ladder tip will be not less than 11.00" below horizontal for
unsurpassed visibility and safety while maneuvering the apparatus.
FOLDING STEPS
One (1) set of folding steps will be provided at the tip of the ladder. An additional set of folding steps will be
provided at the base of the fly section. The steps will be bright finished, non -skid luminescent folding type.
The luminescent coating is rechargeable from any light source and can hold a charge for up to 24 hours.
EXTENSION INDICATOR
Extension markings and corresponding numerical indicators will be provided along each inside and outside top
rail of the base section of the aerial every ten (10) feet. They will indicate various positions of extension up to
full. Markings and indicators will be clearly visible to the console operator. To aid in visibility during hours of
darkness, the markings and numerical indicators will be of a red reflective material.
SPOTLIGHTS
Four (4) Unity AG- 5-4007 12 volt spoUtlood lights will be furnished.
The two (2) "tracking lightsn will be mounted on the base section of the ladder, one (1) on each side.
The two (2) "tip fights" will be mounted on the tip of the ladder, one (1) on each side.
The lights will be mounted below the handrail height so as not to increase the overall height of the unit.
An individual master switch with appropriate identification labels will be provided for the "tracking lights" and
"tip lights" in addition to the ontoff switch located on the light itself.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
The aerial electrical system will be designed and manufactured in such a way that the power and signal
Protection and control compartments will contain circuit protection devices and power control devices. The
Power and signal protection and control components will be protected against corrosion, excessive heat,
excessive vibration, physical damage, and water spray.
The aerial electrical system will be designed and manufactured to allow the following
- All of the serviceable components will be readily accessible.
- Circuit protection devices will be utilized to protect each circuit.
- General protection circuit breakers will be Type-I automatic reset (continuously resetting) or Type -II
(manual resetting) and conform to SAE requirements. When required, automotive type fuses conforming
to SAE requirements will be utilized to protect electronic equipment.
- Power control relays and solenoids, when utilized, will have a direct current (dc) rating of 125% of the
maximum current for which the circuit is protected.
Page 66 of 92
The aerial electrical system will be designed and manufactured to allow the following:
- Toggle switches will be utilized that are certified for the outside conditions that fire apparatus
experience.
- All wiring will be protected through conduit or loom.
- All wiring harnesses will be properly supported to eliminate harness damage through rubbing.
- All connectors utilized in the system will be of a waterproof design.
- Two (2) inductive proximity switchs and an illumination light will be incorporated into the boom
support.
- The aerial master and aerial PTO can be engaged after the water pump has been engaged without
having to bring the RPM back to idle.
- Standard cabling to the tip of the aerial will consist of one (1) 16/20 cable and one (1) 12/8 cable.
DRIVER SIDE TORQUE BOX POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL
A fuse and relay panel, located in the passenger side gooseneck area, will include the following:
- NEMA 4x rated weatherproof enclosure
- Relays, fuses, and circuit breakers for aerial and stabilizer interlocks and control switches
TURNTABLE LIGHTING
The turntable will be lighted for nighttime operation with a minimum of two (2) work lights activated by the
aerial master switch. A foot switch will be located at the turntable console to allow hydraulic flow to the aerial
device. The foot switch will be protected by a cover to prevent accidental activation. Activation of the foot
switch is necessary for aerial device operation.
TURNTABLE CONSOLE
The following switches and indicator lights will be standard on the turntable console:
High idle on/off switch
Tip/Tracking light switch
Indicator and alarm test switch
- Emergency hydraulic power switch
STABILIZERS NOT FULLY EXTENDED amber indicator light
Rung alignment green indicator light
The turntable console will be lighted for nighttime operation with one (1) work light activated by the aerial
master switch A fuse panel will be located in the turntable console.
TURNTABLE OVERRIDE CONTROLS
Page 67 of 92
The aerial manual override controls will be located in the turntable control console.
MASTER OVERRIDE CONTROLS
An emergency power switch will be located at the rear of the apparatus. The switch will activate the emergency
power unit and allow control of the aerial or stabilizers based on the direction the switch is toggled.
A wolf: light will be provided to illuminate the master override controls when the battery switch is active and
the master override door is open.
BOOM SUPPORT
Two (2) Tuck inductive proximity switchs will be provided on the boom support to detect if the aerial device is
fully stowed within the boom support.
STABILIZER INDICATOR
A "Stabilizers Not Stowed" indicator will be provided in the driver's compartment. It will illuminate
automatically whenever the stabilizers are not fully stowed, to prevent damage to the apparatus if moved. The
stabilizer system will also be wired to the "Do Not Move" indicator light, which will flash whenever the
apparatus parking brake is not fully engaged and the stabilizers are not fully stowed.
CRADLE INTERLOCK SYSTEM
A cradle interlock system will be provided to prevent the lifting of the aerial from the nested position until the
operator has positioned all the stabilizers in a load supporting configuration. A switch will be installed at the
cradle to prevent operation of the stabilizers once the aerial has been elevated from the nested position.
STABILIZER ALARM
An electronic warning device will be provided at each stabilizer to warn personnel that the stabilizers are being
deployed. Each alarm will produce a fast pulsing 90 DBA signal and will cancel only when the stabilizer is put
into a load bearing configuration.
STABILIZER SCENE LIGHTS
A 4.00" clear floodlight will be provided on each stabilizer to illuminate the surrounding area. The light will be
actuated by the aerial master switch.
CONTROL STATION
There will be a turntable control station located on the right hand side of the turntable so the operator will be
able to easily observe the ladder tip while operating the controls. The controls will permit the operator to
regulate the speed of the aerial functions within safe limits (as determined by the manufacturer and NFPA
standards). The controls will be clearly marked and lighted for nighttime operation. A hinged aluminum cover
will be provided. The momentary foot switch located at the turntable control station will activate the aerial
function controls. They are capable of being operated independently or simultaneously.
The following controls and indicator lights will be clearly identified, illuminated, and conveniently located for
ease of operation and viewing:
- Elevation, extension/retraction, and rotation controls
- High idle switch
- Rung alignment indicator light
- Tip/Tracking lights
Page 68 of 92
- Hydraulic system pressure gauge
- Indicator /Alarm test switch
- EPU switch
- Operator's load chart
- Stabilizer Not Fully Extended indicator light
- Monitor controls
- Aerial waterway flow meter
There will also be a minimum of two (2) 12 -volt work lights installed on the turntable to illuminate the
surrounding area for nighttime operation. The work lights will be activated by the aerial master switch.
STABILIZER CONTROL STATION
There will be an easily accessible control station located at both the driver and passenger side of the apparatus.
The following controls and indicator lights will be clearly identified and conveniently located for ease of
operation and viewing at each control station.
- Stabilizer controls for driver and passenger side
- Stabilizer Firm On Ground indicator lights
- Stabilizer Fully Extended indicator lights
- Inclinometer for grade and slope
- Stabilizer EPU switch
- High Idle switch
STABILIZERS
The vehicle will come equipped with a stabilization system consisting of two (2) hydraulically operated out and
down style stabilizers. This system will meet or exceed all requirements of the NFPA specifications related to
stabilization and setup on sloped surfaces.
The stabilizer /leveling jacks will have a maximum spread of 17' measured from the centerline of the jack
footpads when the beams are fully extended. The beams will be 6.81" wide x 8.88" high with 3/4" thick top and
bottom plates and 1/2" thick sides of 100,000 -PSI minimum yield strength steel. The cylinders will have pilot -
operated check valves with thermal relief designed to insure that the beams will not drift out of the stowed
position during travel. Wear pads will guide the stabilizers.
The horizontal extension cylinders will be totally enclosed within the beams and will incorporate telescoping
hydraulic tubing to supply the jack cylinder hydraulic power. Stabilizer hydraulic hoses will remain stationary
during operation of the stabilizers to prevent hose wear and potential failure. The cylinders will be equipped
with decelerators to reduce the speed of extension and retraction when the beams are near the fully retracted and
extended positions. The stabilizer extension hydraulic cylinders will have the following dimensions: 2.25"
bore, 1.38" rod, and 57.25" stroke.
Page 69 of 92
The vertical jack cylinders will be capable of 12.00" ground penetration. The cylinders will be supplied with
pilot operated check valves on each jack cylinder to hold the cylinder in the stowed or working position, should
a charged line be severed at any point in the hydraulic system. For safety, the integral holding valves will be
located in the cylinder base end, NOT in the transfer tube. Vertical jack cylinder rods will be fully enclosed by
a telescoping inner box to protect the cylinder rods from damage. The stabilizer jack hydraulic cylinders will
have the following dimensions: 4.50" bore, 3.00" rod, and 28.88" stroke.
Each stabilizer jack will have a polished stainless steel shield. The stainless steel shield will be a maximum of
14.00" wide so as to allow the extension of the stabilizer between parked cars or other obstacles. This plate will
serve as a protective guard and a mounting surface for warning tights. The top, forward, and rear edges will be
flanged back 90 degrees for added strength. Each stabilizer will be supplied with a red LED warning light on
each side of the beam. A reflective stripe will be provided on the horizontal and vertical beams of each
stabilizer. A 4.00" diameter clear work light will be provided to illuminate the stabilizer and the ground.
Lighting will automatically activate with the aerial master switch.
STABILIZER PADS
The stabilizer footpad will be 12.00" in diameter. The footpad will be attached to the jack cylinder rod by
means of a machined ball at the end of the jack cylinder rod which mates to a socket machined into the footpad.
The footpad will have the ability to pivot 20 degrees from horizontal in any direction to allow setup on uneven
terrain.
AUXILIARY STABILIZER PADS
An auxiliary ground pad will be supplied for each stabilizer to provide additional load distribution on soft
surfaces. The pads will be 24.00" square and made from a lightweight composite material. The ground
pressure will not exceed 75 pounds per square inch when the ground pads are used and the apparatus is fully
loaded and the aerial device is carrying its rated capacity in any position.
STABILIZER CONTROLS
An electrically controlled hydraulic valve will power stabilizer movement. The valve can also be manually
controlled in the event of electrical malfunction. Hydraulic power override controls will be incorporated into
the valve. The manual override mechanism will be completely sealed within the valve assembly to prevent any
possibility of corrosion.
The stabilizer controls will be located to provide the operator with a full view of each stabilizer being
positioned. Each stabilizer control panel will include the following:
- In/out stabilizer beam control toggle switch
-Up /down stabilizer jack control toggle switch
- Emergency hydraulic power unit (EPU) control toggle switch
-High idle control toggle switch
- Stabilizer fully extended LED indicator lights
- Stabilizer planted LED indicator lights
As a safety device, an electrically actuated diverter valve will be provided. The hydraulic power will be
diverted to the aerial ladder controls automatically the instant all stabilizer jacks are firmly planted on the
ground. Once the aerial ladder is raised from the bedded position, the stabilizer hydraulic power is cut off so
the stabilizers will not accidentally be moved while the aerial is being operated.
To aid in leveling the unit, two bubble type angle indicators will be located near the stabilizer controls. One
indicator will show the angle of the truck from the front to rear and the other will show the side to side angle of
the truck. The indicators will be color coded green to show when the truck has been properly leveled allowing
the aerial device to be operated at full capacity.
Page 70 of 92
A stabilizer deployment audible warning alarm will be provided at each side of the body, activated by the
stabilizer movement.
A "Stabilizers Not Stowed" indicator light will be provided in the cab within view of the driver. It will
illuminate automatically whenever the stabilizers are not fully stowed to prevent damage to the vehicle if it is
moved. The stabilizer system will also be wired to the "Do Not Move Truck" indicator light. This light will
flash whenever the apparatus parking brake is not engaged and the stabilizers are not fully stowed.
STABILIZER PINS
The stabilizer jacks will have holes for the stabilizer pins.
STAINLESS STEEL DOORS, STABILIZER CONTROL BOX
Vertically hinged stainless steel doors will be provided over each stabilizer control box. The doors will be
hinged inboard.
LIGHTING ON AERIAL LADDER
Blue LED rope lighting will be provided on both sides of the aerial ladder base, upper and lower mid, and fly
sections. The lighting will be located adjacent to the ladder rungs along the lower rail of the ladder sections and
will run the length of the ladder section. The lighting will be controlled with a switch at the turntable control
console.
AERIAL LOCATOR LIGHT, STROBE
A light will be installed at the aerial tip for the purpose of locating the aerial device while in operation. The
light will be a Whelen 800D strobe. The light will be activated when the aerial device is lifted from the cradle.
The color of the locator light will be blue.
STABILIZER WARNING LIGHTS
Two (2) Whelen model 60 *02F *R flashing Super LED warning light will be mounted on the stabilizer cover
panel, one (1) for each panel.
These lights will be controlled by the NFPA side lower zone switch.
The color of these lights will be red Super LED /red lens each side.
These lights wil l be with a flange.
STABILIZER BEAM WARNING LIGHTS
Two (2) 4.00" diameter red LED flashing lights will be mounted on each stabilizer, one (1) facing forward and
one (1) facing rearward. The lights will be Grote Supernova 40 series LED lights. The lights will be recessed
,in the horizontal beam of the stabilizer. These warning lights will be activated with the aerial master switch.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
All hose assemblies will be assembled and crimped by the hose manufactures certified technician. An assembly
cell will be located on the premises where the technician can perform audits of the final aerial assembly for
proper fitting torque and hose routing.
All manufacturing employees responsible for the installation of hydraulic components will be properly trained.
Training will include: proper handling, installation, torque requirements, cleanliness and quality control
procedures for hydraulic components.
Hoses used in the aerial hydraulic system will be of a premium quality hose with a high abrasion resistant cover.
All pressure hoses will have a working pressure of 4000 psi and a burst pressure rating of 16,000 psi.
Page 71 of 92
The hydraulic oil will be a premium Multi -Vis product having a leading edge additive package, provide
oxidation stability, be extremely shear stable and maximum anti -wear properties. All oil delivered to the
manufacturing site will have a minimum ISO cleanliness level of 18115/13.
Each aerial will be evaluated as to the region and climate where it will be used to determine the optimum
viscosity and proper oil grade. Oil viscosity will be based on an optimum range of 80 to 1060 SUS during
normal aerial use. Before shipment of the unit, an oil sample will be taken and analyzed to confirm the oil is
within the allowable ISO grade tolerance.
The aerial hydraulic system will have a minimum oil cleanliness level of ISO 18 115 /13 based on the ISO
4406:1999 cleanliness standard. Each customer will receive a certificate of actual cleanliness test results and an
explanation of the rating system.
Each aerial will include an oil sample port, identified with a yellow dust cap and a label, for subsequent
customer testing.
Ball valves will be provided in the hydraulic suction and return lines to permit component servicing without
draining the oil reservoir.
The system hydraulic pressure will be displayed on a 2.5" liquid filled gauge, located on the control console.
The hydraulic system will be additionally protected from excessive pressure by a secondary pressure relief
valve set at 3,150 psi. In the event the main hydraulic pump compensator malfunctions, the secondary relief will
prevent system damage.
HYDRAULIC CYLMERS
All cylinders used on the aerial device will be produced by a manufacturer that specializes in the manufacture of
hydraulic cylinders.
Each cylinder will include integral safety holding cartridges.
Each cylinder will be designed to a minimum safety factor of 4:1 to failure.
All safety holding cartridges will be installed at the cylinder manufacturer, in a controlled clean environment to
avoid possible contamination and or failure.
HYDRAULIC PUMP
The hydraulic system will be supplied by a 4.6 cubic inch variable volume, load and pressure compensating
piston pump. The pump will be rated at a minimum of 5,365 psi peak pressure and 2,600 rpm. The pump will
meet the demands of all three simultaneous aerial functions. The pump will provide proper flow for single aerial
function with the engine at idle speed. A switch will be provided on the control console to increase the engine
speed for multiple function operation.
EMERGE CYPUMP
The aerial will be equipped with an emergency hydraulic pump, electrically driven from the truck batteries. The
pump will be capable of running for 30 minutes for limited aerial functions to stow the unit in case of a main
pump or truck system failure. A momentary switch will be located at the stabilizer and aerial control locations
to activate the emergency pump. ,
AERIAL CONTROL VALVE
The aerial hydraulic control valve will be designed with special spool flows, limiting the oil flow for the
Page 72 of 92
designed function speed. The valve will be manually controlled and be located in the control console with the
handles protruding through the operating surface for operation. The activation handles will be spaced a
minimum of 3.5" for ease of operation. The valve spools will be designed to bleed off downstream pressure, in
the neutral position and allow proper seating of any cylinder holding cartridge.
OIL RESERVOIR
The oil reservoir will have a minimum capacity of 40 gallons. The oil fill location will be easily accessible and
be labeled "Hydraulic Oil Only" and also indicate the grade of oil that is installed in the reservoir. The fill cap
will have a 40 micron filter to provide protection from contamination. A drain hose will be included and will
terminate with a quarter ruin ball valve.
Two suction ports will be provided, one for the main hydraulic pump and one for the emergency pump. The
main suction will be slightly elevated off the bottom of the reservoir and include a 100 mesh suction strainer.
The emergency suction port will be closer to the bottom of the reservoir to provide some reserve oil for
emergency operation.
A six (6) disc type magnetic drain will also be provided to collect any ferrous contaminants.
A combination sight glass and thermometer will be mounted to the reservoir in an easily viewable location.
HIGH PRESSURE FILTER
The pressure filter will be rated for 6,000 psi working pressure and generously sized for efficiency and capacity
A 90 psi bypass spring will be included to protect the element and hydraulic system during lower than normal
system operating temperatures.
The 5Q filter element will be constructed of a micro glass medium, which has the highest capture efficiency,
dirt holding capacity and life expectancy over other media such as cellulose and synthetic. The nominal rating
will be 5 micron and have an efficiency rating of 99.3 % for 5 micron sized particles. The element will have a
dirt holding capacity of not less than 35 grams.
RETURN FILTER
The return filter will be rated for 150 psi worsting pressure and generously sized for efficiency and capacity. A
25 psi bypass spring will be included to protect the element and hydraulic system during lower than normal
system operating temperatures. The I OQ filter element will be constructed of a micro glass medium, which has
the highest capture efficiency, dirt holding capacity and life expectancy over other media such as cellulose and
synthetic. The nominal rating will be 10 microns and have an efficiency rating of 99.5% for 10 micron sized
particles. The element will have a dirt holding capacity of not less than 84.7 grams.
HYDRAULIC SWIVEL
The aerial ladder will be equipped with a high pressure hydraulic swivel which will connect the hydraulic lines
from the hydraulic pump and reservoir, through the rotation point, to the aerial control bank. The hydraulic
swivel will allow for 360degree continuous rotation of the aerial.
ELECTRIC SWIVEL
The ladder will be equipped with an electric swivel to allow 360 - degree rotation of the aerial while maintaining
connections in all electrical circuits through the rotation point. A minimum of 32 collector rings that are
capable of supplying 30 -amp continuous service will be provided. All collector rings will be enclosed and
Protected against condensation and corrosion.
AERIAL STRUCTURAL WARRANTY
Limited Warranry
Page 73 of 92
Except as provided below, and provided the vehicle will have been placed in service within 60 days after
delivery to the original purchaser as established by our original invoice, for a period ending on the first to occur
of the expiration of 20 years or 100,000 miles of use, Pierce Manufacturing Inc. ( "Pierce ") warrants to the user
that each new aerial device of its manufacture which is installed on its Fire and Rescue Apparatus vehicles will
be free of defects in design and workmanship. This warranty will apply only to the torque box, turntable, aerial
sections and other structural components of the aerial device, as identified in the Pierce specifications for the
aerial device. This warranty will be void if, or to the extent that the aerial device is not maintained in strict
compliance with NFPA Standard 1914 in effect at time of sale, including such periodic inspections and testing
by qualified third parties as are required by that Standard as it may be in effect from time to time. Proof of such
compliance will accompany any claims under this warranty. Thud party testing agencies known to Pierce to be
qualified for such purposes may be obtained from the Pierce Customer Service Department. This limited
warranty will apply only if the aerial device is properly maintained and used in service which is normal to the
particular vehicle. Normal service means service which does not subject the aerial device or vehicle to stresses
or impacts greater than normally result from the careful use of the aerial device or vehicle. If the buyer
discovers a defect or nonconformity it must notify Pierce in writing within 30 days after the date of discovery.
This limited warranty is not transferable by the first user.
A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal.
HYDRAULIC PLUMBING COMPONENTS WARRANTY
All hydraulic plumbing component suppliers will warrant the hose, adaptors, and fittings from component
failure for a period of five (5) years. The supplier's obligation under this warranty will be limited to the
replacement or repair of any failed components. The buyer understands that the seller will not be liable for any
other costs or damages.
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER WARRANTY
Each hydraulic cylinder will have a structural warranty of not less than five (5) years and a seal warranty of not
less than two and one -half (2.5) years.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM COMPONENTS WARRANTY
All hydraulic system component suppliers will warrant all Motion and Control Group components for a period
of five (5) years. This warranty will cover the valves, pumps, and hydraulic motors. Each component supplier's
obligation under this warranty will be limited to the replacement or repair of any failed components. The buyer
understands that the seller will not be liable for any other costs or damages. A copy of the five (5) year
warranty will be included with the bid.
120 -VOLT RECEPTACLE AT TIP
A 120 -volt, 20 amp, three (3) -prong twist lock receptacle, with weatherproof cover will be provided at the tip of
the aerial device.
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
An Atkinson communication system will be furnished between the aerial tip and the turntable operator's
Position. The communication system will be a two (2)-way system with the communication speaker at the tip
requiring no operator attention to transmit or receive. The transmitting and receiving volume controls will be
located at the turntable operator's position.
REMOTE AERIAL CONTROL
A remote control will be provided whereby all ladder movements can be controlled at the ladder tip, in addition
to the control console.
The three (3) ladder functions (extension, rotation, elevation) will be controlled individually by means of spring
loaded, return to center 12 -volt proportional controls.
Page 74 of 92
A momentary switch at the turntable control station will activate the controls at the ladder tip.
The remote control aerial speed will be set in accordance with the current NFPA 1901 standards
RESCUE LIFTING SYSTEM
A rescue lifting attachment will be provided. The Iifting attachment brackets will mount to the front of the
aerial egress using two (2) easily removable mounting brackets. The rescue lifting system will consist of a pair
Of nylatron pulleys mounted to a stainless steel shaft. The pulleys will be adjustable from side to side and will
have a total lifting capacity of 500 pounds, regardless of whether one (1) or both pulleys are being utilized.
SPECIAL HEIGHT BOOM SUPPORT
A special height boom support will be provided to raise the aerial device to clear the compartment above the
body.
AXE MOUNTING BRACKETS
Brackets will be provided near the end of the fly section of the aerial ladder for mounting a fire axe being
supplied by the purchaser. The mounting plates for this installation will be "D /A" finished aluminum.
PIKE POLE MOUNTING BRACKETS
will be "D/A" finished and provided near the end of the fly section of the aerial ladder for pike pole mounting.
The bracket will be sized to hold a.
AIR HORN CONTROL AT AERIAL TURNTABLE
A push button control for the air hams will be provided at the aerial turntable. Collector ring space will be
available for this option to be utilized.
LIFTING EYE - ROPE RESCUE ATTACHMNT
Two (2) eyes will be welded, one (l) to each ladder beam, at the ladder egress with a spreader bar to mounted
between the eyes. This design will distribute a load evenly across the ladder beams because of a single lifting
eye on the spreader bar. The bar is retained by two (2) locking pins, one (1) at each end outboard of each eye.
Leveling is maintained by the bar rotating in the eyes.
MANSAVERTA° BARS, AERIAL TURNTABLE
ManSaverT"r bars will be installed at the aerial turntable.
WATER SYSTEM
A waterway system will be provided consisting of the following components and features:
The integral telescopic water system will consist of a 4.50" diameter tube in the base section, a 4.00" diameter
tube in the lower mid- section, a 3.50" diameter tube in the upper mid - section and a 3.00" diameter tube in the
fly section. The telescopic waterway will be constructed of anodized aluminum pipe.
The aerial will be capable of discharging up to 1000 gpm at 100 psi parallel to the ladder and 90 degrees to each
side of center.
An adjustable pressure relief valve will be furnished to protect the aerial waterway from a pressure surge.
Two (2) 1.50" drain valves will be located at the lowest points of the waterway system.
WATERWAY SEALS
Page 75 of 92
The waterway seals will be of type-B PolyPak design, composed ofnitroxile seal and a nitrite wiper, which
together offer maximum stability and extrusion resistance on the waterway. The seal will be capable of
withstanding pressures up to 2000 psi, temperatures in excess of 250 degrees Fahrenheit and have resistance to
all foam generating solutions. The seals will be internally lubricated.
The waterway seals will have automatic centering guides constructed of synthetic thermalpotymer. The guides
will provide positive centering of the extendible sections within each other and the base section to insure longer
service life and smoother operation.
AERIAL MOMTOR
An Akron, model 3578 monitor with stow and deploy will be provided at the tip with a Akron 1250 gpm
model 5177.
The monitor's functions will be controlled electrically from two (2) separate locations. One (1) control
will be located at the control console and the other at the ladder tip.
There will be a courtesy light at the tip of the aerial to Illuminate the controls.
AERIAL MONITOR
An Akron Model 3578 monitor w /stow and deploy, and a 5177, (1250 gallon per minute), variable stream
nozzle with built in stream shaper will be provided. The monitor will be capable of delivering flows up to 1000
gpm. The actuators will allow for vertical travel of 135 degrees below the centerline of the aerial and 90
degrees on either side of center. The unit will be equipped with two (2) control loxes: one (1) at the aerial tip
and one (1) on the turntable control console. The monitor controls will include "one touch" stow and deploy
function at the turntable location. There will be a courtesy light at the tip of the aerial to illuminate the controls.
FLOW METER (Aefial Waterway)
A Fire Research Corporation (FRC), model DF430, digital flow indicator with a four (4) digit LED display will
be provided for the aerial waterway at the turntable control station.
The display will have a flow totalizer, programmable high and low flow warnings, and automatically adjust
LED brightness for day /night viewing.
AERIAL WATERWAY INLET
The aerial waterway will be plumbed from the fifth wheel area to the waterway swivel with 4.00" pipe. A 5.00"
inlet will be located on each side of the apparatus complete with a chrome plated cap. The individual "line"
pressure gauges for the inlets will be manufactured by Class 1. They will be a minimum of 3.50" in diameter
and will have white faces with black lettering. Gauges will be compound type with a vacuum/pressure range of
30.00 " -0 -600 #.
The individual pressure gauge will be installed as close to the inlet as practical.,
WATERWAY LOCKING SYSTEM
The aerial ladder waterway monitor will be capable of being positioned at either the fly section or at the next
lower section of the ladder.
The monitor location will be changeable by the use of a single handle, located at the side of the ladder.
The handle, attached to a cam bracket, will simply be moved forward to lock the monitor at the fly section and
back to lock it to the previous section.
There will be no pins to remove and reinstall
Page 76 of 92
The monitor will be operational at all times, regardless of its position, without connecting or disconnecting
electrical lines.
The aerial waterway 1.5" drain valve will be mounted horizontal with a stainless steel extension with an elbow
at the end to direct to the water rear of the tiller tractor on both the driver and passenger side. Valve acuation
will be with a handle easily accessible from the side of the apparatus. This option will not include the drain
valve itself. This option calls for the pipe and the valve to be painted job color.
OUTLET 250" AUXILIARY AERIAL TIP HEAVY DUTY STEEL PAL
An auxiliary hose connection outlet will be supplied at the tip of the aerial ladder. It will be located on the left
hand side of the aerial waterway.
Flow to the auxiliary outlet will be supplied by 2:50" piping. A 2.50" gate valve with a non -rising stem and
crank handle will be supplied. A cap and chain will be provided.
Flow to the aerial waterway monitor will be controlled by a 4.00" aluminum butterfly valve with a non -rising
stem and crank handle. The valve will be located at the monitor inlet.
A 200 -psi relief valve and a .75" automatic drain valve will be supplied in the waterway at the tip.
TOOLS
The following tools will be provided for retorquing of all specified bolts as recommended by the manufacturer:
- Torque Wrench
- All Required Extensions, Sockets and Adapters
- 4 -to -1 Multiplier
MANUALS
Two (2) operator maintenance manuals and two (2) wiring diagrams pertaining to the aerial device will be
Provided with the apparatus at time of pick -up.
INITIAL INSTRUCTION
On initial delivery of the fire apparatus, the contractor will supply a qualified representative to demonstrate the
apparatus and provide initial instruction to the fire department regarding the operation, care, and maintenance of
the apparatus for a period of three (3) days.
ADDITIONAL AERIAL TRA1NTNG
There will be one (1) additional aerial training day(s) provided by the manufacturer with a training engineer.
This is in addition to the standard three (3) days.
TILLER CAB
A permanently mounted tiller cab will be located on top of the tiller trailer, to the rear of the aerial ladder. The
maximum overall height of the tiller cab will not exceed 134.00". The tiller cab will be totally enclosed.
The cab windshield will be automotive approved tinted safety glass and will provide a minimum of 1,513
square inches of clear viewing area. Each side window, directly rearward of the windshield, will be more than
536 square inches. The side windows, combined with the windshield, will provide a minimum of 2,585 square
inches of unobstructed viewing area. In order to provide maximum visibility for the tillerman, there will be no
comer posts at the forward corners of the windshield.
Page 77 of 92
The upper area of each tiller cab door will be contoured into the roof, providing greater clearance when entering
and exiting the tiller cab. The tiller cab doors will be equipped with drop -down sliding window. The windows
will be 18.00" wide x 31.00" high.
The rear wall of the tiller cab will have a vertically -split sliding window. The window will be 33.50" wide x
27.75" high.
The tiller cab floor will be constructed of aluminum treadplate.
A two speed electric windshield wiper with washer will be provided for the front windshield. The windshield
washer reservoir will have a capacity of two (2) quarts and will be located forward of the tiller cab.
An adjustable, telescopic steering column will be provided.
Auxiliary lighting inside the tiller cab will consist of a 5.00" diameter overhead dome light with an integral
switch.
The following controls/alarms will be provided inside the tiller cab:
- Buzzer signaling system with foot switch control
- Jackknife alarm
The following will be provided on the steering column support pedestal: .
- Two heater /defroster outlets
Diagnostic plug for trailer ABS system
- Heater /defroster control switch
- Windshield wiper /washer control switch
The following controls/gauges will be located in the upper control panel:
- Dome/step light switch
- Tiller wheel position indicator gauge. (L -C -R)
- Two 2.0" diameter amber turn signal & brake indicator lights
The cornering lights will be controlled by a switch on the steering column
TILLER CAB HEATER
For the tillerman's comfort, the cab is equipped with a 13,850 BTU heater /defroster. The heater will have a
multi-speed motor and thermostatic control located in the tiller cab within reach of the tillerman. The heater
Will be diesel/kerosene fueled and will have a separate three (3) gallon fuel tank which will provide a minimum
of 23 hours of continuous running time. The fuel tank will be recessed in the body, behind the driver side tiller
cab access steps. There will be a minimum of two (2) defrost outlets in the cab for maximum defrost
performance. The heater /defrost system will have an airflow of 85 cfm.
Page 78 of 92
AIR CONDITIONER
Air conditioning will be provided for the tiller cab.
The unit will be manufactured by Danhard Inc.
The air conditioner will have cooling capacity of 13,500 BTU.
The unit will be 120 volt AC and will be ran off of the onboard generator. The full load amperage draw
will be 12.00 amps in the cooling mode.
The evaporator will be located ahead of the tiller cab on the top deck of the tiller trailer. The air conditioning
unit will not increase the overall height of the tiller cab.
TILLER CAB SEAT
A Seats Inc. 911 fixed companion high back style seat with forward and rearward adjustment will be provided
in the tiller cab for the tillerman. The seat will be provided with a switch that is connected to a warning
indicator in the tractor cab. The indicator will indicate the tiller driver is not present in the tiller cab.
The seating position will be furnished with a 3-point seat belt. The seat belt will be famished with an automatic
retractor. Extension will be provided with the seat belt so the male end can be easily grasped and the female
end easily located while sitting in a normal position.
TILLER CAB STEPS
For access to the tiller cab, a series of four (4) steps will be famished at the rear on each side of the apparatus.
The steps will be constructed of aluminum treadplate. The steps will be a minimum of 21.00" wide x 8.00"
deep. Handrails will be provided on each side of the step assemblies for maximum safety. The steps will be
illuminated for nighttime operation.
TILLERMAN'S INTERCOM
An Atkinson Dynamics two -way intercom will be provided between the tractor and the tIDerman. The tractor
position will require push -to -talk and the tillerman's position will be hands free.
JACKKNIFE ALARM
An audible and visual warning system will be provided to warn both drivers when the jackknife position
approaches the maximum allowable angle.
TILLER WARNING INDICATOR
A warning indicator in the tractor cab will be activated if the parking brake is released and the tiller driver is not
present in the tiller cab.
CONVEX MIRRORS (tiller cab)
A 6.00" diameter round convex mirror with adjustable arm will be installed on each side of tiller cab.
The engine start switch in the tiller cab will be a footswitch in place of the standard push button.
WINDOW DEFROST FANS
Two (2) window defrost fans will be mounted in forward comers.
TILLER TRAILER FRAME
The gooseneck area of the tiller trailer will be constructed of 100,000 psi minimum yield strength steel.
The gooseneck area will have a section modulus of 289 cu. in. and a resistance to bending moment of
Page 79 of 92
28,900,000 inch pounds.
The gooseneck area will be 46.00" wide x 13.50" deep.
The tiller trailer frame will be box type construction to effectively resist trailer twist.
The side mils will have a 13.38" tall web over the front and mid sections of the trailer, with a continuous
smooth taper to a 10.75' over the tiller axle.
The frame tails will be constructed of 80,000 psi minimum yield strength heat treated .38" thick steel, with
3.50" wide flanges and covered by top and bottom plates to form a ridged box structure. Cover plates will be
50,000 psi minimum yield strength steel.
The tiller trailer frame will have a section modulus of 257.7 cu. in., and a resisting bending moment (rbm) of
12,880,000 inch pounds over the critical regions of the frame assembly, with a section modulus of 18.96 cu. in.
with an rbm of 2,085,803 inch pounds over the rear axle.
The overall length of the tiller trailer frame will be 462.00 ".
WALKWAY, TURNTABLE TO BODY
A walkway will be provided from the aerial turntable to the tiller body.
TILLER TRAILER NON DRIVE AXLE
The tiller trailer axle will be of the independent suspension design with a ground rating of 22,800 pounds.
Upper and lower control arms will be used on each side of the axle. Upper control arm castings will be made of
100,000 -psi yield strength 8630 steel and the lower control arm casting will be made of 55,000 -psi yield ductile
iron.
The center cross members and side plates will be constructed out of 80,000 -psi yield strength steel.
Each control arm will be mounted to the center section using elastomer bushings. These rubber bushings will
rotate on low friction plain bearings and be lubricated for life. Each bushing will also have a flange end to
absorb longitudinal impact loads, reducing noise and vibrations.
The upper control arm will be shorter than the lower arm so that wheel end geometry provides positive camber
when deflected below rated load and negative chamber above rated load.
Camber at load will be zero degrees for optimum tire life.
The kingpin bearing will be of low friction design and be sealed for life.
Toe links that are adjustable for alignment of the wheel to the center of the trailer will be provided:
The wheel ends must have little to no bump steer when the chassis encounters a hole or obstacle.
The steering linkage will provide proper steering angles for the inside and outside wheel, based on the vehicle
wheelbase.
The turning angle will be 24 degrees or greater.
TILLER TRAILER NON DRIVE AXLE WARRANTY
Page 80 of 92
The non drive axle system will have a three (3) year parts and labor warranty
TILLER TRAILER STEERING
Dual Sheppard M110 steering gears, with integral heavy -duty power steering, will be provided.
The steering wheel will be 18.00" in diameter, and capable of tilting and telescoping.
BRAKES
The tiller trailer brakes will be KnorrBendix disc type with a 17.00" ventilated rotor for improved stopping
distance.
SUSPENSION
Independent suspension will be provided with a minimum ground rating of 22,800 pounds. The independent
suspension system will be designed to provide maximum ride comfort. The design will allow the vehicle to
travel at highway speeds over improved road surfaces, and at moderate speeds over rough terrain with minimal
transfer of road shock and vibration to the vehicle's crew compartment.
Each wheel will have torsion bar type spring. In addition, each wheel end will also have energy absorbing
jounce bumpers to prevent bottoming of the suspension. The suspension design will be such that there is at
least 10.00" of total wheel travel and a minimum of 3.75" before suspension bottoms. The torsion bar type
spring and anchor lock system will allow for simple lean adjustments, without the use of shims. Adjustment for
a lean will be accomplished within 15 minutes. Anchor adjustment design is such that it allows 4.0" of ride
height adjustment per side.
The independent suspension will have been put through a durability test that simulated a minimum of 140,000
miles of inner city driving.
TIRES
Tiller trailer tires will be Michelin radials 425/65822.50, 20 ply "all position" XZY tread.
The tires will be mounted on 22.50" x 12.25" polished aluminum disc type wheels with a ten (10)-stud 1125"
bolt circle.
OIL SEALS
Oil seals will be provided on the tiller axle. .
INSTALL CUSTOMER PROVIDED EOUIPMENT
The following customer supplied equipment shall be furnished to a preferred installer for installation.
One (1) MW -800 Motorola CPU & Monitor
One VRM 850 Modem
- One AVL Pinpoint X Modem
- Four (4) Motorola WPLN4208 portable radio chargers
- One (1) Motorola Astro Spectra 800MHz mobile radio
The apparatus builder shall not accept or warranty customer famished equipment. Specific shipping
requirements shall be followed. -
Page 81 of 92
ANTENNA INSTALLATION
There will be four (4) customer supplied two -way radio antenna(s) installed on the roof. The antenna coax
cable will be run from the antenna to To be determined at pre con. Specific shipping requirements will be
followed.
LOOSE EQUIPMENT
The following equipment will be furnished with the completed unit:
- One (1) bag of chrome, stainless steel, or cadmium plated screws, nuts, bolts and washers, as used in the
construction of the unit.
NFPA REQUIRED LOOSE EQUIPMENT PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT
The following loose equipment as outlined in NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, section 8.82 will be provided
by the fire department. All loose equipment will be installed on the apparatus before placed in
emergency service, tmlbss the fire department waives NFPA section 4.21.
- Two (2) crowbars mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus-
- Two (2) claw tools mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus.
- Two (2) 12 lb (5 kg) sledgehammers mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus.
- One (I) SCBA complying with NFPA 1981, Standard on Open- Circuit Self- Contained Breathing
Apparatus for Fire and Emergency Services, for each assigned seating position, but not fewer than four
(4), mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus or stored in containers supplied by the SCBA
manufacturer.
- One (1) spare SCBA cylinder for each SCBA carried, each mounted in a bracket fastened to the
apparatus or stored in a specially designed storage space(s).
- One (1) first aid kit.
- Six (6) salvage covers, each a minimum size of 12 ft x 18 ft (3.6 m x 5.5 m).
- Four (4) combination spanner wrenches mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus.
- Two (2) scoop shovels mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus.
- One pair of bolt cutters, 24" (0.6 m) minimum, mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus.
- Four (4) ladder belts meeting the requirements of NFPA 1983, Standard on Fire Service Life Safety
Rope and System Components.
- One (I) 150 ft (45 m) light -use life safety rope meeting the requirements of NFPA 1983, Standard on
Fire Service Life Safety Rope and System Components.
- One (1) 150 ft (45 m) general -use life safety rope meeting the requirements of NFPA 1983, Standard
on Fire Service Life Safety Rope and system Components.
-Two (2) 150 ft (45 m) utility ropes having a breaking strength of at least 5000 lb (2300 kg).
- One (1) box of tools to include the following:
Page 82 of 92
one(1) hacksaw with three (3) blades
one(1) keyhole saw
one (1) 12" (.3 m) pipe wrench
one (1) 24" (.6 m) pipe wrench
one (1) ballpeen hammer
one (1) pair of tin snips
one (1) pair of pliers
one (1) pair of lineman's pliers
assorted types and sizes of screwdrivers
assorted adjustable wrenches
assorted combination wrenches
- One (1) traffic vest for each seating position, each vest to comply with ANSVISEA 207, Staxdardfor
High Visibility Public Safety Vests, and have a fiv"oint breakaway feature that includes two at the
shoulders, two at the sides, and one at the front.
- Five (5) fluorescent orange traffic cones not less than 28" (711 mm) in height, each equipped with a 6"
(152 mm) repo- reflective white band no more than 4" (152 mm) from the top of the cone, and an
additional 4" (102 mm) retro- reflective white band 2" (51 mm) below the 6" (152 mm) band.
- Five (5) illuminated warning devices such as highway flares, unless the five (5) fluorescent orange
traffic cones have illuminating capabilities.
- One automatic external defibrillator (AED).
- One (1) double female 2.50" adapter with National Hose Threads, mounted in a bracket fastened to the
apparatus (if equipped with a fire pump).
- One (1) double male 2.50" adapter with National Hose Threads, mounted in a bracket fastened to the
apparatus (if equipped with a fire pump).
- One (1) tubber mallet, for use on suction hose connections, mounted in a bracket fastened to the
apparatus (if equipped with a fire pump).
- Two (2) hydrant wrenches mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus (if equipped with a fire
pump).
- If the supply hose carried does not use sexless couplings, an additional double female adapter and
double male adapter, sized to fit the supply hose carried, will be carried mounted in brackets fastened to
the apparatus (if equipped with a fire pump).
- If none of the pump intakes are valved, a hose appliance that is equipped with one or more gated
intakes with female swivel connection(s) compatible with the supply hose used on one side and a swivel
connection with pump intake threads on the other side will be carried. Any intake connection larger than
3 in. (75 mm) will include a pressure relief device that meets the requirements of 16.6.6 (if equipped
with a fire pump).
- if the apparatus does not have a 2Y:" National Hose (NH) intake, an adapter from 2'/" NH female to a
pump intake will be carried, mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus if not already mounted
directly to the intake (if equipped with a fire pump).
- If the supply hose carried has other than 2'/" National Hose (NH) threads, adapters will be carried to allow
Page 83 of 92
feeding the supply hose from a 29P NH thread male discharge and to allow the hose to connect to a 2%," NH
female intake, mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus if not already mounted directly to the discharge or
intake (if equipped with a fire pump).
DRY CHEMICAL EXTINGUISHER PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT
NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, section 8.8.2 requires one (1) approved dry chemical portable fire
extinguisher with a minimum 80 -B:C rating mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus.
The extinguisher is not on the apparatus as manufactured. The fire department will provide and mount the
extinguisher.
WATER EXTINGUISHER PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT
NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, section 8.8.2 requires one (1) 2.5 gallon or larger water extinguisher mounted
in a bracket fastened to the apparatus.
The extinguisher is not on the apparatus as manufactured. The fire department will provide and mount the
extinguisher.
AXE. FLATHEAD. PROVIDED BY FERE DEPARTMENT
NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, Section 8.8.2 requires two (2) flathead axes mounted in brackets fastened to the
apparatus.
The axes are not on the apparatus as manufactured. The fire department will provide and mount the axes.
AXE. PICKHEAD. PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT
NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, Section 8.8.2 requires three (3) pickhead axes mounted in brackets fastened to the
apparatus.
The axes are not on the apparatus as manufactured. The fire department will provide and mount the axes.
WIRING SCHEMATIC
One (1) copy on CD of detailed wiring schematic will be provided for the 120 /240 -volt electrical system.
PAINT
The exterior custom cab and body painting procedure will consist of a seven (7) step finishing process as
follows:
1. Manual Surface Preparation - All exposed metal surfaces on the custom cab and body will be thoroughly
cleaned and prepared for painting. Surfaces that will not be painted include all chrome plated, polished
stainless steel, anodized aluminum and bright aluminum treadplate. Each imperfection . on the exterior metal
surface will be removed or filled and then sanded smooth for a smooth appearance. All seams will be sealed
before painting.
2. Chemical Cleaning and Treatmgpt - The metal surfaces will be properly cleaned using a high pressure and
high temperature cleaning system. Surfaces are chemically cleaned to remove all dirt, oil, grease and metal
oxides to ensure the subsequent coatings bond well. An ultra pure water final rinse will be applied to all metal
surfaces at the conclusion of the metal treatment process.
3. Primer/Surfacer Coats - A two (2) component urethane primer /surfacer will be hand applied to the
chemically treated metal surfaces to provide a strong corrosion protective base coat and to smooth out the
surface.
Page 84 of 92
4. Hand Sanding - The primer /surfacer coat will be lightly sanded to an ultra smooth finish.
5. Sealer Primer Coat - A two (2) component sealer primer coat will'be applied over the sanded primer
6. Topcoat Paint - Urethane base coat will be applied to opacity for correct color matching.
7. Clearmat - Two (2) coats of an automotive grade two (2) component urethane will be applied. Lap style
doors will be clear coated to match the body. Roll -up doors will not be clear coated and the standard roll-up
door warranty will apply.
All removable items such as brackets, compartment doors, door hinges, trim, etc. will be removed and painted
separately to insure paint behind all mounted items. Body assemblies that cannot be finish painted after
assembly will be finish painted before assembly.
The cab and the body will be painted Pierce #351 Red.
Prior to reassembly and reinstallation of lights, handrails, door hardware and any miscellaneous items an
isolation tape, gasket or dielectric material will be used to prevent damage to the finish painted surfaces (no
exceptions). A nylon washer will be installed under each atom nut or metal screw that is fastened directly to an
exterior painted surface.
PAINT - ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT
The contractor will meet or exceed his current State regulations concerning paint operations. Pollution control
will include measures to protect the atmosphere, water and soil. Controls will include the following conditions:
- Topcoats and primers will be chrome and lead free.
- Metal treatment chemicals will be chrome free. The wastewater generated in the metal treatment process will
be treated on -site to remove any other heavy metals.
- Particulate emission collection from sanding operations will have a 99.99% efficiency factor.'
- Particulate emissions from painting operations will be collected by a dry filter or water wash process. if the
dry filter means is used, it will have an efficiency rating of 98.110%. Water wash systems will be 99.97°/a
efficient.
- Water from water wash booths will be reused. Solids will be removed mechanically on a continual basis to
keep the water clean.
- Paint wastes will be disposed of in an environmentally safe manner.
- Empty metal paint containers will be crushed and recycled to recover the metal.
- Solvents used in cleanup operations will be collected, recycled on -site, or sent off -site for distillation and
returned for reuse. Residue from the distillation operation will be used as fuel in off -site kilns.
Additionally, the finished apparatus will not be manufactured with or contain products that have ozone
depleting substances. The contactor will, upon demand, present evidence that his manufacturing facility meets
the above conditions and that it is in compliance with his State EPA rules and regulations.
PAINT
The tiller cab will be painted Red #351.
Page 85 of 92
PAINT CHASSIS FRAME ASSEMBLY
The chassis frame assembly will be painted job color before the installation of the cab and body, and before
installation of the.engine, drive shafts and transmission assembly, air brake lines, electrical wire harnesses, etc.
Components that are included with the chassis frame assembly will be painted job color are frame rails, cross
members, axles, suspension, steering gear, fuel tank, body substructure supports, miscellaneous mounting
brackets, etc.
WARRANTY - PAINT AND CORROSION
Limited Waranty
Except as provided below, and provided the vehicle has been placed in service within 60 days after delivery to
the original purchaser as established by our original invoice, for a period of ten (10) years after delivery to the
original purchaser, Pierce Manufactuting Inc. ( "Pierce ") warmats to the user that its cab and body are free of
blistering, peeling, corrosion, or any other adhesion defect caused by defective manufacturing methods or paint
material selection for exterior surfaces of the cab and body of the vehicle. This limited warranty will apply only
if the vehicle is properly maintained and used in service which is normal to the particular vehicle. Normal
service means service which does not subject the vehicle to stresses or impacts greater than normally result
from the careful use of the vehicle or chassis. If the buyer discovers a defect or nonconformity it must notify
Pierce in writing within 30 days after the date of discovery. This limited warranty is not transferable by the first
user, and is applicable to the vehicle in the following percentage costs of warranty repair, if any:
Topcoat Durability & Appearance:
Integrity of Coating System:
Corrosion:
Gloss Color Retention & Cracking
Adhesion, Blisterin ubblin
Dissimilar Metal and Crevice
0 -72 months 1000/4
0 -36 months 100°/"
0-36 months 100%
73 -96 months 50%
37 -84 months 500/0
37 -48 months 50%
97 -120 months 25%
85 -120 months 25%
49 -72 months 25%
73 -120 months 10%
This limited warranty applies only to cab and body exterior paint. Paint on the vehicle's undercarriage, cab and
body interior is warranted only under the Pierce Basic One Year Limited Warranty.
In addition to the foregoing, and subject to all of the terms and conditions of this Limited Warranty, except cost
allocations, Pierce warrants its cab and body exterior paint for a period of ten (10) years against corrosion
perforation.
A.copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposaL
This warranty text is an illustration only. For actual details, refer to the warranty document. A copy of the
Pierce warranty is included with this proposal.
PAINT, COMPARTMENT INTERIOR
The compartment interior will be painted with a gray spatter finish for ease of cleaning and to make it easier to
touch up scratches and nicks.
AERIAL DEVICE PAINT COLOR
All aerial device structural components above the rotation point that are not chrome plated or stainless steel will
be painted.
All buy out components, such as monitor, nozzle, gauges, etc. will be supplied as received from the vendor.
All areas to be painted will be sanded to remove any metal flakes and smooth any rough surfaces.
Page 86 of 92
All ladder surfaces to be painted will be phosphatized to remove metal impurities, aid paint adhesion and inhibit
rust.
The components will be prime painted with an epoxy primer and finished painted with a durable, high quality
white paint (manufacturer's standard brand).
The support structure and components below the rotation point will be painted job color.
The torque box, stabilizers, titter axle & suspension will be painted job color.
The tip of the ladder will be painted a contrasting color for high visibility.
REFLECTIVE BAND
A 6.00" white reflective band will be provided across the front of the vehicle and along the sides of the body.
The reflective band provided on the cab face will be at the headlight level.
CHEVRON STRIPING, REAR
There will be alternating chevron striping located on the entire rear - facing vertical surface of the
apparatus including the rear door and bumper. The tillerman cab will not be covered.
The colors will be red and fluorescent yellow diamond grade.
Each stripe will be 6.00" in width.
This will meet the requirements of NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, which states that 50% of the rear surface will be
covered with chevron striping,
JOG(S) IN REFLECTIVE BAND
The reflective band located on each side of the apparatus body will contain one (1) jog(s) and will be angled at
approximately a 45 degree "s" when installed.
PIN STRIPE, DOUBLE TAPE
A double pinstripe will be applied on the reflective band. The pinstripe will consist of a Black. 125" stripe
followed by a.125" void and then a blue .062" wide stripe. This pinstripe will be located on the top and
bottom portion of the reflective band.
REFLECTIVE STRIPE, CAB DOORS
A 6.00" x 16.00" ruby red reflective stripe will be provided across the interior of each cab door. The stripe will
be located approximately 1.00" up from the bottom, on the door panel.
This stripe will meet the NFPA 1901 requirement.
REFLECTIVE STRIPE. TILLERMAN DOORS
A 6.00" x 16.00" ruby red reflective stripe will be provided across the interior of each tillerman's entry
door. The stripe will be located approximately 1.00" up from the bottom, on the door panel.
This stripe will meet the NFPA 1901 requirement.
,LETTERING ON AERIAL BOOM
There will be 6.00" to 7.00" high white reflective vinyl lettering provided on a separate panel on each side of
Page 87 of 92
the base ladder section, The lettering will include a Black outline. The panels will be painted Red sign plate
body color #351.
GOLD LEAF BODY STRIPE
A gold leaf stripe will be provided on each side of the body, over the fender.
LETTERING
The lettering will be totally encapsulated between two (2) layers of clear vinyl.
GOLDSTAR@ LAMINATION WARRANTY
Limited Warranry
Except as provided below, for a period of three (3) years after delivery to the original purchaser, Pierce
Manufacturing Inc. ( "Pierce") warrants to the user that each Goldstar® lamination sold by it will be free from
defects in material and workmanship. This limited warranty will apply only if the vehicle on which such
Goldstar® lamination is affixed or installed is properly maintained and used in service which is normal to the
particular vehicle. Normal service means service which does not subject the vehicle to stresses or impacts
greater than normally result from a careful use of the vehicle. If the buyer discovers a defect or nonconformity
it must notify Pierce in writing within 30 days after date of discovery. This limited warranty is not transfemble
by the first user.
A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal
LETTERING
Forty -one (4l) to sixty (60) genuine gold leaf lettering, 3.00" high, outlining and shading will be provided.
REFLECTIVE LETTERING
15 letters, 6.00" high blue reflective will be installed on on crew cab doors and front of cab.
REFLECTIVE LETTERING
six (6) letters, 6.00" high white reflective letter(s) will be installed on Rear of tiller cab.
DECAL INSTALLATION
There will be one (1) pair of decals furnished by the fire department and applied by the apparatus manufacturer.
EMBLEM
There will be one (1) pair of emblems with the words "HONORING AMERICA'S BRAVEST 9- 11 -01" and a
firefighter's helmet will be mounted N /A.N /A The emblems will be color imaged.
Page 88 of 92
EXHIBIT C
CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH
BOND NO.
FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE BOND
The premium charges on this Bond is $
being at the rate of $
price.
thousand of the Contract
WHEREAS, the City of Newport Beach, State of California, has awarded to
PIERCE MANUFACTURING, INC. hereinafter designated as the "Principal," a contract for
two (2) new GPM Triple Combination Pumpers and one (1) new 100' Heavy Duty Tiller
Ladder Truck in strict conformity with the Contract on file with the office of the City Clerk of
the City of Newport Beach, which is incorporated herein by this reference.
WHEREAS, Principal has executed or is about to execute the Contract and the
terns thereof require the furnishing of a Bond for the faithful performance of the Contract.
NOW, THEREFORE, we, the Principal, and
, duly authorized to transact business under the laws of the State of
California as Surety (hereinafter "Surety'), are held and firmly bound unto the City of
Newport Beach, in the sum of Two Million Ninety Nine Thousand and Six Hundred
Thirty One Dollars and no /100 ($2,099,631.00) lawful money of the United States of
America, said sum being equal to 100% of the estimated amount of the Contract, to be
paid to the City of Newport Beach, its successors, and assigns; for which payment well
and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and administrators,
successors, or assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these present.
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that 9 the Principal, or the
Principal's heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns, fail to abide by, and
well and truly keep and perform any or all the work, covenants, conditions, and
agreements in the Contract Documents and any alteration thereof made as therein
provided on its part, to be kept and performed at the time and in the manner therein
specified, and in all respects according to its true intent and meaning, or fails to indemnify,
defend, and save harmless the City of Newport Beach, its officers, employees and agents,
as therein stipulated, then, Surety will faithfully perform the same, in an amount not
exceeding the sum specified in this Bond; otherwise this obligation shall become null and
void.
As a part of the obligation secured hereby, and in addition to the face amount
specified in this Performance Bond, there shall be included costs and reasonable
expenses and fees, including reasonable attorneys fees, incurred by the City, only in the
event the City is required to bring an action in law or equity against Surety to enforce the
obligations of this Bond.
Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time,
alterations or additions to the terms of the Contract or to the work to be performed
thereunder shall in any way affect its obligations on this Bond, and it does hereby waive
notice of any such change, extension of time, alterations or additions of the Contract or to
the work or to the specifications.
This Faithful Performance Bond shall be extended and maintained by the Principal
in full force and effect for one (1) year following the date of formal acceptance of the
Project by the City.
In the event that the Principal executed this bond as an individual, it is agreed that
the death of any such Principal shall not exonerate the Surety from its obligations under
this Bond.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed by the Principal
and Surety above named, on the day of 2010.
Name of Contractor (Principal)
Name of Surety
Address of Surety
Telephone
Authorized Signature/Title
Authorized Agent Signature
Print Name and Title
NOTARY ACKNOWLEDGMENTS OF CONTRACTOR AND SURETY MUST BE
ATTACHED
Page 12
City of Newport Beach NO. BA- 10BA -030
BUDGET AMENDMENT
2009 -10 AMOUNT: $346,019.00
EFFECT ON BUDGETARY FUND BALANCE:
Increase Revenue Estimates Increase in Budgetary Fund Balance
�X Increase Expenditure Appropriations AND X Decrease in Budgetary Fund Balance
Transfer Budget Appropriations No effect on Budgetary Fund Balance
SOURCE:
from existing budget appropriations
from additional estimated revenues
PX from unappropriated fund balance
EXPLANATION:
This budget amendment is requested to provide for the following:
To increase expenditure appropriations from the Equipment Fund unappropriated fund balance for the purchase
of one ladder truck and two fire engines from Pierce Manufacturing.
ACCOUNTING ENTRY:
BUDGETARY FUND BALANCE
Fund Account Description
610 3605 Equipment Fund - Fund Balance
REVENUE ESTIMATES (3601)
Fund /Division Account
EXPENDITURE APPROPRIATIONS (3603)
Division
Account
Division
Account
Division
Account
Division
Account
Signed:
Signed
Signed
Description
Description
Number 6120 Equipment Fund - Replacement
Number 9100 Rolling Equipment
Number
Number
Number
Number
Number
Number
Financial
Approval: City
City Council Approval: City Clerk
Services Director
Amount
Debit Credit
$346,019.00
$346,019.00
/ ate ,
z
-2, 11 o
Date
Date
"RECEIVED AFTER AGENDA
PRINTED." all
a -a -lu
PURCHASE AGREEMENT
FOR TWO 1250 GPM TRIPLE COMBINATION PUMPERS AND
ONE 100' HEAVY DUTY TILLER LADDER TRUCK FROM
PIERCE MANUFACTURING INC.
This Purchase Agreement (the "Agreement ") is entered into as of this
day of February, 2010 ( "Execution Date "), by and between the CITY OF NEWPORT
BEACH, a California municipal corporation and charter city ( "City "), and PIERCE
MANUFACTURING INC., a Wisconsin Corporation ( "Vendor"), whose principal place of
business is 2600 American Dr., Appleton, Wisconsin 54914.
RECITALS
A. City is a municipal corporation duly organized and validly existing under the laws
of the State of California with the power to carry on its business as it is now being
conducted under the statutes of the State of California and the Charter of City.
B. City requires two (2) new GPM Triple Combination Pumpers and one (1) new
100' Heavy Duty Tiller Ladder Truck (individually "Piece of Equipment" and
collectively the "Equipment ").
C. Vendor is a fire apparatus manufacturer and dealer.
D. The principal members of Vendor for purposes of this Agreement shall be Cherry
Sewell and Kevin Newell.
E. City has solicited and received a proposal from Vendor, has evaluated the
expertise of Vendor, and desires to submit an order for the Equipment under the
terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement.
NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual representations, warranties
and covenants, and other terms and conditions as set forth herein, Vendor and City
(each a "Party' and together the "Parties ") agree as follows:
1. COMPENSATION
Total Compensation for Equipment, including all sales taxes, shall not exceed
Two Million Ninety Nine Thousand and Six Hundred Thirty One Dollars and
no/100 ($2,099,631.00) ( "Contract Price "), without prior written authorization.
Total Compensation includes One Million Nine Hundred Thirty Thousand Six
Hundred Ninety -Five Dollars and no /100 ($1,930,695.00) ( "Purchase Price ")
payable to the Vendor and One Hundred Sixty Eight Thousand Nine Hundred
Thirty Six Dollars and no /100 ($168,936.00) ( "Taxes ") payable directly to the
California State Board of Equalization as fully described on the Pricing Page
attached hereto as Exhibit A and incorporated herein by reference for the
Equipment, which is described more fully in the final proposals for Fire Truck
Specifications and Warranty Details in Exhibits B -1 and B -2 attached hereto
and incorporated herein by reference. Vendor agrees to accept this
compensation as full remuneration for delivery to City of the Equipment.
1.1 Payment Schedule: The City shall pay Vendor twenty percent (20 %) of
purchase price or Three Hundred Eighty Six Thousand One Hundred
Thirty Nine Dollars and no /100 ($386,139.00) within ten (10) days of City
receipt of the performance bond, as required under section 11, a copy of
which is attached hereto as Exhibit C and incorporated herein by
reference. The City shall pay Vendor remaining eighty percent of
purchase price, or One Million Five Hundred Forty Four Thousand Five
Hundred Fifty Six Dollars and no /100 ($1,544,556.00), no later than thirty
(30) days after City approval of the final invoice.
1.2 Taxes: Under the City's Direct Payment Exemption permit number SR
EAA 24- 089475 DP, the City will self - accrue its Use Tax obligation to the
California State Board of Equalization in the amount of One Hundred Sixty
Eight Thousand Nine Hundred Thirty Six Dollars and no /100
($168,936.00) within thirty (30) days of Equipment delivery to the City. If
only partial delivery of equipment is received, the City will only pay the
State Board of Equalization the amount of Use Tax due on the value of the
equipment delivered.
2. ADMINISTRATION
This Agreement will be administered by the General Services Department.
Deputy Director Mike Pisani, or his designee, shall be the Purchase
Administrator and shall have the authority to act for City under this Agreement.
The Purchase Administrator or his /her authorized representative shall represent
City in all matters pertaining to the services to be rendered pursuant to this
Agreement.
3. DELIVERY
Delivery to City of the Equipment shall be made within 300 calendar days from
City issuance of the notice to proceed. Delivery shall be made to the City's Yard
at 592 Superior Ave., Newport Beach, CA 92663. Time of delivery is of the
essence in this Agreement. City reserves the right to refuse any goods and to
cancel all or any part of the goods not conforming to applicable specifications,
samples or descriptions. Acceptance of any part of the order for goods shall not
bind City to accept future shipments nor deprive City of the right to return goods
already accepted at Vendors expense. Over shipments and under shipments of
goods shall be only as agreed to in writing by City. Delivery shall not be deemed
to be complete until all goods have actually been received and accepted in
writing by the City.
3.1 Vendor shall submit all requests for extensions of time for delivery in
writing to the City Purchase Administrator not later than ten (10) calendar
days after the start of the condition that purportedly causes a delay. The
Page 12
Purchase Administrator shall review all such requests and may, at his sole
discretion, grant reasonable time extensions for unforeseeable delays that
are beyond Vendor's control.
3.2 The parties agree that it is extremely difficult and impractical to determine
and fix the actual damages that City will sustain should the Vendor fail to
complete the work called for in this Agreement. Should Vendor fail to
complete the work called for in this Agreement, Vendor agrees to the
deduction of liquidated damages in the sum of Two Hundred Dollars and
no /100 ($200.00) per day, per Piece of Equipment, for every day beyond
the date scheduled for delivery provided in Section 3. Execution of this
Agreement shall constitute agreement by the City and Vendor that the
sum of Two Hundred Dollars and no /100 ($200.00) per day, per Piece of
Equipment is the minimum value of costs and actual damages caused by
the failure of Vendor to deliver the Equipment within the allotted time.
Such sum is liquidated damages and shall not be construed as a penalty,
and may be deducted from payments due the Vendor if such delay occurs.
4. ACCEPTANCE/ PAYMENT
Unless otherwise agreed to in writing by City, acceptance shall not be deemed
complete unless in writing and until each Piece of Equipment has actually been
received, inspected and tested to the satisfaction of City, and payment shall be
made in arrears after satisfactory acceptance.
5. NOTICES
All notices, demands, requests or approvals to be given under the terms of this
Agreement shall be given in writing, and conclusively shall be deemed served
when delivered personally, or on the third business day after the deposit thereof
in the United States mail, postage prepaid, first -class mail, addressed as
hereinafter provided. All notices, demands, requests or approvals from Vendor
to City shall be addressed to City at:
Attn: Mike Pisani
General Services Deputy Director
City of Newport Beach
3300 Newport Boulevard
PO Box 1768
Newport Beach, CA 92658
Phone: 949 -644 -3101
Fax: 949 - 673 -3056
Email: mpisanianewportbeachca.4ov
Page 13
All notices, demands, requests or approvals from City to Vendor shall be
addressed to Vendor at:
With a copy to:
Attention: Cherry Sewell
Pierce Manufacturing, Inc.
2600 American Dr.
Appleton, WI 54914
Phone: 920 - 832 -4433
Fax: 920- 832 -3080
Email: csewell @piercemfg.com
Kevin Newell
South Coast Fire Equipment, Inc.
2020 South Baker Ave.
Ontario, CA 91761
Phone: 909 - 673 -9900
Fax: 909 -673 -9700
Email: Kevin @southcoastfire.net
6. GOVERNING LAW AND VENUE
This Agreement shall be deemed negotiated and executed in the State of
California and shall be governed by and construed under the laws of the state of
California. In the event of any legal action to enforce or interpret this Agreement,
the sole and exclusive venue shall be the Orange County Superior Court, located
in Orange County, California, and the parties hereto agree to and do hereby
submit to the jurisdiction of such court. Furthermore, the parties specifically
agree to waive any and all rights to request that an action be transferred for trial
to another City.
7. AMENDMENTS
No alteration or variation of the terms of this Agreement shall be valid unless
made in writing and signed by the parties; no oral understanding or agreement
not incorporated herein shall be binding on either of the parties; and no
exceptions, alternatives, substitutes or revisions are valid or binding on City
unless authorized by City in writing.
8. TAXES
The price quoted includes California state sales or use taxes.
9. ENTIRE AGREEMENT
This Agreement, when accepted by the Vendor either in writing or by the
shipment of any articles, goods, or other commencement of performance
hereunder, contains the entire Agreement between the parties with respect to all
Page 14
matters herein, and there are no restrictions, promises, warranties, or
undertakings other than those set forth herein or referred to herein. No
exceptions, alternatives, substitutes or revisions are valid or binding on City
unless authorized by City in writing. Electronic acceptance of any additional
terms, conditions or supplemental agreements by any City employee or agent,
shall not be valid or binding on City unless accepted in writing by the Purchase
Administrator. The terms of this Agreement shall supersede any inconsistencies
between this Agreement and the Exhibits hereto.
10. WARRANTY
Vendor expressly warrants that the goods covered by this Agreement are: 1) free
of liens or encumbrances; 2) of merchantable quality and good for the ordinary
purposes for which they are used; and 3) fit for the particular purpose for which
they are intended. Acceptance of this order shall constitute an agreement upon
Vendor's part to indemnify, defend and hold City and its indemnities as identified
in paragraph 17 below, and as more fully described in paragraph 17, harmless
from liability, loss, damage and expense, including reasonable counsel fees,
incurred or sustained by City by reason of the failure of the goods to conform to
such warranties, faulty work performance, negligent or unlawful acts, and non-
compliance with any applicable state or federal codes, ordinances, orders, or
statutes, including the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) and the
California Industrial Safety Act. Such remedies shall be in addition to any other
remedies provided by law.
Vendor and /or manufacturer's warranty, as applicable, is attached hereto as part
of Exhibits B -1 and B -2, and incorporated in full by this reference. The
Warranty Period shall commence on the date the Equipment is delivered to the
City. All warranty repair work shall be conducted by a Vendor certified dealer/
agent in the southern California region.
As of execution of Agreement the Vendor certified dealer/ agent for purposes of
all repairs and warranty work is: South Coast Fire Equipment, Inc., 2020 S.
Baker Ave., Ontario, CA 91761.
In the event that Vendor designates a different certified dealer/ agent for the
southern California region, Vendor shall provide City with written notice of such
change within ten (10) days of the change.
11. BONDING
Vendor shall obtain, provide and maintain at its own expense during the term of
this Contract: a Faithful Performance Bond in the amount of one hundred percent
(100 %) of the total amount to be paid by Vendor as set forth in this Agreement in
the form attached hereto as Exhibit C which is incorporated herein by this
reference.
Page 15
The Faithful Performance Bond shall be issued by an insurance organization or
surety (1) currently authorized by the Insurance Commissioner to transact business
of insurance in the State of California, (2) listed as an acceptable surety in the latest
revision of the Federal Register Circular 570, and (3) assigned a Policyholders'
Rating A and Financial Size Category Class VII (or larger) in accordance with the
latest edition of Best's Key Rating Guide: Property - Casualty.
The Vendor shall deliver, concurrently with execution of this Agreement, the
Faithful Performance Bond and a certified copy of the "Certificate of Authority" of
the Insurer or Surety issued by the Insurance Commissioner, which authorizes
the Insurer or Surety to transact surety insurance in the Slate of California.
12. ASSIGNEMENT OR SUBCONTRACTING
The terms, covenants, and conditions contained herein shall apply to and bind
the heirs, successors, executors, administrators and assigns of the parties.
Furthermore, neither the performance of this Agreement nor any portion thereof
may be assigned or sub - contracted by Vendor without the express written
consent of City. Any attempt by Vendor to assign or subcontract the
performance or any portion thereof of this Agreement without the express written
consent of City shall be invalid and shall constitute a breach of this Agreement.
13. NON - DISCRIMINATION
In the performance of this Agreement, Vendor agrees that it will comply with the
requirements of Section 1735 of the California Labor Code and not engage nor
permit any subcontractors to engage in discrimination in employment of persons
because of the race, religious creed, color, national origin, ancestry, physical
disability, mental disability, medical condition, marital status, or sex of such
persons. Vendor acknowledges that a violation of this provision shall subject
Vendor to all the penalties imposed for a violation of Section 1720 et seq. of the
California Labor Code.
14. TERMINATION
In the event that either party fails or refuses to perform any of the provisions of
this Agreement at the time and in the manner required, that party shall be
deemed in default in the performance of this Agreement. If such default is not
cured within a period of two (2) calendar days, or if more than two (2) calendar
days are reasonably required to cure the default and the defaulting party fails to
give adequate assurance of due performance within two (2) calendar days after
receipt of written notice of default, specifying the nature of such default and the
steps necessary to cure such default, and thereafter diligently take steps to cure
the default, the non - defaulting party may terminate the Agreement forthwith by
giving to the defaulting party written notice thereof. Cause shall further be
defined as any breach of this Agreement, any misrepresentation or fraud on the
part of the Vendor and /or filing of any petition in U.S. Bankruptcy Court or
entering of Bankruptcy by Vendor.
Page 16
Notwithstanding the above provisions, City shall have the right, at its sole
discretion without cause, of terminating this Agreement at any time by giving
seven (7) calendar days prior written notice to Vendor. In the event of termination
under this Section, City shall pay Vendor for services satisfactorily performed and
costs incurred up to the effective date of termination for which Vendor has not
been previously paid. On the effective date of termination, Vendor shall deliver
to City all Equipment, reports, Documents and other information developed or
accumulated in the performance of this Agreement, whether in draft or final form.
15. CONSENT TO BREACH NOT WAIVER
No term or provision of this Agreement shall be deemed waived and no breach
excused, unless such waiver or consent shall be in writing and signed by the
parry claimed to have waived or consented to such breach. Any consent by any
party to, or waiver of, a breach by the other, whether express or implied, shall not
constitute consent to, waiver of, or excuse for any other different or subsequent
breach.
16. REMEDIES NOT EXCLUSIVE
The remedies for breach set forth in this Agreement are cumulative as to one
another and as to any other provided by law, rather than exclusive; and the
expression of certain remedies in this Agreement does not preclude resort by
either party to any other remedies provided by law.
17. PERFORMANCE
Vendor shall perform all work under this Agreement, taking necessary steps and
precautions to perform the work to City's satisfaction. Vendor shall be
responsible for the professional quality, technical assurance, timely completion
and coordination of all documentation and other goods or services fumished by
the Vendor under this Agreement. Vendor shall perform all work diligently,
carefully, and in a good and workman -like manner; shall furnish all labor,
supervision, machinery, equipment, materials, and supplies necessary therefore;
shall at its sole expense obtain and maintain all permits and licenses required by
public authorities, including those of City required in its governmental capacity, in
connection with performance of the work; and, if permitted to subcontract, shall
be fully responsible for all work performed by subcontractors.
18. INDEMNIFICATION
To the fullest extent permitted by law, Vendor shall indemnity, defend and hold
harmless City, its City Council, boards and commissions, officers, agents,
volunteers, and employees (collectively, the "Indemnified Parties ") from and
against any and all claims (including, without limitation, claims for bodily injury,
death or damage to property), demands, obligations, damages, actions, causes
of action, suits, losses, judgments, fines, penalties, liabilities, costs and expenses
Page 17
(including, without limitation, attorney's fees, disbursements and court costs) of
every kind and nature whatsoever (individually, a Claim; collectively, "Claims "),
which may arise from or in any manner relate (directly or indirectly) to any breach
of the terms and conditions of this Agreement, any work performed or services
provided under this Agreement including, without limitation, defects in
workmanship or materials (including the negligent and /or willful acts, errors
and/or omissions of Vendor, its principals, officers, agents, employees, suppliers,
consultants, subcontractors, anyone employed directly or indirectly by any of
them or for whose acts they may be liable or any or all of them).
Notwithstanding the foregoing, nothing herein shall be construed to require
Vendor to indemnify the Indemnified Parties from any Claim arising from the sole
negligence or willful misconduct of the Indemnified Parties. Nothing in this
indemnity shall be construed as authorizing any award of attorney's fees in any
action on or to enforce the terms of this Agreement. This indemnity shall apply to
all claims and liability regardless of whether any insurance policies are
applicable. The policy limits do not act as a limitation upon the amount of
indemnification to be provided by the Vendor.
19. BILLS AND LEINS
Vendor shall pay promptly all indebtedness for labor, materials and equipment
used in performance of the work. Vendor shall not permit any lien or charge to
attach to the goods, but if any does so attach, Vendor shall promptly procure its
release and, in accordance with the requirements of paragraph 17 above,
indemnify, defend, and hold City harmless and be responsible for payment of all
costs, damages, penalties and expenses related to or arising from or related
thereto.
20. INSURANCE
Without limiting Vendor's indemnification of City, and prior to commencement of
work. Vendor shall obtain, provide and maintain at its own expense during the
term of this Agreement, a policy or policies of liability insurance of the type and
amounts described below and in a form satisfactory to City.
A. Certificates of Insurance. Vendor shall provide certificates of insurance
with original endorsements to City as evidence of the insurance coverage
required herein. Insurance certificates must be approved by City's Risk
Manager prior to commencement of performance or issuance of any
permit. Current certification of insurance shall be kept on file with City at
all times during the term of this Agreement.
B. Sivnature. A person authorized by the insurer to bind coverage on its
behalf shall sign certification of all required policies.
C. Acceptable Insurers. All insurance policies shall be issued by an
insurance company currently authorized by the Insurance Commissioner
Page 18
to transact business of insurance in the State of California, with an
assigned policyholders' AM Best "A" rated category and Financial Size
Category Class VII (or larger) in accordance with the latest edition of
Best's Key Rating Guide, unless otherwise approved by the City's Risk
Manager.
D. Coverage Regurrements.
Workers' Compensation Coverage. Vendor shall maintain
Workers' Compensation Insurance and Employer's Liability
Insurance for his or her employees in accordance with the
laws of the State of California. In addition, Vendor shall
require each subcontractor to similarly maintain Workers'
Compensation Insurance and Employer's Liability Insurance
in accordance with the laws of the State of California for all
of the subcontractor's employees. Any notice of cancellation
or non - renewal of all Workers' Compensation policies must
be received by City at least thirty (30) calendar days (10
calendar days written notice of non - payment of premium)
prior to such change. The insurer shall agree to waive all
rights of subrogation against City, its officers, agents,
employees and volunteers for losses arising from work
performed by Vendor for City.
ii. General Liability Coverage. Vendor shall maintain
commercial general liability insurance in an amount not less
than one million dollars ($1,000,000) per occurrence for
bodily injury, personal injury, and property damage, including
without limitation, contractual liability. If commercial general
liability insurance or other form with a general aggregate limit
is used, either the general aggregate limit shall apply
separately to the work to be performed under this
Agreement, or the general aggregate limit shall be at least
twice the required occurrence limit.
iii. Automobile Liability Coverage. Vendor shall maintain
automobile insurance covering bodily injury and property
damage for all activities of the Vendor arising out of or in
connection with work to be performed under this Agreement,
including coverage for any owned, hired, non -owned or
rented vehicles, in an amount not less than one million
dollars ($1,000,000) combined single limit for each
occurrence.
E. Endorsements. Each general liability and automobile liability insurance
policy shall be endorsed with the following specific language:
Page 19
i. The City, its elected or appointed officers, officials, employees,
agents and volunteers are to be covered as additional insureds with
respect to liability arising out of work performed by or on behalf of
the Vendor.
ii. This policy shall be considered primary insurance as respects to
City, its elected or appointed officers, officials, employees, agents
and volunteers as respects to all claims, losses, or liability arising
directly or indirectly from the Vendor's operations or services
provided to City. Any insurance maintained by City, including any
self- insured retention City may have, shall be considered excess
insurance only and not contributory with the insurance provided
hereunder.
iii. This insurance shall act for each insured and additional insured as
though a separate policy had been written for each, except with
respect to the limits of liability of the insuring company.
iv. The insurer waives all rights of subrogation against City, its elected
or appointed officers, officials, employees, agents and volunteers.
V. Any failure to comply with reporting provisions of the policies shall
not affect coverage provided to City, its elected or appointed
officers, officials, employees, agents or volunteers.
vi. The insurance provided by this policy shall not be suspended,
voided, canceled, or reduced in coverage or in limits, by either party
except after thirty (30) calendar days (10 calendar days written
notice of non - payment of premium) written notice has been
received by City.
F. Timely Notice of Claims. Vendor shall give City prompt and timely notice
of claim made or suit instituted arising out of or resulting from Vendor's
performance under this Agreement.
G. Additional Insurance. Vendor shall also procure and maintain, at its own
cost and expense, any additional kinds of insurance, which in its own
judgment may be necessary for its proper protection and prosecution of
the work.
21. CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP
Vendor agrees that if there is a change or transfer in ownership of Vendor's
business prior to completion of this Agreement, the new owners shall be required
under terms of sale or other transfer to assume Vendors duties and obligations
contained in this Agreement and complete them to the satisfaction of City.
Page 110
22. FORCE MAJEURE
Vendor shall not be assessed with liquidated damages or unsatisfactory
performance penalties during any delay beyond the time named for the
performance of this Agreement caused by any act of God, war, civil disorder,
employment strike or other cause beyond its reasonable control, provided that
Vendor gives written notice of the cause of the delay to City within 36 hours of
the start of the delay and Vendor avails himself of any available remedies.
23. CONFIDENTIALITY
Vendor agrees to maintain the confidentiality of all City and City - related records
and information pursuant to all statutory laws relating to privacy and
confidentiality that currently exist or exist at any time during the term of this
Agreement. All such records and information shall be considered confidential
and kept confidential by Vendor and Vendor's staff, agents and employees.
24. COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS
Vendor represents and warrants that services to be provided under this
Agreement shall fully comply, at Vendor's expense, with all standards, laws,
statutes, restrictions, ordinances, requirements, and regulations (collectively
'laws "), including, but not limited to those issued by City in its governmental
capacity and all other laws applicable to the services at the time services are
provided to and accepted by City. Vendor acknowledges that City is relying on
Vendor to ensure such compliance, and pursuant to the requirements of
paragraph 17 above, Vendor agrees that it shall defend, indemnity and hold City
and Indemnified Parties harmless from all liability, damages, costs and expenses
arising from or related to a violation of such laws.
25. FREIGHT (F.O.B. DESTINATION)
Vendor assumes full responsibility for all transportation, transportation
scheduling, packing, handling, insurance, and other services associated with
delivery of all products deemed necessary under this Agreement.
26. TERMS AND CONDITIONS
Vendor acknowledges that it has read and agrees to all terms and conditions
included in this Agreement.
27. SEVERABILITY
If any term, covenant, condition or provision of this Agreement is held by a court
of competent jurisdiction to be invalid, void or unenforceable, the remainder of
the provisions hereof shall remain in full force and effect and shall in no way be
affected, impaired or invalidated thereby.
Page 111
28. ATTORNEYS FEES
In any action or proceeding to enforce or interpret any provision of this
Agreement, or where any provision hereof is validly asserted as a defense, each
party shall bear its own attorney's fees, costs and expenses.
29. EXECUTION AND COUNTERPARTS
This Agreement may be executed in multiple counterparts, each of which shall be
deemed an original Agreement, and all of which shall constitute one Agreement.
These counterparts may be transmitted by facsimile or e-mail with the originals to
be thereafter provided by the Parties. Such facsimiles or e-mail shall be deemed
original signatures.
30. SIGNATORIES AUTHORITY
Each and every one of the persons executing this Agreement expressly warrants
that he or she is authorized to do so on behalf of the entity for which he or she is
executing this Agreement. The City and Vendor represent and warrant that this
Agreement is executed voluntarily, with full knowledge of its significance.
Page 112
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have caused this Agreement to be executed on
the day and year first written above.
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
OFFICE OF THE CITY ATTORNEY
By:
yne eauc mp,
Assistant City mey
ATTEST:
A
Leilani I. Brown,
City Clerk
Attachments:
CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH,
A Municipal Corporation
22
Keith D. Curry, Mayor
City of Newport Beach
VENDOR: Pierce Manufacturing, Inc.
Page 113
By:
(Corporate Officer)
Title:
Print Name:
By:
(Financial Officer)
Title:
Print Name:
Exhibit A —
Pricing Page
Exhibit B -1 —
Final Proposals for Fire Truck Specifications and
Warranty Details: Two (2) Pierce 1250 GPM Triple
Combination Pumper
Exhibit B -2 —
Final Proposals for Fire Truck Specifications and
Warranty Details: One Pierce Tractor -drawn Arial
Ladder
Exhibit C —
Performance Bond
Page 113
EXHIBIT A
Exhibit A
Month
0
Date of Delivery 10"
Total Cash Flows
Net Present Value (NPV)
Proposed Total Price
Less: Discount
Sales Tax
Total Cost
20% Down Option
CF Engines
CF Ladder
Total
(192,004)
(840,802)
(198,225)
(868,599)
(390,229)
(1,709,402)
(1,032,806)
(1,066,824)
(2,099,631)
(1,022,368)
(1,056,041) (2,078,409)
960,019
991,125
1,951,144
(10,312)
(10,137)
(20,449)
83,099
85,836
168,936
1,032,806
1,066,824
2,099,631
'Amounts include Sales Tax of 8.75%
August 31, 2009
City of Newport Beach
3300 Newport Blvd.
Newport Beach, CA 92658
4K
PERFORM. LIKE NO OTHER?
Proposal for Furnishing Fire Apparatus
The undersigned is prepared to manufacture for you, upon an order being placed by you, for final
acceptance by Pierce Manufacturing, Inc. at its corporate office in Appleton, Wisconsin, the
apparatus and equipment herein name for the following prices.
Two (2) Pierce 1250 GPM Triple Combination Pumpers mounted on Arrow XT
chassis as per the enclosed proposal for a total sum of ... ..............................$ 935,019.00
If the City of Newport Beach desires the mounting of equipment, the amount of
equipment to be mounted will be installed up to the cost of $25,000.00 for both
pumpers. Since there is not a defined list of equipment, the tools will be installed
as per fire department locations ........................... ............................... 25.000.00
Fire Apparatus cost less tax $ 960,019.00
If the City of Newport Beach would desire to pay for the apparatus in full, with in
ten days of the purchase order acceptance as Pierce and the issuing of a 100%
performance bond, Pierce Manufacturing with discount the above amount by $44,468.00.
Sales tax is then determined on the discounted amount.
Said apparatus and equipment are to be built and shipped in accordance with the specifications
hereto attached, delays due to strikes, war or international conflict, failures to obtain chassis,
materials, or other causes beyond our control not preventing, within about 9 -10 months after
receipt of this order and the acceptance thereof at our office at Appleton, Wisconsin and delivered
to you at Newport Beach, California.
The specifications herein contained shall form a part of the final contract, and are subject to
changes desired by the purchaser, provided such alterations are interlined prior to the acceptance
by the company or the order to purchase, and provided such alternations do not materially affect
the cost of the construction of the apparatus.
The proposal for the fire apparatus conforms with all Federal Department of Transportation (DOT)
rules and regulations in effect at the time of initial purchase, and with all National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA) Guidelines for Automotive Fire Apparatus as published at the time of initial
purchase, except where modified by customer requirements. Any increased costs incurred by the
first party because of future changes in or additions to said DOT or NFPA standards will be passed
along to the customers as an addition to the price set forth above.
Unless accepted within thirty (30) days from date, the right is reserved to withdraw this proposition.
The proposed unit is a Pierce stock unit and subject to prior sale.
PIERCE MANUFACTURING, INC.
By: Jay W. Bressler
Sales Representative
August 31, 2009
City of Newport Beach
3300 Newport Blvd.
Newport Beach, CA 92658
PERFORM. LIKE NO OTHER-
Proposal for Furnishing Fire Apparatus
The undersigned is prepared to manufacture for you, upon an order being placed by you,
for final acceptance by Pierce Manufacturing, Inc. at its corporate office in Appleton,
Wisconsin, the apparatus and equipment herein name for the following prices.
One (1) Pierce 100' Heavy Duty Tiller mounted on an Arrow XT chassis
as per the enclosed proposal for a total sum of .............. ..............................$ 966,125.00
If the City of Newport Beach desires the mounting of equipment, the amount of
equipment to be mounted will be installed up to the cost of $25,000.00.
Since there is not a defined list of equipment, the tools will be installed as per
fire department locations .................................... ............................... 25.000.00
Fire Apparatus cost less tax $ 991,125.00
If the City of Newport Beach would desire to pay for the apparatus in full, with in
ten days of the purchase order acceptance as Pierce and the issuing of a 100%
performance bond, Pierce Manufacturing with discount the above amount by $49,467.00.
Sales tax is then determined on the discounted amount.
Said apparatus and equipment are to be built and shipped in accordance with the
specifications hereto attached, delays due to strikes, war or international conflict, failures
to obtain chassis, materials, or other causes beyond our control not preventing, within
X11 %% 9 -10 months after receipt of this order and the acceptance thereof at our office at
Appleton, Wisconsin and delivered to you at Newport Beach, California.
The specifications herein contained shall form a part of the final contract, and are subject to
changes desired by the purchaser, provided such alterations are interlined prior to the
acceptance by the company or the order to purchase, and provided such alternations do
not materially affect the cost of the construction of the apparatus.
The proposal for the fire apparatus conforms with all Federal Department of Transportation
(DOT) rules and regulations in effect at the time of initial purchase, and with all National Fire
Protection Association (NFPA) Guidelines for Automotive Fire Apparatus as published at
the time of initial purchase, except where modified by customer requirements. Any
increased costs incurred by the first party because of future changes in or additions to said
DOT or NFPA standards will be passed along to the customers as an addition to the price
set forth above.
Unless accepted within thirty (30) days from date, the right is reserved to withdraw this
proposition. The proposed unit is a Pierce stock unit and subject to prior sale.
PIERCE MANUFACTURING, INC.
By: Jay W. Bressler
Sales Representative
EXHIBIT B -1
We are pleased to submit a proposal to the CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH for Two (2)
Pierce(g) 1250 GPM Triple Combination Pumper. The following paragraphs will describe
in detail the apparatus proposed. Loose equipment not specifically requested will not be
provided.
PIERCE MANUFACTURING was incorporated in 1917. Since then we have been building
bodies with one philosophy, 'BUILD THE FINEST'. Our skilled craftsmen take pride in their
work, which is reflected, in the final product. We have been building fire apparatus since the
early "forties" giving Pierce Manufacturing over 50 years of experience in the fire apparatus
market. Our plant is located in Appleton, Wisconsin with over 757,000 total square feet of
floor space situated on approximately 97 acres of land. A multi - million dollar inventory of
parts is available to keep your unit in service long after it has left the factory.
QUALITY AND WORKMANSHIP
Pierce has set the pace for quality and workmanship in the fire apparatus field. Our tradition
of building the highest quality units with craftsmen second to none has been the rule right
from the beginning. We currently have a "Quality Achievement Supplier" program to insure
the vendors and suppliers that we utilize meet the high standards that we demand. That is
just part of our overall "Quality at the Source" program at Pierce. Another part of this
program is employing experts in their fields, like a Certified American Welding Society
Inspector to monitor our weld quality.
DELIVERY
The apparatus will be delivered under its own power to insure proper break -in of all
components while the apparatus is still under warranty.
INFORMATION
At time of delivery, complete operation and maintenance manuals covering the apparatus
will be provided. A permanent plate will be mounted in the drivers compartment specifying
the quantity and type of fluids required including engine oil, engine coolant, transmission,
pump transmission lubrication, pump primer and drive axle.
SAFETY VIDEO
At the time of delivery Pierce will also provide one 39- minute, professionally - produced
apparatus safety video, in DVD format. This video will address key safety considerations for
personnel to follow when they are driving, operating, and maintaining the apparatus,
including the following: vehicle pre -trip inspection, chassis operation, pump operation, aerial
operation, and safety during maintenance.
PERFORMANCE TESTS
A road test will be conducted with the apparatus fully loaded and a continuous run of no less
than ten (10) miles. During that time the apparatus will show no loss of power nor will it
overheat. The transmission drive shaft or shafts and the axles will run quietly and be free of
abnormal vibration or noise. The apparatus will meet NFPA 1901 acceleration requirements
and NFPA 1901 braking requirements. The apparatus when fully loaded will not have less
than 25% nor more than 50% on the front axle, and not less than 50% nor more than 75%
on the rear axle.
Page I of 96
ISO COMPLIANCE
Pierce Manufacturing operates a Quality Management System under the requirements of
ISO 9001. These standards sponsored by the "International Organization for
Standardization (ISO)" specify the quality systems that are established by the manufacturer
for design, manufacture, installation and service. A copy of the certificate of compliance
Number 32454 is included with this proposal.
SINGLE SOURCE MANUFACTURER
Pierce Manufacturing, Inc. provides an integrated approach to the design and manufacture
of our products that delivers superior apparatus and a dedicated support team. From our
headquarters, all chassis, cab and body systems are engineered, tested, and hand
assembled to the customer's exact specifications. Pierce® vehicles are also backed by a
network of sales and service organizations that are dedicated exclusively to the fire service
who are ready to help you 24 hours a day, 7 days a week with parts, service, and training.
Pierce's single source solution adds value by providing a fully engineered product that offers
durability, reliability, maintainability, performance, and a high level of quality.
NFPA 2009 STANDARDS
This unit will comply with the NFPA standards effective January 1, 2009, except for fire
department directed exceptions. These exceptions will be set forth in the Statement of
Exceptions.
Certification of slip resistance of all stepping, standing and walking surfaces will be
supplied with delivery of the apparatus.
A plate that is highly visible to the driver while seated will be provided. This plate will show
the overall height, length, and gross vehicle weight rating.
The manufacturer will have programs in place for training, proficiency testing and
performance for any staff involved with certifications.
An official of the company will designate, in writing, who is qualified to witness and certify
test results.
NFPA COMPLIANCY
Apparatus proposed by the bidder will meet the applicable requirements of the National
Fire Protection Association (NFPA) as stated in current edition at time of contract
execution. Fire department's specifications that differ from NFPA specifications will be
indicated in the proposal as "non- NFPA ".
TOTAL VEHICLE ASSESSMENT CERTIFICATION
The apparatus will be third -party, independent, audit- certified to the current edition of NFPA
1901 standards. The certification includes: all design, production, operational, and
performance testing of the apparatus.
PUMP TEST
The pump will be tested, approved, and certified at the manufacturer's expense. The test
Page 2 of 96
results and the pump manufacturer's certification of hydrostatic test; the engine
manufacturer's certified brake horsepower curve; and the manufacturer's record of pump
construction details will be forwarded to the Fire Department.
GENERATOR TEST
If the unit has a generator, the generator will be tested, approved, and certified at the
manufacturers expense. The test results will be provided to the Fire Department at the
time of delivery.
BREATHING AIR TEST
If the unit has breathing air, Underwriters Laboratories will draw an air sample from the air
system and certify that the air quality meets the requirements of NFPA 1989, Standard on
Breathing Air Quality for Fire and Emergency Services Respiratory Protection.
INSPECTION TRIP(S)
The bidder will provide three (3) factory inspection trip(s) for for a total of twelve customer
representative(s). The inspection trip(s) will be scheduled at times mutually agreed upon
between the manufacturer's representative and the customer. All costs such as travel,
lodging and meals will be the responsibility of the bidder.
CUSTOMER SERVICE WEBSITE
The Pierce Customer Service website will provide the dealer and customer access to
comprehensive information pertaining to the maintenance and service of the apparatus.
The website will consist of the following screens:
My Fleet Screen
The My Fleet screen will provide access to truck detail information on the major components
of the vehicle, warranty information, available vehicle photographs, vehicle drawings, sales
options, applicable vehicle software downloads, etc.
Parts Screens
The Parts screens will provide parts look -up capability of Pierce Manufacturing sourced
items, with the aid of digital photographs, part drawings and assembly drawings. The parts
search application will permit the searching of parts by item description or function group
(major system category). The parts application will provide the ability to submit
electronically a parts order, parts quote, or parts return request directly to Pierce
Manufacturing for processing.
Warranty Screen
The Warranty screens will provide dealers the ability to submit electronically warranty claims
directly to Pierce Manufacturing for reimbursement.
My Reports Screens
The My Reports screens will provide access to multiple dealer reports to allow the
dealership to maintain communication with the customer on the status of orders, claims, and
phone contacts.
Page 3 of 96
Technical Support Screens
The Technical Support screens will provide access to all currently published Operation and
Maintenance and Service Publications. Access to Pierce Manufacturing Service Bulletins
and Work Instructions, containing information on current service topics and
recommendations will be provided.
Training
The Training screens will provide access to upcoming training classes offered by Pierce
Manufacturing.
Interactive electronic learning modules (Operators Guides) covering the operation of major
vehicle components will be provided. Access to training manuals used in Pierce
Manufacturing training classes will be provided.
About Pierce
Access to Customer Service Articles, Corporate News, Quarterly Newsletters, and Key
Contacts within the Customer Service Department will be provided. The current Customer
Service Policy and Procedure Manual, detailing the operation of the Customer Service
group will also be accessible.
The Search screen will provide search access for terms used on the website.
The customer will have limited access specific to their vehicle.
MAXIMUM OVERALL HEIGHT
The maximum overall height of the apparatus will be 111 inches.
MAXIMUM OVERALL LENGTH
The maximum overall length of the apparatus will be 360 inches.
APPROVAL DRAWING
A drawing of the proposed apparatus will be prepared and provided to the purchaser for
approval before construction begins. The Pierce sales representative will also be provided
with a copy of the same drawing. The finalized and approved drawing will become part of
the contract documents. This drawing will indicate the chassis make and model, location of
the lights, siren, horns, compartments, major components, etc.
A "revised" approval drawing of the apparatus will be prepared and submitted by Pierce to
the purchaser showing any changes made to the approval drawing.
DRAWING. PUMP OPERATOR'S PANEL
A detailed drawing to scale of the pump operator's panel will be provided for approval prior
to construction. This drawing will include all of the gauges and controls located on the pump
operator's panel.
I'agc 4 of 96
WARRANTY
The following warranty will be supplied with each bidders proposal and printed on the
company letterhead.
We warranty each piece of new fire or rescue apparatus to be free from defects in materials
or workmanship under normal use and service. Our obligation under this warranty is limited
to repairing or replacing, as the company may elect, any parts thereof which are returned to
us with transportation costs prepaid, and as to which examination is disclose to the
company's satisfaction to have been defective, provided such part, or parts will be returned
to us not later than three (3) years from delivery of the apparatus. Such defective part or
parts will be repaired or replaced free of charge and without charge for installation to the
original purchaser.
This warranty will not apply:
1) To normal maintenance and adjustments.
2) To any vehicle which has been repaired or altered outside of our factory in any way
so that, in our judgment, to affect the stability, nor which has been subject to misuse,
neglect, or accident, nor to any vehicle which will operate at any speed exceeding the
factory rated speed, or loaded beyond the factory rated load capacity.
This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied, all others
representations to the original purchaser and all other obligations or liabilities, including
liability for incidental or consequential damages on the part of the company. We neither
assume or authorize any other person to give or assume any other warranty or liability on
the company's behalf unless made or assumed in writing by the company.
CROSSMEMBERS WARRANTY
A one (1) year parts and labor warranty will be provided on all chassis frame crossmembers.
PERFORMANCE BOND /
A performance bond will rapt be included. If requested, the following will apply:
The successful bidder will `provide, �On LIY( Ilt Wt o contract, aarf -ekwg
a performance bond, which guarantees performance of
all terms and conditions of the contract and of the Basic One (1) Year Limited Warranty
agreement. The performance bond will specifically cover the performance of the contract
according to its terms and conditions, as well as payment of all related bills and
encumbrances. This performance bond will be issued by a surety company who is listed by
the U.S. Treasury Department's list of approved sureties, as published in Circular 570, as of
the bid date. The performance bond will be issued in an amount equal to 100% of the
contract amount and will be dated concurrent to, or subsequent to, the date of the contract.
Notwithstanding any document or assertion to the contrary, any surety bond related to the
sale of a vehicle will apply only to the Basic One (1) Year Limited Warranty for such vehicle.
Any surety bond related to the sale of a vehicle will not apply to any other warranties that
Page 5 of'96
are included within this bid (OEM or otherwise) or to the warranties (if any) of any third party
of any part, component, attachment or accessory that is incorporated into or attached to the
vehicle.
Page 6 of 96
ARROW -XTTu CHASSIS
The Pierce Arrow -XT is the custom chassis developed exclusively for the fire service.
Chassis provided will be a new, tilt -type custom fire apparatus. The chassis will be
manufactured in the apparatus body builder's facility eliminating any split responsibility. The
chassis will be designed and manufactured for heavy -duty service, with adequate strength,
capacity for the intended load to be sustained, and the type of service required. The chassis
will be the manufacturer's heavy -duty line tilt cab.
SEATING CAPACITY
The seating capacity in the cab will be four (4).
WHEELBASE
The wheelbase of the vehicle will be 174.5 inches.
GVW RATING
The gross vehicle weight rating will be 42,000 lbs.
FRAME
The chassis frame will be built with two (2) steel channels bolted to five (5) cross members
or more, depending on other options of the apparatus. The side rails will have a 13.38" tall
web over the front and mid sections of the chassis, with a continuous smooth taper to 10.75"
over the rear axle. Each rail will have a section modulus of 25.992 cubic inches and a
resisting bending moment (rbm) of 3,119,040 inch - pounds over the critical regions of the
frame assembly, with a section modulus of 18.96 cubic inches with an rbm of 2,275,200
inch - pounds over the rear axle. The frame rails will be constructed of 120,000 psi yield
strength heat - treated .38" thick steel, with 3.50" wide flanges.
FRAME RAIL WARRANTY
Limited Warranty
Except as provided below, and provided the vehicle will have been placed in service within
60 days after delivery to the original purchaser as established by our original invoice, for a
period of 50 years, which is the estimated useful life of the vehicle, after delivery to the
original purchaser, Pierce Manufacturing Inc. ( "Pierce ") warrants to the user that its chassis
frame rail manufactured by Pierce are free of defects in design, material, or workmanship.
This limited warranty will apply only if the vehicle is properly maintained and used in service
that is normal to the particular vehicle. Normal service means service that does not subject
the vehicle to stresses or impacts greater than normally result from the careful use of the
vehicle or chassis. If the buyer discovers a defect or nonconformity, it must notify Pierce in
writing within 30 days after the date of discovery. This limited warranty is not transferable by
the first user.
A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal.
FRAME REINFORCEMENT
In addition, a mainframe inverted "L" liner will be provided. It will be heat - treated steel
measuring 12.00" x 3.00" x .25 ". Each liner will have a section modulus of 7.795 cu. in.,
Pagel of 96
yield strength of 110,000 psi, and rbm of 857,462 inch - pounds. Total rbm at wheelbase
center will be 3,976,502 pounds per rail.
The frame liner will be mounted inside of the chassis frame rail, beginning at the front edge
of the mainframe rail and extending to the rear cab crossmember.
FRONT NON DRIVE AXLE
The Oshkosh TAK -40 front axle will be of the independent suspension design with a ground
rating of 19,500 pounds.
Upper and lower control arms will be used on each side of the axle. Upper control arm
castings will be made of 100,000 -psi yield strength 8630 steel and the lower control arm
casting will be made of 55,000 -psi yield ductile iron.
The center cross members and side plates will be constructed out of 80,000 -psi yield
strength steel.
Each control arm will be mounted to the center section using elastomer bushings. These
rubber bushings will rotate on low friction plain bearings and be lubricated for life. Each
bushing will also have a flange end to absorb longitudinal impact loads, reducing noise and
vibrations.
There will be nine (9) grease fittings supplied, one (1) on each control arm pivot and one (1)
on the steering gear extension.
The upper control arm will be shorter than the lower arm so that wheel end geometry
provides positive camber when deflected below rated load and negative camber above rated
load.
Camber at load will be zero degrees for optimum tire life.
The kingpin bearing will be of low friction design and be sealed for life.
Toe links that are adjustable for alignment of the wheel to the center of the chassis will be
provided.
The wheel ends must have little to no bump steer when the chassis encounters a hole or
obstacle.
The steering linkage will provide proper steering angles for the inside and outside wheel,
based on the vehicle wheelbase.
The axle will have a third party certified turning angle of 45 degrees. Front discharge, front
suction, or aluminum wheels will not infringe on this cramp angle.
WARRANTY. FRONT NON DRIVE AXLE
The Oshkosh TAK -4 system will have a three (3) year parts and labor warranty. This
Page 8 of 96
warranty applies to the TAK -4 suspension components only. All steering linkages, pumps
etc., are covered under our standard chassis warranty (exception steer gears - see Steering
for warranty).
OIL SEALS
Oil seals with viewing window will be provided on the front axle.
SHOCK ABSORBERS
Heavy -duty telescoping shock absorbers (KONI) will be provided on the front suspension.
REAR AXLE
The rear axle will be a Mentor", Model RS -24 -160, with a capacity of 24,000 pounds.
REAR AXLE WARRANTY
The MeritorTM two (2) year, unlimited mileage, parts and labor warranty will be provided
with this axle.
TOP SPEED OF VEHICLE
A rear axle ratio will be furnished to allow the vehicle to reach a top speed of 68 MPH.
OIL SEALS
Oil seals will be provided on the rear axle.
FRONT SUSPENSION
Front Oshkosh TAK -411 independent suspension will be provided with a minimum ground
rating of 19,500 pounds.
The independent suspension system will be designed to provide maximum ride comfort.
The design will allow the vehicle to travel at highway speeds over improved road surfaces
and at moderate speeds over rough terrain with minimal transfer of road shock and vibration
to the vehicle's crew compartment.
Each wheel will have torsion bar type spring. In addition, each front wheel end will also
have energy absorbing jounce bumpers to prevent bottoming of the suspension.
The suspension design will be such that there is at least 10.00" of total wheel travel and a
minimum of 3.75" before suspension bottoms.
The torsion bar anchor lock system allows for simple lean adjustments, without the use of
shims. One can adjust for a lean within 15 minutes per side. Anchor adjustment design is
such that it allows for ride height adjustment on each side.
The independent suspension was put through a durability test that simulated 140,000 miles
of inner city driving.
REAR SUSPENSION
The rear springs will be Standens semi - elliptical, 3.00" x 52.00 ", 10 leaves with a ground
Page 9 (if 96
rating of 24,000 pounds. Castings will be used for spring hangers with provisions for
lubrication. The grease fittings will be 90- degree type and will be accessible without
removing the wheels or cutting any sheet metal. The two (2) top leaves will wrap the
forward spring hanger pin and the top leaf will wrap the rear spring hanger pin on both the
front and rear suspensions.
Kaiser spring pins will be provided, with double "figure- eight" grease grooves and a layer of
electroless nickel plating, 1.0 mil thick, around the entire pin. The bushing that holds the
spring pin in place will also have a grease groove.
ANTI -LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
The vehicle will be equipped with a Wabco 4S4M, anti -lock braking system. The ABS will
provide a four (4) channel anti -lock braking control on both the front and rear wheels. A
digitally controlled system that utilizes microprocessor technology will control the anti -lock
braking system. Each wheel will be monitored by the system. When any particular wheel
begins to lockup, a signal will be sent to the control unit. This control unit then will reduce
the braking of that wheel for a fraction of a second and then reapply the brake. This anti -
lock brake system will eliminate the lockup of any wheel thus helping to prevent the
apparatus from skidding out of control.
ANTI -LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WARRANTY
The Wabco ABS system will come with a three (3) year or 300,000 mile parts and labor
warranty provided by Meritor Wabco Vehicle Control Systems.
BRAKES
The service brake system will be full air type.
The front brakes will be Knorr /Bendix disc type with a 17.00" ventilated rotor for improved
stopping distance.
The brake system will be certified, third party inspected, for improved stopping distance.
The rear brakes will be MeritorT" 16.50" x 7.00" cam operated with automatic slack
adjusters.
ENGINE BRAKE
A Jacobs Engine Brake is to be installed with the controls located on the instrument panel
within easy reach of the driver.
The driver will be able to turn the engine brake system on/off and have a high and low
setting.
The engine brake will be installed in such a manner that when the engine brake is slowing
the vehicle the brake lights are activated.
The ABS system will automatically disengage the auxiliary braking device, when required
Paec 10 of 96
AIR COMPRESSOR, BRAKE SYSTEM
The air compressor will be a Cummins/Wabco with 18.7 cubic feet per minute output.
BRAKE SYSTEM
The brake system will include:
- Bendix- Westinghouse dual brake treadle valve with vinyl covered foot surface
- One heated automatic moisture ejector on air dryer
- Total air system capacity of 4,362 cubic inches
- Two (2) air pressure gauges with red warning light and audible alarm, that activates when
air pressure falls below 60 psi
- MGM spring set parking brake system
- Parking brake operated by a Bend ix - Westinghouse PP -1 control valve
- A parking "brake on" indicator light on instrument panel
- Bendix - Westinghouse SR -1 valve, in conjunction with a double check valve system, will
provide an automatic spring -brake application at 40 psi
- Bendix AD -9 air dryer with heater
BRAKE LINES
Wire braided reinforced rubber brake lines will be provided for the chassis air brake system,
up to the individual line coupler fittings, located in the chassis frame near the cab lock down.
The coupler fittings will be the separation point for all air lines going to the front of the
chassis and into the cab.
The only wire braided lines forward of the coupler fittings are the front brake lines that run
from the QR1 valve to the front air chambers.
The air lines going into the cab will be nylon, wrapped in loom.
The area where the nylon air lines run will be well protected inside the frame rails
The brake lines will not be painted.
AIR INLET
One (1) air inlet with male coupling will be provided. It will allow station air to be supplied to
the apparatus brake system through a shoreline hose. The inlet will be located in the driver
side lower step well of cab. A check valve will be provided to prevent reverse flow of air.
The inlet will discharge into the "wet' tank of the brake system. A mating female coupling
Page I I of 96
will also be provided with the loose equipment
AIR TANK, ADDITIONAL
An additional air tank with 1454 cubic inch displacement will be provided to increase the
capacity of the air system. This tank will be dedicated for air horn use.
The output flow of the engine air compressor vanes with engine RPM. Full compressor
output is only achieved at governed engine speed. Engine speed may be limited by
generators, pumps and other PTO driven options.
MANUAL MOISTURE EJECTOR(S)
Four (4) manual moisture ejectors will be installed in the brake system. The moisture ejector
will be remote mounted on the driver side of vehicle, as close to the edge of vehicle as
possible. A loop will be provided at the moisture ejector, to allow for ease of pulling the
drain. Each moisture ejector will have a label directly under the ejector, stating air tank
drain. Nylon tubing, .38" diameter will be routed from the air tank to the moisture ejector.
The nylon tubing will be cover with protective split loom. The moisture ejector(s) will be
provided on the primary, reserve and extra reservoirs(s).
ENGINE
The chassis will be powered by a Cummins electronic engine as described below:
- Model: ISL
- Number of Cylinders: Six (6)
- Bore and Stroke: 4.49" x 5.69"
- Displacement: 543 cubic inches
- Maximum Horsepower: 370 hp at 2100 rpm
- Torque: 1200 lb-ft at 1300 rpm
- Compression Ratio: 16.6:1
- Governed rpm: 2200
Standard equipment on the engine will include the following:
- Air Cleaner: Farr or equal
- Fuel Filters: Dual, with check valve, integrated water separator, and water in fuel sensor
- Coolant Filter: Spin -on with shut off valves on the supply and return line
- Governor: Limiting speed type
N--e 12 of 96
- Injectors: Cam operated, unit type, clean tip
- Lube Oil Cooler
- Lube Oil Filter: Full flow
- Starting Motor: 12 -volt
- Turbocharger
- Charge Air Cooled
- Priming Pump
ENGINE WARRANTY
The engine will have a five (5) year or 100,000 mile warranty provided by Cummins. This
warranty will provide the same coverage for the Diesel Particulate Filter "DPF that is an
integral component of the exhaust emissions system. Cummins will add a $100.00
deductible during the extended basic coverage period in years 3, 4, and 5. There will be no
deductible in the first 2 years of warranty.
CONTROLS AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
The following amber indicator lights will be located on the driver's side of the cab to denote
engine information:
- Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
- High Exhaust Temperature (NET)
A switch to initiate the diesel particulate filter regeneration cycle will be located on the
driver's side instrument panel.
ENGINE INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION
The fire apparatus manufacturer will provide a certification, along with a letter from the
engine manufacturer stating they approve of the engine installation in the bidder's chassis.
The certification will be provided at the time of delivery.
ENGINE AIR INTAKE
The air intake with an ember separator will be mounted high on the passenger side of the
cab, to the front of the crew cab door. The ember separator is designed to prevent road dirt
and recirculating hot air from entering the engine. The ember separator will be easily
accessible through a hinged stainless steel grille, with one (1) flush quarter turn latch.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The exhaust system will be stainless steel from the turbo to the inlet of the diesel particulate
filter and will be 4.00" in diameter. The exhaust system will include a diesel particulate filter
and a diesel oxidation catalyst to meet current EPA standards. The exhaust will terminate
horizontally ahead of the passenger side rear wheels. A tailpipe diffuser will be provided to
Page 13 of 96
reduce the temperature of the exhaust as it exits. An insulation wrap will be provided on the
exhaust pipe between the turbo and DPF inlet to minimize the transfer of heat to the cab.
Heat deflector shields will be provided to isolate chassis and body components from the
heat of the tailpipe diffuser.
FUELSEPARATOR
The engine will be equipped with a Racor in -line spin -on fuel and water separator in addition
to the engine fuel filters.
HIGH IDLE
A high idle switch will be provided, inside the cab, on the instrument panel, that will
automatically maintain a preset engine rpm. A switch will be installed, at the cab instrument
panel, for activation /deactivation.
The high idle will be operational only when the parking brake is on and the truck
transmission is in neutral. A green indicator light will be provided, adjacent to the switch.
The light will illuminate when the above conditions are met. The light will be labeled "OK to
Engage High Idle ".
COOLANT LINES
Silicone hoses will be used for all engine coolant/heater lines installed by Pierce
Manufacturing.
Hose clamps will be the stainless steel constant torque type to prevent coolant leakage.
They will expand and contract according to coolant system temperature thereby keeping a
constant clamping pressure on the hose.
RADIATOR
The radiator and the complete cooling system will meet or exceed NFPA and engine
manufacturer cooling system standards.
For maximum cooling performance, the radiator core will be made of copper fins having a
serpentine design, soldered to brass tubes. The tubes will be welded to brass headers
using the patented 'Beta- Weld" process for increased strength, longer road life and solder -
bloom corrosion protection. The radiator core will have a minimum frontal area of 1396
square inches. Steel supply and return tanks will be bolted to the core headers and steel
side channels to complete the radiator assembly. The radiator will be compatible with
commercial antifreeze solutions.
The radiator will be mounted in such a manner as to prevent the development of leaks
caused by twisting or straining when the apparatus operates over uneven ground. The
radiator assembly will be isolated from the chassis frame rails with rubber isolators.
The radiator will include an integral deaeration tank, with a remote - mounted overflow tank.
For visual coolant level inspection, the radiator will have a built -in sight glass. The radiator
will be equipped with a 15 psi pressure relief cap.
Page 14 of 96
A drain port will be located at the lowest point of the cooling system and /or the bottom of the
radiator to permit complete flushing of the coolant from the system.
A heavy -duty fan will draw in fresh, cool air through the radiator. Shields or baffles will be
provided to prevent recirculation of hot air to the inlet side of the radiator.
CLUTCH FAN
A Horton fan clutch will be provided. The fan clutch will be automatic when the pump
transmission is in "Road" and "Pump" position.
FUEL TANK
A 65- gallon fuel tank will be provided and mounted at the rear of the chassis. The tank will
be constructed of 12- gauge, hot rolled steel. It will be equipped with swash partitions and a
vent.
A .75" drain plug will be located in a low point of the tank for drainage.
A fill inlet will be located on the driver's side of the body and is covered with a hinged, spring
loaded, stainless steel door that is marked "Diesel Fuel Only ".
A .50" diameter vent will be installed from tank top to just below fuel fill inlet.
The fuel tank will meet all FHWA 393.67 requirements including a fill capacity of 95% of tank
volume.
All fuel lines will be provided as recommended by the engine manufacturer
FUEL COOLER
An air to fuel cooler will be installed in the engine fuel return line.
The fuel filler cap will have a retaining chain.
LABEL, FUEL DOOR
There will be a label provided, on the fuel door, to read "Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel Only ".
AUXILIARY FUEL PICKUP
A auxiliary fuel pickup will be provided in the chassis fuel tank.
TRANSMISSION
An Allison Gen IV, model EVS 3000P, electronic torque converting automatic
transmission will be provided.
Two (2) PTO openings will be located on left side and top of converter housing (positions 9
o'clock and 3 o'clock).
A transmission temperature gauge with red light and audible alarm will be installed on the
cab dash.
Page 15 of 96
TRANSMISSION SHIFTER
A six (6) -speed T- Handle shift module with the 4 + 2 "Mode" button will be mounted to right
of driver on console. Shift position indicator will be indirectly lit for after dark operation.
The Allison shifter will be a "double - digit' display model.
The transmission ratio will be: 1st - 3.51 to 1.00, 2nd - 1.91 to 1.00, 3rd - 1.43 to 1.00, 4th -
1.00 to 1.00, 5th - 0.75 to 1.00, 6th - 0.64 to 1.00, R - 4.80 to 1.00.
TRANSMISSION COOLER
A transmission oil cooler will be provided in the lower tank of the radiator.
TRANSMISSION WARRANTY
The transmission will have a five (5) year /unlimited mileage warranty covering 100% parts
and labor. The warranty will be provided by Allison Transmission.
Note: The transmission cooler is not covered under any extended warranty you may be
getting on your Allison transmission. Please review your Allison transmission warranty for
coverage limitations.
DRIVELINE
Drivehries will be a heavy -duty metal tube and be equipped with Spicer 1710 universal
joints.
The shafts will be dynamically balanced before installation.
A splined slip joint will be provided in each driveshaft, slip joint will be coated with Glidecoat
or equivalent.
STEERING
Dual Sheppard M110 steering gears, with integral heavy -duty power steering, will be
provided. The power steering will incorporate a Vickers V20F three (3) -line hydraulic pump
with integral pressure and flow control.
The steering wheel will be:
- 18.00" in diameter
- Capable of tilting and telescoping
- Four (4) -spoke design
STEERING WARRANTY
The steering gear will have a three (3) year parts and labor warranty.
TIRES
The front tires will be Michelin 385165R22.5 radials, 18 ply "Hiway Rib" XFE tread. The tires
will be mounted on Alcoa 22.50" x 12.25' polished aluminum disc -type wheels with a ten
(10) stud, 11.25' bolt circle.
Page 16 of 96
Rear tires will be four (4) Michelin 11R22.50 radials, 16 ply all- season XDN2 tread. The
tires will be mounted on Alcoa 22.50" x 8.25" polished aluminum disc wheels with a ten (10)-
stud 11.25" bolt circle.
LUG NUT COVERS
Chrome plated lug nut covers will be installed on all lug nuts.
WHEEL CHOCKS
There will be one (1) set(s) of folding Ziamatic SAC -44 -E, aluminum alloy, Quick -Choc
wheel blocks, with easy -grip handle provided.
WHEEL CHOCK BRACKETS
There will be one (1) set(s) of Ziamatic SQCH -44 -H horizontal mounting wheel chock
brackets provided for the Ziamatic SAC -44 -E folding wheel chocks. The brackets will be
mounted one fore and aft of the rear wheels on the driver's side.
HUB COVERS (front)
Stainless steel hub covers will be provided on
be provided.
the front axle. An oil level viewing window will
HUB COVERS (rear)
Stainless steel baby moon covers will be provided over the rear axle hubs.
LUG NUT COVERS
Stainless steel lug nut covers will be installed on all lug nuts.
MUD FLAPS
Mud flaps with a Pierce logo will be installed behind the front and rear wheels.
SPARE TIRE
A 315/80R22.50, spare tire to match the vehicle's front tires will be provided, mounted on a
polished aluminum disc wheel.
SPARE TIRE
A spare tire, 11 R22.5, 16 ply, to match the vehicle's rear tires will be provided, mounted on a
polished aluminum disc wheel.
TIRE PRESSURE MANAGEMENT
There will be a VECSAFE LED tire alert pressure management system provided that will
monitor each tire's pressure. A chrome plated brass sensor will be provided on the valve
stem of each tire for a total of six (6) tires.
The sensor will calibrate to the tire pressure when installed on the valve stem for pressures
between 20 and 120 psi. The sensor will activate an integral battery operated LED when
the pressure of that tire drops 8 psi.
Page 17 of 96
Removing the cap from the sensor will indicate the functionality of the sensor and battery. If
the sensor and battery are in working condition, the LED will immediately start blinking.
CAB
The Arrow -XT cab will be designed specifically for the fire service and manufactured by
Pierce Manufacturing.
Construction of the cab will consist of 5052 -H32 .125' aluminum welded to extruded
aluminum framing.
The cab will be built by Pierce Manufacturing within our own facility located on our premises.
The cab will be 96.00" wide, with an interior width of 87.50 ".
The overall height (from the cab roof to the ground) will be approximately 103.00 ". The
overall height listed will be calculated based on a truck configuration with the lowest
suspension weight ratings, the smallest diameter tires for the suspension, no water weight,
no loose equipment weight and no personnel weight. Larger tires, wheels and suspension
will increase the overall height listed.
The floor to ceiling height inside the crew cab will be 54.00" in the center and 59.75' in the
outboard positions.
The crew cab floor will measure 44.50" from rear wall to the back side of engine tunnel.
The engine tunnel, at the rearward highest point (knee level), will measure 50.88" to the
back wall.
The crew cab will be of the totally enclosed design, with access doors constructed in the
same manner as the driver and passenger doors.
The cab will be a full tilt cab style. The engine will be easily accessible and capable of being
removed with the cab tilted. The cab will be capable of tilting 45 degrees and 90 degrees
with crane assist.
The cab will have three (3) -point rubber mounting and will be tilted by a hydraulic pump
connected to two (2) cab lift cylinders. The cab will then be locked down by a two (2) -point
automatic locking mechanism that actuates after the cab has been lowered.
The cab access steps will be 23.25' wide, crew cab will be 21.25" wide x 8.00" minimum
depth and will be the half- height style door, blistered inward at the bottom.
The lower exposed step area at each door location will be trimmed with aluminum treadplate
and have a grip strut insert in the bottom step.
The inside cab steps will not exceed 18.00" high
Page I8 of 96
The crew cab entrance will be a one (1) step design to the cab floor, for easy access.
A 20.00 ", slip resistant, handrail will be provided adjacent to all door openings to assist
entrance into the cab.
A chrome handrail will be provided on the inside each front cab door, for ease of entry.
The cab doors openings will be 37.00" wide x 58.50" high.
The crew cab door openings will be 34.25" wide x 57.00" high for easy entry, and located on
the side of the cab.
The cab and crew cab doors will be constructed of extruded aluminum with a nominal
material thickness of .125'. The exterior skins will be constructed from .090" aluminum.
All cab and crew cab entry doors will contain a conventional roll down window.
Flush mounted, chrome plated paddle type door handle will be provided on the exterior of
the cab doors.
All interior cab door handles will also have flush paddle handles.
The cab doors will be provided with both interior (rotary knob) and exterior (keyed) locks as
required by FMVSS 206. The locks will be capable of activating when the doors are open or
closed. The doors will remain locked if locks are activated when the doors are opened, then
closed.
The door hinge will be a stainless steel piano type with a .25" pin.
There will be double automotive type rubber seals around the perimeter of the door framing
and door edges to ensure a weather tight fit.
Full height polished stainless steel scuffplates will be installed on the inside of all cab doors.
Cab door panels will be removable without disconnecting door and window mechanisms.
Engine hood side walls will be constructed of .50" aluminum, top will be constructed of .19"
aluminum and will be tapered at top to allow for more driver and passenger elbow room.
The engine hood will be insulated for protection from heat and sound. The noise insulation
keeps the DBA level within the limits stated in the current NFPA series 1900 pamphlet.
There will be access, 15.00" wide x 11.25' high at the rear of the engine tunnel to access
the engine fluid checks.
Full circular inner fender liners, in the wheel wells, will be provided.
Page 19 of 96
Bright aluminum treadplate will be overlayed on the outside rear wall of the crew cab except
for areas that are not typically visible when the cab is lowered.
A curved, safety glass windshield will be provided, with over 2,754 square inches of clear
viewing area.
The cab windshield will have bright trim inserts in the rubber molding holding the glass in
place.
All cab glass will be tinted.
Economical windshield replacement glass will be readily available from local auto glass
suppliers.
Two (2) smoked Lexan sunvisors, 8.75' x 31.00" long, will be provided. The sunvisors will
be located above the windshield with one (1) mounted on each side of the cab.
Two (2) Electric windshield wipers with washer will be provided that meet FMVSS and SAE
requirements.
The washer reservoir will be able to be filled without raising the cab.
A glove box with a drop -down door will be installed in the front dash panel in front of the
officer's position.
CAB INTEGRITY CERTIFICATION
Pierce manufacturing will provide a cab crash test certification with this proposal. The
certification states that the cab must meet or exceed the requirements below:
- European Occupant Protection Standard ECE Regulation No.29
- SAE J2422 Cab Roof Strength Evaluation - Quasi- Static Loading Heavy Trucks
- SAE J2420 COE Frontal Strength Evaluation - Dynamic Loading Heavy Trucks
- Roof Crush
The cab will be subjected to a roof crush force of 100,000 lbs. This value will be 450% of
the ECE 29 criteria, which must be equivalent to the front axle rating up to a maximum of 10
metric tons.
- Side Impact
The cab will be subjected to dynamic preload with a 13,275 lb moving barrier is slammed
into the side of the cab at 5.5 mph, striking with an impact of 13,000 ft -Ibs of energy. This
test will closely represent the forces a cab will see in a rollover incident.
- Frontal Impact
The cab will withstand a frontal force produced from 65,200 ft-Ibs of energy using a swing-
Page 20 of 96
bob type platen
The same cab will withstand all tests without any measurable intrusion into the survival
space of the occupant area.
CAB DOOR DURABILITY CERTIFICATION
Robust cab doors help protect occupants. Cab doors will survive a 200,000 cycle door slam
test where the slamming force exceeds 20 G's of deceleration. The bidder will certify that
the sample doors similar to those provided on the apparatus have been tested and have met
these criteria without structural damage, latch malfunction, or significant component wear.
CAB MODIFICATION
The engine tunnel will be designed to provide maximum occupant space, and required
clearance to the engine and related components. The engine tunnel will include a
modification on the passenger side to accommodate the Turbo and related components.
CAB FLOOR
The cab and crew cab floor areas will be covered with Polydampl acoustical floor mat
consisting of a black pyramid rubber facing and closed cell foam decoupler.
The top surface of the material has a series of raised pyramid shapes evenly spaced, which
offer a superior grip surface. Additionally, the material has a .25" thick closed cell foam (no
water absorption) which offers a sound dampening material for reducing sound levels.
CREW CAB WINDOWS
On each side of the crew cab, a window with tinted glass will be provided.
The rear wall of the crew cab will have two (2) windows, each being 11.29" wide x 17.95"
high.
WINDOW TINT
Crew cab windows will be tinted with 44% light transmission tint. The following windows are
included-
- Crew cab side windows
- Crew cab door, roll -up windows
- Rear opera windows (if applicable)
SHELVING
There will be two (2) shelves provided in the EMS compartment. Each shelf will be
constructed of 0.090" aluminum with a 1.25" up- turned lip. Shelving will be infinitely
adjustable by means of a threaded tightener sliding in a track.
The location will be in the EMS compartment
Page 21 of 9(,
ELECTRIC OPERATED CAB DOOR WINDOWS
All four (4) cab doors will be equipped with electric operated windows with flush
mounted automotive style switches.
The driver's side lower instrument panel will also have three (3) controls, officer's door
window and both crew cab door windows.
ELECTRIC WINDOW DURABILITY CERTIFICATION
Cab window roll -up systems can cause maintenance problems if not designed for long
service life. The window regulator design will complete 30,000 complete up -down cycles
and still function normally when finished. The bidder will certify that sample doors and
windows similar to those provided on the apparatus have been tested and have met these
criteria without malfunction or significant component wear.
The steering wheel will have an emblem containing the fire apparatus manufacturer's logo
and customer name. The emblem will have three (3) rows of text for the customer's
department name. There will be a maximum of eight (8) characters in the first row, eleven
(11) characters in the second row and eleven (11) characters in the third row.
The first row of text will be: Newport
The second row of text will be: Beach
The third row of text will be: Fire Dept.
SUNVISORS
Two (2) vinyl sunvisors will be provided, one (1) above each windshield.
FENDER CROWNS
Stainless steel fender crowns will be installed at the cab wheel openings. The fender
crowns will have a radius outside comer that will allow the fender crown to extend out further
than the standard width crown, thus extending beyond the sidewall of the front tires and
allow the crew cab doors to open fully.
CAB DOOR INTERIOR PANELS
A brushed stainless steel scuff plate will be provided on the lower interior section of cab and
crew cab doors.
STRIPE (On Paint Break)
There will be a gold leaf stripe provided on the paint break in place of chrome molding. The
stripe will be on both sides of the cab and on the cab face with shield.
MAP BOX
A map box with three (3) bins, open from top, will be installed on the center dash. The map
box will be divided into three (3) bins, each being 12.00" wide x 4.00" deep x 8.00" high.
The map box will be constructed of .125" aluminum and will be painted to match the cab
Paec 22 of 96
interior.
MAP POCKET
Installed on each front door will be a map pocket. The pocket will be 13.50" wide x 14.00"
high x 1.50" deep and constructed of stainless steel.
CAB LIFT
A hydraulic cab lift system will be provided consisting of an electric powered hydraulic pump,
dual lift cylinders, and necessary hoses and valves.
The hydraulic pump will have a manual override for backup in the event of electrical failure.
Lift controls will be on a panel located on the pump panel or front area of the body in a
convenient location.
In addition to the panel controls, a 15' remote control will be provided for raising and
lowering the cab. The remote control will be stored in the cab. The receptacle for the
remote control will be located next to the master controls on the panel.
Cab will be locked down by a two (2) -point automatic spring - loaded hook mechanism that
actuates after the cab has been lowered.
The hydraulic cylinders will be equipped with a velocity fuse that protects the cab from
accidentally descending when the control is located in the tilt position.
A redundant mechanical stay arm will automatically be engaged once the cab has been fully
raised. Before lowering the cab, this device must be disengaged using the stay arm control
located near the cab raise /lower switch.
INTERLOCK. CAB LIFT TO PARKING BRAKE
The cab lift system will be interlocked to the parking brake. The cab tilt mechanism will be
active only when the parking brake is set and the ignition switch is in the on position, if the
parking brake is released the cab tilt mechanism will be disabled.
MIRRORS
Ramco, model #6001CCR, polished aluminum 9.25" x 13.50" mirrors, with a convex section,
will be mounted on each side of the front cab corner.
The flat glass in each mirror will be adjustable with remote controls that are convenient to
the driver.
The convex section in each mirror will be adjusted manually.
BUMPER
A one (1) piece, ten (10) gauge, 304 -2B type polished stainless steel bumper, minimum of
10.00" high, will be attached to a bolted modular extension frame constructed of 50,000 psi
tensile steel "C" channel mounted directly behind it to provide adequate support strength.
Pue 23 of 96
The bumper will be extended 16.00" from front face of cab.
Documentation will be provided, upon request to show that the options selected have been
engineered for fit -up and approval for this modular bumper extension. A chart will be
provided to indicate the option locations and will include, but not be limited to the following
options: air horns, mechanical sirens, speakers, hose trays (with hose capacities), winches,
lights, discharge, and suction connections.
LIFT AND TOW MOUNTS
Mounted to the frame extension will be lift and tow mounts. The lift and tow mounts will be
designed and positioned to adapt to certain tow truck lift systems.
The lift and tow mounts with eyes will be painted the same color as the frame.
HOSE TRAY
A hose tray, constructed of aluminum, will be placed in the center of the bumper extension.
The tray will have a capacity of 20' of 5.00" double jacket cotton - polyester hose.
Black rubber grating will be provided at the bottom of the tray. Drain holes are also
provided.
GRAVEL PAN
A gravel pan, constructed of bright aluminum treadplate, will be furnished between the
bumper and cab face.
The gravel pan will be properly supported from the underside to prevent flexing and vibration
of the aluminum treadplate.
HOSE HOLD DOWN STRAP
There will be one (1) hose tray(s) that will have a pair of 2.00" wide black nylon strap(s), with
Velcro fasteners, provided. The strap(s) will be used to secure the hose in the tray.
TOW HOOKS
No tow hooks are to be provided. This truck will be equipped with a lift and tow package
with integral tow eyes.
CAB INTERIOR
The wrap- around style high impact ABS plastic cab dash fascia will be designed to provide
unobstructed visibility to instrumentation. The dash layout will provide the driver with a quick
reference to gauges that allows more time to focus on the road. The center console will
include an easily removable cover for the defroster, two (2) cup holders located one (1) each
side at the rear of the console, and two (2) 12 volt power sources (cigar lighter style).
The officer side dash and center console will be a flat faced design to provide easy
maintenance and will be constructed out of painted aluminum.
Page 24 of 96
The engine tunnel will be padded and covered with 46 ounce leather grain vinyl resistant to
oil, grease and mildew. The upper door liners will be constructed of an aluminum backing
covered with padded upholstry.
The headliner will be installed in both forward and rear cab sections. Headliner material will
be vinyl. A sound barrier will be part of its composition. Material will be installed on
aluminum sheet and securely fastened to interior cab ceiling.
Forward portion of cab headliner will provide easy access for servicing electrical wiring or for
other maintenance needs without removing the entire unit.
CAB INTERIOR UPHOLSTERY
The cab interior upholstery will be dark silver gray.
INTERIOR PAINT (Cab)
A rich looking interior will be provided by painting all the metal surfaces inside the cab gray,
vinyl texture paint.
GRAB HANDLE
A black rubber covered grab handle will be mounted on the lower portion of the driver's side
cab entrance to assist in entering the cab. The grab handle will be securely mounted to the
post area between the door and steering wheel column.
A long rubber grab handle will be mounted on the dash board in front of the officer.
DRIVER SEAT
A Seats Inc. #911 Magnum 100 "knee- action" air -ride style seat with high -back will be
provided in the cab for the driver.
The seat will have 3.00" of height adjustment, in addition to the "knee- action" suspension.
The driver's seat will be furnished with three (3) -point shoulder type seat belt. The seat belt
will be furnished with automatic retractor. Extension will be provided with the seat belt so
the male end can be easily grasped and the female end easily located while sitting in a
normal position.
OFFICER SEAT
A Seats Inc. #911 fixed companion high back style seat will be provided in the cab for the
officer.
The officers seat will be furnished with three (3) -point shoulder type seat belt. The seat belt
will be furnished with automatic retractor. Extension will be provided with the seat belt so
the male end can be easily grasped and the female end easily located while sitting in a
normal position.
Page 25 of 96
be one (1) fold up seat provided at the passenger side outboard position in the
crew cab
The seat will be constructed of a heavy grade vinyl over foam rubber and will have the
bottom covered with brushed stainless steel for a pleasant appearance when the seat is in
the up position.
The seat will be furnished with a three - point, shoulder type seat belt. The seat belt will be
furnished with automatic retractors.
FORWARD FACING DRIVER SIDE OUTBOARD SEAT
There will be one (1) fold up seat provided at the driver side outboard position in the crew
cab.
The seat will be constructed of a heavy grade vinyl over foam rubber and will have the
bottom covered with brushed stainless steel for a pleasant appearance when the seat is in
the up position.
The seat will be furnished with a three - point, shoulder type seat belt. The seat belt will be
furnished with automatic retractors.
EMS COMPARTMENT
A forward facing EMS compartment will be provided in the crew cab at the center position.
The compartment will be 38.00" wide x 30.00" high x 22.63" deep with two (2) Gortite roll up
doors, non - locking, with white finish. The clear door opening of the compartment will be
approximately 21.00" high x 17.00" wide.
The compartment will be constructed of smooth aluminum, and painted to match the cab
interior.
COMPARTMENT LIGHT
There will be one (1) On Scene Solutions strip light installed on the left side of the
compartment opening.. The lights will be controlled by an automatic door switch.
This storage compartment will be compliant per NFPA standard for automotive fire
apparatus.
RADIO COMPARTMENT
A radio compartment will be provided under the officer's seat.
The inside compartment dimensions will be 14.50" deep x 14.50" across x 9.00" high.
A drop -down door with a chrome plated lift and turn latch will be provided for access.
Page 26 of 96
The compartment will be constructed of smooth aluminum and painted to match the cab
interior.
SEAT UPHOLSTERY
All Seats Inc. 911 seat upholstery will be gray woven with black Imperial 1200 material.
SHOULDER HARNESS HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
All seating positions furnished with three (3) -point shoulder type seat belts will include a
height adjustment. This adjustment will optimize the belts effectiveness and comfort for the
seated firefighter.
SEAT BELTS
All seating positions in the cab and crew cab will have red seat belts.
SEAT BELT ANCHOR STRENGTH
Seat belt attachment strength is regulated by Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
and should be validated through testing. Each seat belt anchor design will withstand
3000 Ibs of pull on both the lap and shoulder belt in accordance with FMVSS 571.210
Seat Belt Assembly Anchorages. The bidder will certify that each anchor design was
pull tested to the required force and met the appropriate criteria.
SEAT MOUNTING STRENGTH
Seat attachment strength is regulated by Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards and
should be validated through testing. Each seat mounting design will be tested to withstand
20 G's of force in accordance with FMVSS 571.207 Seating Systems. The bidder will certify
that each seat mount and cab structure design was pull tested to the required force and met
the appropriate criteria.
SEAT BELT MONITORING SYSTEM
A seat belt monitoring system (SBMS) will be provided. The SBMS will be capable of
monitoring up to ten (10) sensors indicating the status of each seating position in the cab
with green and red LED indicators as follows:
Seat Occupied
Buckled
Green
Seat Occupied
Unbuckled
Red
No Occupant
Buckled
Red
No Occupant
Unbuckled
Not Illuminated
The SBMS will include an audible alarm that will be activated when a red illumination
condition exists and the parking brake is released, or a red illumination condition exists and
the transmission is not in park.
HELMET HOLDER
There will be four (4) Zico UHH -1 helmet holder bracket(s) provided in the cab. The
brackets will provide quick access and secure storage of the helmet(s). The bracket
location(s) will be determined at time of final inspection at Pierce mfg.
Page 27 of 96
AIR BOTTLE MOUNTING BRACKET
A total of two (2) 45 degree mounting bracket will be in the crew cab.
Each mounting bracket will be designed to hold one (1) Ziamatic SCBA holders
The bracket will be mounted on the rear facing seat risors.
CAB WARRANTY
Limited Warranty
Except as provided below, and provided the vehicle will have been placed in service within
60 days after delivery to the original purchaser as established by our original invoice, for a
period of ten (10) years after delivery to the original purchaser or the first 100,000 miles of
use, whichever first occurs, Pierce Manufacturing Inc. ('Pierce ") warrants to the user that its
custom fire and /or rescue vehicle cab are free of defects in design or workmanship in the
cab tubular support and mounting supports and other cab structural components identified in
Pierce specifications. This limited warranty will apply only if the vehicle is properly
maintained and used in service which is normal to the particular vehicle. Normal service
means service which does not subject the vehicle to stresses or impacts greater than
normally result from the careful use of the vehicle or chassis. If the buyer discovers a defect
or nonconformity it must notify Pierce in writing within 30 days after the date of discovery.
This limited warranty is not transferable by the first user.
A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT LIGHTS
Two (2) engine compartment lights will be installed under the engine hood, with an integral
switch. The lights will have a .125" diameter hole in its lens to prevent moisture retention.
CAB INTERIOR LIGHTING
Auxiliary lights will be provided in the cab and consisting of:
- Two (2) Weldon, Model 8081, red /clear dome light located, one (1) on the officer side and
one (1) on the driver side, controlled by the following:
Clear forward light controlled by the door switch and the lens switch.
Red rearward light controlled by the lens switch.
- Two (2) Adjustable Map Lights: With switches mounted on the cab ceiling.
CREW CAB INTERIOR LIGHTING
Auxiliary lights will be provided in the crew cab and consist of:
- Four (4) Weldon, Model 8081, Red /Clear dome lights located two (2) each side, controlled
by the following:
Clear forward lights controlled by the door switch and the lens switch.
Red rearward lights controlled by the lens switch.
Page 28 of 9G
A courtesy light at each door opening, controlled by automatic door switches
STEP LIGHTS
For reduced overall maintenance costs
be four (4) Ritar, Model M27HW2, LE
installed at each cab and crew cab do
doorstep, driver side crew cab doorstep,
side crew cab doorstep.
compared to incandescent lighting, there will
D, step lights provided. The lights will be
or, one (1) per step, in the driver side front
passenger side front doorstep and passenger
The lights will be activated when the adjacent door is opened.
CAB DEFROSTER
There will be a 41,000 BTU /hr defroster in the cab located under the engine tunnel.
The defroster ventilation will be built into the design of the cab dash instrument panel and
will be easily removable for maintenance.
The defroster will have a three (3) speed blower, and temperature controls accessible to the
driver and officer.
The defroster ducts will be designed to provide maximum defrosting capabilities for the front
cab windows.
CAB /CREW CAB HEATER
Two (2) auxiliary heaters with 32,000 BTU /hr each will be provided in the cab. The heaters
will have a three (3) speed blower, and temperature controls accessible to the driver and
officer. There will also be louvers located below the rear facing seat riser and below the
driver and officer positions for airflow.
The heaters will be mounted, one (1) within each rear facing seat riser.
CAB DEFROSTER CERTIFICATION
Visibility during inclement weather is essential to safe apparatus performance. The
defroster system will clear the required windshield zones in accordance with SAE
J381 Windshield Defrosting Systems Test Procedure and Performance Requirements
- Trucks, Buses, and Multipurpose Vehicles. The bidder will certify that the defrost
system design has been tested in a cold chamber and passes the SAE J381 criteria.
CAB HEATER CERTIFICATION
Good cab heat performance and regulation provides a more effective working environment
for personnel, whether in- transit, or at a scene. The cab heaters will warm the cab 75 F
from a cold -soak, within 30 minutes when tested using the coolant supply methods found in
SAE J381. The bidder will certify that a substantially similar cab has been tested and has
met these criteria.
AIR CONDITIONING
An air conditioning system will be furnished inside the cab and crew cab.
Page 29 of 96
The system will be centrally mounted on the cab.
The air conditioner refrigerant will be R-1 34A, installed by a certified technician.
INTERIOR CAB INSULATION
The cab and crew cab walls will be insulated with 2.00" insulation where possible and the
roof with 1.00" insulation to aid in cooling.
The insulation will be covered with a vinyl liner or a metal panel painted to match the interior.
An additional red warning light will be installed to the side of the exterior air conditioning
housing. The light will match the upper zone lighting package to meet NFPA requirements.
No change orders will be allowed for this option. This option will be allowed for orders with a
12 month leadtime from the time the order is submitted to Pierce.
CAB INSTRUMENTATION
The cab instrument panel will consist of gauges, an LCD display, telltale indicator lights,
alarms, control switches, and a diagnostic panel. The function of instrument panel controls
and switches will be identified by a label adjacent to each item. Actuation of the headlight
switch will illuminate the labels in low light conditions. Telltale indicator lamps will not be
illuminated unless necessary. The cab instruments and controls will be conveniently located
within the forward cab section directly forward of the driver. Gauges and switch panels will
be designed to be removable for ease of service and low cost of ownership.
GAUGES
The gauge panel will include the following nine (9) ivory gauges with chrome bezels to
monitor vehicle performance:
Voltmeter gauge (Volts)
Low volts (11.8 VDC)
Amber caution indicator on the information center with intermittent alarm.
Amber caution light on gauge assembly.
High volts (15 VDC)
Amber caution indicator on the information center with intermittent alarm.
Amber caution light on gauge assembly.
Very low volts (11.3 VDC)
Red warning indicator on the information center with a steady alarm.
Amber caution light on gauge assembly.
Very high volts (16 VDC)
Red warning indicator on the information center with a steady alarm.
Amber caution light on gauge assembly.
Tachometer (RPM)
Speedometer (Primary (outside) MPH, Secondary (inside) Km /H)
Fuel level gauge (Empty - Full in fractions)
Low fuel (118 full)
Page 30 496
Amber caution indicator on the information center with intermittent alarm.
Amber caution light on gauge assembly.
Very low fuel (1132) fuel
Red warning indicator on the information center with a steady alarm.
Amber caution light on gauge assembly.
Engine oil pressure gauge (PSI)
Low oil pressure to activate engine warning lights and alarms
Red warning indicator on the information center with a steady alarm.
Amber caution light on gauge assembly.
Front air pressure gauge (PSI)
Low air pressure to activate warning lights and alarm.
Red warning indicator on the information center with a steady alarm.
Amber caution light on gauge assembly.
Rear air pressure gauge (PSI)
Low air pressure to activate warning lights and alarm.
Red warning indicator on the information center with a steady alarm.
Amber caution light on gauge assembly.
Transmission oil temperature gauge (Fahrenheit)
High transmission oil temperature activates warning lights and alarm.
Amber caution indicator on the information center with intermittent alarm.
Amber caution light on gauge assembly.
Engine coolant temperature gauge (Fahrenheit)
High engine temperature activates an engine warning light and alarm.
Amber caution indicator on the information center with intermittent alarm.
Amber caution light on gauge assembly.
All gauges will perform prove out at initial power -up to ensure proper performance.
INDICATOR LAMPS
To promote safety, the following telltale indicator lamps will be integral to the gauge
assembly and are located above and below the center gauges. The indicator lamps will be
"dead- front" design that is only visible when active. The colored indicator lights will have
descriptive text or symbols.
The following amber telltale lamps will be present:
Low coolant
Trac cntl (traction control) (where applicable)
Check engine
Check trans (check transmission)
Aux brake overheat (Auxiliary brake overheat)
Air rest (air restriction)
Caution (triangle symbol)
Water in fuel
DPF (engine diesel particulate filter regeneration)
Trailer ABS (where applicable)
Wait to start (where applicable)
HET (engine high exhaust temperature) (where applicable)
ABS (antilock brake system)
MIL (engine emissions system malfunction indicator lamp) (where applicable)
Page ?1 of96
Side roll fault (where applicable)
Front air bag fault (where applicable)
The following red telltale lamps will be present:
Warning (stop sign symbol)
Seat belt
Parking brake
Stop engine
Rack down
The following green telltale lamps will be provided:
Left turn
Right turn
Battery on
The following blue telltale lamp will be provided:
High beam
ALARMS
Audible steady tone warning alarm: A steady audible tone alarm will be provided whenever
a warning message is present.
Audible pulsing tone caution alarm: A pulsing audible tone alarm (chime /chirp) will be
provided whenever a caution message is present without a warning message being present.
Alarm silence: Any active audible alarm will be able to be silenced by holding the ignition
switch at the top position for 3 -5 seconds. For improved safety, silenced audible alarms will
intermittently chirp every 30 seconds until the alarm condition no longer exists. The
intermittent chirp will act as a reminder to the operator that a caution or warning condition
still exists. Any new warning or caution condition will enable the steady or pulsing tones
respectively.
INDICATOR LAMP AND ALARM PROVE -OUT
A system will be provided which automatically tests telltale indicator lights and alarms
located on the cab instrument panel. Telltale indicators and alarms will perform prove -out at
initial power -up to ensure proper performance.
CONTROL SWITCHES
For ease of use, the following controls will be provided immediately adjacent to the cab
instrument panel within easy reach of the driver.
Emergency master switch: A molded plastic push button switch with integral indicator
lamp will be provided. Pressing the switch will activate emergency response lights
and siren control. A green lamp on the switch provides indication that the emergency
master mode is active. Pressing the switch again disables the emergency master
mode.
Headlight / Parking light switch: A three (3)- position maintained rocker switch will be
provided. The first switch position will deactivate all parking lights and the headlights.
The second switch position will activate the parking lights. The third switch position
t'age 32 of 96
will activate the headlights.
Panel backlighting intensity control switch: A three (3) position momentary rocker
switch will be provided. The first switch position decreases the panel backlighting
intensity to a minimum level as the switch is held. The second switch position is the
default position that does not affect the backlighting intensity. The third switch position
increases the panel backlighting intensity to a maximum level as the switch is held.
The following standard controls will be integral to the gauge assembly and are located below
the right hand gauges. All switches have backlit labels for low light applications.
High idle engagement switch: A two (2) position momentary rocker switch with
integral indicator lamp will be provided. The first switch position is the default switch
position. The second switch position will activate and deactivate the high idle function
when pressed and released. The OK TO ENGAGE HIGH IDLE indicator lamp must
be active for the high idle function to engage. A green indicator lamp integral to the
high idle engagement switch will indicate when the high idle function is engaged.
OK to high idle indicator lamp: A green indicator light will be provided next to the high
idle activation switch to indicate that the interlocks have been met to allow high idle
engagement.
The following standard controls will be provided adjacent to the cab gauge assembly within
easy reach of the driver. All switches will have backlit labels for low light applications.
Ignition switch: A three (3) position maintained /maintained /momentary rocker switch
will be provided. The first switch position will deactivate vehicle ignition. The second
switch position will activate vehicle ignition. The third momentary position will disable
the Command Zone audible alarm if held for 3 -5 seconds. A green indicator lamp will
be activated with vehicle ignition.
Engine start switch: A two (2) position momentary rocker switch will be provided. The
first switch position is the default switch position. The second switch position will
activate the vehicle's engine. The switch actuator is designed to prevent accidental
activation.
4 -way hazard switch: A two (2) position maintained rocker switch will be provided.
The first switch position will deactivate the 4 -way hazard switch function. The second
switch position will activate the 4 -way hazard function. The switch actuator will be red
and includes the international 4 -way hazard symbol.
Heater and defroster controls
Turn signal arm: A self - canceling turn signal with high beam headlight and windshield
wiper /washer controls will be provided. The windshield wiper control will have high,
low, and intermittent modes.
Nwc 33 of 96
Parking brake control: An air actuated push /pull park brake control valve will be
provided.
Chassis horn control: Activation of the chassis horn control will be provided through
the center of the steering wheel.
CUSTOM SWITCH PANELS
The design of cab instrumentation will allow for emergency lighting and other switches to be
placed within easy reach of the operator thus improving safety. There will be positions for
up to four (4) switch panels in the overhead console on the driver's side, up to four (4) switch
panels in the engine tunnel console facing the driver, up to four (4) switch panels in the
overhead console on the officers side and up to two (2) switch panels in the engine tunnel
console facing the officer. All switches will have backlit labels for low light applications.
DIAGNOSTIC PANEL
A diagnostic panel will be accessible while standing on the ground and located inside the
driver's side door left of the steering column. The diagnostic panel will allow diagnostic tools
such as computers to connect to various vehicle systems for improved troubleshooting
providing a lower cost of ownership. Diagnostic switches will allow engine and ABS systems
to provide blink codes should a problem exist. The diagnostic panel will include the
following:
Engine diagnostic port
Transmission diagnostic port
ABS diagnostic port
Roll sensor diagnostic port
Command Zone USB diagnostic port
Engine diagnostic switch (blink codes flashed on check engine telltale indicator)
ABS diagnostic switch (blink codes flashed on ABS telltale indicator)
Diesel particulate filter regeneration switch (where applicable)
Diesel particulate filter regeneration inhibit switch (where applicable)
CAB LCD DISPLAY
A digital 4 row by 50 character dot matrix display will be integral to the gauge panel. The
display will be capable of showing simple graphical images as well as text. The display will
be split into three (3) sections. Each section will have a dedicated function. The upper left
section will display the outside ambient temperature. The upper right section will display
odometer, trip mileage, PTO hours, fuel consumption, and other configuration specific
information. The bottom section will display INFO, CAUTION, and WARNING messages.
Text messages will automatically activate to describe the cause of an audible caution or
warning alarm. The LCD will be capable of displaying multiple text messages should more
than one caution or waming condition exist.
- High Air Restriction Warning Indicator Light: LCD message with amber warning indicator
and audible alarm.
Page 34 of 96
WIPER CONTROL
For simple operation and easy reach, the windshield wiper control will be an integral part of
the directional light lever located on the steering column. The wiper control will include high
and low wiper speed settings, a one (1) speed intermittent wiper control with six (6) second
interval and windshield washer switch. The control will have a "return to park" provision,
which allows the wipers to re -turn to the stored position when the wipers are not in use.
WINDSHIELD WIPER DURABILITY CERTIFICATION
Visibility during inclement weather is essential to safe apparatus performance. Windshield
wipers will survive a 3 million cycle durability test in accordance with section 6.2 of SAE
J198 Windshield Wiper Systems - Trucks, Buses and Multipurpose Vehicles. The bidder will
certify that the wiper system design has been tested and that the wiper system has met
these criteria.
- A dash mounted air restriction gauge will be provided, in the cab instrument panel. The
gauge will be a Farr, model 3781 -325, filter minder with black bezel.
- Officer Speedometer, A Class I digital display speedometer will be provided on the officer
side overhead position.
RADIO WITH CD PLAYER
A Panasonic AM /FM/Weatherband stereo radio with compact disc player will be installed.
The compact disc stereo radio will be mounted in switch panel per layout.
The quantity and location of the speakers will be one (1) pair of 5.25' speakers located in
the cab.
The type and location of the antenna will be a roof- mounted rubber antenna located in an
open space, on the cab roof.
This radio will be installed without remote control.
RADIO ANTENNA MOUNTS
There will be six (6) antenna - mounting bases, model MATM, with 17 feet of coax cable and
weatherproof cap provided for a two -way radio or cell phone installation.
One (1) of the mounts will be located on the cab roof, just to the rear of the officer seat and
the additional mounts) will be located directly to the left, in the following positions cab roof.
The cables will be routed to the seat box on the officer side with enough cable for the
customer to route to the instrument panel if needed.
SWITCH PANELS
The emergency light switch panel will have a master switch for ease of use plus individual
switches for selective control. Each switch panel will contain eight (8) membrane -type
switches each rated for one million (1,000,000) cycles. Panels containing less than eight (8)
Pagc 35 of 96
switch assignments will include non - functioning black appliques. Documentation will be
provided by the manufacturer indicating the rated cycle life of the switches. The switch
panel(s) will be located in the 'overhead" position above the windshield on the driver side
overhead to allow for easy access.
The switches will be membrane -type and also act as an integral indicator light. For quick,
visual indication the entire surface of the switch will be illuminated white whenever
backlighting is activated and illuminated red whenever the switch is active. For ease of use,
a 2 -ply, scratch resistant laser engraved Gravoply label indicating the use of each switch will
be placed in the center of the switch. The label will allow light to pass through the letters for
ease of use in low light conditions.
ELECTRICAL POWER CONTROL SYSTEM
The primary power distribution will be located forward of the officer's seating position and be
easily accessible while standing on the ground for simplified maintenance and
troubleshooting. Additional electrical distribution centers will be provided throughout the
vehicle to house the vehicle's electrical power, circuit protection, and control components.
The electrical distribution centers will be located strategically throughout the vehicle to
minimize wire length. For ease of maintenance, all electrical distribution centers will be
easily accessible. All distribution centers containing fuses, circuit breakers and /or relays will
be easily accessible.
Distribution centers located throughout the vehicle will contain battery powered studs for
supplying customer installed equipment thus providing a lower cost of ownership.
Circuit protection devices, which conform to SAE standards, will be utilized to protect
electrical circuits. All circuit protection devices will be rated per NFPA requirements to
prevent wire and component damage when subjected to extreme current overload. General
protection circuit breakers will be Typed automatic reset (continuously resetting). When
required, automotive type fuses will be utilized to protect electronic equipment. Control
relays and solenoid will have a direct current rating of 125% of the maximum current for
which the circuit is protected per NFPA.
COMMAND ZONE CONTROL SYSTEM
A solidstate electronics based control system will be utilized to achieve advanced operation
and control of the vehicle components. A fully computerized vehicle network will consist of
electronic modules located near their point of use to reduce harness lengths and improve
reliability. The control system will comply with SAE J1939 -11 recommended practices.
The control system will operate as a master -slave system whereas the main control module
instructs all other system components. The system will contain patented Mission Critical
software that maintains critical vehicle operations in the unlikely event of a main controller
error. The system will utilize a Real Time Operating System (RTOS) fully compliant with
OSEK/VDX'I specifications providing a lower cost of ownership.
For increased reliability and simplified use the control system modules will include the
following attributes:
Page 36 of 96
Green LED indicator light for module power
Red LED indicator light for network communication stability status
Control system self test at activation and continually throughout vehicle operation
No moving parts due to transistor logic
Software logic control for NFPA mandated safety interlocks and indicators
Integrated electrical system load management without additional components
Integrated electrical load sequencing system without additional components
Customized control software to this vehicle's configuration
Factory and field reprogrammable to accommodate changes to the vehicles operating
parameters
Complete operating and troubleshooting manuals
USB connection to the main control module for advanced troubleshooting
To assure long life and operation in a broad range of environmental conditions, the
Command Zone control system modules will meet the following specifications:
Module circuit board will meet SAE J771 specifications.
Operating temperature from -40C to +70C
Storage temperature from -40C to +70C
Vibration to 50g
IP67 rated enclosure (Totally protected against dust and also protected against the effect of
temporary immersion between 15 centimeters and 1 meter)
Operating voltage from 8 volts to 16 volts DC
The main controller will activate status indicators and audible alarms designed to provide
warning of problems before they become critical.
CIRCUIT PROTECTION AND CONTROL DIAGRAM
Copies of all job - specific, computer network input and output (1 /0) connection will be
provided with each chassis. The Sheets will indicate the function of each module
connection point, circuit protection information (where applicable), wire numbers, wire colors
and load management information.
ON -BOARD ADVANCEDNISUAL ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS
The on -board information center will include the following diagnostic information:
Text description of active warning or caution alarms
Simplified warning indicators
Amber caution light with intermittent alarm
Red warning light with steady tone alarm
All control system modules, with the exception of the main control module, will contain on-
board visual diagnostic LEDs that assist in troubleshooting. The LEDs will be enclosed
within the sealed, transparent module housing near the face of the module. One LED for
each input or output will be provided and will illuminate whenever the respective input or
output is active. Color coded labels within the modules will encompass the LEDs for ease of
identification. The LED indicator lights will provide point of use information for reduced
troubleshooting time without the need for an additional computer.
Pagc 37 of 96
ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
An advanced, Windows- based, diagnostic software program will be provided for this control
system. The software will provide troubleshooting tools to service technicians equipped with
an IBM compatible computer.
The service and maintenance software will be easy to understand and use, have the ability
to view system input/output (1 /0) information, and include a USB cable for connection from a
computer to the vehicle.
INDICATOR LIGHT AND ALARM PROVE -OUT SYSTEM
A system will be provided which automatically tests basic indicator lights and alarms located
on the cab instrument panel.
VOLTAGE MONITOR SYSTEM
A voltage monitoring system will be provided to indicate the status of the battery system
connected to the vehicle's electrical load. The system will provide visual and audible
warning when the system voltage is below or above optimum levels.
The alarm will activate if the system falls below 11.8 volts DC for more than two (2) minutes.
DEDICATED RADIO EQUIPMENT CONNECTION POINTS
There will be three (3) studs provided in the primary power distribution center located in front
of the officer for two -way radio equipment.
The studs will consist of the following:
12 -volt 40 -amp battery switched power
12 -volt 60 -amp ignition switched power
12 -volt 60 -amp direct battery power
There will also be a 12 -volt 100 -amp ground stud located in or adjacent to the power distribution
center.
ENHANCED SOFTWARE
The Command Zone control system will include the following software enhancements:
All perimeter lights and scene lights (where applicable) will be deactivated when the parking
brake is released
Cab and crew cab dome lights will remain on for 10 seconds for improved visibility after the
doors close. The dome lights will dim after 10 seconds or immediately if the vehicle is put
into gear.
Cab and crew cab perimeter lights will remain on for 10 seconds for improved visibility after
the doors close. The dome lights will dim after 10 seconds or immediately if the vehicle is
put into gear.
EMI /RFI PROTECTION
To prevent erroneous signals from crosstalk contamination and interference, the electrical
system will meet, at a minimum, SAE J551/2, thus reducing undesired electromagnetic and
radio frequency emissions. An advanced electrical system will be used to insure radiated
and conducted electromagnetic interference (EMI) or radio frequency interference (RFI)
Page 38 of 9G
emissions are suppressed at their source.
The apparatus will have the ability to operate in the electromagnetic environment typically
found in fire ground operations to ensure clean operations. The electrical system will meet,
without exceptions, electromagnetic susceptibility conforming to SAE J1113/25 Region 1,
Class C EMR for 10KHz -1GHz to 100 Volts /Meter. The vehicle OEM, upon request, will
provide EMC testing reports from testing conducted on an entire apparatus and will certify
that the vehicle meets SAE J551/2 and SAE J1113/25 Region 1, Class C EMR for 10KHz-
1GHz to 100 Volts /Meter requirements. Component and partial (incomplete) vehicle testing
is not adequate as overall vehicle design can impact test results and thus is not acceptable
by itself.
EMI /RFI susceptibility will be controlled by applying appropriate circuit designs and
shielding. The electrical system will be designed for full compatibility with low -level control
signals and high - powered two -way radio communication systems. Harness and cable
routing will be given careful attention to minimize the potential for conducting and radiated
EMI /RFI susceptibility.
INFORMATION CENTER
An information center employing a 7" diagonal color LCD display will be encased in an
ABS plastic housing.
The information center will have the following specifications:
- Operate in temperatures from -40 to 185 degrees F
- An Optical Gel will be placed between the LCD and protective lens
- Five weather resistant user interface switches
- Black enclosure with gray decal
- Sunlight Readable
- Linux operating system
- Minimum of 400nits rated display
OPERATION
The information center will be designed for easy operation for everyday use.
The page button will cycle from one screen to the next screen in a rotating fashion.
A video button will allow a NTSC signal into the information center to be displayed on
the LCD. Pressing any button while viewing a video feed will return the information
center to the vehicle information screens.
A menu button will provide access to maintenance, setup and diagnostic screens.
All other button labels will be specific to the information being viewed.
GENERAL SCREEN DESIGN
Where possible, background colors will be used to provide "At a Glance" vehicle
information. If information provided on a screen is within acceptable limits, a green
Page 39 of 96
background will be used. If a caution or warning situation arises the following will
occur:
An amber background /text color will indicate a caution condition.
A red background /text color will indicate a warning condition.
Every screen will include the following
- Exterior Ambient Temperature
- Time (12 or 24 hour mode)
- Text Alert Center:
- The information center will utilize an "Alert Center" to display text messages
for audible alarm tones. The text messages will be written to identify the
item(s) causing the audible alarm to sound. If more then one (1) text
message occurs, the messages will cycle every second until the problem(s)
have been resolved. The background color for the "Alert Center" will change
to indicate the severity of the "warning" message. If a warning and a caution
condition occur simultaneously, the red background color will be shown for all
alert center messages.
- Button Labels: A label for each button will exist. The label will indicate the
function for each active button for each screen. Buttons that are not utilized
on specific screens will have a button label with no text.
PAGE SCREENS
The Information center will include the following screens:
Load Manager Screen: A list of items to be load managed will be provided.
The list will provide:
- Description of the load
- Individual load shed priority: The lower the priority number the earlier
the device will be shed should a low voltage condition occur.
- Load Status: The screen will indicate if a load has been shed
(disabled) or not shed.
At a Glance" color features are utilized on this screen
Do Not Move Truck: The Do Not Move Truck screen will indicate the
approximate location and type of item that is open or is not stowed for travel.
The actual status of the following devices will be indicated:
- Driver Side Cab Door
- Passenger's Side Cab Door
- Driver Side Crew Cab Door
- Passenger's Side Crew Cab Door
- Driver Side Body Doors
- Passenger's Side Body Doors
- Rear Body Door(s)
- Ladder Rack (if applicable)
- Deck Gun (if applicable)
- Light Tower (if applicable)
- Hatch Door (if applicable)
Page 40 of 96
- Stabilizers (if applicable)
- Steps (if applicable)
- Any other device that is opened, extended, or deployed that creates
a hazard or is likely to cause damage to the apparatus if the
apparatus is moved, will cause an "Alert Center" message if the
parking brake is disengaged.
Chassis Information: The following information will be shown:
- Engine RPM
- Fuel Level
- Battery Voltage
- Engine Coolant Temperature
- Engine Oil Pressure
"At a Glance" color features are utilized on this screen
Active Alarms List: This screen will show a list of all active text messages. The
list items text will match the text messages shown in the "Alert Center". The
date and time the message occurred is displayed with each message in the
list.
MENU SCREENS
The following screens will be available through the Menu button:
View System Information: A detailed list of vehicle information:
- Battery Volts
- Pump Hours
- Transmission Oil Temperature
- Pump Engaged
- Engine Coolant Level
- Engine Oil Level
- Oil level will only be shown when the engine is not running
- Power Steering Level
Set daytime and nighttime Display Brightness:
- Brightness: Increase and decrease
- Default setting button
Configure Video Mode:
Set Video Contrast
Set Video Color
Set Video Tint
Set Startup Screen:
- Choose the screen that will be active at vehicle power -up
Set Date & Time:
- 12 or 24 hour format
Page 4l of 96
- Set time
- Set date
View Active Alarms:
- Shows a list of all active alarms
- Date and time of the occurrence is shown with each alarm
- Silence alarms
- All alarms are silenced
System Diagnostics:
- Module type and ID number
- Module version
- Module diagnostics information:
- Input or output number
- Circuit number connected to that input or output
- Circuit name (item connected to the circuit)
- Status of the input or output
- Power and Constant Current module diagnostic information
Button functions and button labels may change with each screen.
VEHICLE DATA RECORDER
A vehicle data recorder (VDR) will be provided. The VDR will be capable of reading and
storing vehicle information. The VDR will be capable of operating in a voltage range from
8VDC to 16VDC. The VDR will not interfere with, suspend, or delay any communications
that may exist on the CAN data link during the power up, initialization, runtime, or power
down sequence. The VDR will continue operation upon termination of power or at voltages
below 8VDC for a minimum of 10ms.
The vehicle data recorder will
and/or CAN inputs:
Vehicle Speed -
Acceleration -
Deceleration -
Engine Speed -
Engine Throttle Position -
ABS Event -
Seat Occupied Status -
Seat Belt Buckled Status -
Master Optical Warning Device
Time -
Date -
be capable of recording the following data via hardwired
MPH
MPH /sec
MPH /sec
RPM
% of Full Throttle
On /Off
Yes /No by Position (7 -12 Seating Capacity)
Yes /No by Position (7 -12 Seating Capacity)
Switch - On /Off
24 Hour Time
Year /Month /Day
INTERCOM SYSTEM
A four (4) position David Clark, Model U3800, intercom system with radio interface at two (2)
positions will be provided.
Page42 of96
- Driver position will have radio interface capability
- Officer position will have radio interface capability
- Two (2) crew cab positions, located at both forward facing seats, will have intercom only
The following components will be supplied with this system:
- One (1) -U3800 Intercom Unit (2 Crew)
- One (1) -U3815 Radio Interface Module (Officer)
-One (1) -U3811 Radio Interface Modules (Driver)
- One (1) -U3805 Radio Cord Junction Module
- One (1) -H3441 Single Ear Headset (Driver)
- Three (3) -H3442 Headsets (Officer, crew)
- One (1) -C3820 Power Cable.
- Three (3) -C3821 Radio Interface Cord
- One (1) -03402 Jumper Cord
- Two (2)- C38 -12 Jumper Cord
- Three (3)- 18352G -17 MS Connectors
- One (1) -09271 P -13 Cable (20 feet)
- Four (4) Headset Hangar Hooks
All necessary cables and connectors
RADIO INTERFACE
Due to the combination of the mobile radio and the brand of intercom system, a mobile radio
interface adapter is not required for this application.
CAB ROOF COVERING
Horizontal cab roof surfaces will be covered with bright aluminum treadplate. Edges and
fastening screws will be properly caulked to prevent water from leaking under aluminum.
Front and side warning lights will not be mounted on top of treadplate. The treadplate will
extend and terminate next to the warning lights.
ra,•c 43 of e6
BATTERY SYSTEM
Five (5) 12 volt, Exide Model 31A950X1W batteries that include the following features will be
provided:
- 950 CCA, cold cranking amps
- 190 amp reserve capacity
- High cycle
- Group 31
- Rating of 4750 CCA at 0 degrees Fahrenheit
- 950 minutes of reserve capacity
- SAE Posts
Each battery case will be a black polypropylene material with a vertically ribbed container for
increased vibration resistance. The cover will be manifold vented with a central venting
location to allow a 45 degree tilt capacity.
The inside of each battery will consist of a "maintenance free" grid construction with poly
wrapped separators and a flooded epoxy bottom anchoring for maximum vibration
resistance.
ISOLATED BATTERY
One (1) 12 volt, Exide Model 31A950X1W battery will be provided for voltage sensitive
components. A battery isolator appropriately suited for the group 31 battery capacity will be
supplied.
BATTERY SYSTEM
A single starting system will be provided.
An ignition switch and starter button will be located on the instrument panel.
MASTER BATTERY SWITCH
A master battery switch, to activate the battery system, will be provided inside the cab within
easy reach of the driver.
An indicator light will be provided on the instrument panel to notify the driver of the status of
the battery system.
BATTERY COMPARTMENTS
Batteries will be stored in well - ventilated compartments that are located under the cab and
bolted directly to the chassis frame. The compartments will include formed fit heavy -duty
roto - molded polyethylene battery tray inserts. The batteries will be mounted inside of the
roto - molded trays. The battery hold -downs will be of a non - corrosive material. All bolts and
nuts will be stainless steel.
Heavy -duty battery cables will be used to provide maximum power to the electrical system.
Cables will be color- coded.
Page 44 of 96
Battery terminal connections will be coated with anti - corrosion compound. Battery solenoid
terminal connections will be encapsulated with semi - permanent rubberized compound.
There will be a door in the crew cab floor to provide access to the battery terminals.
JUMPER STUDS
One (1) set of battery jumper studs with plastic color -coded covers will be installed on the
bottom of the driver's side battery box. This will provide for easy jumper cable access. A
tag will be provided for positive /negative terminals.
BATTERY CHARGER
A Newmar model PT -40, three stage battery charger, will be provided. A bar graph
indicating the state of charge will be included.
The vehicle battery output will be capable of supplying up to 40 amps for charging the
batteries.
The battery charger will be wired to the 120 -volt shoreline to activate automatically when the
power is connected.
Battery charger will be located in the front left body compartment, mounted high in the
compartment.
The battery charger indicator will be located on the driver's seat riser.
ALTERNATOR
A Leece- Neville, model 4890JB, alternator will be provided. It will have a rated output
current of 320 amps, as measured by SAE method J56. The alternator will feature an
integral, self diagnostic regulator and rectifier. The alternator will be connected to the power
and ground distribution system with heavy -duty cables sized to carry the full rated alternator
output.
SPARE CIRCUIT
There will be four (4) pair of wires, including a positive and a negative, installed on the
apparatus.
The above wires will have the following features:
The positive wire will be connected directly to the battery power.
The negative wire will be connected to ground.
Wires will be protected to 15 amps at 12 volts DC.
Power and ground will terminate two in the center dash and one on the officer's
side and one at the rear.
Termination will be with 15 amp, power point plug with rubber cover.
Wires will be sized to 125% of the protection.
This circuit(s) may be load managed when the parking brake is set.
Page 45 of 96
SPARE CIRCUIT
There will be one (1) pair of wires, including a positive and a negative, installed on the
apparatus.
The above wires will have the following features:
The positive wire will be connected directly to the battery power.
The negative wire will be connected to ground.
Wires will be protected to 15 amps at 12 volts DC.
Power and ground will terminate to be determined.
Termination will be with heat shrinkable butt splicing.
The circuits selected above will be controlled by a switch in the following locations:
a switch in the driver's side switch panel
no additional switch location
Wires will be sized to 125% of the protection.
This circuit(s) may be load managed when the parking brake is set.
ELECTRONIC LOAD MANAGER
An electronic load management (ELM) system will be provided that monitors the vehicles
12 -volt electrical system, automatically reducing the electrical load in the event of a low
voltage condition, and automatically restoring the shed electrical loads when a low voltage
condition expires. This ensures the integrity of the electrical system.
For improved reliability and ease of use, the load manager system will be an integral part of
the vehicle's solid state control system requiring no additional components to perform load
management tasks. Load management systems which require additional components will
not be allowed.
The system will include the following features:
System voltage monitoring.
A shed load will remain inactive for a minimum of five minutes to prevent the load
from cycling on and off.
Sixteen available electronic load shedding levels.
Priority levels can be set for individual outputs.
High Idle will not be controlled by the load manager.
If enabled:
"Load Man Hi -Idle On" will display on the information center.
Hi -Idle will not activate until 30 seconds after engine start up.
Individual switch "on" indicator to flash when the particular load has been shed.
The information center indicates system voltage.
The information center includes a "Load Manager" screen indicating the following:
Load managed items list, with priority levels and item condition.
Individual load managed item condition:
Page 46 of 96
ON = not shed
SHED = shed
SEQUENCER
A sequencer will be provided that automatically activates and deactivates vehicle loads in a
preset sequence thereby protecting the alternator from power surges. This sequencer
operation will allow a gradual increase or decrease in alternator output, rather than loading
or dumping the entire 12 volt load to prolong the life of the alternator.
For improved reliability and ease of use, the load sequencing system will be an integral part
of the vehicle's solid state control system requiring no additional components to perform
load sequencing tasks. Load sequencing systems which require additional components will
not be allowed.
Emergency light sequencing will operate in conjunction with the emergency master light
switch. When the emergency master switch is activated, the emergency lights will be
activated one by one at half- second intervals. Sequenced emergency light switch indicators
will flash while waiting for activation.
When the emergency master switch is deactivated, the sequencer will deactivate the
warning light loads in the reverse order.
Sequencing of the following items will also occur, in conjunction with the ignition switch, at
half- second intervals:
Cab Heater and Air Conditioning
Crew Cab Heater (if applicable)
Crew Cab Air Conditioning (if applicable)
Exhaust Fans (if applicable)
Third Evaporator (if applicable)
AMP DRAW REPORT
The bidder will provide, at the time of bid and delivery, an itemized print out of the expected
amp draw of the entire vehicle's electrical system.
The manufacturer of the apparatus will provide the following:
1) Documentation of the electrical system performance tests.
2) A written load analysis, which will include the following:
A) The nameplate rating of the alternator.
B) The alternator rating under the conditions specified per:
Applicable NFPA 1901 or 1906 (Current Edition).
C) The minimum continuous load of each component that is specified per:
Applicable NFPA 1901 or 1906 (Current Edition).
D) Additional loads that, when added to the minimum continuous load, determine the
Pagc 47 of 96
total connected load
E) Each individual intermittent load.
All of the above listed items will be provided by the bidder per the applicable NFPA 1901 or
1906 (Current Edition).
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
Exterior lighting will meet or exceed Federal Department of Transportation, Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards and National Fire Protection Association requirements in effect at
time of proposal.
Front headlights will be halogen, rectangular shape, one (1) pair mounted in each front trim
housing.
The LED directional lights will wrap- around on the outside corners of the trim housing. The
headlight and LED directional lights will be in the same assembly.
Five (5) LED clearance and marker lights will be installed across the leading edge of the
cab.
WARNING LIGHTS (Cab Face)
Four (4) Whelen Model 60.02F "R Super LED lights will be installed on the cab face, above
the headlights, mounted in common bezels matching the headlight bezel.
The outside flashing LEDs will be red Super LED /red lens.
The inside steady burning LEDs will be red Super LED /red lens.
All of these lights will be activated by the same switch in the cab.
To meet NFPA requirements, the inside lights will be disabled if clear when the parking
brake is applied.
BACK -UP ALARM
An ECCO, Model SA917 -PM2, solid -state electronic audible back -up alarm that actuates
when the truck is shifted into reverse will be provided. The device will sound at 60 pulses
per minute and automatically adjust its volume to maintain a minimum five (5) dBA above
surrounding environmental noise levels.
MANUAL, FIRE APPARATUS PARTS
Two (2) custom parts manuals for the complete fire apparatus will be provided in hard copy
with the completed unit.
One (1) compact disc (CD) will also be provided that will include all of the information from
the above manual.
The manual will contain the following
Page 48 of 96
- Job number
- Part numbers with full descriptions
- Table of contents
- Parts section sorted in functional groups reflecting a major system, component, or
assembly
- Parts section sorted in Alphabetical order
- Instructions on how to locate a parts
The manual will be specifically written for the chassis and body model being purchased. It
will not be a generic manual for a multitude of different chassis and bodies.
SERVICE PARTS INTERNET SITE
The service parts information included in this manual is also available on the Pierce website.
The website offers additional functions and features not contained in this manual, such as
digital photographs and line drawings of select items. The website also features electronic
search tools to assist in locating parts quickly.
MANUALS. CHASSIS SERVICE
Two (2) chassis service manuals containing parts and service information on major
components will be provided with the completed unit.
One (1) compact disk (CD) will also be provided that will include all of the information from
the above manual.
The manuals will contain the following sections
- Job number
- Table of contents
- Troubleshooting
- Front Axle /Suspension
- Brakes
- Engine
- Tires
- Wheels
- Cab
- Electrical, DC
- Air Systems
- Plumbing
- Appendix
The manual will be specifically written for the chassis model being purchased. It will not be
a generic manual for a multitude of different chassis and bodies.
MANUALS. CHASSIS OPERATION
Two (2) chassis operation manuals will be provided.
Page 49 of 96
One (1) compact disk (CD) will also be provided that will include all of the information from
the above manual.
COMMAND ZONE WARRANTY
The Command Zone modules, membrane switches, and display(s) will be warranted against
defective materials or workmanship for a period of five (5) years from the date of delivery to
the original purchaser. The warranty will also include a standard repair time for covered
components.
A copy of the fire apparatus manufacturer's warranty will be included with the bid.
ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS
Two (2) electrical wiring diagrams, prepared for the model of chassis and body, will be
provided.
Page5U of96
WATER TANK
Booster tank will have a capacity of 500 gallons and be constructed of polypropylene plastic
by United Plastic Fabricating, Incorporated.
Tank joints and seams will be nitrogen welded inside and out.
Tank will be baffled in accordance with NFPA bulletin 1901 requirements.
Baffles will have vent openings at both the top and bottom to permit movement of air and
water between compartments.
Longitudinal partitions will be constructed of .38" polypropylene plastic and will extend from
the bottom of the tank through the top cover to allow for positive welding.
Transverse partitions will extend from 4.00" off the bottom of the tank to the underside of the
top cover.
All partitions will interlock and will be welded to the tank bottom and sides.
Tank top will be constructed of .50" polypropylene. It will be recessed .38" and will be
welded to the tank sides and the longitudinal partitions.
Tank top will be sufficiently supported to keep it rigid during fast filling conditions.
Construction will include 2.00" polypropylene dowels spaced no more than 30.00" apart and
welded to the transverse partitions. Two (2) of the dowels will be drilled and tapped (50"
diameter, 13.00" deep) to accommodate lifting eyes.
A sump that is 8.00" long x 8.00" wide x 6.00" deep will be provided at the bottom of the
water tank.
Sump will include a drain plug and the tank outlet.
Tank will be installed in a fabricated cradle assembly constructed of structural steel.
Sufficient crossmembers will be provided to properly support bottom of tank.
Crossmembers will be constructed of steel bar channel or rectangular tubing.
Tank will "float' in cradle to. avoid torsional stress caused by chassis frame flexing. Rubber
cushions, .50" thick x 3.00" wide, will be placed on all horizontal surfaces that the tank rests
on.
Stops or other provision will be provided to prevent an empty tank from bouncing
excessively while moving vehicle.
Mounting system will be approved by the tank manufacturer.
Pabc 5l of 96
Fill tower will be constructed of .50" polypropylene and will be a minimum of 8.00" wide x
14.00" long.
Fill tower will be furnished with a .25" thick polypropylene screen and a hinged cover.
An overflow pipe, constructed of 4.00" schedule 40 polypropylene, will be installed
approximately halfway down the fill tower and extend through the water tank and exit to the
rear of the rear axle.
WATER TANK WARRANTY
The tank will have a lifetime warranty.
If the tank manufacturer determines that the tank problem has rendered the truck out -of-
service, the tank manufacturer will dispatch a service technician WITHIN 48 HOURS (2
DAYS) to repair the tank (This time period is for the United States and Canada only).
HOSE BED
The hose body will be fabricated of .125" -5052 aluminum with a 38,000 psi tensile strength.
The hose body width will be a minimum of 68.00" inside.
The interior of the hose bed will be unpainted with a DA finish.
The upper and rear edges of side panels will have a double break for rigidity.
The upper inside area of the beavertails will be covered with brushed stainless steel to
prevent damage to the painted surface when the hose is removed.
The flooring of the hose bed will be removable aluminum grating with the top surface
corrugated to aid in hose aeration. The grating slats will be a minimum of .50" x 4.50" with
spacing between slats for hose ventilation.
Hose bed will accommodate 1000' of 3 ", 1000' of 2.5 ", 200' of 1.75" and 8" wide for long
tools.
Three (3) adjustable hosebed dividers will be used to separate the hose.
Each divider will be constructed of a .125" brushed aluminum sheet fitted and fastened into
a slotted, 1.50" diameter radiused extrusion along the top, bottom, and rear edge.
Partition will be fully adjustable by sliding in tracks, located at the front and rear of the hose
bed.
Divider will be held in place by tightening bolts, at each end.
Acorn nuts will be installed on all bolts in the hose bed which have exposed threads.
Pao-C 52 ot'96
HOSE RESTRAINT
The hose in the hosebed will be restrained by black nylon velcro straps at the top of the
hosebed and a black nylon web strap netting at the top and rear of the hosebed. The
netting will include quick release fasteners.
BACKBOARD COMPARTMENT
One (1) backboard compartment will be fabricated of bright aluminum treadplate and
mounted to the underside of the bright aluminum treadplate hose bed cover, passenger's
side. Compartment(s) size will be 76 x 4 x 20 and will have a bright aluminum treadplate
drop -down door at the rear.
HOSE BED COVER
A two (2) section hose bed cover, constructed of .125" bright aluminum treadplate, will be
furnished. The cover will be hinged with full length stainless steel piano hinge. The sides
will be slanted down.
The cover will be reinforced so that it can support the weight of a man walking on the cover.
If access to water tank fill tower is blocked by the hose bed cover, then a hinged door will be
provided in it so that tank may be filled without raising cover doors.
Chrome grab handles and gas filled cylinders will be provided to assist in opening and
closing the cover. A handrail is provided at the rear, in the center of the support, to assist in
opening the cover.
RUNNING BOARDS
Running boards will be fabricated of .125' bright aluminum treadplate.
Each running board will be supported by a welded 2.00" square tubing and channel
assembly, which will be bolted to the pump compartment substructure.
Running boards will be 12.75' deep and spaced .50" away from the pump panel.
A splashguard will be provided above the running board treadplate.
TAILBOARD
Rear step will also be constructed of .125' bright aluminum treadplate and spaced .50" from
the body, as well as supported by a structural steel assembly.
The rear tailboard will be 16.00" deep.
The exterior side will be flanged down and in.
Flanges will not be notched.
Entire rear surface between the beavertails will be covered with smooth aluminum.
Page 53 of96
Inside surface of each beavertail in the hose bed area will be covered with stainless steel to
protect the paint finish.
The remaining inside surface of the beavertails will be covered with bright aluminum
treadplate.
TOW BAR
A tow bar will be installed under the tailboard at center of truck.
Tow bar will be fabricated of 1.00" CRS bar rolled into a 3.00" radius.
Tow bar assembly will be constructed of .38" structural angle. When force is applied to the
bar, it will be transmitted to the frame rail.
Tow bar assembly will be designed and positioned to allow up to a 30- degree upward
angled pull of 17,000 pounds, or a 20,000 -pound straight horizontal pull in line with the
centerline of the vehicle.
Tow bar design will have been fully tested and evaluated using strain gauge testing and
finite element analysis techniques.
COMPARTMENTATION
Body and compartments will be fabricated of .125 ", 5052 -H32 aluminum with a tensile
strength range of 31,000 to 38,000 psi.
Side compartments will be an integral assembly with the rear fenders.
Circular fender liners will be provided for prevention of rust pockets and ease of
maintenance.
Compartment Flooring will be of the sweep out design with the floor higher than the
compartment door lip.
The compartment door opening will be framed by flanging the edges in 1.75' and bending
out again .75" to form an angle.
Drip protection will be provided above the doors by means of bright aluminum extrusion,
formed bright aluminum treadplate or polished stainless steel.
The top of the compartment will be covered with bright aluminum treadplate rolled over the
edges on the front, rear and outward side. These covers will have the corners "TIG" welded.
Side compartment covers will be separate from the compartment tops.
Front facing compartment walls will be covered with bright aluminum treadplate.
All screws and bolts which protrude into a compartment will have acorn nuts on the ends to
Page 54 of96
prevent injury.
UNDERBODY SUPPORT SYSTEM
Due to the severe loading requirements of this pumper a method of body and compartment
support suitable for the intended load will be provided.
The backbone of the support system will be the chassis frame rails which is the strongest
component of the chassis and is designed for sustaining maximum loads.
The support system will include .375" thick steel vertical angle supports bolted to the chassis
frame rails with .625" diameter bolts.
Attached to the bottom of the steel vertical angles will be horizontal angles, with gussets
welded to the vertical members, which extend to the outside edge of the body.
A steel frame will be mounted on the top of these supports to create a "floating substructure"
which will result in a 500 pound equipment support rating per lower compartment.
The "floating substructure" will be separated from the horizontal members with neoprene
elastomer isolators. These isolators will reduce the natural flex stress of the chassis from
being transmitted to the body.
Isolators will have a broad load range, proven viability in vehicular applications, be of a fail
safe design and allow for all necessary movement in three (3) transitional and rotational
modes.
The neoprene isolators will be installed in a modified "V" three (3) -point mounting pattern to
reduce the natural flex of the chassis being transmitted to the body.
A design with body compartments hanging on the chassis in an unsupported fashion will not
be acceptable.
AGGRESSIVE WALKING SURFACE
All exterior surfaces designated as stepping, standing, and walking areas will comply with
the required average slip resistance of the current NFPA standards.
LOUVERS
All body compartments will have a minimum of one (1) set of louvers stamped into a wall to
provide the proper airflow inside the compartment and to prevent water from dripping into
the compartment. These louvers will be formed into the metal and not added to the
compartment as a separate plate.
TESTING OF BODY DESIGN
Body structural analysis has been fully tested. Proven engineering and test techniques such
as finite element analysis, stress coating and strain gauging have been performed with
special attention given to fatigue, life and structural integrity of the cab, body and
substructure.
Page 55 of 96
Body will be tested while loaded to its greatest in- service weight
The criteria used during the testing procedure will include:
- Raising opposite corners of the vehicle tires 9.00" to simulate the twisting a truck may
experience when driving over a curb.
- Making a 90 degree turn, while driving at 20 mph to simulate aggressive driving conditions.
- Driving the vehicle at 35 mph on a "washboard" road.
- Driving the vehicle at 55 mph on a smooth road.
- Accelerating the vehicle fully, until reaching the approximate speed of 45 mph on rough
pavement.
Evidence of actual testing techniques will be made available upon request.
BODY WARRANTY
Except as provided below, and provided the vehicle will have been placed in service within
60 days after delivery to the original purchaser as established by our original invoice, for a
period of ten (10) years after delivery to the original purchaser or the first 100,000 miles of
use, whichever first occurs, Pierce Manufacturing Inc. ('Pierce ") warrants to the user that its
second generation body and/or heavy duty rescue body are free of defects in design and
workmanship in body tubular support, mounting structures and other structural components
identified in Pierce specifications. This limited warranty will apply only if the vehicle is
properly maintained and used in service which is normal to the particular vehicle. Normal
service means service which does not subject the vehicle to stresses or impacts greater
than normally result from the careful use of the vehicle or chassis. If the buyer discovers a
defect or nonconformity it must notify Pierce in writing within 30 days after the date of
discovery. This limited warranty is not transferable by the first user.
A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal.
COMPARTMENTATION. DRIVER'S SIDE
A full height, roll -up door compartment ahead of the rear wheels will be provided. The
interior dimensions of this compartment will be 49.00" wide x 58.25" high x 25.88" deep in
the lower 26.00" of the compartment and 12.00" deep in the remaining upper portion. The
height of the compartment will be measured from compartment floor to the bottom edge of
the door roll. The depth of the compartment will be calculated with the compartment door
closed. The compartment interior will be fully open from the compartment ceiling to the
compartment floor and designed so that no permanent dividers are required between the
upper and lower sections. The clear door opening of this compartment will be 43.25' wide x
58.25' high.
Closing of the door will not require releasing, unlocking, or unlatching any mechanism and
Page 56 of 96
will easily be accomplished with one hand
A roll -up door compartment over the rear wheels will be provided. The interior dimensions
of this compartment will be 66.50" wide x 25.38" high x 12.00" deep. The height of the
compartment will be measured from compartment floor to the bottom edge of the door roll.
The depth of the compartment will be calculated with the compartment door closed. The
clear door opening of this compartment will be 58.25' wide x 25.12" high.
Closing of the door will not require releasing, unlocking, or unlatching any mechanism and
will easily be accomplished with one hand.
A full height, roll -up door compartment behind the rear wheels will be provided. The interior
dimensions of this compartment will be 31.50" wide x 58.25' high x 25.88" deep in the lower
26.00" of the compartment and 12.00" deep in the remaining upper portion. The height of
the compartment will be measured from compartment floor to the bottom edge of the door
roll. The depth of the compartment will be calculated with the compartment door closed.
The compartment interior will be fully open from the compartment ceiling to the compartment
floor and designed so that no permanent dividers are required between the upper and lower
sections. The clear door opening of this compartment will be 28.75' wide x 58.25' high.
Closing of the door will not require releasing, unlocking, or unlatching any mechanism and
will easily be accomplished with one hand.
COMPARTMENTATION, PASSENGER' SIDE
A full height, vertically hinged, single door compartment ahead of the rear wheels will be
provided. The interior dimensions of this compartment will be 27.50" wide x 67.63" high x
12.00" deep. The depth of the compartment will be calculated with the compartment door
closed. The compartment interior will be fully open from the compartment ceiling to the
compartment floor and designed so that no permanent dividers are required between the
upper and lower section. The clear door opening of this compartment will be 23.00" wide x
63.00" high.
A positive door holder will be furnished with this compartment.
A horizontally hinged, single lift -up door compartment over the rear wheels will be provided.
The interior dimensions of this compartment will be 66.50" wide x 32.88" high x 12.00" deep.
The depth of the compartment will be calculated with the compartment door closed. The
clear door opening of this compartment will be 59.50" wide x 28.25' high.
The lift -up door will be furnished with two (2) gas- charged cylinders to assist in the opening
of the door and to maintain the door in an open position. There will be a field adjustable,
three - position bracket mounted on the vertical side door opening that will allow the door to
be held open at 87, 900, or 930. Closing of the door will not require releasing, unlocking, or
unlatching any mechanism.
A vertically hinged, double door compartment behind the rear wheels will be provided. The
interior dimensions of this compartment will be 47.50" wide x 67.63" high x 12.00" deep. A
Page 57 of 96
section of this compartment will be 25.88" deep x 26.00" height directly behind the rear
wheels. The depth of the compartment will be calculated with the compartment door closed.
The compartment interior will be fully open from the compartment ceiling to the compartment
floor and designed so that no permanent dividers are required between the upper and lower
sections. The clear door opening of this compartment will be 46.00" wide x 63.00" high.
A positive door holder will be furnished with this compartment.
ROLL -UP DOOR, SIDE COMPARTMENTS
All roll -up door(s) will be of an anodized satin finish, double faced, aluminum construction
and manufactured by ABTA Manufacturing (Gortite).
Lath sections will be an interlocking rib design and will be individually replaceable without
complete disassembly of door.
Between each slat at the pivoting joint will be a PVC inner seal to prevent metal to metal
contact and prevent dirt or moisture from entering the compartments. Seals will allow door to
operate in extreme temperatures ranging from plus 180 to minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit.
Side, top and bottom seals will be provided to resist ingress of dirt and weather and be
made of Santoprene.
All hinges, barrel clips and end pieces will be nylon 66. All nylon components will withstand
temperatures from plus 300 to minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit. Hardened plastic will not be
acceptable.
A polished stainless steel lift bar will be provided for opening door. Lift bar will be located at
the bottom of door and have latches on the outer extrusion of the doors frame. A ledge will
be supplied over lift bar for additional area to aid in closing the door.
Door(s) will be constructed from an aluminum box section. The exterior surface of each slat
will be flat. The interior surfaces will be concave to provide strength and prevent loose
equipment from jamming the door from inside.
To conserve space in the compartment(s), the spring roller assembly will not exceed 3.00" in
diameter. A roll -up door that retracts below the compartment ceiling (garage door style) will
not acceptable.
The header for the roll -up door assembly will not exceed 4.00 ".
A heavy -duty magnetic switch will be used for control of 'open compartment door" waming
lights.
All mechanical components of the door will be warranted to be free from defects in materials
and workmanship for the lifetime of the vehicle. All parts covered under this warranty will be
to the original owner.
Page 58 of 96
COMPARTMENTATION, REAR
A vertically hinged, double door compartment above the rear tailboard will be provided.
Interior dimensions of this compartment will be 40.00" wide x 40.63" high x 25.88" deep.
Depth of the compartment will be calculated with the compartment door closed.
A louvered, removable access panel will be furnished on the back wall of the compartment.
Rear compartment will be open into the rear side compartments.
Clear door opening of this compartment will be 34.50" wide x 36.00" high.
Each of the vertically hinged compartment doors will be provided with a positive door holder.
DOORS. REAR COMPARTMENT
All hinged compartment doors will be lap style with double panel construction and fabricated
of .09" 5052H34 aluminum. Doors will be a minimum of 1.50" thick with a full interior panel.
To provide additional door strength, a "C" section reinforcement will be installed between the
outer and interior panels.
Doors will be provided with a closed cell rubber gasket around the surface that laps onto the
body. A second heavy -duty automotive rubber molding with a hollow core will be installed
on the door framing that seals onto the interior pan, to ensure a weather resisting
compartment.
All compartment doors will have polished stainless steel continuous hinge with a pin
diameter of .1875', that is bolted or screwed on with stainless steel fasteners. A strip of
dielectric isolation tape will be provided between the hinge and the doorjamb.
All door lock mechanisms will be fully enclosed within the door panels to prevent fouling of
the lock in the event equipment inside shifts into the lock area.
Doors will be latched with recessed, polished stainless steel "D" ring handles and Eberhard
106 locks.
To prevent corrosion caused by dissimilar metals, compartment door handles will not be
attached to outer door panel with screws. A rubber gasket will be provided between the "D"
ring handle and the door.
PULL -OUT TRAY
There will be three (3) slide -out trays with 2.00" sides and a capacity of 500 pounds
provided. Capacity rating will be in the extended position.
Slides will be General Device ball bearing type for ease of operation and years of
dependable service.
Automatic locks will be provided for both the "in" and 'but' positions. The trip mechanism for
it will be located at the front of the tray for ease of use with a gloved hand.
Page 59 of 96
Tray location will be two on the driver's side fore and aft of rear wheels and one in the right
rear compartment.
Heavy -duty steel angle iron assembly will support the body under the compartment floor. It
will be attached to the chassis frame for load transfer and to reduce stress on body.
Pac Trac equipment mounting system will be installed on the walls of one (1)
compartment(s), driver's side over wheel compartment.
PARTITION, TRANSVERSE REAR COMPARTMENT
Two (2) partitions will be bolted in place to separate driver and passenger side rear
compartments from the rear tailboard compartment.
ADJUSTABLE SHELVES
There will be seven (7) shelves, with a minimum capacity of 215 pounds provided. The shelf
construction will consist of .125' pan - shaped aluminum with 2.00" sides. Each shelf will be
infinitely adjustable by means of a threaded fastener, which slides in a track.
The location will be two in D3, one in D2, one in D1, one P2,P1 and R1.
MOUNTING TRACKS
There will be six (6) sets of tracks for mounting shelf(s) in all compartments. These tracks
will be installed vertically to support the adjustable shelf(s).
RUB RAIL
Bottom edge of the side compartments will be trimmed with a bright aluminum extruded rub
rail.
Trim will be 2.12" high with 1.38" flanges turned outward for rigidity
The rub rails will not be an integral part of the body construction, which allows replacement
in the event of damage.
BODY FENDER CROWNS
Stainless steel fender crowns will be provided around the rear wheel openings.
A rubber welting will be installed between the body and the crown to seal the seam and
restrict moisture from entering.
A dielectric barrier will be provided between the fender crown fasteners (screws) and the
fender sheet metal to prevent corrosion.
HARD SUCTION HOSE
Hard suction hose will not be required.
Pace 60 of 96
HANDRAILS
The handrails will be 1.25" diameter anodized aluminum extrusion, with a ribbed design, to
provide a positive gripping surface.
Chrome plated end stanchions will support the handrail. Plastic gaskets will be used
between end stanchions and any painted surfaces.
Drain holes will be provided in the bottom of all vertically mounted handrails.
- Four (4) handrails will be provided, two above each side pump panel.
- One (1) vertical handrail will be provided on the driver's body, on the front bulkhead door
frame.
- One (1) vertical handrail, not less than 29.00" long, will be located on each rear
beavertail.
- One (1) full width horizontal handrail will be provided below the hose bed at the rear
of the apparatus.
AIR BOTTLE STORAGE (Single bottle)
A total of four (4) air bottle compartments will be provided and located fore and aft each rear
wheel. The air bottle compartment will be in the form of a round tube, 7.63" diameter, and
will be of adequate depth to accommodate different size air bottles. The flooring will be
rubber lined and have a drain hole. A stainless steel door with a chrome - plated latch will be
provided to contain the air bottle. A dielectric barrier will be provided between the door
hinge, hinge fasteners and the body sheet metal.
EXTENSION LADDER
There will be a 24', two (2) section, aluminum, Duo - Safety, Series 900 -A extension ladder
provided.
ROOF LADDER
There will be a 14' aluminum, Duo - Safely, Series 775 -A roof ladder provided.
LADDER STORAGE
The ladders will be stored between the water tank and the passenger's side compartments.
The ladders will extend into the pump compartment just to the rear of the water pump
discharges.
The ladder storage area will be enclosed as practical by means of sheet metal to protect the
ladders from road dirt. The ladders that extend into the pump house will also be enclosed.
A black rubber boot will be provided to enclosed the ladders in the gap between the pump
house and the body.
Each ladder will be stored vertically in a separate stainless steel storage trough. Each
stainless steel trough will be lined with Dura -Surf nylon slides.
Page 61 of 96
A bright aluminum treadplate enclosure will be provided at the rear of the body to properly
contain the ladders This enclosure will extend to the rear of the side body compartments.
The enclosure will also include a vertically hinged smooth aluminum door with a "D" handle
latch to access the ladders.
FOLDING LADDER
One (1) 10' aluminum, Series 585 -A Duo - Safety folding ladder will be installed in the pike
pole /folding ladder compartment.
PIKE POLE, 8'
One (1) pike pole, Fire Hooks Unlimited, Model GBH -10, 10' long Gator Back Hook, will be
provided and located in the compartment.
PIKE POLE, 8'
One (1) pike pole, Fire Hooks Unlimited, Model GBH -6, 6' long Gator Back Hook, will be
provided and located in the pike pole compartment.
PIKE POLE 8 FT, PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT
NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, Section 5.8.3 requires one (1) 8 ft or longer pike pole mounted in
a bracket fastened to the apparatus.
The pike pole is not on the apparatus as manufactured. The fire department will provide
and mount the pike pole.
PIKE POLE, 6'
One (1) pike pole 6' long with a Nupla Featherlight fiberglass handle will be provided and
located in the compartment.
PIKE POLES /FOLDING LADDER COMPARTMENT
A compartment will be provided, recessed below the water tank tee at the rear of body, on
the driver's side.
The compartment will be equipped with two (2) pvc tubes for storage of two (2) straight
handled pike poles and (1) stainless steel trough for storage of (1) folding ladder.
A stainless steel door will be provided at the rear with a lift and turn latch.
REAR STEPS
Bright aluminum treadplate corner steps will be provided at the rear. All steps will provide
adequate surface for stepping.
Page 62 of 96
PUMP
Pump will be a Waterous CM, 1250 gpm, two (2) stage midship mounted centrifugal type.
Pump will be the class "A" type.
Pump will deliver the percentage of rated discharge at pressures indicated below:
- 100% of rated capacity at 150 psi net pump pressure.
- 70% of rated capacity at 200 psi net pump pressure.
- 50% of rated capacity at 250 psi net pump pressure.
Pump body will be close - grained gray iron, bronze fitted, and will be horizontally split in two
(2) sections for easy removal of the entire impeller shaft assembly (including wear rings).
Pump will be designed for complete servicing from the bottom of the truck, without disturbing
the pump setting or apparatus piping.
Pump case halves will be bolted together on a single horizontal face to minimize a chance of
leakage and facilitate ease of reassembly. No end flanges will be used.
Discharge manifold of the pump will be cast as an integral part of the pump body assembly
and will provide a minimum of three (3) 3.50" openings for flexibility in providing various
discharge outlets for maximum efficiency.
The three (3) 3.50" openings will be located as follows: one (1) outlet to the right of the
pump, one (1) outlet to the left of the pump, and one (1) outlet directly on top of the
discharge manifold.
Impeller shaft will be stainless steel, accurately ground to size. It will be supported at each
end by sealed, anti - friction ball bearings for rigid precise support.
Bearings will be protected from water and sediment by suitable stuffing boxes, flinger rings,
and oil seals. No special or sleeve type bearings will be used.
Pump will be equipped with a self- adjusting, maintenance -free, mechanical shaft seal.
The mechanical seal will consist of a flat, highly polished, spring fed carbon ring that rotates
with the impeller shaft. The carbon ring will press against a highly polished stainless steel
stationary ring that is sealed within the pump body.
In addition, a throttling ring will be pressed into the steel chamber cover, providing a very
small clearance around the rotating shaft in the event of a mechanical seal failure. The
pump performance will not deteriorate, nor will the pump lose prime, while drafting if the seal
fails during pump operation.
Wear rings will be bronze and easily replaceable to restore original pump efficiency and
eliminate the need to replace the entire pump casing due to wear.
Page 63 o(46
PUMP TRANSMISSION
The pump transmission will be made of a three (3) piece, aluminum, horizontally split casing.
Power transfer to pump will be through a high strength Morse HY -VO silent drive chain. By
the use of a chain rather than gears, 50% of the sprocket will be accepting or transmitting
torque, compared to two (2) or three (3) teeth doing all the work.
Drive shafts will be 2.35" diameter hardened and ground alloy steel and supported by ball
bearings. The case will be designed to eliminate the need for water cooling.
AIR PUMP SHIFT
Pump shift engagement will be made by a two (2) position sliding collar, actuated
pneumatically (by air pressure), with a three (3) position air control switch located in the cab.
A manual back -up shift control will also be located on the driver's side pump panel.
Two (2) indicator lights will be provided adjacent to the pump shift inside the cab. One (1)
green light will indicate the pump shift has been completed and be labeled "pump engaged ".
The second green light will indicate when the pump has been engaged, and that the chassis
transmission is in pump gear. This indicator light will be labeled "OK to pump ".
Another green indicator light will be installed adjacent to the hand throttle on the pump panel
and indicate either the pump is engaged and the road transmission is in pump gear, or the
road transmission is in neutral and the pump is not engaged. This indicator light will be
labeled "Warning: Do not open throttle unless light is on ".
The pump shift control in the cab will be illuminated to meet NFPA requirements.
TRANSMISSION LOCK -UP
The direct gear transmission lock -up for the fire pump operation will engage automatically
when the pump shift control, in the cab, is activated.
AUXILIARY COOLING SYSTEM
A supplementary heat exchange cooling system will be provided to allow the use of water
from the discharge side of the pump for cooling the engine water. The heat exchanger will
be cylindrical type and will be a separate unit. The heat exchanger will be installed in the
pump or engine compartment with the control located on the pump operator's control panel.
Exchanger will be plumbed to the master drain valve.
TRANSFER VALVE
Transfer valve design will be of the latest ball type, of all bronze construction and
incorporate a hydraulically balanced seal assembly, minimizing leakage around the ball and
assuring maximum pump efficiency.
Transfer valve will operate smoothly and without sticking, even when exposed to sandy or
dirty water.
Transfer valve will be operated electrically with a control switch mounted on the pump
operator's control panel, with two (2) indicator lights which will indicate "pressure" or
Page 64 of 96
"volume"
Transfer valve will have the ability to change from series (pressure) operation to parallel
(volume) operation without reducing the operating speed of the engine regardless of the
operating pressure of the pump, thus maintaining an effective fire stream at the nozzle at all
times.
A manual override will be provided in the event of electrical malfunction. The manual
override system operates with the use of a removable hand crank located at the left
(driver's) side pump panel.
INTAKE RELIEF VALVE
An Elkhart relief valve will be installed on the suction side of the pump preset at 125 psig.
Relief valve will have a working range of 75 psig to 250 psig.
Outlet will terminate below the framerails with a 2.50" National Standard hose thread
adapter and will have a "do not cap" warning tag.
Control will be located behind an access door at the right (passenger's) side pump panel.
RELIEF VALVE
A Waterous adjustable relief valve, specially designed for fire service, will be provided.
Valve will be positive, quick acting, and include an instantaneous on /off control. When in the
off position, the relief valve will functionally be removed from the system. When turned back
to the on position, the relief valve will again monitor and maintain the previous pressure
setting.
Control for adjusting pressure will be elliptical shaped for positive grip.
An easily removable pilot valve strainer will be provided and be accessible from the pump
operator's panel.
Two (2) indicator lights will be furnished, showing the position of the relief valve (amber for
open and green for closed).
PRIMER
An electric pump priming system will be furnished with the apparatus. It will consist of a
rotary vane priming pump, driven by a 12 volt electric motor.
All rotating parts of the pump will be made of corrosion resistant aluminum, stainless steel,
or laminated phenolic.
Pump cylinder will be made of aluminum alloy, hard anodized and Teflon coated, for
corrosion resistance and long life.
Page 65 of 96
The primer will be built by the manufacturer of the fire pump.
A control located at the pump control panel will operate the primer.
When dry, the pump system will be capable of taking suction through 20 feet of hard suction
hose and discharging water in not more than the time allowed by current NFPA 1901
standard. Also, rated capacity of the pump will be achieved at the lift stated in current NFPA
1901 standard table.
THERMAL RELIEF VALVE
A Waterous Overheat Protection Manager (OPM) will be mounted on the water pump. The
OPM will consist of a valve that opens and discharges to the ground when the water in the
pump reaches 140 F and a warning light that is triggered when the water in the pump
reaches 180 F. The warning light will act as an additional protection device if the
temperature in the pump keeps rising after the valve opens. The warning light with a test
switch will be mounted on the pump operator panel.
PUMP WARRANTY
A Waterous five (5) year warranty will be provided for the pump.
PUMP MANUALS
Two (2) pump manuals from the pump manufacturer will be furnished in compact disc format
with the apparatus. The manuals will cover pump operation, maintenance, and parts.
PLUMBING
All inlet and outlet plumbing, 3.00" and smaller, will be plumbed with either stainless steel
pipe or synthetic rubber hose reinforced with high - tensile polyester braid. If hose is used, it
must have a minimum burst rating of 1,000 psi and be equipped with high pressure
couplings. Larger inlets and outlets will be threaded or welded black iron pipe. Small
diameter secondary plumbing such as drain lines will be stainless steel, brass or hose.
Where vibration or chassis flexing may damage or loosen piping or where a coupling is
required for servicing, the piping will be equipped with victaulic or rubber couplings.
All lines to drain through either a master drain valve or will be equipped with individual drain
valves. All individual drain lines for discharges will be extended with a hose to drain below
the chassis frame.
All water carrying gauge lines will be of flexible polypropylene tubing.
PUMP PLUMBING WARRANTY
Except as provided below, and provided the vehicle will have been placed in service
within sixty (60) days after delivery to the original purchaser as established by our
original invoice, for a period ending on the first to occur of the expiration of ten years
or 100,000 miles of vehicle use after delivery to the original purchaser, Pierce
Manufacturing Inc. ('Pierce ") warrants to the user that the stainless steel piping that is
3.00" and smaller in diameter in its first Fire and Rescue Apparatus vehicles will be
Pkgc 66 of 96
free of structural failures caused by defective design, workmanship, or perforation
caused by corrosion. This limited warranty will apply only if the vehicle is properly
maintained and used in service which is normal to the particular vehicle. Normal
service means service which does not subject the vehicle to stresses or impacts
greater than normally result from the careful use of the vehicle or chassis. If the buyer
discovers a defect or nonconformity it must notify Pierce in writing within thirty (30)
days after the date of discovery. This limited warranty is not transferable by the first
user.
Pierce's obligation under this warranty is limited to repairing or replacing without
charge, as Pierce may elect, the stainless steel piping or components which Pierce
determines to have failed due to defective design, workmanship, or perforation caused
by corrosion.
A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal.
MAIN PUMP INLETS
A 6.00" pump manifold inlet will be provided on the passenger's side of the vehicle only.
The suction inlet will include a removable die cast zinc screen that is designed to provide
cathodic protection for the pump, thus reducing corrosion in the pump.
The main pump inlets will have National Standard Threads with a long handle chrome cap.
The cap will be the Pierce VLH, which incorporates a Pierce exclusive thread design to
automatically relieve stored pressure in the line when disconnected.
VALVES
All ball valves will be Akron Brass. The Akron valves will be the 8000 series heavy -duty
style with a stainless steel ball and a simple two -seat design. No lubrication or regular
maintenance is required on the valve.
Valves will have a ten (10) year warranty.
INLET (Left side)
On the left side pump panel will be one (1) 2.50" auxiliary suction, terminating in 2.50"
National Standard Hose Thread. The auxiliary suction will be provided with a strainer,
chrome swivel and plug.
INLET (Right side)
On the right side pump panel will be one (1) 2.50" auxiliary suction, terminating in 2.50"
National Standard Hose Thread. The auxiliary suction will be provided with a strainer,
chrome swivel and plug.
Inlet valve location will be outside the pump panel.
ANODE, INLET
A pair of sacrificial zinc anodes will be provided in the water pump inlets to protect the pump
Page 67 of 96
from corrosion
INLET CONTROL
Control for the side auxiliary inlet(s) will be located at the inlet valve.
INLET (Front)
A 4.00" Inlet front inlet with die cast zinc screens will be provided using 5.00" welded black
iron pipe and a 5.00" butterfly valve. Only radiused elbows will be used in the piping, no
mitered joints.
Drains are furnished in all the low points of piping and have 3/4" ball valve with a handwheel
control.
A bleeder valve will be located at the threaded connection.
The front suction will be located on the passenger side of the bumper extension
CONTROL, FRONT INLET
The front suction will be gated with an electric operated control located at the pump
operators panel. The controller will be an Akron Navigator Model 9313, which will allow the
valve to be gated for ease of operation. The controller will have individual red, yellow and
green lights to show the valve position.
A manual override will be provided on the valve and located behind a stainless steel access
door, located on the passenger side pump panel.
A manual override switch will be provided next to the stainless steel access door. The
switch will cut off power to the valve, making turning the manual override on the valve much
easier.
Manual override will be in an easily accessible location.
INTAKE RELIEF VALVE
An intake relief valve, preset at 125 psig, will be installed on the inlet side of the
valve.
Relief valve will have a working range of 75 psig to 250 psig.
Outlet will terminate below the framerails.
The front inlet will have National Standard hose threads with a long handle chrome plated
cap.
The cap will be the Pierce VLH, which incorporates a Pierce exlusive thread design to
automatically relieve stored pressure in the line when disconnected.
The front suction will have a 4.00" swivel with National Standard hose threads and a long
Page 68 of 96
handle chromed plated cap.
The swivel will have a smooth surface chrome finish
INLET BLEEDER VALVE
A .75" bleeder valve will be provided for each side gated inlet. The valves will be located
behind the panel with a swing style handle control extended to the outside of the panel. The
handles will be chrome plated and provide a visual indication of valve position. The swing
handle will provide an ergonomic position for operating the valve without twisting the wrist
and provides excellent leverage. The water discharged by the bleeders will be routed below
the chassis frame rails.
TANK TO PUMP
The booster tank will be connected to the intake side of the pump with heavy duty piping
and a quarter turn 3.00" full flow line valve with the control remotely located at the operator's
panel. Tank to pump line will run straight (no elbows) from the pump into the front face of
the water tank and angle down into the tank sump. A rubber coupling will be included in this
line to prevent damage from vibration or chassis flexing.
A check valve will be provided in the tank to pump supply line to prevent the possibility of
"back filling" the water tank.
TANK REFILL
A 1.50" combination tank refill and pump re- circulation line will be provided, using a quarter -
turn full flow ball valve controlled from the pump operator's panel.
DISCHARGE OUTLETS (Left Sidel
There will be two (2) discharge outlets with a 2.50" valve on the left side of the apparatus,
terminating with a male 2.50" National Standard hose thread adapter.
DISCHARGE OUTLETS (Right Side)
There will be two (2) discharge outlets with a 2.50" valve on the right side of the apparatus,
terminating with a male 2.50" National Standard hose thread adapter.
DISCHARGE CAPS
Chrome plated, rocker lug, caps with chains will be furnished for all side discharge outlets.
The caps will be the Pierce VLH, which incorporates a Pierce exclusive thread design to
automatically relieve stored pressure in the line when disconnected.
OUTLET BLEEDERS
A .75" bleeder valve will be provided for each outlet 1.50" or larger. Automatic drain valves
are acceptable with some outlets if deemed appropriate with the application.
The valves will be located behind the panel with a swing style handle control extended to the
outside of the side pump panel. The handles will be chrome plated and provide a visual
indication of valve position. The swing handle will provide an ergonomic position for
Page 69 of 96
operating the valve without twisting the wrist and provides excellent leverage. Bleeders will
be located at the bottom of the pump panel. They will be properly labeled identifying the
discharge they are plumbed in to. The water discharged by the bleeders will be routed
below the chassis frame rails.
ELBOWS. LEFT SIDE OUTLETS
The 2.50" discharge outlets, located on the left side pump panel, will be furnished with a
2.50 "(F) National Standard hose thread x 2.50 "(M) National Standard hose thread, chrome
plated, 45 degree elbow.
The elbow will be the Pierce VLH, which incorporates a Pierce exclusive thread design to
automatically relieve stored pressure in the line when disconnected.
ELBOWS. RIGHT SIDE OUTLETS
The 2.50" discharge outlets, located on the right side pump panel, will be furnished with a
2.50 "(F) National Standard hose thread x 2.50 "(M) National Standard hose thread, chrome
plated, 45 degree elbow.
The elbow will be the Pierce VLH, which incorporates a Pierce exclusive thread design to
automatically relieve stored pressure in the line when disconnected.
There will be two (2) adapters with 2.50" FNST x 1.50" MNST threads and a 1.50" chrome
plated cap installed on one each side.
DISCHARGE DRAIN VALVES
Provide a manual style drain in all low plumbing points that would normally have automatic
drains.
DISCHARGE OUTLET CONTROLS
The discharge outlets will incorporate a quarter -turn ball valve with the control located at the
pump operator's panel. The valve operating mechanism will indicate the position of the
valve.
If a handwheel control valve is used, the control will be a minimum of a 3.9" diameter
chrome plated handwheel with a dial position indicator built in to the center of the
handwheel.
DELUGE RISER
A 3.00" deluge riser will be installed above the pump in such a manner that a monitor can be
mounted and used effectively. Piping will be rigidly braced and installed securely so no
movement develops when the line is charged. The riser will be gated and controlled at the
pump operator's panel with a handwheel control.
TELESCOPIC PIPING
The deluge riser piping will include a 18.00" Task Force Model XG18 Extend -A -Gun
extension.
Page 70 of 96
This extension will be telescopic to allow the deluge gun to be raised 18.00" increasing the
range of operation.
A position sensor will be provided on the telescopic piping that will activate the "do not move
vehicle" light inside the cab when the monitor is in the raised position.
MONITOR
An Akron Model 3423 monitor will be properly installed on the deluge riser. This monitor will
include both a fixed mounting base and a portable base with two (2) clappered 2.5" inlets.
The monitor will be unpainted.
NOZZLE. DELUGE
Akron model #2499 Quad Stacked pyrolite deluge tips will be provided.
The tip sizes will be 1.375 ", 1.50 ", 1.75 ", and 2.00 ".
This will include an Akron 3488 pyrolite stream shaper.
The deluge riser will have male National Pipe Threads for mounting the monitor.
CROSSLAY HOSE BEDS, 1.50"
Two (2) crosslays with 1.50" outlets will be provided. Each bed to be capable of carrying
250' of 1.75" single stack and will be plumbed with 2.00" i.d. pipe and gated with a 2.00"
quarter turn ball valve.
Outlets to be equipped with a 1.50" National Standard hose thread 90 degree swivel located
in the hose bed so that hose may be removed from either side of apparatus.
The crosslay controls will be at the pump operator's panel.
The center crosslay dividers will be fabricated of .25" aluminum and will provide adjustment
from side to side. The divider will be unpainted with a brushed finish. The remainder of the
crosslay bed will be painted job color.
Vertical scuffplates, constructed of stainless steel, will be provided at the front and rear ends
of the bed on each side of vehicle.
Crosslay bed flooring will consist of removable perforated brushed aluminum.
CROSSLAY HOSE BEDS, 2.50"
One (1) crosslay with 2.50" outlets will be provided. Each bed will be capable of
carrying 200' of 2.5" single stack and will be plumbed with 2.50" i.d. pipe and gated
with a 2.50" quarter turn ball valve.
The outlets will be equipped with a 2.50" National Standard hose thread 90 degree
swivel located in the hose bed so that hose may be removed from either side of
Page 71 of 96
apparatus.
The crosslay controls will be at the pump operator's panel
The center crosslay dividers will be fabricated of .25" aluminum and will provide
adjustment from side to side. The divider will be unpainted with a brushed finish. The
remainder of the crosslay bed will be painted job color.
Stainless steel vertical scuffplates will be provided at hose bed ends (each side of
vehicle). Bottom of hose bed ends (each side) will also be equipped with a stainless
steel scuff plate.
Crosslay bed flooring will consist of removable perforated brushed aluminum.
CROSSLAY COVER
A hinged aluminum treadplate cover will be installed over the crosslay hose beds. It will
include a latch at each end of the cover to hold it securely in place, a chrome grab handle at
each end for opening and closing the cover and a foam rubber gasket where the cover
comes into contact to a painted surface.
CROSSLAY 8.00" LOWER THAN STANDARD
The crosslays will be lowered 8.00" from standard.
CROSSLAY COVER
A black vinyl cover with Velcro fasteners along each side and bottom will be provided over
the ends of the crosslay hose beds. A bar will be provided on the bottom to accommodate a
Velcro loop to positively hold the base.
FOAM CONCENTRATE PROPORTIONING SYSTEM
A Hypro FoamPro®, Model 2001, foam system will be provided as the means for the
proportioning of foam concentrate into the water stream. The FoamPro is an electronic, fully
automatic, variable speed, direct injection, discharge side foam proportioning system.
This system will be capable of handling Class "A" foam concentrates, as well as most
Class 'B" foam concentrates.
The foam system will be plumbed to three (3) discharges. The discharges capable of
dispensing foam will be three crosslays.
The foam proportioning system operation will be based on a direct measurement of water
flows, and remain consistent within the specified flow and pressure. The system will be
equipped with a digital electronic control display on the pump panel. Incorporated within the
control display will be a microprocessor, which receives input from the system flow meter
while also monitoring the foam concentrate pump output. The microprocessor will compare
the values of the water flow versus the foam flow, to ensure the proportion rate is accurate.
One (1) paddle wheel will be installed to monitor all foam discharges
Pace 72 of 96
Push button control for the form proportioning rate will allow a ratio from 0.1% to 3.0% in
0.1% increments.
The rated capacity of this system will be 85 gpm at 3.0% and 500 gpm at 0.5 %.
A 2.5 gpm @150 psi, positive displacement foam pump will be powered by a 1/2 hp 12 vdc
electric motor.
One (1) check valve will be installed in the plumbing to prevent foam from contaminating the
water pump. The check valve will be approved by the foam system manufacturer.
FOAM TANK
The foam tank will be an integral portion of the polypropylene water tank. The cell will have
a capacity of 20 gallons of foam with the intended use of Class "A" foam. The brand of foam
stored in this tank will be TBD. The foam cell will not reduce the capacity of the water tank.
The foam cell will have a screen in the fill dome and a breather in the lid.
FOAM TANK DRAIN
The foam tank drain will be a 1.00" drain valve located inside the pump compartment
accessible through a door on the passenger's side pump panel.
PUMP COMPARTMENT
The pump compartment will be separate from the hose body and compartments so that
each may flex independently of the other. It will be a fabricated assembly of steel tubing,
angles and channels which supports both the fire pump and the side running boards.
The pump compartment will be mounted on the chassis frame rails with rubber biscuits in a
four point pattern to allow for chassis frame twist.
Pump compartment, pump, plumbing and gauge panels will be removable from the chassis
in a single assembly.
PUMP CONTROL PANELS (Side Control)
All pump controls and gauges will be located at the left (driver's) side of the apparatus and
properly marked.
The pump panel on the right (passenger's) side is removable with lift and turn type
fasteners. The left (driver's) side is fastened with screws.
The control panels will be 45.00" wide.
The gauge and control panels will be two (2) separate panels for ease of maintenance
Polished stainless steel trim collars will be installed around all inlets and outlets.
All push /pull valve controls will have 1/4 turn locking control rods with polished chrome
Pace 73 of 96
plated zinc tee handles. Guides for the push /pull control rods will be chrome plated zinc
castings securely mounted to the pump panel. Push /pull valve controls will be capable of
locking in any position. The control rods will pull straight out of the panel and will be
equipped with universal joints to eliminate binding.
The identification tag for each valve control will be recessed in the face of the tee handle.
All discharge outlets will have color coded identification tags, with each discharge having its
own unique color. Color coding will include the labeling of the outlet and the drain for each
corresponding discharge.
All line pressure gauges will be mounted in individual chrome plated castings with the
identification tag recessed in the casting below the gauge. All remaining identification tags
will be mounted on the pump panel in chrome plated bezels. Mounting of the castings and
identification bezels will be done with a threaded peg cast on the back side of the bezel or
screws.
PUMP PANEL CONFIGURATION
The pump panel configuration will be neat and orderly.
PUMP AND GAUGE PANEL
The pump and gauge panels will be constructed of stainless steel with a brushed finish. A
polished aluminum trim molding will be provided on both sides of the pump panel.
PUMP PANEL GAUGES AND CONTROLS
The following will be provided on the pump and gauge panels in a neat and orderly fashion:
- Engine Oil Pressure Gauge: With visual and audible warning
- Engine Water Temperature Gauge: With visual and audible warning
- Tachometer: Electric
- Master Pump Drain Control
- Voltmeter
- Engine Throttle
- Check Transmission Warning Indicator Light
- Stop Engine Warning Indicator Light
- Check Engine Warning Indicator Light.
- Pump Hourmeter
- Fuel Gauge
Page 74 of 96
AIR HORN SWITCH
An air hom control switch will be provided at the pump operator's control panel. This switch
will be red and properly labeled and put within easy reach of the operator in the electrical
switch panel.
RADIO SPEAKER
A University model radio speaker will be provided and mounted at the pump panel. Wiring
will not be necessary.
GAUGES. VACUUM and PRESSURE
The pump vacuum and pressure gauges will be silicone filled and manufactured by Class 1,
Inc.
The gauges will be a minimum of 4.50" in diameter and will have white faces with black
lettering, with a pressure range of 30.00 " -0 -600#.
The pump pressure and vacuum gauges will be installed adjacent to each other at the pump
operator's control panel.
Test port connections will be provided at the pump operator's panel. One will be connected
to the intake side of the pump, and the other to the discharge manifold of the pump. They
will have 0.25 in. standard pipe thread connections and polished stainless steel plugs. They
will be marked with a label.
PRESSURE GAUGES
The individual 'line" pressure gauges for the discharges will be interiube filled and
manufactured by Class 1.
The gauges will be a minimum of 3.50" in diameter and will have white faces with black
lettering.
Gauges will be compound type with a vacuum /pressure range of 30.00 " -0 -600#.
The individual pressure gauge will be installed as close to the outlet control as practical.
WATER LEVEL GAUGE
An electric water level gauge will be provided on the operator's panel that registers water
level by means of five (5) brightly colored incandescent lights. The water level indicators will
be as follows:
- Full = Green
- 3/4 = Yellow
- 1/2 = Yellow
- 1/4 = Yellow
- Refill = Red
To further alert the pump operator, the refill light will start flashing when the water level drops
Page 75 of 96
below the 1/4 mark
The level measurement will be based on the sensing of the electrical conductivity of the
water in the tank.
The display will be constructed of a solid plastic material to reduce vibrations that can cause
broken wires and loose electronic components. The encapsulated design will provide
complete protection from water and environmental elements.
The gauge light bulbs will be rated for 15,000 hours. The bulbs will be easily replaced by
unscrewing the colored lens cover.
The cover plate panel bezel will be of a chrome plated die cast design. The overlay graphics
will be on the inside surface of the composite overlay to provide protection from wear. The
composite overlay will be scratch resistant and immune to cleaning solvents and UV light
weathering.
The water level probe will be constructed of chemical resistant, PVC plastic with a 3.00"
diameter anodized flange. The internal wire connectors and electronics will be fully
encapsulated to protect against water, dirt, and vibration. The probe system will not contain
moving parts or mechanical switching.
WATER LEVEL GAUGE, ADDITIONAL
An Ernst sight tube water level indicator will be mounted on the driver side pump panel.
FOAM LEVEL GAUGE
An electronic foam level gauge will be provided on the operator's panel that registers foam
level by means of five colored LED lights. The lights will be durable, ultra - bright five LED
design viewable through 180 degrees. The foam level indicators will be as follows:
- 100% = Green
- 75% = Yellow
- 50% = Yellow
- 25% = Yellow
- Refill = Red
The light will flash when the level drops below the given level indicator to provide an eighth
of a tank indication. To further alert the pump operator, the lights will flash sequentially
when the foam tank is empty.
The level measurement will be based on the sensing of head pressure of the fluid in the
tank.
The display will be constructed of a solid plastic material with a chrome plated die cast bezel
to reduce vibrations that can cause broken wires and loose electronic components. The
encapsulated design will provide complete protection from foam and environmental
elements. An industrial pressure transducer will be mounted to the outside of the tank. The
Page 76 of 96
display will be able to be calibrated in the field and will measure head pressure to accurately
show the tank level.
LIGHT SHIELD
Illumination will be provided by On Scene Solutions, model Night Stick, LED lights for
controls, switches, essential instructions, gauges, and instruments necessary for the
operation of the apparatus and the equipment provided on it. External illumination will be a
minimum of five (5) foot - candles on the face of the device. Internal illumination will be a
minimum of four (4) footlamberts.
Lights will be installed under a stainless steel shield. A light will come on above the pump
panel light switch when the parking brake is set. This is to afford the operator some
illumination when first approaching the control panel. A pump engaged indicator will come
on at the operators panel when the pump is shifted into gear from inside the cab. The
remaining lights to be actuated from a switch located on the pump panel.
ADDITIONAL LIGHT SHIELD
An additional On Scene Solutions, model Night Stick, LED light shield will be provided
above passengers side pump panel. The pump panel will be illuminated by Night Slick,
LED lights installed under the light shield.
The lights will be operated from a switch on the pump panel.
ELECTRICAL HARNESSING INSTALLATION
All 12 -volt wiring and harnessing installed by the apparatus manufacturer will conform to
specification PM -QA W -101: Pierce manufacturing Wiring Harness Specification.
To ensure rugged dependability, all wiring harnesses installed by the apparatus
manufacturer will conform to the following specifications:
SAE J1128 - Low tension primary cable
SAE J1292 - Automobile, truck, truck - tractor, trailer and motor coach wiring
SAE J163 - Low tension wiring and cable terminals and splice clips
SAE J2202 - Heavy duty wiring systems for on- highway trucks
NFPA 1901 - Standard for automotive fire apparatus
FMVSS 302 - Flammability of interior materials for passenger cars, multipurpose passenger
vehicles, trucks and buses
SAE J1939 - Serial communications protocol
SAE J2030 - Heavy -duty electrical connector performance standard
SAE J2223 - Connections for on board vehicle electrical wiring harnesses
NEC - National Electrical Code
SAE J561 - Electrical terminals - Eyelet and spade type
SAE J928 - Electrical terminals - Pin and receptacle type A
Wiring will be run in loom or conduit where exposed, and have grommets or other edge
protection where wires pass through metal. Wiring will be color, function and number coded.
Wire colors will be integral to each wire insulator and run the entire length of each wire.
Page 77 of 96
Harnessing containing multiple wires and uses a single wire color for all wires will not be
allowed. Function and number codes will be continuously imprinted on all wiring harness
conductors at 2.00" intervals. All wiring installed between the cab and into doors will be
protected by an expandable rubber boot to protect the wiring. Exterior exposed wire
connectors will be positive locking, and environmentally sealed to withstand elements such
as temperature extremes, moisture and automotive fluids. Electrical wiring and equipment
will be installed utilizing the following guidelines:
(1) All wire ends not placed into connectors will be sealed with a heat shrink end cap.
Wires without a terminating connector or sealed end cap will not be allowed.
(2) All holes made in the roof will be caulked with silicon (no exception). Large fender
washers, liberally caulked, will be used when fastening equipment to the underside of
the cab roof.
(3) Any electrical component that is installed in an exposed area will be mounted in a
manner that will not allow moisture to accumulate in it. Exposed area will be defined as
any location outside of the cab or body.
(4) For low cost of ownership, electrical components designed to be removed for
maintenance will be quickly accessible. For ease of use, a coil of wire will be provided
behind the appliance to allow them to be pulled away from the mounting area for
inspection and service work.
(5) Corrosion preventative compound will be applied to non - waterproof electrical
connectors located outside of the cab or body. All non - waterproof connections will
require this compound in the plug to prevent corrosion and for easy separation of the
plug.
(6) Any lights containing non - waterproof sockets in a weather - exposed area will have
corrosion preventative compound added to the socket terminal area.
(7) All electrical terminals in exposed areas will have DOW 1890 protective Coating applied
completely over the metal portion of the terminal.
(8) Rubber coated metal clamps will be used to support wire harnessing and battery cables
routed along the chassis frame rails.
(9) Heat shields will be used to protect harnessing in areas where high temperatures exist
Harnessing passing near the engine exhaust will be protected by a heat shield.
(10)AII braided wire harnesses will have a permanent label attached for easy identification
of the harness part number and fabrication date.
(11) All standard wiring entering or exiting the cab will be routed through sealed bulkhead
connectors to protect against water intrusion into the cab.
BATTERY CABLE INSTALLATION
All 12 -volt battery cables and battery cable harnessing installed by the apparatus
manufacturer will conform to the following requirements:
SAE J1127 - Battery Cable
SAE J561 - Electrical terminals, eyelets and spade type
SAE J562 - Nonmetallic loom
SAE J836A - Automotive metallurgical joining
SAE J1292 - Automotive truck, truck - tractor, trailer and motor coach wiring
NFPA 1901 - Standard for automotive fire apparatus
Pagc78 of96
Battery cables and battery cable harnessing will be installed utilizing the following guidelines
(1) All battery cables and battery harnesses will have a permanent label attached for easy
identification of the harness part number and fabrication date.
(2) Splices will not be allowed on battery cables or battery cable harnesses.
(3) For ease of identification and simplified use, battery cables will be color coded. All
positive battery cables will be red in color or wrapped in red loom the entire length of the
cable. All negative battery cables will be black in color.
(4) For ease of identification, all positive battery cable isolated studs throughout the cab and
chassis will be red in color.
(5) For increased reliability and reduced maintenance, all electrical buss bars located on the
exterior of the apparatus will be coated to prevent corrosion.
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT INSTALLATION
All lighting used on the apparatus will be, at a minimum, a two (2) wire light grounded
through a wired connection to the battery system. Lights using an apparatus metal structure
for grounding will not be allowed.
An operational test will be conducted to ensure that any equipment that is permanently
attached to the electrical system is properly connected and in working order. The results of
the tests will be recorded and provided to the purchaser at time of delivery.
STEP LIGHTS
Four (4) Ri -Tar, Model M27HW2 Super LED, step lights will be provided. One (1) step light
will be provided on each side, on the front compartment face and two (2) step lights at the
rear to illuminate the tailboard.
These step lights will be actuated with the pump panel light switch.
All other steps on the apparatus will be illuminated per the current edition of NFPA 1901.
REAR FMVSS LIGHTING
The rear stop /tail and directional lighting will consist of the following:
Two (2) Whelen model 60ROOBRR red LED stop/tail lights.
Two (2) Whelen, Model 60AOOTAR, amber LED populated arrow turn light.
These lights will be installed at the rear of the truck in a polished housing.
Four (4) red reflectors will be provided.
A Weldon, Model 23882- 2600 -00, license plate bracket will be mounted on the driver's side
above the warning lights. A Weldon, Model 9186- 23882 -30, step lamp will illuminate the
license plate.
Two (2) Whelen, Model: 6000OVCR, LED backup lights will be provided
Page 79 ot'96
REAR ID /MARKER DOT LIGHTING
The three (3) identification lights located at the rear will be installed per the following:
As close as practical to the vertical Centerline.
Centers spaced not less than six (6) inches or more than twelve (12) inches
apart.
Red in color.
All at the same height.
One (1) Truck Lite model 1505OR LED ID bar
The outside clearance lights located at the rear will be installed per the following:
To indicate the overall width of the vehicle.
At least one (1) each side of the vertical Centerline.
All at the same height.
As near the top as practical.
To be visible from the rear and the side.
Four (4) Ri -Tar red Model M27 LED lights
Per FMVSS 108 and CMVSS 108 requirements.
LIGHTING BEZEL
Two (2) Whelen, model CAST4V, four (4) light aluminum housings will be provided for the
rear stop /tail, directional, scene lights and warning.
CORNERING /SCENE LIGHTS
There will be one (1) pair of Whelen 600 halogen lights with flanges and 15 degree forward
lens provided on the apparatus.
The lights will be provided one each side of bumper extension.
The halogen lights will be wired so they activate and cancel with the directional lights, and
include a delay, cancel with the 4 -way flashers and activate by a switch in the cab.
These lights will also activate with the other side scene light on the apparatus.
MAP LIGHT
One (1) map light with goose neck with a switch control on base of light will be installed
passenger's side adjacent to the "A" post. The light will be a Sunnex, Model 742 with a
20.00" long flexible neck that exits the top of the chassis mount.
LIGHT, INTERMEDIATE
There will be one (1) pair, of Truck -Lite, Model: 60115Y, amber, LED, turn signal, marker
lights furnished, one (1) each side, horizontally in the rear fender panel.
A stainless steel trim will be included with this installation.
"DO NOT MOVE APPARATUS" INDICATOR
A flashing red indicator light, located in the driving compartment, will be illuminated
Page 80 of 96
automatically per the current NFPA requirements. The light will be labeled "Do Not Move
Apparatus If Light Is On ".
The same circuit that activates the Do Not Move Apparatus indicator will activate a steady
tone alarm when the parking brake is released.
DO NOT MOVE TRUCK MESSAGES
Messages will be displayed on the gauge panel LCD located forward of the steering wheel
directly in front of the driver whenever the Do Not Move Truck light is active. The messages
will designate the item or items not in the stowed for vehicle travel position (parking brake
disengaged).
The following messages will be displayed (where applicable)
Do Not Move Truck
DS Cab Door Open (Driver Side Cab Door Open)
PS Cab Door Open (Passenger's Side Cab Door Open)
DS Crew Cab Door Open (Driver Side Crew Cab Door Open)
PS Crew Cab Door Open (Passenger's Side Crew Cab Door Open)
DS Body Door Open (Driver Side Body Door Open)
PS Body Door Open (Passenger's Side Body Door Open)
Rear Body Door Open.
DS Ladder Rack Down (Driver Side Ladder Rack Down)
PS Ladder Rack Down (Passenger Side Ladder Rack Down)
Deck Gun Not Stowed
Any other device that is opened, extended, or deployed that creates a hazard or is likely to
cause major damage to the apparatus if the apparatus is moved will be displayed as a
caution message after the parking brake is disengaged.
COMPARTMENT LIGHTING
There will be seven (7) compartments with On Scene Solutions LED compartment light
strips. The strips will be centered vertically along each side of the door framing. The
compartments with these strip lights will be located all compartments.
Opening the compartment door will automatically turn the compartment lighting on.
Page 8 1 of 96
PUMP COMPARTMENT LIGHT
A pump compartment light will be provided inside the right side pump enclosure and
accessible through a door on the pump panel.
A .125' weep hole will be provided in each light lens, preventing moisture retention.
PERIMETER SCENE LIGHTS, CAB
There will be a Truck -Lite, model 60, grommet mount weatherproof light provided for
each cab door. Lighting will be designed to provide illumination on areas under the
driver, officer, and crew cab riding area exits, which will be activated automatically
when the exit doors are opened and by the same means as the body perimeter lights.
The lighting will be capable of providing illumination at a minimum level of two (2) foot -
candles on ground areas within 30.00" of the edge of the apparatus in areas which
personnel climb in or out of the apparatus or descend from the apparatus to the ground
level.
PERIMETER SCENE LIGHTS, BODY
There will be a total of four (4) Truck -Lite, model 60, grommet mount, weatherproof lights
provided on the apparatus. Two (2) lights will be provided under the rear step area and two
(2) lights will be provided under the pump panel running boards. The lights will be spaced
one (1) each side of apparatus and have a clear lens. The perimeter scene lights will be
activated by a parking brake.
The lighting will be capable of providing illumination at a minimum level of two (2) foot -
candles on ground areas within 30.00" of the edge of the apparatus in areas designed for
personnel to climb onto the apparatus or descend from the apparatus to the ground level.
SIDE SCENE LIGHTS
one (1) pair of Whelen, Model 810CAOZR, 8 -32 degree surface mount halogen scene lights
with chrome trim ring will be provided one each side high between the front and rear doors.
The lights will be controlled by:
From the first switch feature, a control at the driver side switch panel and a contol at the
officer side switch panel
From the second switch feature, there is no control of this option
From the third switch feature, there is no control of this option
12 VOLT LIGHTING
two (2) lights, Havis - Shields. Magnafire 3000 Model: 31, 70 watt, 12VDC, floodlights with
switch, will be installed, two on the right side of the pump compartment.
A pull up pole, side mount will be installed for each light head.
These lights will be load managed when the parking brake is set.
These lights will not be connected to the Do Not Move Truck indicator
Page 82 of96
12 VOLT LIGHTING
There will be two (2) lights, Kwik -Raze model 631, 70W, non telescoping, 12V Magnafire
light will be provided mounted on the left high side compartments4.
These lights will be controlled from the following:
From the first switch feature, a control at the driver side switch panel.
From the second switch feature, there is no control of this option.
From the third switch feature, there is no control of this option.
These lights may be load managed when the parking brake is set.
DECK LIGHTS
Two (2) 6.00" Unity AG deck lights with swivel mount will be provided at the rear of the hose
bed, one (1) each side.
One (1) light will be furnished with a 160,000 candle power halogen spot bulb and the other
will be furnished with a 6,000 candle power halogen flood bulb.
CAB SPOTLIGHTS
Two (2) Unity Model 325 spotlights, one (1) each side at front of cab, will be provided. The
spotlights will be furnished with 160,000 candle power halogen bulbs.
HAND HELD LIGHT
There will be four (4) Streamlight LiteBox lights with an orange thermoplastic body provided.
The location will be in the cab.
AIR HORN SYSTEM
Two (2) Grover air horns will be provided and located, in the front bumper, recessed one
each side. The horn system will be piped to the air brake system wet tank utilizing .38"
tubing. A pressure protection valve will be installed in -line to prevent loss of air, in the air
brake system.
AIR HORN CONTROL
The air horn will be actuated by a chrome push button switch located on the officer side of
the engine tunnel and by a foot switch on the drivers side.
Siren head will be located on a swivel bracket mounted on the headliner so that it is
accessible to both the driver and officer. The swivel bracket will be capable of rotating a
minimum of 180 degrees.
SPEAKER
There will be one (1) speaker provided. Each speaker will be a Whelen, Model SA314A,
100 -watt, cast aluminum with natural finish. Each speaker will be pre -wired to the
instrument panel.
The speaker(s) will be recessed in the front bumper on the driver's side
Page 83 of 96
MECHANICAL SIREN. (Auxiliary)
A Federal Q26 siren will be fumished. A siren brake button will be installed on the switch
panel.
The mechanical siren will be recessed in the front bumper on the right side. The siren will
be properly supported using the bumper framework.
SWITCHES. MECHANICAL SIREN
The mechanical siren will be actuated by one (1) foot switch located on the driver's side and
a push button switch on the officer's side of cab.
WARNING LIGHTS
A 72.00" Whelen Freedom model FN' "QLED lightbar will be mounted on the cab roof.
The lightbar will include the following:
Two (2) red flashing forward facing LED modules.
Two (2) clear flashing forward facing LED modules.
Two (2) red flashing front corner LED modules.
One (1) red flashing driver side facing LED module.
One (1) red flashing officer side facing LED module.
One (1) GTT model 795 LED Opticom^" with National standard.
All the lenses will be clear.
Two (2) switches located in the cab on the switch panel will control this lightbar
One (1) switch for the warning lights.
One (1) switch for the traffic light controller.
The clear warning lights and the traffic light controller will be turned off when the parking
brake is set.
WARNING LIGHTS (CAB ROOF SIDES)
Two (2) 24" Whelen, Model: Freedom Mini LED lightbars will be mounted on the roof, one
(1) on each side, over the crew cab doors.
Each lightbar will include the following:
Two (2) red flashing corner LED modules.
Two (2) red flashing LED light.
These lightbars will be controlled by the roof light switch
Each lightbar will be furnished with a clear lens.
HEADLIGHT FLASHER
The high beam headlights will flash alternately between the left and right side, with a control
switch located on the cab instrument panel.
Page 84 of 96
The flashing will automatically cancel when the headlight switch is activated or when the
parking brake is set.
SIDE ZONE LOWER LIGHTING
Six (6) Whelen model 60'02F "R flashing "Super" LED lights will be located at the following
positions:
Two (2) lights, one (1) each side on the front cab corner - red Super LED /red lens
each side.
Two (2) lights, behind the crew cab doors - red Super LED /rd lens each side.
Two (2) lights, N/A - red Super LED /red lens each side.
The lights will be controlled by a lighted switch on the cab instrument panel.
These lights will be installed N /A.
SIDE WARNING LIGHTS
one (1) pair of Whelen, Model 500FPLF•R, LED lights will be provided. The lights will be
located above the front wheels. The color of the lights will be red. These lights will be
provided in addition to the NFPA minimum.
These lights will be activated with the Side Zone Lower lights.
REAR ZONE LOWER LIGHTING
Two (2) Whelen model 60'02F'R, LED, red Super LED /red lens lights will be located at the
rear of the apparatus required to meet or exceed the lower level optical warning and optical
power requirements of NFPA.
Each light will be mounted in a housing.
WARNING LIGHTS (Rear of Truck)
Two (2) Whelen, Model: RB6T'P, warning lights will be provided at the rear of the truck,
located one (1) on each side.
One (1) switch located in the cab on the switch panel will control these lights.
The color of the lights will be driver side dome amber and passenger side dome red.
The rear warning lights will be mounted on stainless steel brackets with all wiring totally
enclosed. These brackets will also support the clearance /marker lights.
TRAFFIC DIRECTING LIGHT
There will be one (1) Whelen model TAL85 46.81" long x 2.84" high x 2.24" deep,
amber LED traffic directing light installed at the rear of the apparatus.
The Whelen model TACTLDI control head will be included with this installation.
The auxillary warning mode will be activated with the control head only.
Yage85 of96
This traffic directing light will be surface mounted over the rear door, at the rear of the
apparatus as high as practical.
The traffic directing light control head will be located within a heavy duty swivel
bracket centered between the driver and passenger.
This swivel bracket will enable the driver access as well as the passenger.
110 VOLT INTERIOR RECEPTACLE
Receptacle will be a NEMA 5 -15, 120 volt, 15 amp, three (3) wire duplex household type
connected to the shoreline.
There will be one (1) receptacle provided.
in the EMS cab compartment.
KUSSMAUL AUTO EJECT FOR SHORELINE
one (1) shoreline receptacle will be provided to operate the dedicated 120 -volt circuits on
the truck without the use of the generator.
The shoreline receptacle (s) will be provided with a NEMA 5 -20, 120 volt, 20 amp, straight
blade Kussmaul Super auto eject plug with a yellow weatherproof cover. The cover is
spring loaded to close, preventing water from entering when the shoreline is not connected.
The unit is completely sealed to prevent road dirt contamination.
A solenoid wired to the vehicle's starter is energized when the engine is started. This
instantaneously drives the plug from the receptacle.
An internal switch arrangement will be provided to disconnect the load prior to ejection to
eliminate arcing of the connector contacts.
The shoreline will be connected to battery charger.
A mating connector body will also be supplied with the loose equipment.
The shoreline receptacle will be located in the driver side lower step well of cab.
TRAINING
There will be two (2) days of training provided at the Fire Department for operation, use and
maintenance of the apparatus.
There will be one (1) day of training provided for service technicians at the Fire Department
for maintenance, trouble shooting and repair of the apparatus.
- 36" Hooligan tool
Page 86 of 96
51" Council Crowbar
Firehooks 24" bolt cutters BC -24
48" Nupla Scoop Shovel steel
48" Nupla Round Point shovel
One Council 81b. Fiberglas sledge hammer
One 20'x 4" Snap Tite TPX 400 PSI yellow soft suction hose
Two Red Head 146 -2 spanner and hydrant wrench sets.
Pike poles, ladders, handlights, and wheels chocs will be mounted by Pierce
LOOSE EQUIPMENT
The following equipment will be fumished with the completed unit:
- One (1) bag of chrome, stainless steel, or cadmium plated screws, nuts, bolts and
washers, as used in the construction of the unit.
NFPA REQUIRED LOOSE EQUIPMENT, PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT
The following loose equipment as outlined in NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, section 5.8.2
and 5.8.3 will be provided by the fire department. All loose equipment will be installed
on the apparatus before placed in emergency service, unless the fire department
waives NFPA section 4.21.
- 800 ft (60 m) of 21/2' (65 mm) or larger fire hose.
- 400 ft (120 m) of 1112" (38 mm), 1'/." (45 mm), or 2" (52 mm) fire hose.
- One (1) handline nozzle, 200 gpm (750 Umin) minimum.
- Two (2) handline nozzles, 95 gpm (360 Umin) minimum.
- One (1) playpipe with shutoff and 1" (25 mm), 1 1/8" (29 mm), and 1W (32 mm) tips.
- One (1) SCBA complying with NFPA 1981, Standard on Open- Circuit Self- Contained
Breathing Apparatus for Fire and Emergency Services, for each assigned seating
position, but not fewer than four (4), mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus or
stored in containers supplied by the SCBA manufacturer.
- One (1) spare SCBA cylinder for each SCBA carried, each mounted in a bracket
fastened to the apparatus or stored in a specialty designed storage space(s).
- One (1) first aid kit.
- Four (4) combination spanner wrenches mounted in bracket(s) fastened to the
apparatus.
- Two (2) hydrant wrenches mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus.
Page 87 of 96
- Four (4) ladder belts meeting the requirements of NFPA 1983, Standard on Fire
Service Life Safety Rope and System Components (if equipped with an aerial device).
- One (1) double female 2'/2" (65 mm) adapter with National Hose threads, mounted in
a bracket fastened to the apparatus.
- One (1) double male 2Y2' (65 mm) adapter with National Hose threads, mounted in a
bracket fastened to the apparatus.
- One (1) rubber mallet, for use on suction hose connections, mounted in a bracket
fastened to the apparatus.
- Two (2) salvage covers each a minimum size of 12 ft X 14 ft (3.7 m X 4.3 m).
- One (1) traffic vest for each seating position, each vest to comply with ANSUISEA
207,
Standard for High Visibility Public Safety Vests, and have a five -point breakaway
feature that includes two at the shoulders, two at the sides, and one at the front.
- Five (5) fluorescent orange traffic cones not less than 28" (711 mm) in height, each
equipped with a 6" (152 mm) retro - reflective white band no more than 4" (152 mm)
from the top of the cone, and an additional 4" (102 mm) retro - reflective white band 2"
(51 mm) below the 6" (152 mm) band.
- Five (5) illuminated warning devices such as highway flares, unless the five (5)
fluorescent orange traffic cones have illuminating capabilities.
- One automatic external defibrillator (AED).
- If the supply hose carried does not use sexless couplings, an additional double
female adapter and double male adapter, sized to fit the supply hose carried, will be
carried mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus.
- If none of the pump intakes are valved, a hose appliance that is equipped with one or
more gated intakes with female swivel connection(s) compatible with the supply hose
used on one side and a swivel connection with pump intake threads on the other side
will be carried. Any intake connection larger than 3 in. (75 mm) will include a pressure
relief device that meets the requirements of 16.6.6.
- If the apparatus does not have a 21/2" National Hose (NH) intake, an adapter from
2112" NH female to a pump intake will be carried, mounted in a bracket fastened to the
apparatus if not already mounted directly to the intake.
- If the supply hose carried has other than 2'/2" National Hose (NH) threads, adapters will be
carried to allow feeding the supply hose from a 21/2' NH thread male discharge and to allow
the hose to connect to a 2'/" NH female intake, mounted in brackets fastened to the
apparatus if not already mounted directly to the discharge or intake.
Pagc 88 of 96
NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, section 5.7.2 requires a minimum of 20 ft of suction hose or 15 ft
of supply hose.
Hose is not on the apparatus as manufactured. The fire department will provide suction or
supply hose.
- One (1) extinguisher, 10 pound, CO2
DRY CHEMICAL EXTINGUISHER
There will be One (1) extinguisher, 20 pound, dry chemical extinguisher(s) provided.
WATER EXTINGUISHER
There will be One (1) extinguisher, 2.50 gallon pressurized water extinguisher(s).
AXE, FLATHEAD, PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT
NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, Section 5.8.3 requires one (1) flathead axe mounted in a bracket
fastened to the apparatus.
The axe is not on the apparatus as manufactured. The fire department will provide and
mount the axe.
- Two (2) pickhead axes: Fiberglass handles and pick covers
PAINT
The exterior custom cab and body painting
finishing process as follows:
procedure will consist of a seven (7) step
1. Manual Surface Preparation - All exposed metal surfaces on the custom cab and body
will be thoroughly cleaned and prepared for painting. Surfaces that will not be painted
include all chrome plated, polished stainless steel, anodized aluminum and bright aluminum
treadplate. Each imperfection on the exterior metal surface will be removed or filled and
then sanded smooth for a smooth appearance. All seams will be sealed before painting.
2. Chemical Cleaning and Treatment - The metal surfaces will be properly cleaned using a
high pressure and high temperature cleaning system. Surfaces are chemically cleaned to
remove all dirt, oil, grease and metal oxides to ensure the subsequent coatings bond well.
An ultra pure water final rinse will be applied to all metal surfaces at the conclusion of the
metal treatment process.
3. Primer /Surfacer Coats - A two (2) component urethane primer /surfacer will be hand
applied to the chemically treated metal surfaces to provide a strong corrosion protective
base coat and to smooth out the surface.
4. Hand Sanding - The primer /surfacer coat will be lightly sanded to an ultra smooth finish.
Page 89 of 96
5. Sealer Primer Coat - A two (2) component sealer primer coat will be applied over the
sanded primer.
6. Topcoat Paint - Urethane base coat will be applied to opacity for correct color matching.
7. Clearcoat - Two (2) coats of an automotive grade two (2) component urethane will be
applied. Lap style doors will be clear coated to match the body. Roll -up doors will not be
clear coated and the standard roll -up door warranty will apply.
All removable items such as brackets, compartment doors, door hinges, trim, etc. will be
removed and painted separately to insure paint behind all mounted items. Body assemblies
that cannot be finish painted after assembly will be finish painted before assembly.
The cab will be two -tone, with the upper section painted white along with a shield design on
the cab face and lower section of the cab and body painted red.
PAINT - ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT
Contractor will meet or exceed all current State (his) regulations concerning paint
operations. Pollution control will include measures to protect the atmosphere, water and
soil. Controls will include the following conditions:
- Topcoats and primers will be chrome and lead free.
- Metal treatment chemicals will be chrome free. The wastewater generated in the
metal treatment process will be treated on -site to remove any other heavy metals.
- Particulate emission collection from sanding operations will have a 99.99% efficiency
factor.
- Particulate emissions from painting operations will be collected by a dry filter or water
wash process. If the dry filter means is used, it will have an efficiency rating of
98.00 %. Water wash systems will be 99.97% efficient.
- Water from water wash booths will be reused. Solids will be removed mechanically
on a continual basis to keep the water clean.
- Paint wastes are disposed of in an environmentally safe manner. They are used as
fuel in kilns used in the cement manufacturing process - thereby extracting energy from
a waste material.
- Empty metal paint containers will be cleaned, crushed and recycled to recover the
metal.
- Solvents used in cleanup operations will be collected, recycled on -site, or sent off -site
for distillation and returned for reuse. Residue from the distillation operation will be
used as fuel in off -site cement kilns.
Page 90 of 96
Additionally, the finished apparatus will not be manufactured with or contain products that
have ozone depleting substances. Contractor will, upon demand, present evidence that his
manufacturing facility meets the above conditions and that it is in compliance with his State
EPA rules and regulations.
PAINT CHASSIS FRAME ASSEMBLY
The chassis frame assembly will be painted black before the installation of the cab and
body, and before installation of the engine and transmission assembly, air brake lines,
electrical wire harnesses, etc. Components that are included with the chassis frame
assembly will be painted black are frame rails, cross members, axles, suspension, steering
gear, fuel tank, body substructure supports, miscellaneous mounting brackets, etc.
WARRANTY - PAINT AND CORROSION
Limited Warranty
Except as provided below, and provided the vehicle has been placed in service within 60
days after delivery to the original purchaser as established by our original invoice, for a
period of ten (10) years after delivery to the original purchaser, Pierce Manufacturing Inc.
( "Pierce ") warrants to the user that its cab and body are free of blistering, peeling, corrosion,
or any other adhesion defect caused by defective manufacturing methods or paint material
selection for exterior surfaces of the cab and body of the vehicle. This limited warranty will
apply only if the vehicle is properly maintained and used in service which is normal to the
particular vehicle. Normal service means service which does not subject the vehicle to
stresses or impacts greater than normally result from the careful use of the vehicle or
chassis. If the buyer discovers a defect or nonconformity it must notify Pierce in writing
within 30 days after the date of discovery. This limited warranty is not transferable by the
first user, and is applicable to the vehicle in the following percentage costs of warranty
repair, if any:
Topcoat Durability &
Integrity of Coating System:
Corrosion:
Appearance:
Adhesion, Blistering /Bubbling
Dissimilar Metal and
Gloss, Color Retention &
Crevice
Cracking
0 -72 months 100%
0 -36 months 100%
0 -36 months 100%
73 -96 months 50%
37 -84 months 50%
37-48 months 50%
97 -120 months 25%
85 -120 months 25%
49 -72 months 25%
73 -120 months
10%
This limited warranty applies only to cab and body exterior paint. Paint on the vehicle's
undercarriage, cab and body interior is warranted only under the Pierce Basic One Year
Limited Warranty.
In addition to the foregoing, and subject to all of the terms and conditions of this Limited
Warranty, except cost allocations, Pierce warrants its cab and body exterior paint for a
period of ten (10) years against corrosion perforation.
Page 91 ot'96
A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal.
This warranty text is an illustration only. For actual details, refer to the warranty document.
A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal.
PAINT, COMPARTMENT INTERIOR
The compartment interior will be painted with a gray spatter finish for ease of cleaning and
to make it easier to touch up scratches and nicks.
REFLECTIVE BAND
A 6.00" white reflective band will be provided across the front of the vehicle and along the
sides of the body.
The reflective band provided on the cab face will be at the headlight level.
CHEVRON STRIPING, REAR
There will be alternating chevron striping located on the rear- facing vertical surface of
the apparatus. The entire rear surface, excluding the rear compartment door, will be
covered.
The colors will be red and yellow diamond grade.
Each stripe will be 6.00" in width.
This will meet the requirements of NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, which states that 50% of the
rear surface will be covered with chevron striping.
REFLECTIVE STRIPE, CAB DOORS
A 6.00" x 16.00" white reflective stripe will be provided across the interior of each cab door.
The stripe will be located approximately 1.00" up from the bottom, on the door panel.
This stripe will meet the NFPA 1901 requirement.
LETTERING
The lettering will be totally encapsulated between two (2) layers of clear vinyl.
GOLDSTAR@ LAMINATION WARRANTY
Limited Warrantv
Except as provided below, for a period of three (3) years after delivery to the original
purchaser, Pierce Manufacturing Inc. ('Pierce ") warrants to the user that each GoldstarS
lamination sold by it will be free from defects in material and workmanship. This limited
warranty will apply only if the vehicle on which such Goldstar® lamination is affixed or
installed is properly maintained and used in service which is normal to the particular vehicle.
Normal service means service which does not subject the vehicle to stresses or impacts
greater than normally result from a careful use of the vehicle. If the buyer discovers a defect
or nonconformity it must notify Pierce in writing within 30 days after date of discovery. This
Page 92 of 96
limited warranty is not transferable by the first user.
A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal
LETTERING
Forty -one (41) to sixty (60) genuine gold leaf lettering, 3.00" high, outlining and shading will
be provided.
LETTERING
A quantity of ten (10) letters, 9.00" high N/A reflective will be installed on on the cab roof.
UNDERCOATING. CAB & BODY
The underside of the apparatus will be undercoated with an asphalt petroleum based
material, dark in color.
The undercoating material utilized on the apparatus will be formulated to resist corrosion
and deaden unwanted sound or road noise.
Coating texture will appear firm, flexible, and resistant to abrasion. Minimum dry film
thickness will be in the range of 8.00 to 12.00 mils.
The material will be applied to the following areas:
Body and cab wheel well fender liners, on the back side only.
Underside of body and cab sheet metal, and structural components.
Underside and vertical sides of all sheet metal compartmentation, including support
angles.
Structural support members under running boards, rear platforms, battery boxes,
walkways, etc.
Inside surfaces of the pump heat enclosure, (when installed).
Steel components used in construction of commercial or custom chassis cabs.
Page 93 of 96
EXHIBIT B -2
Newport Beach 100' HD TDA 8/31/09
We are pleased to submit a proposal to you for a Pierce@ Tractor -Drawn Aerial Ladder per your request for
quotation. The following paragraphs will describe in detail the apparatus proposed. Loose equipment not
specifically requested will not be provided.
PIERCE MANUFACTURING was incorporated in 1917. Since then we have been building bodies with one
philosophy, 'BUILD 7 HE FINEST ". Our skilled craftsmen take pride in their work, which is reflected, in the
final product. We have been building fire apparatus since the early "forties" giving Pierce Manufacturing over
50 years of experience in the fine apparatus marker Our plant is located in Appleton, Wisconsin with over
757,000 total square feet of floor space situated on approximately 97 acres of land. A $7 million dollar
inventory of parts is available to keep your unit in service long after it has left the factory.
QUALITY AND WORKMANSHIP
Pierce has set the pace for quality and workmanship in the fire apparatus field. Our tradition of building the
highest quality units with craftsmen second to none has been the rule right from the beginning. We currently
have a "Quality Achievement Supplier" program to insure that the vendors and suppliers that we utilize; meet the
high standards that we demand. That is just part of our overall "Quality at the Source' program at Pierce.
Another part of flits program is employing experts in their fields, like a Certified American Wclding Society
Inspector to monitor our weld quality.
DELIVERY
The apparatus will be, delivered under its own power to insure proper Breakin of all components while the
apparatus is still under warranty.
INFORMATION
At time of delivery, complete operation and maintenance manuals covering the apparatus will be provided. A
permanent plate will be mounted in the driver's compartment specifying the quantity and type of fluids required
including enghte oil, engine coolant, transmission, pump transmission lubrication, pump primer and drive axle.
SAFETY VIDEO
At the time of delivery Pierce will also provide one 39- minute, professionally - produced apparatus safety video,
ut DVD format. 'This video will address key safety considerations for personnel to follow when they are
driving, operating, and maintaining the apparatus, including the following: vehicle pre -trip inspection, chassis
operation, aerial operation, and safety during maintenance.
PERFORMANCE: TESTS
A road test will be conducted with the apparatus fully loaded and a continuous run of no less than ten (10)
miles. During that time the apparatus will show no loss of power nor will it overheat. The transmission drive
shall or shafts and the axles will run quietly and be lice of abnormal vibration or noise. The apparams will meet
NFPA 1901 acceleration requirements and NFPA 1901 braking requirements. The apparatus when fidly loaded
will not have less than 25% nor more than 50% on the front axle and not less than 50% nor more than 75% on
the rear axle.
COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE
Certification of insurance coverage will be enclosed.
ISO COMPLIANCE
Pierce Manufacturing operates a Quality Management System under the requirements of ISO 9001. These
standards sponsored by die "International Organization for Standardization (ISO)" specify the quality systems
that are established by the manufacturer for design, manufacture, installation and service. A copy of the
Paec 1 of 92
certificate of compliance Number 32454 is included with this proposal.
SINGLE, SOURCE: MANUFACTURER
Pierce Manufacturing, Inc. provides an integrated approach to the design and manufacture of our products that
delivers superior apparatus and a dedicated support team. From our headquarters, all chassis, cab, body and
aerial systems are engineered, tested and hand assembled to the customer's exact specifications. PierceV
vehicles are also backed by a network of sales and service organizations that are dedicated exclusively to the
fire service who are ready to help you 24 hours a day, 7 days a week with parts, service and training. Pierce's
single source solution adds value by providing a fully engineered product that offers durability, reliability,
maintainability, performance and a high level of quality.
NFPA 2009 STANDARDS
This unit will comply with the NFPA standards effective January 1, 2009, except for fire department directed
exceptions. These exceptions will be set forth in the Statement of Exceptions.
Certification of slip resistance of all stepping, standing and walkutg surfaces will be supplied with delivery of
the apparatus.
A plate that is highly visible to the driver while seated will be provided. This plate will show the overall
height, length, and gross vehicle weight rating.
The manufacturer will have programs in place for training, proficiency testing and performance for any staff
involved with certifications.
An official of the company will designate, in writing, who is qualified to witness and certify test results
NFPA COMPLIANCY
Apparatus proposed by the bidder will meet the applicable requirements of the National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA) as stated in current edition at time of contract execution. Fire department's
specifications that differ from NFPA specifications will be indicated in the proposal as "non- NFPA ".
A third party inspection certificate for the aerial device will be furnished upon delivery of the aerial
device. The certificate will be Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Type I and will indicate that the aerial
device has been inspected on the production line and after final assembly.
The following tests will be conducted:
- Magnetic particle inspection will be conducted on every structural weld to assure the integrity of
the weldments and to detect any flaws or weaknesses. Magnets will be placed on each side of the
weld while iron powder is placed on the weld itself. The powder will detect any crack that may
exist. 'Phis test will conform to ASTM E709 and he performed prior to assembly of the aerial
device.
- With aluminum structural components, visual inspection will be performed on aluminum
surfaces (non - magnetic). A liquid penetrant test will be performed on any suspected defective
area. This test will conform to ASTM F.165 and be performed prior to assembly of the aerial
device.
- Ultrasonic inspection will be used to detect any flaws in pins, bolts and other critical mounting
components.
Page 2 of 92
Functional tests, load tests, stability tests, and visual structural examinations will be performed. 'These
tests will determine any unusual deflection, noise, vibration, or instability characteristics of the unit.
TOTAL VEHICLE ASSESSMENT CERTIFICATION
The apparatus will be third - party, independent, audit - certified through Underwriters Latxtratory (UL) to
the current edition of NFPA 1901 standards. T'hc certification includes: all design, production,
operational and performance testing of the apparatus.
GENF,RATOR TEST
If doe unit has a generator, the generator will be tested, approved, and certified by Underwriters
Laboratories at the manufacturer's expense. The test results will be provided to the Fire Department at
the time of delivery.
BREATHING AIR TEST
If the unit has breathing air, Underwriters Laboratories will draw an air sample from the air system and certify
that the air quality meets the requirements of NFPA 1989, .Standard on Brearhing Air Qualiry for Fire and
Etnergenry .Services Respiratory Protection.
DELIVERY
Said apparatus and equipment will be built and shipped in accordance with the specifications hereto. Delays
due to strikes, war or international conflict, failures to obtain chassis, materials, or other causes beyond our
control not preventing, within about Delivered from Pierce Manufacturing to South Coast Fite Equipment,
Ontario, Ca working days after receipt of this order and the acceptance thereof at our office at Appleton,
Wisconsin, and to be delivered to you at South Coast Fire Equipment Ontario, Ca.
The specifications herein contained will form a part of the final contract and are subject to changes desired by
the purchaser, provided such alterations are interlined prior to the acceptance by the company of the order to
purchase, and provided such alterations do not materially affect the cost of the construction of the apparatus.
The proposal for fire apparatus conforms with all Federal Department of Transportation (DOT) rules and
regulations in effect at the time of bid and with all National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Guidelines for
Automotive Fire Apparatus as published at the time of bid, except as modified by customer specifications. Any
increased costs incurred by first party because of future changes in or additions to said DOT or NFPA standards
will be passed along to the customers as an addition to the price set forth above.
Unless accepted within 30 days from date, the right is reserved to withdraw this proposition.
INSPECTION TRIP(S)
The bidder will provide three (3) factory inspection trip(s) for 3 Trips for 3 people each tripPre con, Mid and
Final customer representative(s). The inspection trip(s) will he scheduled at times mutually agreed upon
between the manufacturer's representative and the customer. All costs such as travel, lodging and meals will be
the responsibility of the bidder.
PRODUCT CHANGES AND IMPROVEMENTS
Our components and processes, as described in this proposal document, are as accurate as known at the time of
bid submission, but are subject to change for the purpose of product or process improvements, or changes in
industry standards providing the change does not affect the meaning or definition of the bid specifications.
APPROVAL DRAWING
A drawing of the proposed apparatus will be prepared and provided to the purchaser for approval before
construction begins. The Pierce sales representative will also be provided with a copy of the same drawing.
The finalized and approved drawing will become part of the contract documents. This drawing will indicate
Page 3 of 92
the chassis make and model, location of the lights, siren, horns, compartments, major components, etc.
A "revised" approval drawing of the apparatus will be prepared and submitted by Pierce to the purchaser
showing any changes made to the approval drawing.
DIAGRAM, ELECTRICAL DC CIRCUITS
Three (3) sets of diagrams of the body and chassis DC electrical system will be provided with the completed
apparatus.
WARRANTY
We warranty each piece of new fire or rescue apparatus to be free from defects in materials or workmanship
under normal use and service. Our obligation under this warranty is limited to repairing or replacing, as the
company may elect, any parts thereof which are remnned to us with transportation costs prepaid, and as to
which examination is disclose to the company's satisfaction to have been defective, provided such pan, or parts
will be retumed to us not later than three (3) years from delivery of the apparatus. Such defective part or parts
will be repaired or replaced free of charge and without charge for installation to the original purchaser.
This warranty will not apply:
1) To normal maintenance and adjustments.
2) To any vehicle which has been repaired or altered outside of our factory in any way so that, in our
judgment, to affect the stability, nor which has been subject to misuse, neglect, or accident, nor to any
vehicle which will operate at any speed exceeding the factory rated speed, or loaded beyond the factory
rated load capacity.
I his warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied, all others representations to the original
purchaser and all other obligations or liabilities, including liability for incidental or consequential damages on
the part of the company. We neither assume or authorize any other person to give or assume any other warranty
or liability on the company's behalf unless made or assumed in writing by the company.
WARRANTY I YEAR CUSTOM CHASSIS
Each piece of new fire or rescue apparatus will be warranted to be free from defects in materials or
workmanship under normal use and service. Each manufacturer will supply, as a part of their bid
package, a copy of the warranty or warranties that they propose to provide, and in no case will it be less
than one (1) year on the entire apparatus.
All other warranties, as outlined in these specifications will be provided in writing as a part of the bid
package.
Failure to provide the wanwtics as outlined throughout these specifications will be cause for rejection of the
bid package.
CROSSMF,MBERS WARRANTY
A one (I ) year parts and labor warranty will be provided on all chassis frame crossmembers.
BID BOND
• bid bond will not be included. c ueste
• I and as security for the bid in the forr5—orTA44JULd bond to accomppa ptF ow —lud.
Thi id bond will he issued by a Surery is listed on the U.S. Treasury qlems list of
acceptable surcucs as d in Department Circular 570. I'll be issued by an authorized
Page 4 of 92
representative of the Surety C ,pr6pany and will be acco anied by a certifie wer of attorne dated or
fore the d< of bid. Th td bon- vill include la g which assures t ' e biddedprincip 11 give a
bo or bonds 'may specified in biddin r contrac ocumcnts, Ih g d and sufticie rety for the
faith performa f the contract, incl i to Basic One Yea muted anty', an or th rompt
payme of labo material furnished i e prosecution of th tract.
Notwithsr 'ng any do nent or . ertion to th contrary, y sure bond relate o e sale of a v cle will
apply y to t Basic On 1) car Limited Warr ty such vehic Any s ety bon relate the sale f
a v cle will no ply to ther warranties that a included within t ' (OEM or o e tse) or to the
wa antics (if any) any trd p of any part, c po t, attachment cessory that ' t orporated into
or attached to the veht In the e t of any c tradiction r inconsis hey ween t ' provi ' n and any
other document or ert n, this provi ' n prevail.
PERFORMANCE BOND e.t�(1Cs�.a(tQfli W1Q.( Q(I IM I l
Pierce Manufacturing will provide, of contract. and along %Y4 a 9itmedcop)
Ditto cewreet a performance bond, which guarantees performance of all terms and conditions of the contract
and of the Basic One (1) Year Limited Warranty agreement. The performance bond will specifically cover the
performance of the contract according to its terms and conditions, as well as payment of all related bills and
encumbrances. This performance bond will be issued by a surety company who is listed by the U.S. Treasury
Department's list of approved sureties, as published in Circular 570, as of the bid date. The performance bond
will be issued in an amount equal to 100% of the contract amount and will be dated concurrent to, or subsequent
to, the date of the contract.
Notwithstanding any document or assertion to the contrary, any surety bond related to the sale of a vehicle will
apply only to di Basic One (1) Year Limited Warranty for such vehicle. Any surety bond related to the sale of
a vehicle will not apply to any other warranties that are included within this bid (OEM or otherwise) or to the
warranties (if any) of any third party of any part, component, attachment or accessory that is incorporated into
or attached to the vehicle. In the event of any contradiction or inconsistency between this provision and any
other document or assertion, this provision wit[ prevail.
ARROW -XTTM TRACTOR CHASSIS
The Pierce Arrow -XT is the custom chassis developed exclusively for the fire service. Chassis provided will be
a new, tilt -type custom fire apparatus. 'I he chassis will be manufactured in the apparatus bodybuilder's facility
eliminating any split responsibility. The chassis will be designed and manufactured for heavy -duty service,
with adequate strength, capacity for the intended load to be sustained, and the type of service required. The
chassis will be the manufacturer's heavy -duty line tilt cab.
SEATING: CAPACITY
The seating capacity in the cab will be four (4).
WHEELBASE
The wheelbase of the vehicle will be 149 ".
GVW RATING
The gross vehicle weight rating will be 72,600.
FRAME.
The chassis frame will be built with two (2) steel channels bolted to five (5) cross members or more, depending
on other options of the apparatus. The side rails will have a 13.38" tall web over the front and mid sections of
the chassis, with a continuous smooth taper to 10.75" over the rear axle. Each rail will have a section modulus
of 25.992 cubic inches and a resisting bending moment (rbm) of 3,1 19,040 inch- pounds over the critical regions
of the frame assembly, with a section modulus of 18.96 cubic inches with an rbm of 2,275,200 etch- pounds over
Page 5 of 92
the rear axle. The frame rails will be constructed of 120,000 psi yield strength heat- treated .38" thick steel, with
3.50" wide flanges.
FRAi•4E RAIL WARRANTY
Limited 14'aran .
Except as provided below, and provided the vehicle will have been placed in service within 60 days after
delivery to the original purchaser as established by our original invoice, for a period of 50 years, which is the
estimated useful life of the vehicle, after delivery to the original purchaser, Pierce Manufacturing Inc. ( "Pierce ")
warrants to the user that its chassis frame rail manufactured by Pierce are free of defects in design, material, or
workmanship. This limited warranty will apply only if the vehicle is property maintained and used in service
that is normal to the particular vehicle. Normal service means service that does not subject die vehicle to
stresses or impacts greater than normally result from the careful use of the vehicle or chassis. If the buyer
discovers a defect or nonconformity, it must notify Pierce in writing within 30 days after the date of discovery.
This limited warranty is not transferable by the first user.
A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal.
FRAME REINFORCEMENT
In addition, a mainframe inverted "I." liner will be provided. It will be heat- treated steel measuring 12.00" x
3.00" x .25 ". Each liner will have a section modulus of 7.795 cu. in., yield strength of 110,000 psi, and rbm of
857,462 inch- pounds. Total rbm at wheelbase center will be 3,976.502 pounds per rail.
The fiame liner will be mounted inside of the chassis frame rail, beginning at the front edge of the mainframe
rail and extending to the rear cab crossmember.
FRONT NON DRIVE, AXLE
The Oshkosh TAKAIJ front axle will be of the independent suspension design with a ground rating of 22,800
pounds.
Upper and lower control arms will be used on each side of the axle. Upper control arm castings will be made of
100,000 -psi vield strength 8630 steel and the lower control arm casting will be made of 55,000 -psi yield ductile
iron.
The center cross members and side plates will be constructed out of 80,000 -psi yield strength steel.
Each control arm will be mounted to the center section rising clastomcr bushings. These rubber bushings will
rotate on low friction plain bearings and be lubricated for life. Bach bushing will also have a flange end to
absorb longitudinal impact loads, reducing noise and vibrations.
There will be nine (9) grease fittings supplied, one (1) on each control arm pivot and one (1) on the steering
gear extension.
The upper control arm will be shorter than the lower arm so that wheel end geometry provides positive camber
when deflected below rated load and negative camber above rated load.
Camber at load will be zero degrees for optimum tire life.
The kingpin bearing will be of low friction design and be scaled for life.
Toe links that are adjustable for alignment of the wheel to the center of the chassis will be provided.
Pagc 6 of 92
The wheel ends will have little to no bump steer when the chassis encounters a hole or obstacle
The steering linkage will provide proper steering angles for the inside and outside wheel, based on the vehicle
wheelbase.
The axle will have a third party certified turning angle of 45 degrees. Front discharge, front suction, or
aluminum wheels will not infringe on this cramp angle.
WARRANTY, FRONT NON DRIVE AXLE
The Oshkosh TAK -4 system will have a three (3) year parts and labor warranty. This warranty applies to the
TAK4 suspension components only. All steering linkages, pumps etc., are covered under our standard chassis
warranty (exception steer gears - see Steering for warranty).
OIL SEALS
Oil seals with viewing window will he provided on the front axle.
SHOCK ABSORBERS
Heavy -duty telescoping shock absorbers (KONI) will be provided on the front suspension.
REAR AXLE
The rear axle will be a MeritorTM, Model RS -30 -185, with a capacity of 31,000 pounds.
REAR AXLE WARRANTY
The Meri(orTM two (2) year, unlimited mileage, parts and labor warranty will be provided with this axle.
TOP SPEED OF VEHICLE.
A rear axle ratio will be fumished to allow the vehicle to reach a top speed of 68 MPH.
011, SEALS
Oil seals will be provided on the rear axle.
FRONT SUSPENSION
Front Oshkosh TAK - 117M independent suspension will be provided with a minimum ground rating of 22,800
pounds.
The independent suspension system will be designed to provide maximum ride comfort. 'Me design will allow
the vehicle to travel at highway speeds over improved road surfaces and at moderate speeds over rough terrain
with minimal transfer of road shock and vibration to the vehicle's crew compartment.
Each wheel will have torsion bar t)pe spring. In addition, each front wheel end will also have energy absorbing
jounce bumpers to prevent bottoming of the suspension.
The suspension design will be such that there is at least 10.00" of total wheel travel and a minimum of 3.75"
before suspension bottoms.
The torsion bar anchor lock sysrern allows for simple lean adjustments, without die use of shims. One can
adjust for a lean within 15 minutes per side. Anchor adjustment design is such that it allows for ride height
adjustment on each side.
The independent suspension was put through a durability test that simulated 140,000 miles of inner city driving.
REAR SUSPENSION
Page 7 of 92
Rear suspension will be a Hendrickson FMX 312 FX, air ride with a ground rating of 31,000 pounds. The
suspension will have the following features:
- Heavy -duty shock absorbers to protect air springs from overextension
- Heavy -duty torque rods and bushings
- Premium, heavy -duty rubber bushings require no lubrication
- Integrated stabilizer design results in greater stability
- Low spring rate air springs for excellent ride quality
- Dual height control valves to maunain level vehicle from side to side
FIFTH WHEEL
The fifth wheel will be designed to allow the tiller trailer to pivot fore & aft and be rotated. A fifth wheel
lockout system will be provided to limit motion during aerial operations. The fifth wheel will also be capable of
full operation up to a 14 degree breakover angle. The fifth wheel lockout system, when activated. will prevent
movement between the upper and lower plates of the fifth wheel assembly. In the normal road travel condition
the cylinder mounted solenoid valves will be open and will allow transfer of oil between the front and rear pair
of cylinders. When the stabilizers are in their proper supporting position and as the aerial leaves the boom
support, the solenoid valves will close. The closed valves will allow no oil to be transferred and the fifth wheel
assembly will become rigid. A fill and a gauge port will be provided on the top of the trailer goose neck for
maintenance.
FENDER PANELS
The chassis behind the cab will be assembled with fender panels over the wheels, running boards and steps for
access to the turntable and decking over the frame rails. The fender panels will be fabricated of. 125"-5052
aluminum with a 38,000 psi tensile strength. Fender design will be provided for prevention of rust packets and
ease of maintenance. The area over the frame mils between the cab and fifth wheel will be covered with
aluminum treadplate to serve as a walkway area. The walkway area will be properly rehhforced with a steel
substructure attached to the frame rails. Running boards will be installed on each side directly behind the cab
for access to the walkway area behind the cab and the turntable. The running boards will be covered with
aluminum treadplate.
ANTI -LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
The vehicle will be equipped with a Wabco, model XS4A4, anti -lock braking system. The A13S will provide a
four (4) channel anti -lock braking control on both the front, rear and tiller wheels. A digitally controlled system
that utilizes microprocessor technology will control the anti -lock braking system. Each wheel will be monitored
by the system. When any particular wheel begins to lockup, a signal will be sent to the control unit. This
control unit then will reduce the braking of that wheel for a fraction of a second and then reapply the brake.
This anti -lock brake system will eliminate the lockup of any wheel thus helping to prevent the apparatus from
skidding out of control.
ANTI -LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WARRANTY
the Wabco ABS system will come with a three (3) year or 300,000 mile parts and labor warrant), provided
by Meritor Wabco Vehicle Control Systems.
BRAKES
The service brake system will be full air type.
Page 8 of 92
The front brakes will be KnorrIBendix disc type with a 17.00" ventilated rotor for improved stopping distance
The brake system will be certified, third party inspected, for improved stopping distance.
The rear brakes will be MeritorTm 16.50" x 8.63" cam operated with automatic slack adjusters.
ENGINE BRAKE
A Jacobs Engine Snake is to be installed with the controls located on the instrument panel within easy reach of
the driver.
The driver will be able to turn the engine brake system ortioff and have a high, medium and low setting.
The engine brake will be installed in such a manner that when the engine brake is slowing the vehicle the brake
lights are activated.
The ABS system will automatically disengage the auxiliary braking device, when required.
AIR COMPRESSOR, BRAKE SYSTEM
The air compressor will be a Bendix BA -921 with 15.8 cubic feet per minute output at 1250 RPM.
BRAKE SYSTEM
The brake system will include:
- Bend ix-Westinghouse dual brake treadle valve with vinyl covered foot surface
- Heated automatic moisture ejector on air dryer
- Total air system capacity of 5.198 cubic inches
- Two (2) air pressure gauges with a red wanting light and an audible alarm, that activates when air pressure
falls below 60 psi
- MGM spring set parking brake system
- Parking brake operated by a Bendix - Westinghouse PP -1 control valve
- A parking "brake on" indicator light on instrument panel
- Bend ix- Westinghouse SR -I valve, in conjunction with a double check valve system. providing automatic
spring brake application at 40 psi
- Wabco System Saver 1200 air dryer
BRAKE LINES
Color -coded nylon brake lines will be provided. The lines will be wrapped in a heat protective loom in the
chassis areas that are subject to excessive heat.
AIR INLET/OUTLET
One ( I ) air inlet ,'''outict will he installed with the female coupling located in the driver side lower step well of
cab. This system will tic into the 'wet" tank of the brake system and include a check valve in the inlet line and
an 85 psi pressure protection valve in the outlet line. The air outlet will be controlled by a needle valve.
Page 9 of 92
A mating male fitting will be provided with the loose equipment.
The air inlet will allow a shoreline air hose to be connected to the vehicle. This will allow station air to be
supplied to the brake system of the vehicle to insure constant air pressure.
AIR TANK.. ADDITIONAL
An additional air tank with 1454 cubic inch displacement will be provided to increase the capacity of the air
system. This tank will be dedicated for air horn use.
The output flow of the engine air compressor varies with engine RPM. Full compressor output is only achieved
at govemed engine speed. Engine speed may be limited by generators, pumps and other PTO driven options.
ALL WHEEL LOCK -UP
An additional all wheel lock -up system will be installed which applies air to the front brakes only. The standard
spring brake control valve system will also be used for the rear.
EN(;INF.
The chassis will be powered by a Detroit Diesel electronically controlled engine as described below:
- Model: Series 60, 14.01. (855 cubic inches)
- Maximum Horsepower: 515 bhp at 1800 rpm
- Peak Torque: 1650 lb-ft at 1200 rpm
- Governed Speed: 2000 rpm
- Bore and Stroke: 5.24" x 6.61"
- Number of Cylinders: Six (6)
- Compression Ratio: 17.25:1
Standard equipment on the engine will include the following:
- Governor: Limiting speed type
- Injectors: Cam operated, unit type, clean tip
- Starting Motor. 12 -volt
- Turbocharger
- Air To Air Aftcrcooled
- Lube Oil Cooler
- Lube Oil Filter: Full Flow
- Air Cleaner: Farr or equal
- Fuel Filters: Dual, with check valve
Page 10 of 92
- Coolant Filter: Spin -on with shut ofl'valves on the supply and return line (precharged with coolant inhibitor)
ENGINE WARRANTY
The engine will come with a five (5) year or 100,000 mile warranty provided by the Detroit Diesel
Corporation.
CONTROLS AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
The following amber indicator lights will be located on the driver's side of the cab to denote engine information
- Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
- High Exhaust Temperature (HET)
- Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
A switch to initiate the diesel particulate filter regeneration cycle will be located on the driver's side instrument
panel.
ENGINE INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION
The fire apparatus manufacturer will provide a certification, along with a letter from the engine manufacturer
stating they approve of the engine installation in the bidder's chassis. The certification will be provided at the
time of bid.
ENGINE AIR INTAKE,
'I he air intake with an ember separator will be mounted high on the passenger side of the cab, to the front of the
crew cab door. The ember separator is designed to prevent road dirt and recirculating hot air from entering the
engine. The ember separator will be easily accessible through a hinged stainless steel grille, with one (1) flush
quarter turn latch.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The exhaust system will be stainless steel from the turbo to the inlet of the diesel particulate filter and will be
5,00" in diameter. The exhaust system will include a diesel particulate filter and a diesel oxidation catalyst to
meet current EPA standards. The exhaust will terminate horizontally ahead of the passenger side rear wheels.
A tailpipe diffuser will be provided to reduce the temperature of the exhaust as it exits. An insulation wrap will
be provided on the exhaust pipe between the turbo and DPF inlet to minimize the transfer of heat to die cab.
Heat deflector shields will be provided to isolate chassis and body components from the heat of the tailpipe
diffuser.
ENGINE SHUTDOWN W /RESET
An emergency engine shutdown, by means of incorporating a flapper over the engine air intake, will be
provided with a pneumatic push -to- activate control inside the cab. A protective guard will be supplied to avoid
unnccessary activation.
The push -to- active control inside the cab can also be used to release the emergency shutdown, without having to
tilt die cab.
FIJU SEPARATOR
The engine will he equipped with a Racor in -line spin -on fuel and water separator in addition to the engine fuel
filters.
ENGINE. HEATER
A 1000 wan, 120 volt, immersion type engine heater will be installed with the AC power inlet located to the
rear of die drivers door.
Page I I of 92
A LED warning light and buzzer will be provided on the cab instrument panel to indicate water in the fuel
system.
HIGH IDLE
A high idle switch will be provided, inside the cab, on the instrument panel, that will automatically maintain a
preset engine rpm. A switch will be installed, at the cab instrument panel, for activatiom'dcactivation.
The high idle will be operational only when the parking brake is on and the truck transmission is in neutral. A
green indicator light will be provided. adjacent to the switch. The light will illuminate when the above
conditions are met. The light will be labeled "OK to Fngage High Idle ".
COOLANT LINES
Silicone hoses will be used for all engine coolant/heater lines urstalled by Pierce Manufacturing.
Hose clamps will be the stainless steel constant torque type to prevent coolant leakage. They will expand and
contract according to coolant system temperature thereby keeping a constant clamping pressure on the hose.
RADIATOR
The radiator and the complete cooling system will meet or exceed NFPA and engine manufacturer cooling
system standards.
For maximum cooling performance, the radiator core will be made of copper fins having a serpentine design,
soldered to brass tubes. The tubes will be welded to brass headers using the patented 'Beta -Weld" process for
increased strength, longer road life and solder -bloom corrosion protection. The radiator core will have a
minimum frontal area of 1396 square inches. Steel supply and return tanks will he bolted to the core headers
and steel side channels to complete the radiator assembly. The radiator will be compatible with commercial
antifreeze solutions.
The radiator will be mounted in such a manner as to prevent the development of leaks caused by twisting or
straining when the apparatus operates over uneven ground. The radiator assembly will be isolated from the
chassis frame rails with rubber isolators.
The radiator will include an integral deaeration tank, with a remote - mounted overflow tank. For visual coolant
level inspection, the radiator will have a built -in sight glass. The radiator will be equipped with a 15 psi
pressure relief cap.
A drain port will be located at the lowest point of the cooling system and/or the bottom of the radiator to permit
complete flushing of the coolant from the system.
A heavy -duty Can will draw in fresh, cool air through the radiator. Shields or baffles will be provided to prevent
recirculation of hot air to the inlet side of the radiator.
CLUTCH FAN
A l lonon fan clutch will be provided. The fan clutch will be automatic when the pump transmission is in
"Road" and "pump" position.
FUEL TANK
A 65- gallon fuel tank will be provided and mounted at rear of chassis. The tank will be constructed of 12-
gauge, hot rolled steel. It will he equipped with swash partitions and a vent.
A .75" drain plue will be provided in a low point of the tank for drainage
Page 12 of 92
A fill inlet will be located on the driver's side rear of the chassis on the vertical portion of the fender skirting
area. The inlet will be covered with a hinged, spring loaded, stainless steel door that is marked "Diesel Fuel
Only ".
A .50" diameter vent will be provided running from top of tank to just below fuel fill inlet.
The tank will meet all FHWA 393.67 requirements including a fill capacity of 950/b of tank volume.
All fuel lines will be provided as recommended by the engine manufacturer.
AUXILIARY FUEL PUMP
An auxiliary electric fuel pump will be added to the fuel line for priming the engine. A switch located on the
cab instrument panel will be provided to operate the pump.
FUELSHUTOFF
A shutoff valve will be installed in the fuel line, near the filter.
FUEL COOLER
An air to fuel cooler will be installed in the engine fuel return line.
TRANSMISSION
An Allison Gen IV, model EVS 4000P, electronic, torque converting, automatic transmission will be provided.
Two (2) PTO openings will be located on left side and top of converter housing (positions 8 o'clock and I
o'clock).
A transmission temperature gauge with red light and buzzer will be installed on the cab instrument panel.
TRANSMISSION SHIFTER
A six (6) -speed push button shift module will be mounted to right of driver on console. Shits position indicator
will be indirectly lit for after dark operation.
The transmission ratio will be: 1st - 3.51 to 1.00, 2nd - 1.91 to 1.00, 3rd - 1.43 to 1.00, 4th - 1.00 to 1.00, 5th -
0.75 to 1.00, 6th - 0.64 to 1.00, R - 4.80 to 1.00.
TRANSMISSION COOLER
A transmission oil cooler will be provided in the lower tank of the radiator.
TRANSMISSION WARRANTY
The transmission will have a five (5) year /unlimited mileage warranty covering 100% parts and labor. The
warranty will he provided by Allison Transmission.
Note: ']'he transmission cooler is not covered under any extended warranty you may be getting on your Allison
transmission. Please review your Allison transmission warranty for coverage limitations.
SYNTHETIC FLUID ONLY TAG
A tag will be located at the transmission 811 point labeled "Synthetic Fluid Only ".
TRANSMISSION FLUID
The transmission will be provided with TranSynd, or TLS 295 (generic synthetic fluid) equivalent heavy duty
synthetic transmission fluid.
Page 13 of 92
DRIVELINF.
Drive[ines will he a heavy -duty metal tube and be equipped with Spicer 1810 universal joints.
The shafts will be dynamically balanced before installation.
A splined slipjoint will be provided in each driveshaft, slipjoint will be coated with Glidecoat or equivalent.
STEERING
Dual Sheppard MI 10 steering gears, with integral heavy -duty power steering, will be provided. The power
steering will incorporate a Vickers V20F three (3) -line hydraulic pump with integral pressure and Flow control.
The steering wheel will be:
- 18.00" in diameter
- Capable of tilting and telescoping
Four (4)-spoke design
STEERING WARRANTY
The steering gear will have a three (3) year parts and labor warranty.
TIRES
Front tires will be Michelin 425/65822.50 radials, 20 ply "all position' XZY 3 tread. The tires will be mounted
on Alcoa 22.50" x 12.25" polished aluminum disc -type wheels with a ten (10) stud, 1 1.25" bolt circle.
Rear tires will be four (4) Michelin 315/80822.50 radials, 20 ply XDN2 Grip "traction' tread. The tires will be
mounted on Alcoa 22.50" x 9.00" polished aluminum disc wheels with a ten (10) -stud 11.25" bolt circle.
LUG NUT COVERS
Chrome plated lug nut covers will be installed on all lug nuts.
WHEEL CHOCKS
There will be two (2) set(s) of folding Ziamatic SAC -44 -E, aluminum alloy, Quick -Choc wheel blocks, with
easy -grip handle provided.
WHEEL CHOCK BRACKETS
There will be two (2) sct(s) of Ziamatic SQCH -44 -11 horizontal mounting wheel chock brackets provided for
the Ziamatic SAC -44 -F, folding wheel chocks. The brackets will be mounted TBD.
IIUB COVERS (front)
Stainless steel hub covers will be provided on the front axle. An oil level viewing window will be provided.
HUB COVERS (Tiller Azle)
Stainless steel hub covers will be provided on the tiller trailer axle. An oil level viewing window will be
provided.
HUB COVERS (rear)
A pair of stainless steel high hat hub covers will be provided on rear axle hubs.
MUD FLAPS
Mud flaps with a Pierce logo will be installed behind the front and rear wheels.
MUD FLAPS
Mud flaps will be installed behind the tiller trailer wheels of the apparatus.
Page 14 of 92
TIRE PRESSURE MANAGEMENT
There will be a VECSAFE LED tire alert pressure management system provided that will monitor each tire's
pressure. A chrome plated brass sensor will be provided on the valve stem of each tire for a total of eight (8)
tires.
The sensor will calibrate to the tire pressure when installed on the valve stem for pressures between 20 and 120
psi. The sensor will activate an integral battery operated LED when the pressure of that lire drops 8 psi.
Removing the cap from the sensor will indicate the functionality of the sensor and battery. If the sensor and
battery are in working condition, the LED will immediately start blinking.
CAB
The Arrow -XT cab will be designed specifically for the fire service and manufactured by the chassis builder.
Construction of the cab will consist of 5052 -1132 .125" aluminum welded to extruded aluminum framing.
The cab will be built by the apparatus manufacturer in a facility located on the manufacturer's premises. (no
exceptions)
1'hc cab will be 96.00" wide, with an interior width of 87.50"
The forward cab section will have an overall height (from the cab roof to the ground) of approximately 103.00 ".
The crew cab section will have a 10.00" raised roof, with an overall cab height of approximately 113.00 ". 'Ilne
overall height listed will be calculated based on a truck configuration with the lowest suspension weight ratings,
the smallest diameter tires for the suspension, no water weight, no loose equipment weight and no personnel
weight. Larger tires, wheels and suspension will increase the overall height listed.
The flour to ceiling height inside the crew cab will be 64.00" in the center and 69.75' in the outboard positions.
The crew cab flour will measure 44.50" from rear wall to the back side of engine tunnel.
The engine tunnel, at the rearward highest point (knee level), will measure 50.88" to the back wall.
The crew cab will be of the totally enclosed design, with access doors constructed in the same manner as die
driver and passenger doors.
The cab will be a full tilt cab style. 'lltc engine will be easily accessible and capable of being removed with the
cab tilted. The cab will be capable of tilting 45 degrees and 90 degrees with crane assist.
The cab will have three (3) -point rubber mounting and will be tilted by a hydraulic pump connected to two (2)
cab lift cylinders. 'Ilse cab will then be locked down by a two (2) -point automatic locking mechanism that
actuates after the cab has been lowered.
The cab access steps will be 23.25' wide, crew cab will be 21.50" wide x 8.00" minimum depth and will be the
half- height style door, blistered inward at the bottom.
The lower exposed step area at each door location will he trimmed with aluminum treadplate and have a grip
strut insert in the bottom step.
The inside cab steps will not exceed 18.00" high.
Page 15 ot'92
The crew cab entrance will be a one (1) step design to the cab floor, for easy access.
A 20.00 ", slip resistant, handrail will be provided adjacent to all door openings to assist entrance into the cab.
A chrome handrail will be provided inside each front cab door, for ease of entry.
The cab doors will be 37.00" wide x 58.50" high.
I'hc crew cab doors will be 34.25' wide x 67.00" high for easy entry, and located on the side of the cab.
The cab and crew cab doors will be constructed of extruded aluminum with a nominal material thickness of
.125'. The exterior skins will be constructed front .090" aluminum.
All cab and crew cab entry doors will contain a conventional roll down window.
Flush mounted, chrome plated paddle type door handle will be provided on the exterior of the cab doors.
All interior cab door handles will also have flush paddle handles.
The cab doors will be provided with both interior (rotary knob) and exterior (keyed) locks as required by
FM VSS 206. The locks will be capable of activating when the doors are open or closed. The doors will remain
locked if locks are activated when the doors are opened, then closed.
The door hinge will be a stainless steel piano type with a .25" pin.
There will be double automotive type rubber scats around the perimeter of the door framing and door edges to
ensure a weather tight fit.
Full height polished stainless steel scuffplates will be installed on the inside of all cab doors.
Cab door panels will be removable without disconnecting door and window mechanisms.
Engine hood side walls will be constructed of.50" aluminum, top will be constructed of. 19" aluminum and will
be tapered at top to allow for more driver and passenger elbow room.
The engine hood will be insulated for protection from heat and sound. The noise insulation keeps the DDA
level within the limits stated in the current NFPA series 1900 pamphlet. There will be access, 15.00" wide x
11.25" high, at the rear of the engine tunnel to access the engine fluid checks.
Fu)) circular inner fender liners, in the wheel wells, will be provided.
Brieht aluminum treadplate will be overlayed on the outside rear wall of the crew cab except for areas that are
not typically visible when the cab is lowered.
A curved, safety glass windshield will be provided, with over 2,754 square inches of clear viewing area.
The cab windshield will have bright trim inserts in the rubber molding holding the glass in place.
All cab glass will be tinted.
Economical windshield replacement glass will be readily available from local auto glass suppliers.
Page 16 of 92
Two (2) smoked Lexan sunvisors, 8.75" x 31.00" long, will be provided. The sunvisors will be located above
the windshield with one (1) mounted on each side of the cab.
Two (2) Electric windshield wipers with washer will be provided that meet PMVSS and SAE requirements.
The washer reservoir will be able to be filled without raising the cab.
A glove box with a drop -down door will be installed in the front dash panel in front of the officer's position.
CAB INTEGRITY CERTIFICATION
Pierce manufacturing will provide a cab crash test certification with this proposal. The certification states that
the cab must meet or exceed the requirements below:
- F,uropean Occupant Protection Standard GCE Regulation No.29
- SAL J2422 Cab Roof Strength Evaluation - Quasi- Static Loading I Leavy Trucks
- SAE 12420 COE Frontal Strength Evaluation - Dynamic Loading I leave Trucks
- Roof Crush
The cab will be subjected to a roof crush force of 100,000 lbs. This value will be 450% of the ECE 29 criteria,
which must be equivalent to the front axle rating up to a maximum of 10 metric tons.
- Side Impact
The cab will be subjected to dynamic preload with a 13,275 lb moving barrier is slammed into the side of the
cab at 5.5 mph, striking with an impact of 13,000 R -Ibs of energy. This test will closely represent the forces a
cab will see in a rollover incident.
- Frontal Impact
The cab will withstand a frontal force produced from 65,200 ft-Ibs of energy using a swing—bob type platen.
The same cab will withstand all tests without any measurable intrusion into the survival space of the occupant
area.
CAB DOOR DURABILITY CERTIFICATION
Robust cab doors help protect occupants. Cab doors will survive a 200,000 cycle door slain test where the
slamming force exceeds 20 Gs of deceleration. The bidder will certify that the sample doors similar to those
provided on the apparatus have been tested and have met these criteria without structural damage, latch
malfunction, or significant component wear.
CAIJ MODIFICATION
The engine tunnel will be designed to provide maximum occupant space, and required clearance to the engine
and related components. The engine tunnel will include a modification on the passenger side to accommodate
the Turbo and related components.
CAB FLOOR
The cab and crew cab floor areas will be covered with PolvdamprM acoustical floor mat consisting of a black
pyramid rubber facing and closed cell foam decoupler.
The top surface of the material has a series of raised pyramid shapes evenly spaced, which offer a superior grip
surface. Additionally, the material has a 25" thick closed cell foam (no water absorption) which offers a sound
dampening material for reducing sound levels.
Page 17 of 92
CREW CAB WINDOWS
On each side of the crew cab, a window with tinted glass will be provided.
The rear wall of the crew cab will have two (2) windows, each being 11.29" wide x 17.95" high.
WINDOW TINT
Crew cab windows will be tinted with 44% light transmission tint. The following windows are included:
- Crew cab side windows
- Crew cab door, roll -up windows
- Rear opera windows (if applicable).
ELECTRIC OPERATED CAB DOOR WINDOWS
All four (4) cab doors will be equipped with electric operated windows with flush mounted automotive
style switches.
The drivers side lower instrument panel will also have four (4) controls, one (1) for each door window.
ELECTRIC WINDOW DURABILITY CERTIFICATION
Cab window roll -up systems can cause maintenance problems if not designed for long service life. The window
regulator design will complete 30.000 complete up -down cycles and still function normally when finished. The
bidder will certify that sample doors and windows similar to those provided on the apparatus have been tested
and have met these criteria without malfunction or significant component wear.
ELECTRIC CAB DOOR LOCKS
'I he front driver and officer doors will have a door lock master switch. The master switches will control
all cab door locks.
I'hc rear cab doors will have the standard manual lock control
There will be one (1) concealed switch located in an easily accessible chassis specific location that will
unlock all the doors.
The lock system will include two (2) key FOBS that allow for keyless entry into the vehicle. The key FOB
system will use code hopping technology for high security and be FCC part 15 compliant.
KEY PAD FOR ELECTRIC DOOR LOCKS
For improved convenience, the cab door locks will include a Trintark keypad entry system to provide complete
keyless entry to the cab. 'There will be two (2) keypads provided, located one each side of the cab behind the
front cab doors. The keypads will include visual and audio feedback to confirm activation and acknowledge
correct entry code. For enhanced night time use, the keypads will be lighted. For increased security, the system
will allow over 3000 possible code combinations.
LOGO AND CUSTOMER DESIGNATION ON HORN BUTTON
The steering wheel will have an emblem containing the tine apparatus manufacturer's logo and customer name.
The emblem will have three (3) rows of text for the customer's department name. There will be a maximum of
eight (S) characters in the first row, eleven (11) characters or the second row and eleven (11) characters in the
third row.
Page 18 of 92
The first row of text will be: COSTA MI7SA
The second row of text will be: FIRL•'
The third row of text will be: DEPARTMENT
STORAGE. COMPARTMENTS
Provided on each side of the cab, below the cab floor, to the rear of the crew cab access doors, will be a storage
compartment. The compartments will be 11.50" wide x 14.00" deep x 18.00" high.
The doors will be of the single pan construction with one (I) D -ring latch. Chain with a clear plastic covering
will be used as a door stop.
FENDER CROWNS
Stainless steel fender crowns will be installed at the cab wheel openings. The fender crowns will have a radius
outside comer that will allow the fender crown to extend out further than the standard width crown, thus
extending beyond the sidew•all of the front tires and allow the crew cab doors to open fully.
CAB DOOR INTERIOR PANELS
A brushed stainless steel scuffplate will be provided on the lower interior section of cab and crew cab doors.
CAB DOOR INTERIOR PANELS
A full height stainless steel scuffplate will be provided on the cab and crew cab interior doors.
TR PM(On Pait�reak
There will be a gold leaf stripe provided on the paint break in place of chrome molding. The stripe will be on
both sides of the cab and on the cab face with shield.
MAP
A map box with six (6) bins, open from top, will be installed. The map box will be divided into six (6) bins,
each bin will slant 30 degrees from horizontal. The map box will be constnucted of .125" aluminum and will he
painted to match the cab interior. Two (2) rows of three (3) slots will measure 12.00" long x 3.00" wide.
MAP POCKET
Installed on each front door will be a map pocket. The pocket will be 13.50" wide x 14.00" high x 1.50" deep
and constructed of stainless steel.
CAB LIFT
A hydraulic cab lift system will be provided consisting of an electric powered hydraulic pump, dual lift
cylinders, and necessary hoses and valves.
The hydraulic pump will have a manual override for backup in the event of electrical failure.
Lift controls will be on a panel located on the pump panel or front area of the body tat a convenient location.
Cab will be hiked down by a two (2) -point automatic spring - loaded hook mechanism that actuates after the cab
has been lowered.
The hydraulic cylinders will be equipped with a velocity fuse that protects the cab fiont accidentally descending
when the control is located in the tilt position.
A redundant mechanical stay arm will automatically be engaged once the cab has been fully raised. Before
Page 19 of 92
lowering the cab, this device must be disengaged using the stay arm control located near the cab raise /lower
switch.
INTERLOCK, CAR LIFT TO PARKING BRAKE
The cab lift system will be interlocked to the parkutg brake. The cab tilt mechanism will be active only when
the parking brake is set and the ignition switch is in the on position, if the parking brake is released the tab tilt
mechanism will be disabled.
MIRRORS
A Velvac, model 2010, west coast mirror will be mounted on each side of the front cab door. Mirror
dimensions will be 7.00" wide x 16.00" high, and will be heated and motorized. The shell will be bright
annealed stainless steel.
Both mirrors will be heated and have a remote control that is convenient to the driver.
BUMPER
A one (1) piece, ten (10) -gauge 304 -26 polished stainless steel bumper, minimum of 10.00" high, will be
attached to the front of the chassis frame.
A 9.00" formed steel channel will be mounted directly behind bumper for additional strength.
LIFT AND TOW MOUNTS
Mounted to the frame extension will be lift and tow mounts. The lift and tow mounts will be designed and
positioned to adapt to certain tow truck lift systems,
fhe lift and tow mounts with eyes will be painted die same color as the frame
GRAVELPAN
A gravel pan, constructed of bright aluminum treadplate, will be furnished between the bumper and cab face
TOW HOOKS
No tow hooks are to be provided. This truck will be equipped with a lift and tow package with integral tow
cvcs.
CAR INTERIOR
The cab dash fascias will be a flat faced design to provide easy of maintenance and will be constructed out of
painted aluminum.
The engine tunnel will he padded and covered with 46 ounce leather grain vinyl resistant to oil, grease and
mildew.
'I he headliner will be installed in both forward and rear cab sections. Headliner material will be vinyl. A sound
barrier will be pan of its composition. Material will be installed on aluminum sheet and securely fastened to
interior cab ceiling.
Forward portion of cab headliner will provide easy access for servicing electrical wiring or for other
maintenance needs without removing the entire unit.
CAB INTERIOR UPHOLSTERY
The cab interior upholstery will he dark silver gray.
INTERIOR PAINT (Cab
Page 20 of 92
A rich looking interior will be provided by painting all the metal surfaces inside the cab gray, vinyl texture
paint.
CRAB HANDLE
A black rubber covered grab handle will be mounted on the lower portion of the drivers side cab entrance to
assist in entering the cab. The grab handle will he securely mounted to the post area between the door and
steering wheel column.
A long rubber grab handle will be mounted on the dash board in front of the officer.
DRIVER SEAT
A Seats Inc. #911 "scissors- action" air -ride high -back style seat will be provided in the cab for the driver.
The driver's seat will be furnished with three (3) -point shoulder type seat belt. The seat belt will be furnished
with automatic retractor. Extension will be provided with the seat belt so the male end can be easily grasped
and the female end easily located while sitting in a normal position.
The seat back will be removable for ease of access to components located behind the driver seat.
OFFICER SEAT
A Seats Inc. 4911 fixed companion high back style seat will be provided in the cab for the officer.
The officer's seat will be furnished with three (3) -pour shoulder type seat belt. The scat belt will be furnished
with automatic retractor. Extension will be provided with the seat belt so the male end can be easily grasped
and the female end easily located while sitting in a normal position.
FORWARD FACING. PASSENGER SIDE OUTBOARD SEAT
There will be one (1) fold up seat provided at the passenger side outboard position in the crew cab.
The seat will be constructed of a heavy grade vinyl over foam rubber and will have the bottom covered with
brushed stainless steel for a pleasant appearance when the seat is in the up position.
The seat will be furnished with a three- point, shoulder type seat belt. The seat belt will be famished with
automatic retractors.
FORWARD FACING DRIVER SIDE OUTBOARD SEAT
There will be one (1) forward facing; Seats Incorporated 911 fold -up SCBA style scat provided at the driver
side outboard position in the crew cab. The SCBA cavity will be adjustable front to rear in 0.50" increments to
accommodate different size SCBA bottles.
Moving the SCBA cavity will be accomplished by unbolting, relocating and rebolting in the desired location.
The scat will be furnished with a three three - point, shoulder type scat belt. The scat belt will be furnished with
automatic retractors. Extensions will he provided with the seat belt so the male end can be easily grasped and
the female end easily located while sitting in a normal position.
RADIO COMPARTMENT
A radio compartment will be provided under the officer's seat.
The inside compartment dimensions will be 14.50" deep x 14.50" across x 9.00" high.
A drop -down door with a chronic plated lift and turn latch will be provided for access.
Paec 21 of 92
The compartment will be constructed of smooth aluminum and painted to match the cab interior.
SEAT UPHOLSTERY
All Seats Inc. 911 seat upholstery will be gray woven with black Imperial 1200 material.
AIR BOTTLE HOLDERS
All SCBA type scats in the cab will have a "llands -Free" auto clamp style bracket in its backrest. For efficiency
and convenience, the bracket will include an automatic spring clamp that allows the occupant to store the SCBA
bottle by simply pushing it into the seat back. For protection of all occupants in the cab, in the event of an
accident, the inertial components within the clamp will constrain the SCBA bottle in the seat and will exceed
the NFPA standard of 9G. Bracket designs with manual restraints (belts, straps, buckles) that could be
inadvertently left unlocked and allow the SCBA to move freely within the cab during an accident, will not be
acceptable.
There will be a quantity of one (1) SCBA brackets.
SHOULDER HARNESS HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
All seating positions furnished with three (3) -point shoulder type seat belts will include a height adjustment.
This adjustment will optimize the belts effectiveness and comfort for the seated firefnghter.
SEAT BFUFS
All seating positions in the cab and crew cab will have red seat belts.
SEAT BELT ANCHOR STRENGTH
Seat belt attachment strength is regulated by Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards and should be
validated through testing. Each seat belt anchor design will withstand 3000 Ibs of pull on both the lap
and shoulder belt in accordance with FMVSS 571.210 Seat Belt Assembly Anchorages. The bidder will
certify that each anchor design was pull tested to the required force and met the appropriate criteria.
SEAT MOUNTING STRENGTH
Seat attachment strength is regulated by Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards and should be validated
through testing. Each scat mounting design will be tested to withstand 20 G's of force in accordance with
FMVSS 571.207 Seating Systems. The bidder will certify that each seat mount and cab structure design was
pull tested to die required force and met the appropriate criteria.
SEAT BELT MONITORING SYSTEM
A seat belt monitoring system (SBMS) will be provided. The SBMS will be capable of monitoring up to ten
(10) sensors indicating the status of each seating position in the cab with green and red LED indicators as
follows:
Seat Occupied
Buckled
Green
Seat Occupied
Unbuckled
Red
No Occupant
Buckled
Red
No Occupant
Unbuckled
Not Illuminated
The SBMS will include an audible alarm that will be activated when a red illumination condition exists and the
parking brake is released, or a red illumination condition exists and the transmission is not in park.
HELMET HOLDER
There will be two (2) Zito UHI I -I helmet holder bracket(s) provided in the cab. The brackets will provide
quick access and secure storage of the helmct(s). The bracket location(s) will be determined at time of final
Page 22 of 92
inspection at Pierce mfg
CAB WARRANTY
Limited Warranty,
Except as provided below, and provided the vehicle will have been placed in service within 60 days after
delivery to the original purchaser as established by our original invoice, for a period of ten (I0) years after
delivery to the original purchaser or the first 100,000 miles of use, whichever first occurs, Pierce
Manufacturing Inc. ( "Pierce ") warrants to the user that its custom fire and/or rescue vehicle cab are free of
defects in design or workmanship in the cab tubular support and mounting supports and other cab structural
components identified in Pierce specifications. This limited warranty will apply only if the vehicle is properly
maintained and used in service which is normal to the particular vehicle. Normal service means service which
does not subject the vehicle to stresses or impacts greater than normally result from the careful use of the
vehicle or chassis. If the buyer discovers a defect or nonconformity it must notify Pierce in writing within 30
days after the date of discovery. This limited warranty is not transferable by the first user.
A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT LIGHT
An engine compartment light will be installed under the engine hood, of which the switch is an integral pan.
Light will have a .125" diameter hole in its lens to prevent moisture retention.
CAB INTERIOR LIGHTING
Auxiliary lights will be provided in the cab and consisting of
-Two (2) Weldon, Model 8081, redclear dome light located, one (1) on the of7icer side and one (1) on the
driver side, controlled by the following:
Clear forward light controlled by the door switch and the lens switch.
Red rearward tight controlled by the lens switch.
- Two (2) Adjustable Map Lights: With switches mounted on the cab ceiling.
CREW CAB INTERIOR LIGHTING
Auxiliary lights will be provided in the crew cab and consist of
Two (2) Weldon, Model 8081, RedClear dome lights located one (l) each side, controlled by the following:
Clear forward light controlled by the door switch and the lens switch.
Red rearward light controlled by the lens switch.
A courtesy light at each door opening, controlled by automatic door switches
STEP LIGHTS
For reduced overall maintenance costs compared to incandescent lighting, there will be four (4) Ritar,
Model M27HW2, LED, step lights provided. The lights will be installed at each cab and crew cab door,
one ( I) per step, in the driver side front doorstep, driver side crew cab doorstep, passenger side front
doorstep and passenger side crew cab doorstep.
The lights will be activated when the adjacent door is opened.
CAB DEFROSTER
There will be a 41,000 BTU/hr defroster in the cab located under the engine runnel.
Page 23 of 92
The defroster ventilation will be built into the design of the cab dash instrument panel and will be easily
removable for maintenance.
The defroster will have a three (3) speed blower, and temperature controls accessible to the driver and officer
The defroster ducts will he designed to provide maximum defrosting capabilities for the front cab windows.
CAB /CREW CAB HEATER
Two (2) auxiliary heaters with 32,000 BTIJ/hr each will be provided in the cab. The heaters will have a three
(3) speed blower, and temperature controls accessible to the driver and officer. There will also be louvers
located below the rear facing seat riser and below the driver and officer positions for airflow.
The heaters will be mounted, one (I ) within each rear facing seat riser.
CAB DEFROSTER CERTIFICATION
Visibility during inclement weather is essential to safe apparatus performance. The defroster system will
clear the required windshield cones in accordance with SAG J381 Windshield Ucfrosting.Systent.s Test
Procedure and Perfurmance Requirements - "Trucks. Buses. and Multipurpose Vehicles. The bidder will
certify that the defrost system design has been tested in a cold chamber and passes the SAE, J381 criteria.
CAB HEATER CERTIFICATION
(food cab heat performance and regulation provides a more effective working environment for personnel,
whether in- transit, or at a scene. The cab heaters will warm the cab 75 F from a cold -soak, within 30 minutes
when tested using the coolant supply methods found in SAE 1381. The bidder will certify that a substantially
similar cab has been tested and has met these criteria.
AIR CONDITIONING HOUSINGS
The housings protecting the air conditioning units on either side of the cab will be fabricated from smooth
aluminum and painted to match the exterior of the cab roof, in place of the standard 4 -way aluminum.
AIR CONDITIONING
A high performance, customized air conditioning system will be furnished inside the cab and crew cab.
A 19.1 cubic inch compressor will be installed on the engine.
The air conditioning system will be capable of cooling the average cab temperature from 100 degrees
Fahrenheit to 78 degrees Fahrenheit within 30 minutes at 50% relative humidity. The cooling
performance test will be run only after the cab has been heat soaked at 100 degrees Fahrenheit for a
minimum of 4 hours.
A combination condenser and evaporator with a BTU rating sufficient to meet the performance
specification will be installed on each side of the cab roof.
'I he evaporator unit will have a BTU rating sufficient to meet and exceed the performance specifications.
Adjustable air outlets will he strategically located on the evaporator cover as follows:
Two (2) will be directed towards the drivers location
Two (2) will be directed towards the officers location
Eight (8) will be directed towards the crew cab area
The air conditioner refrigerant will be R -134A, installed by a certified technician.
The air conditioner will be controlled by a single electronic control panel. For case of operation, the
Page 24 of 92
control panel will include variable adjustment for temperature and fan control and be conveniently
located on the dash in clear view of the driver. The control panel will include robust knobs for both fan
speed and temperature adjustment.
INTERIOR CAR INSULATION
The cab will be insulated with 1.50" insulation in the ceiling and side walls, 2.00" in the rear wall, and
1.00" insulation on the slant of a raised roof to reduce heat transfer into the cab.
The insulation will be covered with a vinyl liner or a metal pastel painted to match the interior.
An additional red warning light will be installed to the side of the exterior air conditioning housing. The light
will match the upper zone lighting package to meet NFPA requirements.
CAN INSTRUMENTATION
The cab instrument panel will include gauges, telltale indicator lamps, control switches, alarms, and a
diagnostic panel. The function of the instrument parcel controls and switches will be identified by a label
adjacent to each item. Actuation of the headlight switch will illuminate the labels in low light conditions.
Telltale indicator lamps will not be illuminated unless necessary. The cab instruments and controls will be
conveniently located within the forward cab section, forward of the driver. The gauge assembly and switch
panels are designed to he removable for case of service and low cost of ownership.
GAUGES
The gauge panel will include the following nine (9) black faced gauges with black bezels to monitor vehicle
performance:
Voltmeter gauge (volts):
Low volts (I 1.8 VDC)
Amber telltale light on indicator light display with steady tone alarm
High volts (15.5 VDC)
Amber telltale light on indicator light display with steady tone alarm
Engine Tachometer (RPM)
Speedometer MPII
Fuel level gauge (Empty - Full in fractions):
Low fuel (I `8 full)
Amber telltale light on indicator light display with steady tone alarm
Engine Oil pressure Gauge (PSI)
Low oil pressure to activate engine warning lights and alarms
Red telltale light on indicator light display with steady tone alarm
Front Air Pressure Gauges (PSI)
Low air pressure to activate warning lights and alarm
Red telltale light on indicator light display with steady tone alarm
Rear Air Pressure Gauges (PSI)
Low air pressure to activate warning lights and alarm
Red telltale light on indicator light display with steady tone alarm
Transmission Oil Temperature Gauge (Fahrenheit):
High transmission oil temperature activates warning lights and alarm
Amber telltale light on indicator light display with steady tone alarm
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge (Fahrenheit):
High engine temperature activates an engine warning light and alarms
Red telltale light on indicator light display with steady tone alarm
INDICATOR LAMPS
Page25 of92
To promote safety, the following telltale indicator lamps will be located on the instrument panel in clear view of
the driver. The indicator lamps will be "dead - front" design that is only visible when active. The colored
indicator lights will have descriptive text or symhols.
The following amber telltale lamps will be present:
Low coolant
Trac cntl (traction control) (where applicable)
Check engine
Check trans (check transmission)
Air rest (air restriction)
Driver door open
Passenger door open
Tower (tower raised) (where applicable)
DPP (engine diesel particulate filter regeneration)
HGf (engine high exhaust temperature) (where applicable)
ABS (antilock brake system)
MIL (engine emissions system malfunction indicator lamp) (where applicable)
Regen inhibit (engine emissions regeneration inhibit) (where applicable)
Trans temp (transmission temperature)
Side roll fault (where applicable)
Front air bag fault (where applicable)
Aux brake overheat (auxiliary brake overheat) (where applicable)
The following red telltale lamps will be present:
Ladder rack down
Parking brake
Stop engine
The following green telltale lamps will be present:
Left turn
Right turn
Battery on
Ignition
Aux brake (auxiliary brake engaged)(where applicable)
The following blue telltale lamps will be present:
Iligh beam
ALARMS
Audible steady tone warning alarm: A steady audible tone alarm will be provided whenever a warning message
is present.
INDICATOR LAMP AND ALARM PROVE -OUT
A system will be provided which automatically tests telltale indicator lights and alarms located on the cab
instrument panel. Telltale indicators and alarms will perform prove -out when the ignition switch is held in the
up position for 3 -5 seconds to ensure proper performance.
CONTROL SWITCHES
For case of use, the following controls will be provided immediately adjacent to the cab instrument panel within
easy reach of the driver. All switches will have backlit labels for low light applications.
Ileadlight/Parking light switch: A three (3) position maintained rocker switch will be provided. The
first switch position will deactivate all parking and headlights. The second switch position will
activate the parking lights. The third switch will activate the headlights.
Panel backlighting intensity control switch: A variable voltage control switch will be provided. The
Page 26 of 92
switch moved in the up direction increases the panel backlighting intensity to a maximum and the
switch moved in a down direction decreases the panel backlighting intensity to a minimum level.
Ignition switch: A three (3) position maintained +'maintained /momentary rocker switch will be
provided. The first switch position will deactivate vehicle ignition. The second switch position will
activate vehicle ignition. The third momentary position will perform prove -out on the telltale
indicators and alarms when the ignition switch is held in the up position for 3 -5 seconds to ensure
proper performance. A green indicator lamp is activated with vehicle ignition.
Engine start switch: A two (2) position momentary rocker switch will be provided. The first switch
position is the default switch position. The second switch position will activate the vehicle's engine.
The switch actuator is designed to prevent accidental activation.
I lazard switch will be incorporated into the steering column
I [eater and defroster controls.
Turn signal arm: A self- canceling turn signal with high beam headlight controls.
Windshield wiper control will have high, low, and intermittent modes.
Parking brake control: An air actuated push/pull park brake control.
Chassis hom control: Activation of the chassis horn control will be provided through the center of the
steering wheel.
CUSTOM SWITCH PANELS
The design of cab instrumentation will allow for emergency lighting and other switches to be placed within easy
reach of the operator thus improving safety. There will be positions for up to three (3) switch panels in the
overhead console on the driver's side, up to live (5) switch panels in the engine runnel console, and up to three
(3) switch panels in the overhead console on the officer's side. All switches have backlit labels for low light
applications.
High idle engagement switch: A maintained rocker switch with integral indicator lamp will be
provided. The switch will activate and deactivate the high idle function. The OK TO ENGAGE
HIGH IDLE indicator lamp must be active for the high idle function to engage. A green indicator
lamp integral to the high idle engagement switch will indicate when the high idle function is engaged.
OK to high idle indicator lamp: A green indicator light will be provided next to the high idle
activation switch to indicate that the interlocks have been met to allow high idle engagement.
Diesel particulate filter regeneration switch (where applicable)
Diesel particulate filter regeneration inhibit switch (where applicable)
DIAGNOSTIC PANEL
A diagnostic panel will be accessible while standing on the ground and will be located inside the driver's side
door left of the steering column. The diagnostic panel will allow diagnostic tools such as computers to connect
to various vehicle systems for improved troubleshooting providing a lower cost of ownership. Diagnostic
switches will allow engine and ABS systems to provide blink codes should a prohlcm exist. The diagnostic
panel will include the following:
Engine diagnostic port
Transmission and ABS diagnostic port
Page 27 of 92
Roll sensor diagnostic port
Engine diagnostic switch (blink codes flashed on check engine telltale indicator)
A13S diagnostic switch (blink codes flashed on A13S telltale indicator).
- Air Restriction Indicator (electronic with indicator light).
WIPER CONTROL.
Wiper control will consist of two (2) -speed individual windshield wiper control with intermittent feature and
windshield washer controls. The control will also have a "return to park" provision, which allows the wipers to
return to the stored position when the wipers are not in use.
WINDSHIELD WIPER DURABILITY CERTIFICATION
Visibility during inclement weather is essential to safe apparatus performance. Windshield wipers will survive
a 3 million cycle durability test in accordance with section 6.2 of SAN J 198 Windshield Wiper bysrems - Trucks,
BiLves and Multipurpose Vehicles. The bidder will certify that the wiper system design has been tested and that
the wiper system has met these criteria.
- Arruneter
HOURMETER - AERIAL. DEVICE
A hourmeter for the aerial device will be provided and located within the cab display or instrument panel.
AERIAL MASTER
There will be a master switch for the aerial operating electrical system provided.
LABEL, EMERGENCY 1 IGHTSWITCHES
The emergency light switch labels will have the "NFPA" text omitted. Each switch will he labeled for its
normal function (example: Roof Light, front Wanting, etc.).
RADIO WITH CD PLAYER
A Panasonic AM; TM /Weatherband stereo radio with compact disc player and a jack for a MP -3 player will be
installed.
'I he compact disc stereo radio will be mounted within reach of die driver.
The quantity and location of the speakers will be one (1) pair of 5.25" speakers located in the cab and one (1)
pair of 5.25" speakers located in the crew cab.
The Rpe and location of the antenna will be a roof - mounted rubber antenna located in an open space, on the cab
roof.
This radio will be installed without remote control.
SWIVEL MOUN'C
There will be one (1) lolumy Ray, Model 203 swivel mount bracket(s) provided for the fire department's radio
equipment. The swivel mount bracket(s) will be located at center of ceiling.
RADIO ANTENNA MOUNT
An antenna - mounting base, Model MATM, with 17 feet of coax cable and weatherproof cap will be provided
for a two -way radio. The mount will he located on the cab roof just to the rear of the officer seat. The cable
will be routed to the seat box on the officer side with enough cable for customer to route to the instrument panel
if needed.
Page 28 of 92
SWITCH PANELS
The built -in emergency light switch panel will have a master switch plus individual switches for selective
control. The switch panel will he located in the "overhead" position above the windshield on the driver's side to
allow for easy access. Switches will be rocker type with an indicator light, of which is an integral part of the
switch.
ELECTRICAL POWER CONTROL SYSTEM
A compartment will be provided in or under the cab to house the vehicles electrical power and signal circuit
protection and control components. The power and signal protection and control compartment will contain
circuit protection devices and power control devices. Power and signal protection and control components will
be protected against corrosion, excessive heat, excessive vibration, physical damage and water spray.
Serviceable components will be- readily accessible.
Circuit protection devices, which conform to SAE standard, will be utilized to protect each circuit. All circuit
protection devices will be sized to prevent wire and component damage when subjected to extreme current
overload. General protection circuit breakers will be Type -1 automatic reset (continuously resetting) and
conform to SAE. J553 or J258. PTO power circuits will be protected by Type III manual reset non - cycling
circuit breakers conforming to SAE J553 or 1258 which remain open until manually reset. When required,
automotive type fuses conforming to SAE J554, 11284, J 1888 or J2077 will be utilized to protect electronic
equipment.
Power control relays and solenoids will have a direct current (dc) rating of 125 percent of the maximum current
for which the circuit is protected.
Visual status indicators will be supplied to identify control safety interlocks and vehicle status. In addition to
visual status indicators, audible alarms designed to provide early warning of problems before they become
critical will be used.
VOLTAGE. MONITOR SYSTEM
A voltage monitor system will he provided to indicate the status of each battery system connected to the
vehicles electrical load. The monitor system will provide visual and audio warning when the system voltage is
above or below optimum levels.
POWER AND Glt( jJUD
A 12 -volt power stud and a grounding stud will be provided in the electrical component compartment for 2 -way
radio equipment.
F.MVRFI PROTECTION
The electrical system proposed will include means to control undesired electromagnetic and radio frequency
emissions. State of the art electrical system design and components will to used to insure radiated and
conducted EMI (electromagnetic interference) and RFI (radio frequency interference) emissions are suppressed
at their source.
The apparatus proposed will have the ability to operate in the electromagnetic environment t7pically found in
fire ground operations. The contractor will be able to demonstrate the EMI and RFI testing has been done on
similar apparatus and certifies that the vehicle proposed meets SAE J551 requirements.
EMURF1 susceptibility will be controlled by applying immune circuit designs, shielding, twisted pair wiring
and filtering. The electrical system will be designed for full compatibility with low level control signals and
high powered 2 -way radio communication systems. Harness and cable routing will be given careful attention to
Page 29 of 92
minimize the potential for conducting and radiated EMI -RFI susceptibility.
INFORMATION CENTER
An information center employing a 7" diagonal color LCD display will be encased in an ABS plastic
housing.
The information center will have the following specifications:
Operate in temperatures from 40 to 185 degrees F
An Optical Gel will be placed between the LCD and protective lens
Five weather resistant user interface switches
- Black enclosure with gray decal
Sunlight Readable
Linux operating system
Minimum of400nits rated display
OPERATION
The information center will be designed for easy operation for everyday use.
The page button will cycle from one screen to the next screen in a rotating fashion.
A video button will allow a NTSC signal into the information center to be displayed on the LCD.
Pressing any button while viewing a video feed will return the information center to the vehicle
information screens.
A menu button will provide access to maintenance, setup and diagnostic screens.
All other button labels will be specific to the information being viewed.
GENERAL SCREEN DESIGN
Where possible, background colors will be used to provide "At a Glance" vehicle information. If
information provided on a screen is within acceptable limits, a green background will be used If a
caution or warning situation arises the following will occur:
- An amber background/text color will indicate a caution condition.
- A red background,text color will indicate a warning condition.
Every screen will include the following:
- Exterior Ambient Temperature
- Time (12 or 24 hour mode)
- Text Alert Center:
- The information center will utilize an "Alert Centee' to display text messages for audible
alarm tones. The text messages will be wTitten to identify the items) causing the audible
alarm to sound. If more then one (1) text message occurs. the messages will cycle every
second until the problem(s) have been resolved. The background color for the "Alert Center"
will change to indicate the severity of the "warning" message. If a warning and a caution
condition occur simultaneously, the red background color will be shown for all alert center
messages.
- Button Labels: A label for each button will exist. The label will indicate the function for
each active button for each screen. Buttons that are not utilized on specific screens will have
a button label with no text.
PAGESCREENS
The Infornnatiun center will include the following screens:
Page 30 of 92
Load Manager Screen: A list of items to be load managed will be provided. The list will
provide:
- Description of the load
- Individual load shed priority: The lower the priority number the earlier the device
will be shed should a low voltage condition occur.
- Load Status: The screen will indicate if a load has been shed (disabled) or not shed.
"At a Glance' color features are utilized on this screen
Do Not Move Truck: The Do Not Move Truck screen will indicate the approximate location
and type of item that is open or is not stowed for travel. The actual status of the following
devices will be indicated:
- Driver Side Cab Door
- Passengers Side Cab Door
- Driver Side Crew Cab Door
- Passenger's Side Crew Cab Door
- Driver Side Body Doors
- Passenger's Side Body Doors
- Rear Body Door(s)
- Ladder Rack (if applicable)
- Deck Gun (if applicable)
- Light Tower (if applicable)
- Hatch Door (if applicable)
- Stabilizers (if applicable)
- Steps (if applicable)
- Any other device that is opened, extended, or deployed that creates a hazard or is
likely to cause damage to the apparatus if the apparatus is moved, will cause an
"Alert Center" message if the parking brake is disengaged.
Chassis Information: The following information gill be shown:
- Engine RPM
- Fuel Level
- Battery Voltage
- Engine Coolant Temperature
- Engine Oil Pressure
"At a Glance" color features are utilized on this screen
Active Alarms List: This screen will show a list of all active text messages. The list items text
will match the text messages shown in the "Alert Center ". The date and time the message
occurred is displayed with each message in the list.
MENU SCREENS
The following screens will be available through the Menu button:
View System Information: A detailed list of vehicle infonnation:
- Battery Volts
- Pump Hours
- Transmission Oil Temperature
- Pump Engaged
- Engine Coolant Level
- Enginc Oil Level
- Oil level will only be shown when the engine is not running
Page 31 of 92
Power Steering Level
Set daytime and nighttime Display Brightness:
- Brightness: Increase and decrease
- Default setting button
Configure Video Mode:
- Set Video Contrast
- Set Video Color
- Set Video Tint
Set Startup Screen:
- Choose the screen that will be active at vehicle power -up
Set Date & Time:
- 12 or 24 hour format
- Set time
- Set date
View Active Alarms:
- Shows a list of all active alarms
- Date and time of the occurrence is shown with each alarm
- Silence alarms
- All alarms are silenced
System Diagnostics:
- Module type and ID number
- Module version
- Module diagnostics information:
- Input or output number
- Circuit number connected to that input or output
- Circuit name (item connected to the circuit)
- Status of tic input or output
- Power and Constant Current module diagnostic information
Hutton fimctions and button labels may change with each screen.
VEHICLE DATA RECORDER
A vehicle data recorder (VDR) will be provided. The VDR will be capable of reading and storing vehicle
information. The VDR will be capable of operating in a voltage range from 8VDC to 16VDC. The VDR will
not interfere with, suspend, or delay any communications that may exist on the CAN data link during the power
up, initialization, runtime, or power down sequence. The VDR will continue operation upon termination of
power or at voltages below 8VDC for a minimum of IOms.
The vehicle data recorder will be capable of recording the following data via hardwired and/or CAN inputs
Vehicle Speed -
MPH
Acceleration -
MPIIIsec
Deceleration -
MPIVsec
Engine Speed -
RPM
Engine fhrotdc Position -
% of Full Throttle
ABS Event-
Oil Off
Seat Occupied Status -
Yes /No by Position (7 -12 Seating Capacity)
Page 32 of-92
Seat Belt Buckled Status - Yes/No by Position (7 -12 Seating Capacity)
Master Optical Warning Device Switch - On'Off
Time - 24 I four Time
Date - Year /Month/Dav
INTERCOM SYSTEM
A ten (10) position, David Clark, model U3800, intercom system with radio interface at three (3) positions will
be provided. The driver, officer, six (6) crew cab, turntable, and tiller cab locations will have intercom
capability. The driver, officer, and turntable will have radio interface capability.
- Driver position will have radio interface capability.
- Officer position will have radio interface capability.
- Turntable position will have radio interface capability.
- Six (6) Crew will have intercom only
- One (1) Tiller Cab will have intercom only
The following components will be supplied with this system:
- One (l) -U3800 Intercom Unit (2 Crew).
- Two (2) -U3806 Dual Headset Intercom Stations (4 Crew).
- One (I) -U3815 Radio Interface Module (Officer).
- One (I) -U3811 Radio Interface Module (Driver).
-One (I)- U3815A Radio Interface Module (Pump Panel).
- One (1 )-1)3801 Intercom Only Single Headset Module (Tiller Cab).
- Two (2) -C3023 Headset Belt Station (Turntable. Tiller Cab).
-Seven (7)- 113342 headsets. (Officer, 6 Crew').
- One (1) -143341 Single Ear Headsets. (Driver fumtable).
- One (I)- 113805 Radio Cord Junction Module.
- fight (8) Headset Hangar Hooks
All necessary cables and connectors will be provided.
RADIO INTERFACE
Due to the combination of the mobile radio and the brand of intercom system, a mobile radio interface adapter
is not required for this application.
CAB ROOF COVERING
Horizontal cab roof surfaces will be covered with bright aluminum treadplate. Edges and fastening screws will
Page 33 of 92
be properly caulked to prevent water from leaking under aluminum. Front and side warning lights will not be
mounted on top of treadplate. The trcadplate will extend and terminate next to the wanting lights.
BATTERY SYSTEM
Six (6) 12 volt, Dcka Model 1131 XMF batteries that include the following features will be provided:
- 1000 CCA (cold cranking amps)
- 185 reserve capacity
- High cycle
- Maintenance free
- Group 31
- Rating of 6000 CCA at 0 degrees Fahrenheit
- 1110 minutes of reserve capacity
- Threaded posts
BATTERY SYSTEM
A single starting system will be provided.
An ignition switch and starter button will be located on the instrument panel.
MASTER BATTERY SWITCH
A master battery switch, to activate the battery system, will be provided inside the cab within easy reach of the
driver.
An indicator light will be provided on the instrument panel to notify the driver of the status of the battery
system.
BATTERY COMPARTMENTS
Batteries will be placed on non - corrosive mats and be stored in well - ventilated compartments located under the
cab. The battery hold - downs will be of a non - corrosive material. All bolts and nuts will be stainless steel.
I Leavy -duty battery cables will he used to provide maximum power to the electrical system. Cables will be
color - coded.
Battery terminal connections will be coated with anti - corrosion compound. Battery solenoid terminal
connections will be encapsulated with semi - permanent rubberized compound.
There will be a door in the crew cab floor to provide access to the battery terminals.
JUMPER STUDS
One ( I ) set of battery juniper studs with plastic color -coded covers will be installed on the front side of battery
box on the driver's side. This will allow enough room for easy jumper cable access. A tag will be provided for
posit i velnegative terminals.
BATTERY CHARGER
A Newmar model PT -40, three stage battery charger, will be provided. A Newmar DC Volt Meter, model DCV
indicating the state of charge will be included.
The vehicle battery output will be capable of supplying up to 40 amps for charging the batteries.
The battery charger will be wired to the 120 -volt shoreline to activate automatically when the power is
connected.
Page 34 of 92
Battery charger will be located in the front left body compartment, mounted Compartment behind cab
The battery charger indicator will be located on the driver's seat riser.
CHARGING INDICATOR
A green indicator light, remote mounted next to the battery charger receptacle, will be provided. The light will
indicate when the battery charging receptacle is active.
DUAL ALTERNATORS
A pair of Lecce- Neville 270 amp alternators will be provided. They will have a rated output current of 540
amps, as measured by SAE, method J56. The alternators will feature an integral, fail -sate regulator and rectifier
The alternators will be connected to the power and ground distribution system with heavy -duty cables sized to
cam the full rated alternator output.
RADIO ANTENNA MOUNTS
There will be three (3) antenna mounting bases, Model MATM with 25 feet of coax cable and weatherproof
caps provided.
The mounts will be located cab roof.
The cable will be routed across roof behind fightbar.
SPEAKERS
There will be one (1) radio speakers with volume control provided. Wiring will be routed from the speakers
and volume control to Plush mount in tiller cab drivers side. Speakers will be located N /A.
SPARE CIRCUIT
There will be four (4) pair of wires, including a positive and a negative, installed on the apparatus.
The above wires will have the following features:
The positive wire will be connected directly to the battery power.
The negative wire will be connected to ground.
Wires will be protected to 15 amps at 12 volts DC.
Power and ground will terminate 2 at rear forward facibg seats and 2 at dash at Driver and
Officer.
Termination will he with 15 amp, power point plug with rubber cover.
Wires will be sized to 125% of the protection.
This circuit(s) may be load managed when the parking brake is set.
SPARE, CIRCUIT
There will be two (2) pair of wires, including a positive and a negative, installed on the apparatus.
The above wires will have the following features:
fhe positive wire will be connected directly to die battery power.
The negative wire will be connected to ground.
Wires will be protected to 15 amps at 12 volts DC.
Power and ground will terminate 2 on back of engine doghouse.
'termination will be with 15 amp, power point plug with rubber cover.
Page 35 of'92
Wires will he sized to 125% of the protection.
This circuit(s) may be load managed when the parking brake is set.
SPARE CIRCUIT
There will be four (4) pair of wires, including a positive and a negative, instilled on the apparatus.
The above wires will have the following features
The positive wire will be connected directly to the battery power.
The negative wire will be connected to ground.
Wires will be protected to 15 amps at 12 volts DC.
Power and growd will terminate at base of each rear facing EMS Compartment.
Termination will be with six (6) position terminal strip.
Wires will be sized to 125% of the protection.
This circuit(s) may be load managed when the parking brake is set.
SPARE: CIRCUIT
There will be two (2) pair of wires, including a positive and a negative, installed on the apparatus.
The above wires will have the following features:
The positive wire will he connected directly to the battery power.
The negative wire will be connected to ground.
Wires will be protected to 20 amps at 12 volts DC.
Power and ground will terminate Behind each seat driver and officer.
Termination will be with six (6) position terminal strip.
Wires will be sized to 125% of the protection.
This circuit(s) may he load managed when the parking brake is set.
ELECTRONIC LOAD MANAGEMENT
A Kussmaul electronic load management (ELM) system will be provided that monitors the vehicles 12 -volt
electrical system, and automatically reduces the electrical load in the event of a low voltage condition and by
doing so, ensures the integrity of the electrical system.
The ELM will monitor the vehicle's voltage while at the scene (parking brake applied). It will sequentially shut
down individual electrical loads when the system voltage drops below a preset value. Ten (10) separate
electrical loads will be controlled by the load manager. The ELM will sequentially re- energize electrical loads
as the system voltage recovers.
The (EI,M) will also include a sequencer function which will be used to enable channels 1 -5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10.
The (ELM) will sequentially re- energize electrical loads as the system voltage recovers.
SEQUENCER
A warning light sequencer will be provided that automatically turns the emergency lights on and off in a preset
sequence.
The sequencer will be wired in conjunction with the emergency master light switch.
When the switch is activated the lights will be turned on in sequence one by one at 1/2 second intervals thereby
Page 36 of 92
protecting the alternator from power surges. When turned off the same process will deactivate the warning
lights in sequence to allow a gradual decrease in alternator output, rather than dumping the load.
AMP DRAW REPORT
The bidder will provide, at the time of bid and delivery, an itemized print out of the expected amp draw of the
entire vehicle's electrical system.
The manufacturer of the apparatus will provide the following:
1) Documentation of the electrical system performance tests.
2) A written load analysis, which will include the following:
A) The nameplate rating of the alternator.
B) The alternator rating under the conditions specified per:
Applicable NFPA 1901 or 1906 (Current Edition).
C) The minimum continuous load of each component that is specified per:
Applicable NFPA 1901 or 1906 (Current Edition).
D) Additional loads that, when added to the minimmrt continuous load, determine the total connected
load.
E) Each individual intennittent load.
All of the above listed items will be provided by the bidder per the applicable NFPA 1901 or 1906 (Current
Edition).
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
Exterior lighting will meet or exceed Federal Department of Transportation, Federal Motor Vehicle Safery
Standards and National Fire Protection Association requirements in effect at time of proposal.
Front headlights will be halogen, rectangular shape, one (1) pair mounted in each front trim housing.
The LED directional lights will wrap- around on the outside corners of the trim housing. The headlight and
LED directional lights will be in the same assembly.
Five (5) I.I:D clearance and marker lights will be installed across the leading edge of the cab.
WARNING LIGHTS (Cab Facel
Two (2) pair of Whelen model 60 "OOF'R LED lights will he installed on the cab face, above the headlights,
mounted in a common bezel.
The outer I.EDS will be required for NFPA and will meet or exceed the NFPA required light output for the
front lower zone.
The color of these LFDs will be red Super I.F.D red lens.
The inner LEDs will be additional lighting.
The color of these lights will be red Super LED(red lens.
Both sets of lights will be activated by the same switch in the cab.
BACK -UP ALARM
An F:CCO, Model SA917 -PM2, solid -state electronic audible back -up alarm that actuates when the truck is
Page37 of92
shifted into reverse will be provided. The device will sound at 60 pulses per minute and automatically adjust its
volume to maintain a minimum five (5) dBA above surrounding environmental noise levels.
MANUAL., FIRE APPARATUS PARTS
fwo (2) custom parts manuals for the complete fire apparatus will be provided in hard copy with the completed
unit.
One (I) compact disc (CD) will also be provided that will include all of the information from the above manual.
The manual will contain the following:
- Job number
- Part numbers with full descriptions
- fable of contents
- Parts section sorted in functional groups reflecting a major system, component, or assembly
- Pans section sorted in Alphabetical order
- Instructions on how to locate a parts
The manual will be specifically written for the chassis and body model being purchased. It will not be a generic
manual for a multitude of different chassis and bodies.
SERVICE PARTS INTERNET SITE
The service pans information included in this manual is also available on the Pierce website. The website
oftcrs additional functions and features not contained in this manual, such as digital photographs and line
drawings of select items. The website also features electronic search tools to assist in locating parts quickly.
MANUALS. CHASSIS SERVICE
Two (2) chassis service manuals containing parts and service information on major components will be
provided with the completed unit.
One (1) compact disk (CD) will also be provided that will include all of the information from the above manual.
The manuals will contain the following sections:
- lob number
- Table of contents
- Troubleshooting
- Front Axle /Suspension
- Brakes
- L'ngine
-Tires
- Wheels
- Cab
- Electrical, DC
- Air Systems
- Plumbine
- Appendix
The manual will be specifically written for the chassis model being purchased. It will not be a generic manual
for a multitude of difcrent chassis and bodies.
MANUALS, CHASSIS OPERATION
Page 38 of'92
The compartment will be 30.00" wide x 37.75' high x 8.00" deep. The door opening will be 25.50" wide x
31.25' high. The transverse section will be 19.38" wide x 15.50" high.
The compartment will be fabricated out of smooth aluminum painted job color. Bright aluminum treadplate
will be provided on the top of the compartment.
The compartment will be furnished with a vertically hinged, lap style compartment door on each side that have
a D handle latch and positive door hold open device.
COMPARTMENTATION, DRIVER SIDE
Driver side compartmentation will consist of the following:
Two (2) compartments will be provided in the front body section on the driver side. Each compartment
will be full - height.
The forward compartment will be 47.13" wide x 55.63" high x 24.50" deep with a door openurg of
39.00" wide x 47.75' high.
The rear compartment will be 44.50" wide x 55.63" high x 24.50" deep with a door opening of 39.00"
wide x 47.75' high.
The upper 38.75" ofeach compartment will be transverse to the passenger side front compartmentation.
Both compartments will have roll -up doors.
Two (2) compartments will be provided in the center body section on the driver side. Each compartment
will be full - height.
The forward compartment will he 47.13" wide x 55.63" high x 24.50" deep with a door opening of
39.00" wide x 47.75' high.
The upper 38.75' of the forward compartment will be transverse to the passenger side front
compartmentation.
The rear compartment will be 44.50" wide x 55.63" high x 24.50" deep with a door opening of 39.00"
wide x 47.75' high.
Both compartments will have roll -up doors.
Two (2) compartments will be provided in the rear body section on the driver side.
The forward compartment will be 69.00" wide x 49.63" high x 24.50" deep, with a door opening of
63.50" wide x 45.75' high. This compartment will he located ahead of the rear wheels.
The rearward compartment will be 49.00" wide x 49.63" high x 12.00" deep with a door opening of
43.50" wide x 45.75' high. This compartment will be located behind the rear wheels.
Both compartments will have roll -up doors.
COMPARTMENTATION. PASSENGER SIDE
Passenger side compartmentation will consist of the following:
Page40 of92
Two (2) compartments will be provided in the front body section on the passenger side. Each
compartment will be full - height.
The forward compartment will be 47.13" wide x 55.63" high x 24.50" deep with a door opening of
39.00" wide x 47.75" high.
The rear compartment will be 44.50" wide x 55.63" high x 24.50" deep with a door opening of- 39.00"
wide x 47.75' high.
The upper 38.75' of each compartment will be transverse to the driver side front compartnnentation.
Both compartments will have roll -up doors.
Two (2) compartments will be provided in the center body section on the passenger side. Each
compartment will be full- height.
The forward compartment will be 47.13" wide x 55.63" high x 24.50" deep with a door opening of
39.00" wide x 47.75' high.
The upper 38.75" of the forward compartment will be transverse to the driver side front
compartmentation.
The rear compartment will be 44.50" wide x 55.63" high x 24.50" deep with a door opening of 39.00"
wide x 47.75' high.
Both compartments will have roll -up doors.
Two (2) compartments shall be provided in the rear body section on the passenger side.
The forward compartment shall be 69.00" wide x 24.13" high x 24.50" deep, with a door opening of
63.50" .vide x 18.75" high. This compartment shall be located ahead of the rear wheels.
The rearward compartment shall be 49.00" wide x 49.63" high x 12.00" deep with a door opening of
43.50" wide x 45.75' high. This compartment shall be located behind the rear wheels.
Both compartments shall have roll -up doors.
ROLL-UP DOOR
Twelve (12) compartment doors will be installed on the side compartments, double faced, aluminum
construction, painted one color to match the lower portion of the body and manufactured by A &A
Manufacturing (Gortitc).
Lath sections will bean interlocking rib design and will be individually replaceable without complete
disassembly of door.
Between each slat at the pivoting joint will be a PVC inner seal to prevent metal to metal contact and
prevent dirt or moisture from entering the compartments. Seats wilt allow door to operate in extreme
temperatures ranging from plus 180 to minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit. Side, top and bottom seals will be
provided to resist ingress of dirt and weather and be made of Santoprene.
All hinges, barrel clips and end pieces will he nylon 06. All nylon components will withstand
temperatures from plus 300 to minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit. Hardened plastic will not be acceptable.
Page 41 of 92
A polished stainless steel lift bar with locking key latches shall be provided for each roll -up door. The
keys shall be model 9751to match all compartment doors and cab doors. will be provided for opening
door. lift bar will be located at the bottom of door and have latches on the outer extrusion of the doors
frame. A ]edge will be supplied over lift bar for additional area to aid in closing the door.
Doors will be constructed fiom an aluminum box section. The exterior surface of each slat will be flat.
The interior surfaces will be concave to provide strength and prevent loose equipment from jamming the
door from inside.
l'o conserve space in the compartments, the spring roller assembly will not exceed 3.00" in diameter. A
roll -up door that retracts below the compartment ceiling (garage door style) will not acceptable.
The header for the roll -up door assembly will not exceed 4.00 ".
A heavy -duty magnetic switch will be used for control of "open compartment door" warning lights.
All mechanical components of the door will be warranted to be free from defects in materials and
workmanship for the lifetime of the vehicle. All parts covered under this warranty will be to the original
owner.
Except as provided below, and provided the vehicle has been placed in service within 60 days after
delivery to the original purchaser as established by our origiral invoice, for a period of six (6) years after
delivery to the original purchaser. A &A Manufacturing Inc. ( "A &A ") warrants to the user that its roll up
doors (if painted) are free of blistering, peeling. bubbling, or any other adhesion defect caused by
defective manufacturing methods or paint material selection for exterior surfaces of the roll up doors.
This limited warranty will apply only if the vehicle is properly maintained and used in service which is
normal to the particular vehicle. Normal service means service, which does not subject the vehicle to
stresses or impacts greater than normally result from the careful use of the vehicle. if the buyer
discovers a defect or nonconformity, the buyer must notify Pierce in writing within 30 days after the date
of discovery. This limited warranty is not transferable by the first user and is applicable to the vehicle in
the following percentage costs of warranty repair, if any:
Months Adhesion Blistering Bubbling Corrosion Cracking Gloss Color Retention
0 to 12
100%
1005'0
100%
100 " /10
100%
100%
100%
13 to 24
100%
100%
1GO%
100%
100%
100%
100%
25 to 36
1005'.
1000,10
100%
1000 /0
1000/0
100%
100%
37 to 48
50%
500,v
50%
50%
1000/0
100%
100%
49 to 60
25%
25%
25%
250/0
50%
50%
50%
61 to 72
25%
25%
25%
25%
50%
50%
50 %.
In addition, the door will also be warranted against corrosion perforation for a period of ten (10) years.
DOOR GUARD
Twelve (12) compartment doors will include a guard/drip pan designed to protect the roll -up door from damage
when in the retracted position and contain any water spray. The guard will be fabricated from stainless steel
and installed at each roll up door.
KEYED LOCKS)
A keyed lock will be furnished for Twelve (12) compartment doors. The compartmenration, to have a keyed
lock, will be All roll up doors.
Page 42 of 92
DOOR FRAME SCUFFPLATE
Thirteen (13) scutiplates will be provided for the lower door frame(s) all roll ups and rear ladder compartment.
Each scuffplate will be brushed stainless steel with a.38" lip down.
PULL-OUT TRAY
There will six (6) slide -out trays, without sides, and a capacity of 500 pounds provided. Capacity rating will be
in the extended position.
Slides will be General Device ball bearing type for case of operation and years of dependable service.
Automatic locks will be provided for both the "in" and "out" positions. The trip mechanism for it will be
located at the front of the tray for case of use with a gloved hand.
Tray location will he D3, D41 D5 and P3, P4,135.
Heavy -duty steel angle iron assembly will support the body under the compartment floor. It will be attached to
the chassis frame for load transfer and to reduce stress on body.
PULL -OUT TRAY
There will be two (2) slide -out trays with 2.00" sides and a capacity of 500 pounds provided. Capacity rating
will be in the extended position.
Slides will be General Device ball bearing type for case of operation and years of dependable service.
Automatic locks will be provided for both the "in" and "out" positions. The trip mechanism for it will be
located at the front of the tray for ease of use with a 9 loved hand.
Tray location will be TBD.
1 ieasy -duty steel angle iron assembly will support the body under the compartment floor. It will be attached to
the chassis frame for load transfer and to reduce stress on body.
PULL -OUT ADJUSTABLE HEIGHT TRAY
There will be two (2) slide -out trays with 2.00" sides and a capacity of 500 pounds provided. Capacity rating
will be in the extended position.
Slides will be Jonathan brand with ball bearings for case of operation and years of dependable service.
'fray location will be To be determined.
Automatic locks will tx provided for both the "in" and "out" positions. The trip mechanism for it will be
located at the front of the tray for case of use with a gloved hand.
Each tray will be adjustable up and down within the compartment.
TWO (2) -WAY UTILITY TRAY
'['here will be two (2) slidc-out trays provided.
The capacity rating will he 500 pounds minimum in the extended position.
Interior tray dimensions will be 85.00" long x 4.00" deep x as wide as possible for the compartment
Pave 43 of 92
Tray will slide out to either side of the vehicle; two - thirds (2./3) of its length.
The vertical location of the tray within the compartment will be adjustable.
The construction will consist of .188" thick aluminum for the tray bottom, and special aluminum extrusions for
the tray sides, end, and tracks.
Corners will be welded to form a rigid unit.
Tray will be supported with a minimum of six (6) ball bearing rollers; each rated for a minimum 500 pound
load.
Automatic locks will be provided for both the in and out tray positions.
to be determined.
CABINET
one (1) cabinet(s) with motion latch aluminum drawers will be provided.
Each cabinets will include four (4) drawers.
The cabinet(s) will have two (2) drawers that are 3.00" tall and two (2) drawers that are 6.00" tall. The drawers
will be stacked one above the other, starting with the 6.00" drawers on the bottom.
The color of the cabinet(s) will be grey.
The location of the cabinet(s) will be Compartment D -6 Drivers side next to air kwik and next to divider.
PARTITION, VERTICAL COMPARTMENT
'rwo (2) partitions will be bolted in D -5 fP -5. Each partition will he the full vertical height of the compartment.
FLOOR EXTENSION
There will be a compartment floor extension provided,
frame rails to within an inch of the compartment door.
1.00" return Flange.
The floor extension will extend from the area over the
The floor extension will have a 2.00" vertical lip and a
A total of one (1) will be provided and located D -6 P-6.
TROUGH, STORAGE
A trough shall be provided to store a stokes basket in above compartment D -2. The trough shall be
approximatehy 80.00" long x 1.00" high x 25.00" wide. The trough shall transverse from one side of the body to
the other.
The trough shall he fabricated from smooth aluminum and have a treadplate, drop down door on each end.
ADJUSTABLE SHELVES
There will be six (6) shelves, with a minimum capacity of 215 pounds provided. The shelf construction will
consist of. 125" pan - shaped aluminum with 2,00" sides. Each shelf will be infinitely adjustable by means of a
threaded fastener, which slides in a track.
'The location will be to be determined.
Page 44 of 92
MOUNTING TRACKS
There will be twelve (12) sets of tracks for mounting shelf(s) in I set tracks in each compartment. These tracks
will be installed vertically to support the adjustable shelf(s).
RUR RAIL
Bottom edge of the side compartments will be trimmed with a bright aluminum extruded rub rail.
Trim will be 2.12" high with 1.38" flanges turned outward for rigidity.
The rub rails will not be an integral part of the body construction, which allows replacement in the event of
damage.
BODY FENDER CROWNS
Stainless steel fender crowns will be provided around the rear wheel openings. These fender crowns must be
wide enough to prevent splashing onto the body from the 315180R22.5 tires on a 30,000# rear axle.
A rubber welting will be provided between the bode and the crown to seal the scam and restrict moisture from
entering.
A dielectric barrier will be provided between the fender crown fasteners (screws) and the fender sheet metal to
prevent corrosion.
AIR BOTTLE STORAGE BIN
A storage bin will be provided for storage of ten (10) air battles. This storage bin will be installed P -2. Each
separate air bottle storage compartment will be 7.50" square x 23.00" deep. The storage bin will be formed out
of aluminum and the flooring lined with rubber.
EXTENSION LADDER
There will be two (2) 35', two (2) section, aluminum, Dun - Safety. Series 1200 -A extension ladder(s) provided.
ADDED EXTENSION LADDER
There will be a 30', two (2) section, aluminum, Duo - Safety Series 1200A extension ladder provided.
EXTENSION LADDERS AERIAL. PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT
NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, section 8.7.2 requires two (2) extension ladders.
The extension ladders are not on the apparatus as manufactured. There will be extension ladder(s) provided
and installed by the fire department. The ladder(s) will he a .
ROOF LADDER
There will be one (1) 16' aluminum, Duo- Safcry, Series 875 -A roof Iadder(s) provided.
ADDED ROOF LADDER
There will be one (1) 20' roof, aluminum, Series 875 -A provided.
FOLDING LADDER. AERIAL
There will be a 12' aluminum, Duo- Safety, Series 585 -A folding ladder provided.
GROUND LADDER STORAGE
The ground ladders will be stored within the torque box and be removable from the rear. Ladders will be
enclosed to prevent road dirt and debris from fouling or damaging the ladders. The ladders will rest in full -
length stainless steel slides and are arranged in such a manner that any one (1) ladder can be removed without
Page 45 of 92
having to move or remove any other ladder. A Gortite roll -up door will be provided at the rear, double faced,
aluminum construction, painted one color to snatch the lower portion of the body and manufactured by A &A
Manufacturing (Gortite). The latching mechanism will consist of a full length lift bar lock with latches on the
outer extrusion of the door frame.
A door guard will be provided to prevent tools inside the torque box from damaging the roll -up door.
An aluminum treadplate box, for a model 17 1.0' Giant ladder, will be mounted above body with stoakesabove
D -2 and P -2. A velcro strap with footman loops will secure the ladder.
One (I ) 10' aluminum, Series 585 -A Duo- Safety folding ladder will be installed in a U- shaped trough inside the
ladder storage compartment.
One Model 10102 Little Giant folding ladder will be provided. The stored dimensions will be 55.00" high x
24.50" wide x 8,00" deep. The weight will be 35 pounds.
PIKE. POLES
There will be one (1) 12 foot pike pole(s) with fiberglass I -beam handles provided. The pike pole(s) will be
stored in tubular holders located in the ground ladder storage compartment.
PIKE. POLE 8 FT
There will be one (1) 8 foot pike pole(s) with fiberglass I beam handles provided. The pike poles) will be
stored in mbular holders located in the ground ladder storage compartment.
PIKE; POLE 6 NT
There will be one (1) 6 foot pike poles) with fiberglass I beam handles provided. The pike pole(s) will be
stored in tubular holders located in the ground ladder storage compartment.
PIKE POLE 3 FT
There will be one (1) 3 foot pike pole(s) with fiberglass shaft and "D" handles shipped loose.
- two (2) 10 foot Nupla Ventilation Itook(s): Fiberglass w; "D" handle
ROPE TIE DOWNS
two (2) pair of rope tic downs will be provided at the tiller trailer gooseneck area. Equal quantities will be
provided on each sidc.The tie downs will be rated for a maximum 6000 pounds.
ELECTRICAL
All 12 -volt electrical equipment installed by the apparatus manufacturer will conform to modern automotive
practices. All wiring will be high temperature type. Wiring will be run in loom, where exposed, and have
grommets where wire passes through sheet metal. Automatic reset circuit breakers will be provided which
conform to SAE Standards. Wiring will be color, function and number coded. Function and number codes will
be continuously imprinted on all wiring harness conductors at 2.00" intervals. Exterior exposed wire connectors
will be positive locking, and environmentally scaled to withstand elements such as temperature extremes.
moisture and automotive fluids.
Electrical wiring and equipment will be installed utilizing the following guidelines:
(1) All holes made in the roof will be caulked with silicon. Large fender washers, liberally caulked. will be
used when fastening equipment to the underside of the cab roof.
(2) Any electrical component that is installed in an exposed area will be mounted in a manner that will not
Page 46 of 92
allow moisture to accumulate in it. Exposed area will be defined as any location outside of the cab or body
(3) Electrical components designed to be removed for maintenance will not be fastened with nuts and bolts.
Metal screws will be used in mounting these devices. Also a coil of wire will be provided behind the appliance
to allow them to be pulled away from mounting area for inspection and service work.
(4) Corrosion preventative compound will be applied to all terminal plugs located outside of the cab or body.
All non - waterproof connections will require this compound in the plug to prevent corrosion and for easy
separation (of the plug).
(5) All lights that have their sockets in a weather exposed area will have corrosion preventative compound
added to the socket terminal area.
(6) All electrical terminals in exposed areas will have silicon (1890) applied completely over the metal portion
of the terminal. All emergency light switches will be mounted on a separate panel installed in the cab. A
master warning light switch and individual switches will be provided to allow pre - selection of emergency lights.
fhe light switches will be 'rocker" type with an internal indicator light to show when switch is energized. All
switches will he properly identified and mounted in a removable panel for ease in servicing. Identification of
the switches will he done by either printing or etching on the switch panel. The switches and identification will
be illuminated.
All lights and reflectors, required to comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard #108, will be
furnished. Rear identification lights will be recessed mounted for protection. Lights and wiring mounted in the
rear bulkheads will be protected from damage by installing a false bulkhead inside the rear compartments.
An operational test will be conducted to ensure that any equipment that is permanently attached to the electrical
system is properly connected and in working order.
The results of the tests will be recorded and provided to the purchaser at time of delivery.
STEP LIGHTS
There will be a total of sixteen (16) Ri -Tar, Model M27 -06HW2 Super LED step lights provided f'or
access to the tiller cab and turntable.
The step lights will be actuated by the aerial master switch in the cab.
All other steps on the apparatus will be illuminated per the current edition of NFPA 1901.
REAR FMVSS LIGHTING
The rear stop!tail and directional (.ED lighting will consist of the following:
Two (2) Whelen model 60ROOXRR red LED stop/tail lights.
Two (2) Whelen model 60AOOTAR amber LED arrow turn lights.
Each light will be installed separately at the rear with a Flange.
Four (4) red reflectors will be provided.
A Weldon, Model 23882- 2600 -00, license plate bracket will be mounted on the driver's side above the warning
lights. A Weldon. Model 9186- 23882 -30, step lamp will illuminate the license plate.
Two (2) Peterson, Model M -392, backup lights will be provided
Page 47 of 92
REAR IDIMARKER DOT LIGHTING
The three (3) identification lights located at the rear will be installed per the following:
Ri -Tar. Model M27, LED
As close as practical to the vertical centerline.
Centers spaced not less than six (6) inches or more than twelve (12) inches apart.
Red in color.
All at the same height.
The four (4) clearance lights located at the rear will be installed per the following:
Ri= far, Model M27, LED
To indicate the overall width of the vehicle.
One (1) each side of the vertical centerline.
All at the same height.
As near the top as practical.
To be visible from the rear and the side.
One (.1 ) each side, facing the side.
One (1) each side, facing the rear.
Per FMVSS 108 and CMVSS 108 requirements.
MAP LIGHT
One (1) map light with goose neck with switch control on base of light will be provided. Each map light will be
a Sunuex, model 742, with red lens and be located pass side dash by A pillar. Each map light will be provided
with an 20.00" long flexible neck that exits the top of the chassis mount.
MARKER LIGHTS
There will be 12 lights of Truck -Lite, model 35200, LED, marker lights installed on this apparatus.
The marker lights will be wired to the running lights of the vehicle.
The lights will be located where required to meet DOT. These lights will be installed either recessed or with
metal flanges to protect them from most damage.
Yellow lights will he installed in any location forward of the rear most point of the vehicle. A single red light
will be installed at the rear most point only.
MARKER LIGHTS
'there will be one (1) pair of amber and red I -ED marker lights with rubber arm, located at rear sides.
The amber lens will face the front and the red lens will face the rear of the truck.
These lights will be activated with the running lights of the vehicle.
"DO NOT MOVE APPARATUS" INDICATOR
A WhOen Model L32LRF red LED indicator beacon, located in the driving compartment, will be illuminated
automatically per the current NFPA requirements. The light will be labeled "Do Not Move Apparatus If Light
Is On ".
The same circuit that activates (lie Do Not Move Apparatus indicator will activate chassis electric horn
intermittently when the parking brake is released.
OPEN DOOR INDICATOR LIGHT
two (2) red indicator lights will be provided and located in clear view of the driver, warning of aft open
Page 48 of 92
passenger or equipment compartment door
One ( I) light will indicate status of doors on the driver's side of the vehicle and the other light will indicate the
status of the passenger side and rear compartment doors.
COMPARTMENT LIGHTING
There will he 14 compartments with On Scene Solutions LED compartment light strips. The compartments
with these strip lights will be located all roll up door compartments. Two (2) strip lights will be installed
vertically, one (1) each side of the compartment door opening. The lights will be sized to accomodate the
compartment door opening.
The remaining compartments will include 6.00" diameter Truck -Lite, Model: 79384, lights in each enclosed
compartment. Each light will have a number 1076 one filament, two wire bulb.
Opening the compartment door, will automatically turn die compartment lighting on.
PERIMETER SCENE LIGHTS, CAB
There will be a Truck -Lite, model 60, grommet mount weatherproof light provided for each cab door.
Lighting will be designed to provide illumination on areas under the driver, officer, and crew cab riding
area exits, which will be activated automatically when the exit doors arc opened and by the same means
as the body perimeter lights.
The lighting will be capable of providing illumination at a minimum level of two (2) foot - candles on ground
areas within 30.00" of the edge of the apparatus in areas which personnel climb in or out of the apparatus or
descend from the apparatus to the ground level.
PERIMETER SCENE LIGHTS BODY
There will be two (2) Truck -Lite model 60 lights provided under the rear step area. The lights will be spaced
one ( I ) each side of apparatus and have a clear lens. The perimeter scene lights will be activated by a rocker
switch in cab and a switch at the rear of the body.
The lighting will be capable of providing illumination at a minimum level of two (2) foot - candles on ground
areas within 30.00" of the edge of the apparatus in areas designed for personnel to climb onto the apparatus or
descend from the apparatus to the ground level.
SCENE LIGHTS
one (1) pair of Whelen, Model 60.000'U, halogen scene lights will be installed at rear of tiller cab.
These lights will have 26 degree internal optics.
The lights will be controlled by the following:
From the first switch feature, a control at the driver side switch panel.
From the second switch feature, a control from a switch in the tillerman's cab.
From the third switch feature, there is no control of this option.
From the fourth switch feature, there is no control of this option
These lights will be installed with a flange.
SIDE SCENE LIGHTS
one (1) pair of Whelen, Model 60F000 *U scene lights will be installed side of crew cab I each side.
These lights will have a 26 degree internal optics to redirect light downward.
Page 49 of 92
The lights will be controlled by the following:
From the first switch feature, a control at the driver side switch panel
From die second switch feature, there is no control of this option
From the third switch feature, there is no control of this option
From the fourth switch feature, there is no control of this option
'these lights will be installed with a flange.
SIDE SCENE LIGHTS
two (2) pairs of Zico, Model: ZQL- SS -I.ED. LED scene lights with bright stainless steel housing will be
installed In tiller axles fendenvell.
The lights will be controlled by N /A.
SCENE. LIGHTS
One (1) pair of Weldon 3010 Series rectangular scene lights will be installed on the rear exterior wall of the
tractor cab. The lights will have a clear lens 26 degree internal optics. The lights will be controlled by the aerial
master switch.
CENTERING LIGHT
Two (2) lights will be provided on the cab roof to aid the tillerman in centering the tiller trailer with the tractor
One (1) Weldon Model 9186- 1500 -50 green LED light will be installed on the tractor roof as far rearward on
the cab as practical that will be used by the tillerman to center the tiller trailer with the tractor.
One (I ) Weldon Model 9186 - 1500 -10 red LED light will be installed centered on the cab roof.
Both of the lights will be provided on 12" brackets.
The light will be activated with the ignition switch.
WORK LIGHTS
Two (2) Collins, Model FX -12, deck lights will be provided at the rear of the apparatus. Each light will be a
spot/floodlight. Each light will have a 100 watt 11 -2 spot bulb and a 55 watt 11 -2 flld bulb.
CAA SPOTLIGHTS
Two (2) Unity Model 325 spotlights, one (1) each side at front of cab, will be provided. The spotlights will be
furnished with 160,000 candle power halogen bulbs.
HAND HELD LIGHT
There will he four (4) Streanilight LitcBox lights with an orange thermoplastic body provided. The location
will be TBD.
CHARGER, BASE (hand held)
The apparatus manufacturer will furnish and utstall a Streatnlight, model 45071, orange, charging base for each
of the customer installed hand held lights. The number of hand held lights being installed by the customer will
be four (4) lights. The charging bases will he located'FBD.
SIDE, AND REAR VISION SYSTEM
A backup camera system, model ZON323 -1 -4AV with additional camera(s) will be provided.
Page 50 of 92
There will be three (3) cameras provided in the following locations: one (1) camera integrated into the
passenger side cab mirror, one ( I ) camera integrated into the driver side cab mirror, and one (1) camera located
at the rear of the truck.
The camera images will be displayed in the cab on a 7" LCD color monitor with integral camera switcher. The
LCD will be located in view of the driver on the overhead panel.
An additional 7" LCD color monitor will be provided in the tiller cab to view only die rear camera.
Components will include:
T wo (2) integrated cameras in the Ramco mirrors
One (1) rear vision color camera kit.
Two (2) T' I.CD color monitors with integrated switcher.
All necessary automated control hardware and wiring
AIR HORN SYSTEM
Two (2) Grover air homy will be provided and located, in the front bumper, recessed Inside frame rails. The
horn system will be piped to the air brake system wet tank utilizing .38" tubing. A pressure protection valve
will be installed in -line to prevent the loss of air. in the air brake system.
AIR HORN CONTROL
The air horns will be actuated by a foot switch on the officers side and by the horn button in the steering wheel.
The driver will have the option to control the air horns or the chassis horns from the horn button by meats of a
selector switch located oil the instrument panel.
ELECTRONIC SIREN
A "Code 3 ", model 3692, electronic siren with noise canceling microphone will be provided.
Siren head will be located on a swivel bracket mounted on the headliner so that it is accessible to both the driver
and officer. The swivel bracket will be capable of rotating a minimum of 180 degrees.
Siren will be actuated by a foot switch on the officer's side and by the hom button in the steering wheel. The
driver will have the option to control the siren or the chassis horns from the horn button by means of a selector
switch.
SPEAKER
There will be two (2) speakers, Codc -3 Model PI)100C with chrome finish. recessed in the front bumper.
Connection will be connected to die siren amplifier.
The speakei(s) will he recessed in either side of the front bumper.
MECHANICAL SIREN, (Auxiliary)
A Federal Q2B siren will be fumished. A siren brake button will be installed on the switch panel.
The mechanical siren will be recessed in the front bumper in the center. The siren will be properly supported
using the bumper framework.
The mechanical siren will be actuated by a chrome push button located on the officer side of the engine tunnel
and by the hom button in the steering wheel.
]'he driver will have the option to control die siren or the chassis hom from the horn button by means of'a
Page 51 of 92
selector switch located on the instrument panel.
LIGHTBAR
One (1) 88.00" Whelen, Model Freedom LED lightbar will be mounted on the cab roof.
This lightbar will include the following:
Two (2) red flashing forward facing LED modules.
Two (2) clear flashing forward facing LED modules.
Two (2) red flashing front comer LED modules.
One (1) red flashing driver side facing LED module.
One (1) red flashing officer side facing LED module.
One (1) switch located in the cab on the switch panel will control this lightbar.
The lens color will be clear.
To meet NFPA requirements, all clear lights will be deactivated when the parking brake is applied.
HEADLIGHT FLASHER
The high beam headlights will flash alternately between the left and right side, with a control switch located on
the cab instrument panel.
The flashing will automatically cancel when the headlight switch is activated or when the parking brake is set.
SIDE ZONE LOWER LIGHTING
Six (6) Whelen model 60'02F•R flashing "Super" LED lights will be located at the following positions:
Two (2) lights, one (1) each side on the front cab comer - red Super LED/red lens each side.
Two (2) lights, Cab sides behind rear doors - red Super LED/rd lens each side.
Two (2) lights, N.IA - red Super LED/red lens each side.
The lights will be controlled by a lighted switch on the cab instrument panel.
Ihesc lights will be installed NIA.
REAR ZONE LOWER LIGHTIN(:
Two (2) Whelen model 60'02F•R Flashing "Super" LED warning lights will be located at die rear of the
apparatus, required to meet or exceed the lower level optical warning and optical power requirements of NFPA.
The color of these lights will be red Super LED /red lens.
One (1) switch in the cab on the switch panel will control these lights.
These lights will be installed with a flange.
WARNING LIGHTS (Rear of Hose Bed)
Two (2) Whelen MCFLED2• LED warning lights will be provided at the rear of die truck, located one (1) each
side.
One (1) of these lights will be all red LED with red lens.
One (1) of these lights will be all amber LED with amber lens.
The location shall be either side at rear of tiller cab
Page 52 of 92
These lights will be activated by a lighted switch on the instrument panel
LIGIIT, REAR UPPER ZONE, BLOCKING
There will be a pair of Whelen 6E series halogen flashing lights provided at the rear of apparatus at a level of
62.00" or higher. The lights will have amber lenses.
The flash pattern will be controlled by an electronic flasher. The halogen flashing lights will he activated
whenever the rear upper zone switch is on and the parking brake is set.
TRAFFIC DIRECTING LIGHT
There will be one (1) Whelen model TAL65 36.01" long x 2.84" high x 2.24" deep, amber LED traffic
directing light installed at the rear of the apparatus.
The Whelen model TACTLDI control head will be included with this installation.
The auxiliary wami ng mode will be activated with the control head only.
This traffic directing light will be surface mounted with a treadplate box at the rear of the apparatus as high as
practical.
The traffic directing light control head will be located within a heavy duty swivel bracket centered
between the driver and passenger.
This swivel bracket will enable the driver access as well as the passenger.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM GENERAL DESIGN for ALTERNATING CURRENT
The following guidelines will apply to the 120.240 VAC system installation:
General
Any fixed line voltage power source producing alternating current (ac) line voltage will produce electric power
at 60 cycles plus or minus five (5) cycles.
Except where superseded by the requirements of NFPA 1901, all components, equipment and installation
procedures will conform to NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (herein referred to as the NEC).
Line voltage electrical system equipment and materials included on the apparatus will be listed and installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. All products will be used only in the manner for which they
have been listed.
Crcunding
Grounding will be in accordance with Section 250 -6 'Portable and Vehicle Mounted Generators" of the NEC.
Ungrounded systems will not be used. Only stranded or braided copper conductors will be used for grounding
and bonding.
An equipment grounding means will be provided in accordance with Section 250 -91 (Grounding Conductor
Material) of the NEC.
The grounded current carrying conductor (neutral) will be insulated from the equipment grounding conductors
and from the equipment enclosures and other grounded parts. The neutral conductor will be colored white or
gray in accordance with Section 200 -6 (Means of Identifying Grounding Conductors) of the NF'.C.
In addition to the bonding required for the low voltage return current, each body and driving or crew
Page 53 of 92
compartment enclosure will be bonded to the vehicle frame by a copper conductor. This conductor will have a
minimum amperage rating of 115 percent of the nameplate current rating of the power source specification label
as defined in Section 310 -15 (amp capacities) of the NEC. A single conductor properly sized to meet the low
voltagc and line voltage requirements will be permitted to be used.
All power source system mechanical and electrical components will be sized to support the continuous duty
nameplate rating of the power source.
Operation
Instructions that provide the operator with the essential power source operating instructions, including the
power -up and power -dowry sequence, will be permanently attached to the apparatus at any point where such
operations can take place.
Provisions will be made for quickly and easily placing the power source into operation. The control will be
marked to indicate when it is correctly positioned for power source operation. Any control device used in the
drive train will be equipped with a means to prevent the unintentional movement of the control device from its
set position.
A power source specification label will be permanently attached to the apparatus near the operator's control
station. The label will provide the operator with the information detailed in Figure 19 -4.10.
Direct drive (PTO) and portable generator installations will comply with Article 445 (Generators) of the NEC.
O'e n
The conductors used in the power supply assembly between the output terminals of the power source and the
main over current protection device will not exceed 144 inches. (3658 mm) in length.
For tired power supplies, all conductors in the power supply assembly will be type T1 If I W, "1'H W, or use
stranded conductors enclosed bh nonmetallic liquid tight Flexible conduit rated for a minimum of 194 degrees
Fahrenheit (90 degrees Celsius).
For portable power supplies, conductors located between the power source and the line side of the main
overcurent protection device will be type So or type SEO with suffix WA flexible cord rated for 600 -volts at
194 degrees Fahrenheit (90 degrees Celsius).
Wiring Methods
Fixed wiring systems will be limited to the following:
- Metallic or nonmetallic liquid tight flexible conduit rated at not less than 194 degrees Fahrenheit (90
degrees Celsius)
or
- Type SO or Type SEO cord with a WA suffix, rated at 600 volts at not less than 194 degrees Fahrenheit
(90 degrees Celsius)
Electrical cord or conduit will not be attached to chassis suspension components, water or fuel lines, air or air
brake lines; fire pump piping, hydraulic lines, exhaust system components, or low voltage wiring. In addition
the wiring will be run as follows-
- Separated by a minimum of 12 inches (305 mm), or properly shielded, from exhaust piping
Page 54 of92
-Separated from fuel lines by a minimum of six (6) inches (152 mm) distance
Electrical cord or conduit will be supported within six (6) inches (152 nmm) of any junction box and at a
minimum of every 24 inches (610 mm) of continuous run. Supports will be trade of nonmetallic materials or
corrosion protected metal. All suppons will be of a design that does not cut or abrade the conduit or cable and
will be mechanically fastened to the vehicle.
Wiritie Identification
All line voltage conductors located in the train panel board will be individually and permanently identified.
The identification will reference the wiring schematic or indicate the final termination poim. When prewiring
for future power sources or devices, the untermbtated ends will be labeled showing function and wire size.
Wet Locations
All wet location receptacle outlets and inlet devices, including those on hardwired remote power distribution
boxes, will be of the grounding type provided with a wet location cover and installed in accordance with
Section 210 -7 'Receptacles and Cord Connections" of the NEC.
All receptacles located in a wet location will be not less than 24 inches (610 nun) from the ground. Receptacles
on off -road vehicles will be a minimum of 30 inches (762 mm) from the ground.
The face of any wet location receptacle will be installed in a plane from vertical to not more than 45 degrees off
vertical. No receptacle will be installed in a face up position.
nry Locations
All receptacles located in a dry location will be of the grounding type. Receptacles will be not less than 30
inches (762 mm) above the interior noor height.
All receptacles will he marked with the type of line voltage (120 -volts or 240- volts) and the current rating in
amps. if the receptacles are direct current, or other than single phase, they will be so marked.
1_isting
All receptacles and electrical inlet devices will be listed to 01, 498, Standard for Safety Attachnment Plugs and
Receptacles, or other appropriate perforiance standards. Receptacles used for direct current voltages will be
rated for the appropriate service.
Electrical System Testing
The wiring and associated equipment will be tested by the apparatus manufacturer or the installer of the line
voltage system.
The wiring and permanently connected devices and equipment will be subjected to a dielectric voltage
withstand test of 900 volts for one (1) minute. The test will be conducted between live pans and the neutral
conductor, and between live parts and the vehicle frame with any switches in the circuit(s) closed. This test will
be conducted after all body work has been completed.
Electrical polarity verification will be made of all permanently' wired equipment and receptacles to determine
that connections have been properly made.
9perational Tgst per Current NPPA 1901 Standards
The apparatus manufacturer will perform the following operation test and ensure that the power source and any
devices that are attached to the line voltage electrical system arc properly connected and in working order. The
test will be witnessed and the results certified by Underwriters Laboratories.
Page 55 of 92
The prime mover will be started from a cold start condition and the line voltage electrical system loaded to 100
percent of the nameplate rating.
The power source will be operated at 100 percent of its nameplate voltage for a minimum of two (2) hours
unless the system meets category certification as defined in the current NPPA 1901 standard.
Where the line voltage power is derived from the vehicle's low voltage system, the minimum continuous
electrical load as defined in the current NFPA 1901 standard will he applied to the low voltage electrical system
during the operational test.
GENERATOR
The apparatus will be equipped with a complete electrical power system. The generator will be a Harrison
Model 15.0 TGM 15.0 kW Hydraulic unit. The wiring and generator installation will conform to the present
National Electrical Codes Standards of the National Fire Protection Association. The installation will be
designed for continuous operation without overheating and undue stress on components.
Generator PLrformance
- Continuous Duty Rating: 15,000 watts
- Nominal Volts: 120/240
Amperage: 125 (a) 120 volts, 62.5 (�@ 240 volts
Phase: Single
Cycles: 60 hertz
Engine Speed at Engagement: Idle
RPM range. 925 to 3,000 (hydraulic pump)
Generator Dimensions
- The dimensions were not available when this option was created. This option will be updated when the
dimensions become available.
- Weight: 455 pounds (dry)
The output of the generator will be controlled by an internal hydraulic system. An electrical instrument gauge
panel will be provided for the operator to monitor and control all electrical operations and output.
The generator will be driven by a transmission power take off unit, through a hydraulic pump and motor.
The generator will include an electrical control inside the cab. The hydraulic engagement supply will be
operational at any time (no interlocks).
An electric /hydraulic valve will supply hydraulic fluid to the clutch engagement unit provided on the chassis
PTO drive.
Generator Instruments and Controls
1'o properly monitor die generator performance a digital meter panel will be furnished and mounted next to the
Page 56 of 92
circuit breaker panel. 'I he meter will indicate the following items:
- Voltage
- Amperage for both lines
-Frequency
- Generator run hours
- Over current indication
- Over temperature indication
- "power On" indication
- Two (2) fuse holders with two (2) amp fuses (for indicator light protection)
The meter and indicators will be installed near eye level in the compartment. Instruments will be Flush mounted
in an appropriate sized weatherproof electrical enclosure. All instruments used will be accurate within +/- two
(2) percent.
Qenemtor Wirine:
The system will he installed by highly qualified electrical technicians to assure the required level of safety and
protection to the fire apparatus operators. The wiring, electrical fixtures and components will be to the highest
industry quality standards available on the domestic market. The equipment will be the type as designed for
mobile type installations subject to vibration, moisture and severe continuous usage. The following electrical
components will be the minimum acceptable quality standards for this apparatus:
\Virin
All electrical wiring will be fine stranded copper type. The wire will be sized to the load and circuit breaker
rating; ten (10) gauge on 30 amp circuits, 12 gauge on 20 amp circuits and 14 gauge on 15 amp circuits. 'I he
cable will be run in center areas and extruded aluminum pathways built into the body for easy access.
Load Center:
The main load center will be a Cutler I lammer with circuit breakers rated to load demand.
Circuit Breakers:
Individual breakers will be provided for all on -line equipment to isolate a tripped breaker from affecting any
other on -line equipment.
GENERATOR LOCATION
The generator will be mounted in the area above the goose neck of
the tiller trailer. The flooring in this area will be either reinforced
or constructed, in such a manner, that it will handle the additional
weight of the generator.
GENERATOR COVER
An aluminum treadplate surround will be provide to conceal the generator. Adequate louvers or knock -outs
will be provided for cooling the generator.
GENERATOR START
Pace 57 of 92
A switch will be located on the cab instrument panel to engage the generator
CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL
The circuit breaker panel will he located to be determined.
120 VOLT LIGHTING
The apparatus will be equipped with a telescoping bottom raise Fire Research Model FC530 -S75 quartz tube
floodlight. The telescoping pole will be as long as is practical to fit in the location it is mounted.
The light fixture will be a single 750 watt. 120 volt Focus light that draws 6.3 amps.
The lamp head will swivel 360 degrees left or right and tilt up and down. All wiring used up to the junction box
will be a minimum of 14 gauge 3 wire cable that is properly supported and protected from darnage.
A total of Two (2) will be provided One each side back of cab use 4" off set brackets for these lights
120 VOLT LIGHTING
The apparatus will be equipped with a top mount non - telescoping Fire Research Model FC570 with a Focus
light head. model S75 quartz tube flood light. Each light head will be 120 volt, 750 watts, with a 6.3 amp draw
and have an output of 21,000 lumens. The light head will swivel 360 degrees left or right and tilt up and down.
All wiring to the circuit breaker box will be a minimum of 14 gauge 3 wire cord that is properly supported and
protected from damage.
A total of Four (4) will be provided abhove U -3 and U -6 and above P -3 and P -6.
REMOTE SWITCH (Quartz Li2htl
A remote on/off actuation switch, with a 12VDC, green indicator light, will be provided to actuate a 120/240
volt solenoid switch for each quartz light.
The two (2) switches will be located driver side and officer side switch panels. The switches will control the
lights On Overhead.
COMMAND LIGHT
A Command Ligltt Knight 2, Model KL475, with backlight and "auto park"
will be provided.
fhe light will be provided with six (6) 750 watt 230 volt lamps. The light will
be actuated by 12 volts.
An indicator light will be provided in the cab for roaming when the light is not
in the nested position.
At the top of the light tower will be a blue strobe light.
The dunensions of the light in the nested position will be 47.00" long x 23.50"
wide x 1115" high. The light will extend 87.50" from the bottom surface to
the top of the light.
the weight of the light tower will be approximately 145 pounds
I'he handheld controller with 12' of cord will be installed THID.
Page 58 of 92
A total ofN!A will be provided.
The light tower will be installed TAD
120 VOLT LIGHTING. Till OF LADDER
Two (2), Kwik -Raze 736, Magnafire 3000. 750 watt, 120 volt light(s), demountable will be provided at the tip
of the ladder. The light(s) will be located on the driver and passenger side.
Light(s) will he 120 volts.
Light(s) will be switched at the lighthead and turntable.
ELECTRIC CORD REEL
Furnished with the 120 volt AC electrical system will be a Hannay, series 1600, cord reel. The reel will be
provided with a 12 -volt electric rewind switch, that is guarded to prevent accidental operation and labeled for its
intended use. The switch will be protected with a fuse and installed at a height not to exceed 72 inches above
the operators standing position.
The exterior Finish of the reel(s) will be painted "'269 gray from the reel manufacturer..
A Nylatron guide to be provided to aid in the payout and loading of the reel. A ball stop will be provided to
prevent the cord from being wound on the reel.
A label will be provided in a readily visible location adjacent to the reel. The label will indicate current rating,
current type, phase, voltage and total cable length.
A total of two (2) cord reels will be provided above gooseneck in front of body.
The cord reel will be configured with three (3) conductors.
CORD
Provided for electric distribution will he two (2) lengths, one for each reel, of 200 feet of yellow 10!3 electrical
cord, weather resistant 105 degree C to -50 degree C, 600 volt jacketed SOOW cord. A Hubbell L5 -20, 20
amp, 120 volt, twist lock connector body will be installed on the end of the cord.
PORTABLE. JUNCTION BOX
There will be four (4) 120 vac 20 atnp twist lock receptacles provided in a portable junction box. The junction
box will be of weatherproof construction and have nip up lids lined with soft neoprene rubber at each outlet
opening.
A Hubbell 1.5 -20, 20 amp, 120 volt, twist lock comtector body.
A total of two (2) will be provided.
REEL ENCLOSURE;
An aluminum treadplaie enclosure will be installed over the reel. The enclosure will be provided with a
stainless steel hinge that will allow the cover to be opened.
A captive roller assembly will be provided through the side sheet to assist with the pay out of the cord. A ball
stop will be provided on the cord to stop the cord at the roller assembly
Page 59 of 92
A total of two (2) will be installed On gooseneck.
JUNCTION BOX HOLDER
There will bean aluminum junction box holder installed adjacent to the cord reel. A total of two (2) will be
installed.
with Electric reel.
20 AMP RECEPTACLE
Wired to the power supple will be two (2) receptacles that are a 120 volt 20 amp three wire twist -lock NEMA
1,5 -20 type with weather resisting cover located Fenderw•ell area I each side.
KUSSMAUL AUTO EJECT FOR SHORELINE
two (2) shoreline receptacles will be provided to operate die dedicated 120 -volt circuits on the truck without the
use of the generator.
The shoreline receptacle (s), model #091- 159 -30 -120, will be provided with a 120 volt, 30 amp, 3 pin Kussmaul
Super auto eject plug with a red weatherproof cover. The cover is spring loaded to close, preventing water from
entering when the shoreline is not connected.
The unit is completely sealed to prevent road din contamination.
A solenoid wired to the vehicle's starter is energized when the engine is started. This unstantancously drives the
plug from the receptacle.
A novel plug detector closes and opens the 120 volt A.C. circuit after the mating connector is inserted and
before the connector is ejected..
The shoreline will be connected to Hatt Charger and F.ng Heater.
A mating connector body will also be supplied with the loose equipment.
The shoreline receptacle will be located un the driver side lower step well of cab.
FOUR (4)- SECTION 100 FOOT TRACTOR -DRAWN AERIAL. LADDER
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS
The ladder will be constructed to meet all of the requirements as described un the current NFPA 1901 standards.
The aerial device will be a true ladder type device: therefore ladders attached to booms will not be considered.
These capabilities will be established in an unsupported configuration.
All structural load supporting elements of the aerial device that arc made of a ductile material will have a design
stress of not more than 50010 of the minimum yield strength of the material based on the combination of the live
load and the dead load. This 2:1 structural safety factor meets the current NFPA 1901 standard.
All structural load supporting elements of the aerial device that are made of non - ductile material will have a
design stress of not more thin 20% of the minimum ultimate strength of the material, based on the combination
of the rated capacity and the dead load. This 5:1 safety factor meets the current NFPA 1901 standard.
Page 60 of 92
Wire ropes and attaching systems used to extend and retract the fly sections will have a 5:1 safety factor based
on the ultimate strength under all operating conditions. The factor of safety for the wire rope will remain above
2:1 during anv extension or retraction stall. The minimum ratio of the diameter of wire rope used to the
diameter of the sheave used will be I.12. Wire ropes will be constructed of seven (7) strands over an inner wire
core for increased flexibility. The wire rope will be galvanized to reduce corrosion.
The aerial device will be capable of sustaining a static load one and one -half times its rated tip load capacity
(live load) in every position in which the aerial device can be placed when the vehicle is on a firm level surface.
The aerial device will be capable of sustaining a static load one and one -third times its rated tip load capacity
(live load) in every position the aerial device can be placed when the vehicle is on a slope of five degrees
downward in the direction most likely to cause overturning.
With the aerial device out of the cradle and in the fully extended position at zoro degrees elevation, a test load
will be applied in a horizontal direction normal to the centerline of the ladder. The turntable will not rotate and
the ladder will not deflect beyond what the product specification allows.
All welding of aerial components, including the aerial ladder sections, turntable, pedestal, and outriggers, will
be in compliance with the American Welding Society standards. All welding personnel will be certified, as
qualified under AWS welding codes.
All material and welds will have a structural safely factor of 2:1. This will be derived from taking into account
structure weight, payload, wind load, ice load, nozzle reactions, and dynamics.
The aerial device will be capable of operating with the maximum rated tip load in either of the two (2)
following conditions:
Conditions of high wind up to 50 nnph
Conditions of icing, up to a coating of .25" over the entire aerial structure
All of the design criteria must be supported by the following test data: (no exception)
- Strain gage testing of the complete aerial device
- Analysis of deflection data taken while the aerial device was under test load
The following standards for materials are to be used in the design of the aerial device
• Materials arc to be certified by the mill that manufactured the material
• Materials that are certified or recertified by vendors other than the mill will not be acceptable
• Material testing drat is performed after the mill test will be fix verification only and not with the intent
of changing the classification
- All welded structural components for the ladder will be traceable to their mill lots.
LADDER CONSTRUCTION
The ladder is comprised of four sections and will extend to a nominal height of 100 feet above the ground at 75
degrees.
Page 61 of 92
T'he ladder will have the capability to support a minimum of 500 pounds at the tip in the unsupported
configuration, based upon 360 degree rotation, up to full extension and from -5 degrees to +75 degrees.
The ladder will be constructed of high strength low alloy steel, minimum 70.000 pounds per square inch yield,
with full traceability on all structural members.
F.ach section will be trussed diagonally, vertically and horizontally using welded steel tubing.
All critical points arc reinforced for extra rigidity and to provide a high strength -to- weight ratio.
All ladder rungs are round and welded to each section utilizing "K" bracing for torsional rigidity.
The inside width dimensions of the ladder will be:
- Base Section 39.00"
- Lower Mid Section 32.25'
- Upper Mid Section 26.62"
- Fly Section 21.38"
The height of the handrails above the centerline of the rungs will be:
- Base Section 26.75'
- Lower Mid Section 22.87"
- Upper Mid Section 20.25'
- Fly Section 17.50"
The ladder will be designed to provide continuous egress for firefighters and civilians fi'om an elevated position
to the ground. '['he end of the fly section will be constructed in a manner that aids personnel in climbing off the
ladder.
The egress section will be designed to maintain the rated load of the aerial device. It will be bolted on for easy
replacement.
Each rung will be covered with a secure, heavy -duty, fiberglass pultrusion that incorporates an aggressive, no-
slip coating.
The rung covers will be glued to each rung, and will be easily replaceable should the rung cover become
darnaged.
Hach rung cover edge will have 2.00" of photo - luminescent, aggressive, no -slip coating to assist ht providing a
light source for each rung during low light conditions.
The photo - luminescent coating will remain visible for up to 20 hours after exposure to light.
The use of electrically powered lighting or tape to light the nmgs will not be allowed. (no exception)
Pace 62 of 92
Under no circumstances will the rung covers be fastened to the rungs using screws or rivets. (no exception)
The rung covers will have a 10 -year, limited warranty.
TURNTABLE
7 he upper turntable assembly will connect the aerial ladder to the turntable hearing. The steel structure will
have a mounting position for the aerial elevation cylinders, ladder connecting pins, and upper turntable
operator's position. The turntable platform will be rectangular- shaped and approximately 96.00" wide by
72.00" long.
The turntable will be a 1.00" thick steel deck, coated with an non -skid, chemical resistant material in the
walking areas. The stepping surfaces will meet the skid - resistance requirements of the current NAPA 1901
standard.
The turntable is Iighted for nighttime operation with a minimum of two (2) work lights activated by the aerial
master switch.
The turntable handrails will be a minimum 42.00" high and will not increase the overall travel height of the
vehicle. The handrails will be constructed from 1.25" diameter extruded 6063 -T6 aluminum with a slip
resistant knurled surface. The handrails will be anodized to resist corrosion.
ELEVATION SYSTEM
"Iwo (2) double acting lift cylinders will be utilized to provide smooth precise elevation from 5 degrees below
horizontal to 75 degrees above horizontal.
The lift cylinders will have a 6.00" internal diameter (bore), a.375" wall thickness, a 4.50" diameter cylinder
rod and a 33.38" stroke.
The lift cylinders will be equipped with integral holding valves located on the cylinder to prevent the unit from
falling should the charged lines be severed at any point within the hydraulic system. (no exception)
They also will have spherical bushings at each end to reduce pin wear.
Roth raising and lowering functions are influenced by flow compensation which maintains ladder tip speed
within approximately 10% regardless of load, angle or extension.
Ladder tip speed is automatically decelerated at angles above 60 degrees reducing "tip - lash ".
The pivot pins will be stainless steel and 2.25' in diameter. Each elevation pin will be stainless steel with a
greaseless ladder pivot pin.
EXTENSION/RETRACTION SYSTEM
A full hydraulic powered extension and retraction system will be provided using two (2) hydraulic cylinders and
wire ropes.
Each set is capable of operating the ladder in the event of a failure to the other.
The extension cylinder will have a 3.00" internal diameter (bore), 1.75' diameter rod and a 134.00" stroke.
Extension and retraction will be internally limited within the cylinders, eliminating excess strain on wire ropes,
sheaves and the ladder structure.
Page 63 of 92
Each of the cylinders, wire ropes and sheave assemblies will be completely independent of the other, so as to
provide a safety factor wherein a failure of one assembly will not affect the function and operation of the other.
The extension cylinders are equipped with counter balance valves to synchronize the cylinders for smoother
operation and prevent the unit from retracting should the charged lines be severed at any point within the
hydraulic system. The cylinders will also have internal deceleration valves, to cushion the movement of the
cylinder when approaching full extension or retraction. All extension /retraction pins will have a corrosion -
preventative, QPQ black finish.
The reeling of the wire rope will be such as to provide synchronized, simultaneous movement of all sections to
full extension.
The extensionlretraction wire ropes will be 7 -flex galvanized with stainless steel threaded ends, and will possess
the following characteristics:
- Lower Mid Section .50 diameter, 26,2009 breaking strength
- Upper Mid Section .38" diameter, 14,8809 breaking strength
- Fly Section .31" diameter, 10,3800 breaking strength
Wear pads made of polymer material will he used between the telescoping sections for maximum weight
distribution, strength and smoothness of operation.
Adjustment screw s are provided on the wear pads to permit proper side alignment.
All sheaves will be plastic and greaseless and all sheave pins and pivot pins will be stainless steel. (no
exception)
ROTATION SYSTEM
A 46.00" diameter, external tooth, monorace, slewing ring bearing will be used for the rotation system. The
gear teeth will be a stub tooth form.
The bearing race will hive scaled 1.00" ball bearings.
The bearing will provide 360 degree continuous rotation.
The turntable will be bolted to the bearing using 36 SAG Grade 8, .875" diameter bolts.
To secure the bearing to the base support 36 Grade 8, .875' diameter bolts will be used.
The turntable base and the torque box bearing plate will be machined to fit the bearing thereby providing even
distribution of forces.
A hydraulically driven, planetary gear box with a drive speed reducer will be used to provide infinite and
minute rotation control throughout the entire rotational travel.
The gearbox will have a torque rating of 130,000 pounds per square inch.
A spring applied, hydraulically released disc type swing brake will be furnished to provide positive braking of
the turntable assembly.
Page 64 of 92
Provisions will be made for auxiliary operation of the system in case of prime mover failure.
The hydraulic system is equipped with pressure relief valves which will limit the rotational torque to a non-
destructive power.
ROTATION INTERLOCK
A permanently installed prevention mechanism will be provided as pan of the rotation system to prevent the
rotation of the aerial device to the side in which the stabilizers have not been fully deployed or are short- jacked.
The mechanism will allow full and unrestricted use of die aerial in the 180 degree area on the side(s) where the
stabilizers have been fully deployed.
The system will also have a manual override to comply with NFPA 1901.
This will consist of a switch located in the lower control station so that activation will require two (2) persons
(one at an aerial device control location and one at the lower control station).
SYSTEMS THAT PERMIT THE AERIAL TO ROTATE TO THE "SHORT' JACK" SIDE WITI IOUT
AU TOMATICALLY STOPPING TIIE ROTATION AND ?OR WITHOUT ACTUATION OF THE
"MANUAL OVERRIDE" SHALL NOT BE ACCEPTED. SYSTEMS THAT ONLY INCLUDE AN ALARM
ARE NOT CONSIDERED AN INTERLOCK AND SI IALL NOT BE ACCEPTED.
LOAD CAPACITIES
The following load capacities will he established with the stabilizers at full horizontal extension and placed in
the down position to level the truck and to relieve the weight from the tires and axles. Capacities will be based
upon full extension and 360 degree rotation.
A load chart, visible at the operator's station, will be provided. The load chart will show the recommended safe
load at any condition of the aerial device's elevation and extension. (no exception)
50 MPH WIND CONDITIONSAVATERWAY DRY
Degrees of
Elevation
5 to 9
10 to 19
20 to 29
30 to 39
40 to 49
50 to 59
60 to 69
70 to 75
Egress
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
Fly
250
500
750
upper Mid
-
-
250
250
500
1000
1000
Lower Mid
250
250
1 500
750
1000
1000
Agee
2.50
250
500
750
1000
1000
1000
50 MPH WIND CONDITIONS/VVATERWAY CHARGED
Degrees of
Hlevation
-51o9
10 to 19
20 to 29
1 30 to 39
40 to 49
50 to 59
60 to 69
70 to 75
Egress
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
Plv
250
500
750
Upper Mid
-
250
500
750
1000
Lower Mid
250
500
750
1000
1000
Page 65 of 92
Base 250 1500 1750 1 1000 1 1000 1 1000
Reduced loads at the tip can be redistributed in 2,50 lb. increments to the fly, mid, or base sections as
needed.
ROOM SUPPORT
A heavy -duty boom support will be provided for support of due ladder in the travel position. On the base
section of the ladder, a stainless steel scuftplate will he provided where the ladder comes into contact with the
boom support. In the stowed position, the ladder tip will be not less than 11.00" below horizontal for
unsurpassed visibility and safety while maneuvering the apparatus.
FOLDIN(: STEPS
One (1) set of folding steps will be provided at the tip of the ladder. An additional set of folding steps will be
provided at the base of the fly section. The steps will be bright finished. non -skid luminescent folding type.
The luminescent coating is rechargeable from any light source and can hold a charge for up to 24 hours.
EXTENSION INDICATOR
Extension markings and corresponding numerical indicators will be provided along each inside and outside top
rail of the base section of the aerial every ten (10) feet. They will indicate various positions of extension up to
full. Markings and indicators will be clearly visible to the console operator. To aid in visibility during hours of
darkness, the markings and numerical indicators will be of a red reflective material.
SPOTLIGHTS
Four (4) Unity AG -S -4007 12 volt spotIflood lights will he furnished.
The two (2) "tracking lights" will be mounted on the base section of the ladder, one (1) on each side.
The two (2) "tip lights" will be mounted on the tip of the ladder, one (1) on each side.
The lights will be mounted below the handrail height so as not to increase the overall height of the unit.
An individual master switch with appropriate identification labels will be provided for the "tracking lights" and
"tip lights" in addition to the on/off switch located on the light itself.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
The aerial electrical system will be designed and manufactured in such a way that the power and signal
protection and control compartments will contain circuit protection devices and power control devices. The
power and signal protection and control components will be protected against corrosion, excessive heat,
excessive vibration, physical damage, and water spray.
The aerial electrical system will be designed and manufactured to allow the following
- All of the serviceable components will be readily accessible.
- Circuit protection devices will be utilized to protect each circuit
- General protection circuit breakers will be Type -I automatic reset (continuously resetting) or Type -11
(manual resetting) and conform to SAE requirements. When required, automotive type fuses conforming
to SAL' requirements will be utilized to protect electronic equipment.
- Power control relays and solenoids, when utilized, will have a direct current (dc) rating of 125% of the
maximum current for which the circuit is protected.
Page 66 of 92
The aerial electrical system will be designed and manufactured to allow the following:
- Toggle switches will be utilized that are certified for the outside conditions that fire apparatus
experience.
- All wiring will be protected through conduit or loom.
- All wiring harnesses will be properly supported to eliminate harness damage through rubbing.
- All connectors utilized in the system will be of a waterproof design.
- Two (2) inductive proximity swilchs and an illumination light will be incorporated into the boom
support
-'Me aerial master and aerial PTO can be engaged after the water pump has been engaged without
having to bring the RPM back to idle.
- Standard cabling to the tip of the aerial will consist of one (1) 1620 cable and one (1) 12!8 cable.
DRIVER SIDE TOROUF. BOX POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL.
A fuse and relay panel, located in the passenger side gooseneck area, will include the following:
- NEMA 4x rated weatherproof enclosure
- Relays, fuses, and circuit breakers for aerial and stabilizer interlocks and control switches
TURNTABLE LIGHTING
The turntable will be lighted for nighttime operation with a minimum of two (2) work lights activated by the
aerial master switch. A foot switch will be located at the turntable console to allow hydraulic flow to the aerial
device. The foot switch will be protected by a cover to prevent accidental activation. Activation of the foot
switch is necessary for aerial device operation.
TURNTABLE CONSOLE.
The following switches and indicator lights will be standard on the turntable console:
- High idle on/off switch
- Tipffracking light switch
- Indicator and alarm test switch
- Emergency hydraulic power switch
- STABILIZERS NOT FULLY EX VENDED amber indicator light
- Rung alignment green indicator light
The turntable console will be lighted for nighttime operation with one (1) work light activated by the aerial
master switch. A fuse panel will be located in the turntable console.
TURNTABLE OVERRIDE CONTROLS
Page 67 of 92
The aerial manual override controls will be located in the turntable control console
MASTER OVERRIDE. CONTROLS
An emergency power switch will be located at the rear of the apparatus. The switch will activate the emergency
power unit and allow control of the aerial or stabilizers based on the direction the switch is toggled.
A work light will be provided to illuminate the master override controls when the battery switch is active and
the master override door is open.
BOOM SUPPORT
Two (2) Turck inductive proximity switchs will be provided on the boom support to detect if the aerial device is
fully stowed within the boom support.
STABILIZER INDICATOR
A "Stabilizers Not Stowed" indicator will be provided in the driver's compartment. It will illuminate
automatically whenever the stabilizers are not fully stowed, to prevent damage to the apparatus if moved. The
stabilizer system will also be wired to the "Do Not Move' indicator light, which will flash whenever the
apparatus parking brake is not fully engaged and the stabilizers are not fully stowed.
CRADLE, INTERLOCK SYSTEM
A cradle interlock system will be provided to prevent the lifting of the aerial from the nested position until the
operator has positioned all the stabilizers in a load supporting configuration. A switch will be installed at the
cradle to prevent operation of the stabilizers once the aerial has been elevated from the nested position.
STABILIZER ALARM
An electronic wamutg device will be provided at each stabilizer to warn personnel that the stabilizers are being
deployed. Each alarm will produce a fast pulsing 90 DBA signal and will cancel only when the stabilizer is put
into a load bearing configuration.
STABILIZER SCENE LIGHTS
A 4.00" clear floodlight will be provided on each stabilizer to illuminate the surrounding area. The light will be
actuated by the aerial master switch.
CONTROL STATION
There will be a turntable control station located on the right hand side of the turntable so the operator will be
able to easily observe the ladder lip while operating the controls. The controls will permit the operator to
regulate the speed of the aerial functions within safe limits (as determined by the manufacturer and NFPA
standards). The controls will be clearly marked and lighted for nighttime operation. A hinged aluminum cover
will be provided. The momentary foot switch located at the turntable control station will activate the aerial
function controls. They are capable of being operated independently or simultaneously.
The following controls and indicator lights will be clearly identified, illuminated, and conveniently located for
ease of operation and viewing:
Elevation, extension.'retraction. and rotation controls
High idle switch
Rung alignment indicator light
Tip/Tracking lights
Page 68 of 92
- I lydraulic system pressure gauge
- Indicator/Alarm test switch
- F.PU switch
- Operator's load chart
Stabilizer Not Fully Extended indicator light
Monitor controls
Aerial waterway flow meter
There will also be a minimum of two (2) 12 -volt work lights installed on the turntable to illuminate the
surrounding area for nighttime operation. The work lights will be activated by the aerial master switch.
STABILIZER CONTROL STATION
There will be an easily accessible control station located at both the driver and passenger side of the apparatus.
The following controls and indicator lights will be clearly identified and conveniently located for case of
operation and viewing at each control station.
- Stabilizer controls for driver and passenger side
- Stabilizer Firm On Ground indicator lights
- Stabilizer Fully Extended indicator lights
- Inclinometer for grade and slope
- Stabilizer EPU switch
High Idle switch
STABILIZERS
The vehicle will come equipped with a stabilization system consisting of two (2) hydraulically operated out and
down style stabilizers. This system will meet or exceed all requirements of the NFPA specifications related to
stabilization and setup on sloped surfaces.
The stabiIizedlevc ling jacks will have a maximum spread of 17' measured from the centerline of the jack
footpads when the beams are fully extended. the beans will be 6.81" wide x 8.88" high with 3/4" thick top and
bottom plates and 1/2" thick sides of 100.000 -PSI minimum yield strength steel. The cylinders will have pilot -
operated check valves with thermal relief designed to insure that the beams will not drift out of the stowed
position during travel. wear pads will guide the stabilizers.
The horizontal extension cylinders will be totally enclosed within the beams and will incorporate telescoping
hydraulic tubing to supply the jack cylinder hydraulic power. Stabilizer hydraulic hoses will remain stationary
during operation of the stabilizers to prevent hose wear and potential failure. The cylinders will be equipped
with decelerators to reduce the speed of extension and retraction when the beams are near the fully retracted and
extended positions. The stabilizer extension hydraulic cylinders will have the following dimensions: 2.25"
bore. 1.38" rod. and 57.25" stroke.
Page 69 of 92
The vertical jack cylinders will be capable of 12.00" ground penetration. The cylinders will be supplied with
pilot operated check valves on each jack cylinder to hold the cylinder in the stowed or working position, should
a charged line be severed at any point in the hydraulic system. For safely, the integral holding valves will be
located in the cylinder base end, NOT in the transfer tube. Vertical jack cylinder rods will be fully enclosed by
a telescoping inner box to protect the cylinder rods from damage. The stabilizerjack hydraulic cylinders will
have the following dimensions: 4.50" bore, 3.00" rod, and 28.88" stroke.
Each stabilizerjack will have a polished stainless steel shield. The stainless steel shield will be a maximum of
14.00" wide so as to allow the extension of the stabilizer between parked cars or other obstacles. This plate will
serve as a protective guard and a mounting surface for warning lights. The top, forward, and rear edges will be
flanged back 90 degrees for added strength. Each stabilizer will be supplied with a red LED warning light on
each side of the beam. A reflective stripe will be provided on the horizontal and vertical beams of each
stabilizer. A 4.00" diameter clear work light will be provided to illuminate the stabilizer and the ground
Lighting will automatically activate with the aerial master switch.
STABILIZER PADS
The stabilizer footpad will be 12.00" in diameter. The footpad will be attached to the jack cylinder rod by
means of a machined ball at the end of the jack cylinder rod which mates to a socket machined into the footpad.
The footpad will have the ability to pivot 20 degrees from horizontal in any direction to allow setup on uneven
terrain.
AUXILIARY STABILIZER PADS
An auxiliary ground pad will be supplied for each stabilizer to provide additional load distribution on soft
surfaces. The pads will be 24.00" square and made from a lightweight composite material. The ground
pressure will not exceed 75 pounds per square inch when die ground pads are used and the apparatus is fully
loaded and the aerial device is carrying its rated capacity in any position.
STABILIZER CONTROLS
An electrically controlled hydraulic valve will power stabilizer movement. The valve can also be manually
controlled in the event of electrical malfunction. Hydraulic power override controls will be incorporated into
the valve. The manual override mechanism will be completely sealed within the valve assembly to prevent any
possibility of corrosion.
The stabilizer controls will be located to provide the operator with a fill view of each stabilizer being
positioned. Each stabilizer control panel will include lie following:
-Wout stabilizer beam control toggle switch
- l)p/down stabilizerjack control toggle switch
- Emergency hydraulic power unit (EPU) control toggle switch
-High idle control toggle switch
- stabilizer fully extended LED indicator lights
- Stabilizer planted LED indicator lights
As a safety device, an electrically actuated diverter valve will be provided. The hydraulic power will be
diverted to the aerial ladder controls automatically the instant all stabilizer jacks are firmly planted on the
ground. Once the aerial ladder is raised from the bedded position, the stabilizer hydraulic power is cut off so
the stabilizers will not accidentally be moved while the aerial is being operated.
To aid in leveling the unit, two bubble type angle indicators will be located near the stabilizer controls. One
indicator will show the angle of the truck from the front to rear and the other will show the side to side angle of
the truck. The indicators will be color coded green to show when the truck has been properly leveled allowing
the aerial device to be operated at full capacity.
Page 70 of 92
A stabilizer deployment audible warning alarm will be provided at each side of the body, activated by the
stabilizer movement.
A "Stabilizers Not Stowed" uidicator light will be provided in the cab within view of the driver. It will
illuminate automatically whenever the stabilizers are not fully stowed to prevent damage to the vehicle if it is
moved. The stabilizer system will also be wired to the "Do Not Move Truck" indicator light. This light will
flash whenever the apparatus parking brake is not engaged and the stabilizers are not fully stowed.
STABILIZER PINS
The stabilizer jacks will have holes for the stabilizer pins.
STAINLESS STEEL DOORS STABILIZER CONTROL BOX
Vertically hinged stainless steel doors will be provided over each stabilizer control box. The doors will be
hinged inboard.
LIGHTING ON AERIAL LADDER
Blue LED rope lighting will be provided on both sides of the aerial ladder base, upper and lower mid, and fly
sections. The lighting will be located adjacent to the ladder rungs along the lower rail of the ladder sections and
will run the length of the ladder section. The lighting will be controlled with a switch at the turntable control
console.
AF.RIAI, LOCATOR LIGHT, STROBE.
A light will be installed at the aerial tip for the purpose of locating the aerial device while in operation. The
light will be a Whclen SOOD strobe. The light will he activated when the aerial device is lifted from the cradle.
The color of the locator light will be blue.
STABILIZER WARNING LIGHTS
Two (2) Whelen model 60 *021' *R flashing Super LED warning light will be mounted on the stabilizer cover
panel, one (1) for each panel.
These lights will be controlled by the NPPA side lower zone switch.
The color of these lights will be red Super LED/red tens each side.
These liehts will be with a flange.
STABILIZER BEAM WARNING LIGHTS
Two (2) 4.00" diameter red LED Flashing lights will be mounted on each stabilizer, one (1) facing forward and
one (1) facing rearward. The lights will be Grote Supemova 40 series LED lights. The lights will be recessed
in the horizontal beam of the stabilizer. These warning lights will be activated with the aerial master switch.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
All hose assemblies will be assembled and crimped by the hose manufactures certified technician. An assembly
cell will be located on the premises where the technician can perform audits of the final aerial assembly for
proper fitting torque and hose routing.
All manufacturing employees responsible for the installation of hydraulic components will be properly trained.
Training will include: proper handling, installation, torque requirements, cleanliness and quality control
procedures for hydraulic components.
Hoses used in the aerial hydraulic system will be of a premium quality hose with a high abrasion resistant cover.
All pressure hoses will have a working pressure of 4000 psi and a burst pressure rating of 16,000 psi.
Page 7l of 92
The hydraulic oil will be a premium Multi -Vis product having a leading edge additive package, provide
oxidation stability, be extremely shear stable and maximum anti -wear properties. All oil delivered to the
manufacturing site will have a minimum ISO cleanliness level of 18i 15x13.
Each aerial will he evaluated as to the region and climate where it will be used to determine the optimum
viscosity and proper oil grade. Oil viscosity will be based on an optimum range of 80 to 1000 SUS during
nomial aerial use. Before shipment of the unit, an oil sample will be taken and analyzed to confirm the oil is
within the allowable ISO grade tolerance.
The aerial hydraulic system will have a minimum oil cleanliness level of ISO 18/15/13 based on the ISO
4406:1999 cleanliness standard. Each customer will receive a certificate of actual cleanliness test results and an
explanation of the rating system.
Each aerial will include an oil sample port, identified with a yellow dust cap and a label, for subsequent
customer testing.
Ball valves will be provided in the hydraulic suction and return lines to permit component servicing without
draining the oil reservoir.
The s\ stein hydraulic pressure will be displayed on a 2.5" liquid tilled gauge, located on the control console.
The hydraulic system will he additionally protected from excessive pressure by a secondary pressure relief
valve set at 3,150 psi. In the event the main hydraulic pump compensator malfunctions, the secondary relief will
prevent system damage.
HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS
All cylinders used on the aerial device will be produced by a manufacturer that specializes in the manufacture of
hydraulic cylinders.
Each cylinder will include integral safety holding cartridges.
Each cylinder will be designed to a minumum safety factor of 4:1 to failure.
All safety holding cartridges will be installed at die cylinder manufacturer, in a controlled clean cnvirotmient to
avoid possible contamination and or failure,
HYDRAULIC PUMP
The hydraulic system will he supplied by a 4.6 cubic inch variable volume, load and pressure compensating
piston pump. The pump will be rated at a minimum of 5,365 psi peak pressure and 2,600 rpnt. The pump will
meet the demands of all three simultaneous aerial functions. The pump will provide proper flow for single aerial
function with the engine at idle speed. A switch will be provided on the control console to increase the engine
speed for multiple function operation.
EMERGENCY PUMP
fhe aerial will be equipped with an emergency hydraulic pump, electrically driven from the truck batteries. The
pump will be capable of running for 30 minutes for limited aerial functions to stow the unit in case of a main
pump or track system failure. A momentary switch will be located at the stabilizer and aerial control locations
to activate [lie emergency pump.
AERIAL CONTROL VALVE
The aerial hydraulic control valve will be designed with special spool flows, limiting the oil flow for the
Page 72 of 92
designed function speed. The valve will be manually controlled and be located in the control console with the
handles protruding through the operating surface for operation. The activation handles will he spaced a
minimum of 3.5" for case of operation. The valve spools will he. designed to bleed off clowiistrearn pressure, in
the neutral position and allow proper seating of any cylinder holding cartridge.
OIL RESERVOIR
The oil reservoir will have a minimum capacity of 40 gallons. The oil fill location will be easily accessible and
be labeled "Hydraulic Oil Only" and also indicate the grade of oil that is installed in the reservoir. The fill cap
will have a 40 micron filter to provide protection from contamination. A drain hose will be included and will
terminate with a quarter turn ball valve.
Two suction ports will be provided, one for the main hydraulic pump and one for the emergency pump. The
main suction will be slightly elevated off the bosom of the reservoir and include a 100 mesh suction strainer.
The emergency suction port will be closer to the bottom of the reservoir to provide some reserve oil for
emergency operation.
• six (6) disc type magnetic drain will also be provided to collect any ferrous contaminants.
• combination sight glass and thermometer will be mounted to the reservoir in an easily viewable location.
HIGH PRESSURE FILTER
The pressure filter will be rated for 6;000 psi working pressure and generously sized for efficiency and capacity
A 90 psi bypass spring will be included to protect the element and hydraulic system during lower than normal
system operating temperatures.
The SQ filter element will be constructed of micro glass medium, which has the highest capture efficiency,
din holding capacity and life expectancy over other media such as cellulose and synthetic. The nominal rating
will be 5 micron and have an efficiency rating of 99.3 % for 5 micron sized particles. The element will have a
dirt holding capacity of not less than 35 grams.
RETURN FILTER
The return filter will be rated for 150 psi working pressure and generously sized for efficiency and capacity. A
25 psi bypass spring will be included to protect the element and hydraulic system during lower than normal
system operating temperatures. The IOQ filter element will be constructed of a micro glass medium, which has
the highest capture efficiency, dirt holding capacity and life expectancy over other media such as cellulose and
synthetic. The nominal rating will be 10 miaons and have an efficiency rating of 99.5% for 10 micron sized
particles. The element will have a dirt holding capacity of not less than 84.7 grains.
HYDRAULIC SWIVEL
The aerial ladder will be equipped with a high pressure hydraulic swivel which will connect the hydraulic lines
from the hydraulic pump and reservoir, through the rotation point, to the aerial control bank. 'Ihe hydraulic
swivel will allow for 360 - degree continuous rotation of the aerial.
ELECTRIC SWIVEL
The ladder will be equipped with an electric swivel to allow 360 - degree rotation of the aerial while maintaining
connections in all electrical circuits through the rotation point. A minimum of 32 collector rings that are
capable of supplying 30 -amp continuous service will be provided. All collector rungs will be enclosed and
protected against condensation and corrosion.
AF,_RIALS'1'RUCTURAL WARRANTY
Limited Warranty
Page 7' of 92
Except as provided below, and provided the vehicle will have been placed in service within 60 days after
delivery to the origuial purchaser as established by our original invoice, for a period ending on the first to occur
of the expiration of 20 years or 100,000 miles of use, Pierce Manufacturing Inc. ('Pierce ") warrants to the user
that each new aerial device of its manufacture which is installed on its Fire and Rescue Apparatus vehicles will
he free of defects in design and workmanship. This warranty will apply only to the torque box, turntable, aerial
sections and other structural components of the aerial device, as identified in the Pierce specifications for the
aerial device. This warranty will be void if, or to the extent that the aerial device is not maintained in strict
compliance with NFPA Standard 1914 in effect at time of sale, including such periodic inspections and testing
by qualified third parties as are required by that Standard as it may be in effect from time to time. Proof of such
compliance will accompany any claims under this warranty. Third party testing agencies known to Pierce to be
qualified for such purposes may be obtained from the Pierce Customer Service Department. This limited
warranty will apply only if the aerial device is properly maintained and used in service which is normal to the
particular vehicle. Normal service means service which does not subject the aerial device or vehicle to stresses
or impacts greater than normally result from the careful use of the aerial device or vehicle. If the buyer
discovers a defect or nonconformity it must notify Pierce in writing within 30 days after the date of discovery.
This limited warranty is not transferable by the first user.
A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal.
HYDRAULIC PLUMBING COMPONENTS WARRANTY
All hydraulic plumbing component suppliers will warrant the hose, adaptors, and fittings from component
failure for a period of five (5) years. The supplier's obligation under this warranty will be limited to the
replacement or repair of any failed components. The buyer understands that the seller will not be liable for any
other costs or damages.
HYDRAULIC CVLINDF-R WARRANTY
Each hydraulic cylinder will have a structural warranty of not less than five (5) years and a seal warranty of not
less than two and one -half (2.5) years.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM COMPONENTS WARRANTY
All hydraulic system component suppliers will warrant all Motion and Control Group components for a period
of five (5) years. This warranty will cover the valves, pumps, and hydraulic motors. Each component supplier's
obligation under this warranty will be limited to the replacement or repair of any failed components. The buyer
understands that the seller will not be liable for any other costs or damages. A copy of the five (5) year
warranty will be included with the bid.
120 -VOLT RECEPTACLE. AT TIP
A 120 -volt. 20 amp, three (3)-prong twist lock receptacle, with weatherproof cover will be provided at the tip of
the aerial device.
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
An Atkinson communication system will be furnished between tine aerial tip and the turntable operator's
position. The communication system will be a two (2) -way system with the communication speaker at tine tip
requiring no operator attention to transmit or receive. The transmitting and receiving volume controls will be
located at the turntable operator's position.
REMOTE AERIAL CONTROL
A remote control will be provided whereby all ladder movements can be controlled at the ladder tip, in addition
to the control console.
The tluee (3) ladder functions (extension, rotation, elevation) will be controlled individually by means of spring
Inaded, return to center 12 -volt proportional controls.
Pap
c 74 of 92
A momentary switch at the turntable control station will activate the controls at the ladder tip.
The reniole control aerial speed will be set in accordance with the current NFPA 1901 standards
RESCUE LIFTING SYSTEM
A rescue lilting attachment will be provided. The lifting, attachment brackets will mount to the front of the
aerial egress using two (2) easily removable mounting brackets. The rescue lifting system will consist of a pair
of nylatron pulleys mounted to a stainless steel shaft. The pulleys will be adjustable from side to side and will
have a total lifting capacity of 500 pounds, regardless of whether one (1) or both pulleys are being utilized.
SPECIAL IiE1GIIT BOOM SUPPORT
A special height boom support will be provided to raise the aerial device to clear the compartment above the
body.
AXE MOUNTING BRACKETS
Brackets will be provided near the end of the fly section of the aerial ladder for mounting a fire axe being
supplied by the purchaser. The mounting plates for this installation will be "D %A" finished aluminum.
PIKE POLE MOUNTING BRACKETS
will be "D. A" finished and provided near the end of the fly section of the aerial ladder for pike pole mounting.
The bracket will be sized to hold a
AIR HORN CONTROL AT AERIAL, TURNTABLF.
A push button control for the air horns will be provided at the aerial turntable. Collector ring space will be
available for this option to be utilized.
LIFTING EYE - ROPE RESCUE ATTACHMENT
Two (2) eyes will be welded, one (1) to each ladder beam, at the ladder egress with a spreader bar to mounted
between the eyes. This design will distribute a load evenly across the ladder beans because of a single lifting
eye on the spreader bar. The bar is retained by two (2) locking pins, one (1) at each end outboard of each eye.
Leveling is maintained by the bar rotating in the eyes.
MANSAVERT "r BARS, AERIAL TURNTABLF.
ManSaverT" bars will be installed at the aerial turntable.
WATER SYSTEM
A waterway system will be provided consisting of the following components and features:
The integral telescopic water system will consist of a 4.50" diameter tube in die base section, a 4.00" diameter
tube in the lower mid - section, a 3.50" diameter tube in the upper mid - section and a 3.00" diameter tube in the
fly section. The telescopic waterway will be constructed of anodized aluminum pipe.
The aerial will be capable of discharging up to 1000 gpm at 100 psi parallel to the ladder and 90 degrees to each
side of center.
An adjustable pressure relief valve will be furnished to protect the aerial waterway from a pressure surge
Two (2) 1.50" drain valves will be located at the lowest points of the waterway system.
WATFRWAV SEALS
Page 75 of 92
The waterway seals will be of type-13 PolyPak design, composed of nitroxile seal and a nitrite wiper, which
together offer maximum stability and extrusion resistance on the waterway. The seal will be capable of
withstanding pressures up to 2000 psi, temperatures in excess of 250 degrees Fahrenheit and have resistance to
all foam generating solutions. The seals will be internally lubricated.
The waterway seals will have automatic centering guides constructed of synthetic thermal polymer. The guides
will provide positive centering of the extendible sections within each other and the base section to insure longer
service life and smoother operation.
AERIAL MONITOR
An Akron, model 3578 monitor with stow and deploy will be provided at the tip with a Akron 1250 gpm
model 5177.
l'he monitor's functions will be controlled electrically from two (2) separate locations. One (1) control
will be located at the control console and the other at the ladder tip.
There will be a courtesy light at the tip of the aerial to illuminate the controls.
AERIAL MONITOR
An Akron Model 3578 monitor Wstow and deploy: and a 5177, (1250 gallon per minute), variable stream
nozzle with built in stream shaper will be provided. the monitor will be capable ot'delivering flows up to 1000
gpm. The actuators will allow for vertical travel of 135 degrees below the centerline of the aerial and 90
degrees on either side of center. The unit will be equipped with two (2) control boxes: one (1) at the aerial tip
and one (1) on the turntable control console. The monitor controls will include 'one touch" stow and deploy
function at the turntable location. There will be a courtesy light at the tip of the aerial to illuminate the controls.
FLOW METER (Aerial Waterway)
A Fire Research Corporation (FRC), model DF430, digital flow indicator with a four (4) digit LED display will
be provided for the aerial waterway at the turntable control station.
The display will have a flow totalizer, programmable high and low flow warnings, and automatically adjust
LLD brightness for day /night viewing.
AERIAL WATERWAY INLET
The aerial waterway will be plumbed from the fifth wheel area to the waterway swivel with 4.00" pipe. A 5.00"
inlet will be located on each side of the apparatus complete with a chrome plated cap. The individual "line"
pressure gauges for the inlets will be manufactured by Class 1. They will be a minuuum of 3.50" in diameter
and will have white faces with black letterine. Gauges will be compound type with a vacuum/pressure range of
30.00 " -0 -600 ".
The individual pressure gauge will be installed as close to the inlet as practical.
WATERWAY LOCKING SYSTEM
The aerial ladder waterway monitor will be capable of being positioned at either the fly section or at the next
lower section of the ladder.
The monitor location will be changeable by the use of a single handle, located at the side of the ladder.
The handle, attached to a cam bracket, will simply be moved forward to lock the monitor at the fly section and
back to lock it to the previous section.
There will he no pins to remove and reinstall
page 76 of 92
The monitor will be operational at all times, regardless of its position, without connecting or disconnecting
electrical lines.
The aerial waterway 1.5" drain valve will be mounted horizontal with a stainless steel extension with an elbow
at the end to direct to the water rear of the tiller tractor on both the driver and passenger side. Valve acuation
will be with a handle easily accessible from the side of the apparatus. This option will not include the drain
valve itself This option calls for the pipe and the valve to be painted job color.
OUTLET, 2.50" AUXILIARY, AERIAL TIP, HEAVY DUTY STEEL PAL
An auxiliary hose connection outlet will be supplied at the tip of the aerial ladder. It will be located on the left
hand side of the aerial waterway.
Flow to the auxiliary outlet will be supplied by 2.50" piping. A 2.50" gate valve with a non - rising stem and
crank handle will be supplied. A cap and chain will be provided.
Flow to the aerial waterway monitor will be controlled by a 4.00" aluminum butterfly valve with a non - rising
stem and crank handle. The valve will he located at the monitor inlet.
A 200 -psi relief valve and a .75" automatic drain valve will be supplied in the.. waterway at the tip.
TOOLS
The following tools will be provided for retorquing of all specified bolts as recommended by the manufacturer:
- Torque Wrench
- All Required Extensions, Sockets and Adapters
- 4 -to -I Multiplier
MANUALS
Two (2) operator maintenance manuals and two (2) wiring diagrams pertaining to the aerial device will be
provided with the apparatus at time of pick -up.
INITIAL INSTRUCTION
On initial delivery of the fire apparatus, the contractor will supply a qualified representative to demonstrate the
apparatus and provide initial instruction to the fire department regarding the operation, care, and maintenance of
the apparatus for a period of three (3) days.
ADDITIONAL AERIAL TRAINING
7 here will be one (1) additional aerial training day(s) provided by the manufacturer with a training engineer.
This is in addition to the standard three (3) days.
TILLER CAB
A permanently mounted tiller cab will be located on top of the tiller trailer, to the rear of the aerial ladder. 'I he
maximum overall height of the tiller cab will not exceed 134.00 ". The tiller cab will be totally enclosed.
The cab windshield will be automotive approved tinted safety glass and will provide a minimum of 1,513
square inches of clear viewing area. Fact) side window, directly rearward of the windshield, will be more than
536 square inches. The side windows. combined with the windshield, will provide a minimum of 2,585 square
incites of unobstructed viewing area. In order to provide maximum visibility for the tillerntan, there will be no
corner posts at the forward corners of the windshield.
Page 77 of 92
The upper area of each tiller cab door will be contoured into the roof, providing greater clearance when entering
and exiting the tiller cab. The tiller cab doors will be equipped with drop -down sliding window. The windows
will be 18.00" wide x 31.00" high.
The rear wall of the tiller cab will have a vertically -split sliding window. The window will be 33.50" wide x
27.75" high.
The tiller cab floor will be constructed of aluminum treadplate.
A two speed electric windshield wiper with washer will be provided for the front windshield. The windshield
washer reservoir will have a capacity of two (2) quarts and will be located forward of the tiller cab.
An adjustable, telescopic steering column will be provided.
Auxiliary lighting inside the tiller cab will consist of a 5.00" diameter overhead dome light with an integral
switch.
The following controWalarms will be provided inside the tiller cab:
Buzzer signaling system with foot switch control
Jackknife alarm
The following will be provided on the steering column support pedestal:
-Two heater/defroster outlets
- Diagnostic plug for trailer AHIS system
- Heater /defroster control switch
- Windshield wiper /washer control switch
The following controls/gauges will be located in the upper control panel:
- Dome. /step light switch
- Tiller wheel position indicator gauge. (I: C -R)
- Two 2.0" diameter amber turn signal & brake indicator lights
The cornering lights will be controlled by a switch on the steering column.
TILLER CAR HEATER
For the tillerman s comfort, the cab is equipped with a 13;650 BTU heateddcfroster. The heater will have a
multi -speed motor and thermostatic control located in the tiller cab within reach of the tillerman. The heater
will be diesel /kerosene fueled and will have a separate three (3) gallon fuel tank which will provide a minimum
of 23 hours of continuous running time. The fuel tank will be recessed in the body, behind the driver side tiller
cab access steps. '['here will be a minimum of two (2) defrost outlets in the cab for maximum defrost
Performance. The heater. defrost system will have an airflow of 85 cfni.
Page 78 of 92
AIR CONDITIONER
Air conditioning will be provided for the tiller cab.
The unit will be manufactured by Danhard Inc.
The air conditioner will have cooling capacity of 13,500 BTU.
The unit will be 120 volt AC and will be run off of the onboard generator. The full load amperage draw
will be 12.00 amps in the cooling mode.
The evaporator will be located ahead of the tiller cab on the top deck of the tiller trailer. The air conditioning
unit will not increase the overall height of the tiller cab.
TILLER CAB SEAT
A Seats Inc. 911 fixed companion high back style seat with forward and rearward adjustment will be provided
in the tiller cab for the lillemtan. The seat will be provided with a switch that is connected to a warning
indicator in the tractor cab. The indicator will indicate the tiller driver is not present in the tiller cab.
The seating position will be furnished with a 3 -point seat belt. The seat belt will be furnished with an automatic
retractor. Extension will be provided with the seat belt so the male end can be easily grasped and the female
end easily located while sitting in a normal position.
TILLER CAB STEPS
For access to the tiller cab, a series of four (4) steps will be furnished at the rear on each side of the apparatus.
The steps will be constructed of aluminum treadplate. The steps will be a minimum of 21.00" wide x 8.00"
deep. Handrails will be provided on each side of the step assemblies for maximum safety. The steps will be
illuminated for nighttime operation.
TILLERMAN'S INTERCOM
An Atkinson Dynamics two -way intercom will be provided between the tractor and the tillerman. The tractor
position will require push -to -talk and the tillemmn's position will be hands free.
JACKKNIFE ALARM
An audible and visual warning system will be provided to warn both drivers when the jackknife position
approaches the maximum allowable angle.
TILLER WARNING: INDICATOR
A wamine indicator in the tractor cab will be activated if the parking brake is released and the tiller driver is not
present in the tiller cab.
CONVEX MIRRORS (tiller cabl
A 6.00" diameter round convex mirror with adjustable arm will be installed on each side of tiller cab.
The engine start switch in the tiller cab will be a footswitch in place of the standard push button.
WINDOW DEFROST FANS
Two (2) window defrost fans will be mounted in forward comers.
TILLER TRAILER FRAME
The gooseneck area of the tiller trailer will be constructed of 100,000 psi minimum yield strength steel.
The gooseneck area will have a section modulus of 289 cu. in. mid a resistance to bending moment of
Page 79 of 92
28,900,000 inch pounds.
The gooseneck area will be 46.00" wide x 13.50" deep.
'I'he tiller trailer frame will be box type construction to effectively resist trailer twist.
The side rails will have a 13.38" tall web over the front and mid sections of the trailer, with a continuous
smooth taper to a 10.75" over the tiller axle.
The frame rails will be constructed of 80,000 psi minimum yield strength heat treated .38" thick steel, with
3.50" wide flanges and covered by top and bottom plates to form a ridged box structure. Cover plates will be
50,000 psi minimum yield strength steel.
The tiller trailer frame will have a section modulus of 257.7 cu. in., and a resisting bending moment (rbm) of
12,880,000 inch pounds over the critical regions of the frame assembly, with a section modulus of 18.96 cu. in.
with an rbm of 2,085,803 inch pounds over the rear axle.
T'he overall length of the tiller trailer frame will be 462.00 ".
WALKWAY TURNTABLE TO BODY
A walkway will be provided from the aerial turntable to the tiller body.
TILLER TRAILER NON DRIVE AXLE.
The tiller trailer axle will be of the independent suspension design with a ground rating of 22,800 pounds.
Upper and lower control arms will be used on each side of the axle. Upper control arm castings will be made of
100,000 -psi yield strength 8630 steel and the lower control arm casting will be made of 55,000 -psi yield ductile
iron.
I he center cross members and side plates will be constructed out of 80,000 -psi yield strength steel.
Each control arm will he mounted to the center section using elastomer bushings. These rubber bushings will
rotate on low friction plain bearings and be lubricated for life. Each bushing will also have a flange end to
absorb longitudinal impact loads, reducing noise and vibrations.
The upper control arm will be shorter than the lower arm so that wheel end geometry provides positive camber
when deflected below rated load and negative chamber above rated load.
Camber at load will be zxro degrees for optimum tire life.
1'he kingpin bearing will be of low friction design and be sealed for life.
'roe links that are adjustable for alignment of the wheel to the center of the trailer will be provided.
The wheel ends must have little to no bump steer when the chassis encounters a hole or obstacle.
T'hc steering linkage will provide proper steering angles for the inside and outside wheel, based on the vehicle
wheelbase.
T'he turning angle will be 24 degrees or greater.
TILLER TRAILER NON DRIVE AXLE WARRANTY
Page 80 of92
The non drive axle system will have a three (3) year parts and labor warranty
TILLER TRAILER STEERING
Dual Sheppard M 110 steering gears, with integral heavy -duty power steering, will be provided.
The steering wheel will be 18.00" in diameter, and capable of tilting and telescoping.
BRAKES
The tiller trailer brakes will be Knorr /Bendix disc type with a 17.00" ventilated rotor for improved stopping
distance.
SUSPENSION
Independent suspension will be provided with a minimum ground rating of 22,800 pounds. The independent
suspension system will be designed to provide maximum ride comfort. The design will allow the vehicle to
travel at highway speeds over improved road surfaces, and at moderate speeds over rough terrain with minimal
transfer of road shock and vibration to the vehicle's crew compartment.
Each wheel will have torsion bar type spring. In addition, each wheel end will also have energy absorbing
jounce bumpers to prevent bottoming of the suspension. The suspension design will be such that there is at
least 10.00" of total wheel travel and a minimum of 3.75" before suspension bottoms. The torsion bar type
spring and anchor lock system will allow for simple lean adjustments, without the use of shims. Adjustment for
a lean will be accomplished within 15 minutes. Anchor adjustment design is such that it allows 4.0" of ride
height adjustment per side.
The independent suspension will have been put through a durability test that simulated a minimum of 140,000
miles of inner city driving.
TIRES
I'iller trailer tires will be Michelin radials 425.105R22.50, 20 ply "all position" X7.Y tread.
The tires will be mounted on 22.50" x 12.25" polished aluminum disc type wheels with a ten (10) -stud 11.25"
bolt circle.
011, SEALS
Oil seals will be provided on the tiller axle.
INSTALL CUSTOMER PROVIDED EQUIPMENT
The following customer supplied equipment shall be furnished to a preferred installer for installation.
- One (1) MW -800 Motorola CP1J & Monitor
- One VRM 850 Modem
- One AVL Pinpoint X Modem
- Pour (4) Motorola RW'LN4208 portable radio chargers
- One (1) Motorola Astro Spectra 800MHz mobile radio
The apparatus builder shall not accept or warranty customer furnished equipment. Specific shipping
requirements shall he followed.
page 81 of42
ANTENNA INSTALLATION
There will he four (4) customer supplied two -way radio antenna(s) installed on the roof The antenna coax
cable will he run from the antenna to To be determined at pre con. Specific shipping requirements will be
followed.
LOOSE EQUIPMENT
The following equipment will be furnished with the completed unit:
- One (1) bag of chrome, stainless steel, or cadmium plated screws, nuts, bolts and washers, as used in the
construction of the unit.
NFPA REQUIRED LOOSE EQUIPMENT PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT
The following loose equipment as outlined in NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, section 8.8.2 will be provided
by the fire department. All loose equipment will be installed on the apparatus before placed in
emergency service, unless the fire department waives NFPA section 4.21.
- Two (2) crowbars mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus.
- Two (2) claw tools mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus.
- Two (2) 12 lb (5 kg) sledgehammers mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus.
- One (1) SCBA complying with NFPA 1981, Standard on Open- Circuit.Se/J Contained Breathing
Apparatus far Fire and Emergency Services, for each assigned seating position, but not fewer than four
(4), mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus or stored in containers supplied by the SCBA
manufacturer.
- One (]),spare SCBA cylinder for each SCBA carried, each mounted in a bracket fastened to the
apparatus or stored in a specially designed storage space(s).
- One (1) first aid kit.
- Six (6) salvage covers, each a miramum size of 12 ft x 18 ft (3.6 in x 5.5 m).
- Four (4) combination spanner wrenches mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus.
- Two (2) scoop shovels mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus.
- One pair of bolt cutters, 24" (0.6 m) minimum, mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus.
- Four (4) ladder belts meeting the requirements of NFPA 1983, Standard on F'ire.Service Life.Sajety
Rope and System Components.
- One (1) 150 It (45 m) light -use life safety rope meeting the requirements of NFPA 1983, Standard on
Fire Senwv Life Sajery Rope and System Components.
- One (1) 150 ft (45 m) general -use life safety rope meeting the requirements of NFPA 1983, Standard
on Fire Serrice Life .Safenv Rope and System Components.
- Two (2) 150 It (45 m) utility ropes having a breaking strength of at least 5000 lb (2300 kg).
- One (1) box of tools to include the following:
Page 82 of 92
one(1) hacksaw with three (3) blades
one(] ) keyhole saw
one (1) 12" (.3 m) pipe wrench
one (1) 24" (.6 in) pipe wrench
one (1) ballpeen hammer
one (1) pair of tin snips
one (1) pair of pliers
one (1) pair of lineman's pliers
assorted types and sizes of screwdrivers
assorted adjustable wrenches
assorted combination wrenches
- One (I ) traffic vest for each seating position, each vest to comply with ANSUISEA 207, Standardfor
High Visibility Public Safety Vests, and have a five -point breakaway feature that includes two at the
shoulders, two at the sides, and one at the front.
- Five (5) fluorescent orange traffic cones not less than 28" (711 mm) in height, each equipped with a 6"
(152 mm) retro - reflective white band no more than 4" (152 mm) from the top of the cone, and an
additional 4" (102 mm) retro - reflective white band 2" (51 mm) below the 6"(152 mm) bated.
- Five (5) illuminated warning devices such as highway flares, unless the five (5) fluorescent orange
traffic cones have illuminating capabilities.
- One automatic external defibrillator (AED).
- One (I ) double female 2.50" adapter with National Hose Threads, mounted in a bracket fastened to the
apparatus (if equipped with a fire pump).
- One (I ) double male 2.50" adapter with National Hose Threads, mounted ui a bracket fastened to the
apparatus (if equipped with a fire pump).
- One (1) rubber mallet, titr use on suction hose connections, mounted in a bracket fastened to the
apparatus (if equipped with a fire pump).
- Two (2) hydrant wrenches mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus (if equipped with a fire
pump).
- If the supply hose carried does not use sexless couplings, an additional double female adapter and
double male adapter, sized to fit the supply hose carried, will be carried mounted in brackets fastened to
the apparatus (if equipped with a fire pump).
- If none of the pump intakes are valved, a hose appliance that is equipped with one or more gated
intakes with female swivel connection(s) compatible with the supply hose used on one side and a swivel
connection with pump intake threads on the other side will be carried. Any intake connection larger than
3 in. (75 nun) will include a pressure relief device that meets die requirements of 16.6.6 (if equipped
with a fire pump).
- If the apparatus does not have a 2'/•" National Hose (NJ 1) intake, an adapter from 2'/," NII female to a
pump intake will he carried, mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus if not already mounted
directly to the intake (if equipped with a fire pump).
- If the supply hose carried has other than 2:;" National I lose (NI{) threads, adapters will be carried to allow
Page 83 of 92
feeding the supply hose from a 21/2" Nil thread male discharge and to allow the hose to connect to a 2,,4" NH
female intake, mounted in brackets fastened to the apparatus if not already mounted directly to the discharge or
intake (if equipped with a fire pump).
DRY CHEMICAL EXTINGUISHER PROVIDED HY FIRE DEPARTMENT
NFPA 1901. 2009 edition, section 8.8.2 requires one (I) approved dry chemical portable fire
extinguisher with a minimum 80 -B:C rating mounted in a bracket fastened to the apparatus.
The extinguisher is not on the apparatus as manufactured. "I'he fire department will provide and mount the
extinguisher.
WATER EXTINGUISHER PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT
NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, section 8.8.2 requires one (1) 2.5 gallon or larger water extinguisher mounted
in a bracket fastened to the apparatus.
The extinguisher is not on the apparatus as manufactured. The fire department will provide and mount the
extinguisher.
AXE. FLATHEAD, PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT
NFPA 1901, 2009 edition. Section 8.8.2 requires two (2) flathead axes mounted in brackets fastened to the
apparatus.
The axes are not on the apparatus as manufactured. The fire department will provide and mount the axes.
AXE, PICKHEAD. PROVIDED BY FIRE DEPARTMENT
NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, Section 8.8.2 requires three (3) pickhead axes mounted in brackets fastened to the
apparatus.
I'he axes are not on the apparatus as manufactured. The fire department will provide and mount the axes.
WIRING SCHEMATIC
One (1) copy on CD of detailed wiring schematic will be provided for the 120!240 -volt electrical system.
PAINT
The exterior custom cab and body painting procedure will consist of a seven (7) step finishing process as
follows-
1 Manual Surface Preparation - All exposed metal surfaces on the custom cab and body will be thoroughly
cleaned and prepared for painting. Surfaces that will not be painted include all chrome plated, polished
stainless steel, anodized aluminum and bright aluminum treadplatc. Each imperfection on the exterior metal
surface will be removed or filled and then sanded smooth for a smooth appearance. All seams will be sealed
before painting.
2. Chemical Cleanfnc ,and Treatment - The metal surfaces will be properly cleaned using a high pressure and
high temperature cleanine system. Surfaces are chemically cleaned to remove all dirt, oil, grease and metal
oxides to ensure the subsequent coatings bond well. An ultra pure water final rinse will be applied to all metal
surfaces at the conclusion of the metal treatment process.
3. Primer/Surfacer (:oats - A two (2) component urethane primer /surfacer will be hand applied to the
chemically treated metal surfaces to provide a strong corrosion protective base coat and to smooth out the
surface.
Page 84 of 92
4. Hand Sanding - The primer /surfacer coat will be lightly sanded to an ultra smooth finish.
5. Sealer Primer Coat - A two (2) component sealer primer coat will be applied over the sanded primer
G. lopeoat Paint - Urethane base coat will be applied to opacity for correct color matching.
7. Clearcoat - Two (2) coats of an automotive grade two (2) component urethane will be applied. Lap style
doors will be clear coated to match the body. Roll -up doors will not be clear coated and the standard roll -up
door warranty will apply.
All removable items such as brackets, compartment doors, door hinges, trim, etc. will be removed and painted
separately to insure paint behind all mounted items. Body assemblies that cannot be finish painted after
assembly will be finish painted before assembly.
The cab and the body will be painted Pierce H351 Red.
Prior to reassembly and reinstallation of lights, handrails, door hardware and any miscellaneous items an
isolation tape, gasket or dielectric material will be used to prevent damage to the finish painted surfaces (no
exceptions). A nylon washer will be installed under each acorn nut or metal screw that is fastened directly to an
exterior painted surface.
PAINT- ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT
The contractor will meet or exceed his current State regulations concerning paint operations. Pollution control
will include measures to protect the atmosphere, water and soil. Controls will include the following conditions:
- Topcoats and primers will be chrome and lead free.
- Metal treatment chemicals will be chrome free. The wastewater generated in the metal treatment process will
be treated on -site to remove any other heavy metals.
Particulate emission collection from sanding operations will have a 99.99°x6 efficiency factor.
-
Particulate emissions front painting operations will he collected by a dry filter or water wash process If the
dry filter means is used, it will have an efficiency rating o198.00 %. Water wash systems will be 99.97%
efficient.
- Water from water wash booths will he reused. Solids will be removed mechanically on a continual basis to
keep the water clean.
- Paint wastes will be disposed of in an environmentally safe manner.
- Empty metal paint containers will be crushed and recycled to recover the metal.
- Solvents used in cleanup operations will be collected, recycled on -site, or sent off -site for distillation and
returned for rouse. Residue from the distillation operation will be used as fuel in off -site kilns.
Additionally, the finished apparatus will not be manufactured with or contain products that have ozone
depleting substances. The contractor will, upon demand, present evidence that his manufacturing facility meets
the above conditions and that it is in compliance with his State EPA rules and regulations.
PAINT
The tiller cab will be painted Red ::351.
Page 85 of 92
PAINT CHASSIS FRAME ASSEMBLY
The chassis frame assembly will he painted job color before the installation of the cab and body, and before
installation of the engine, drive shafts and transmission assembly, air brake lines, electrical wire harnesses, etc.
Components that are included with the chassis frame assembly will be painted job color are frame rails, cross
members, axles, suspension, steering gear, fuel tank, body substructure supports, miscellaneous mounting
brackets, etc.
WARRANTY - PAINT AND CORROSION
Limited WarTM
Except as provided below, and provided the vehicle has been placed in service within 60 days after delivery to
the original purchaser as established by our original invoice, for a period of ten (10) years after delivery to the
original purchaser, Pierce Manufacturing Inc. ( "Pierce ") warrants to the user that its cab and body are free of
blistering, peeling, corrosion, or any other adhesion defect caused by defective manufacturing methods or paint
material selection for exterior surfaces of the cab and body of the vehicle. This limited warranty will apply only
if the vehicle is properly maintained and used in service which is normal to the particular vehicle. Normal
service means service which does not subject the vehicle to stresses or impacts greater than normally result
from the careful use of the vehicle or chassis. If the buyer discovers a defector noncontonnity it must notify
Pierce in writing within 30 days after the date of discovery. This limited warranty is not transferable by the first
user, and is applicable to the vehicle in the following percentage costs of warranty repair, if any:
Topcoat Durability & Appearance:
Integrity of Coating System:
Corrosion:
Gloss, Color Retention & Cracking
Adhesion, Blisterin %bbling
Dissimilar Metal and Crevice
0 -72 months 100%
0 -36 months 100%
0 -36 months 100%
73 -96 months 50%
37 -84 months 50%
37 -48 months 50%
97 -120 months 25%
85 -120 months 25%
49 -72 months 25%
73 -120 months 10%
This limited warranty applies only to cab and body exterior paint. Paint on the vehicle's undercarriage, cab and
body interior is warranted only under the Pierce Basic One Year Limited Warranty.
In addition to the foregoing, and subject to all of the tenns and conditions of this Limited Warranty, except cost
allocations, Pierce warrants its cab and body exterior paint for a period of ten (10) years against corrosion
perforation.
A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal.
This warranty text is an illustration only. For actual details, refer to the warranty document. A copy of the
Pierce warranty is included with this proposal.
PAINT, COMPARTMENT INTERIOR
7 he compartment interior will be painted with a gray spatter finish for case of cleaning and to make it easier to
touch up scratches and nicks.
AERIAL DEVICE PAINT COLOR
All aerial device structural components above the rotation point that are not chronic plated or stainless steel will
be painted.
All buy out components, such as monitor, no»le, gauges, etc. will be supplied as received from the vendor.
All areas to be painted will he sanded to remove any metal flakes and smooth any rough surfaces.
Page 86 of 92
All ladder surfaces to be painted will be phosphatired to remove metal impurities, aid paint adhesion and inhibit
rust.
The components will be prime painted with an epoxy primer and finished painted with a durable, high quality
white paint (manufacturer's standard brand).
'I he support structure and components below the rotation point will be painted job color.
The torque box, stabilizers, tiller axle & suspension will be painted job color.
The tip of the ladder will be painted a contrasting color for high visibility.
REFLECTIVE RAND
A 6.00" white reflective hand will be provided across the front of the vehicle and along the sides of the body.
The reflective band provided on the cab face will be at the headlight level.
CHEVRON STRIPING, REAR
There will be alternating chevron striping located on the entire rear - facing vertical surface of the
apparatus including the rear door and bumper. The tillerman cab will not be covered.
The colors will be red and fluorescent yellow diamond grade.
Each stripe will be 6.00" in width.
This will meet the requirements of NFPA 1901, 2009 edition, which states that 50% of the rear surface will be
covered with chevron striping.
JOG(S) IN REFLECTIVE. RAND
The reflective band located on each side of the apparatus body will contain one (I) jog(s) and will be angled at
approximately a 45 degree "s" when installed.
PIN STRIPE, DOUBLE'rAPF,
A double pin stripe will be applied on the reflective band. The pin stripe will consist of a Black .125' stripe
followed by a .125" void and then a blue .062" wide stripe. This pin stripe will be located on the top and
bottom portion of the reflective band.
REFLECTIVE STRIPE. CAB DOORS
A 6.00" x 16.00" ruby red reflective stripe will be provided across the interior of each cab door. The stripe will
be located approxunately 1.00" up from the bottom, on the door panel.
lllis stripe will meet the NFPA 1901 requirement.
REFLECTIVE STRIPE, TILLERM AN DOORS
A 6.00" x 16.00" ruby red reflective stripe will be provided across the interior of each tillennan's entry
door. The stripe will be located approximately 1.00" up from the bottom, on the door panel.
This stripe will meet the NFPA 1901 requirement.
LETTERING ON AERIAL BOONT
There will be 6.00" to 7.00" high white reflective vinyl lettering provided on a separate panel on each side of
Page 87 of 92
the base ladder section. The lettering will include a Black outline. The panels will be painted Red sign plate
body color #351.
COLD LEAF BODY STRIPE.
A gold leaf stripe will be provided on each side of the body, over the tender.
LF.TTF.RINC
The lettering will be totally encapsulated between two (2) layers of clear vinyl.
GOLDSTARO LAMINATION WARRANTY
Limited Warrant),
Except as provided below, for a period of three (3) years after delivery to the original purchaser, Pierce
Manufacturing Inc. ( "Pierce ") warrants to the user that each Goldstarl) lamination sold by it will be free from
defects in material and workmanship. "is limited warranty will apply only if the vehicle on which such
Goldstar6J lanrbtation is affixed or installed is properly mauttained and used in service which is normal to the
particular vehicle. Normal service means smice which does not subject the vehicle to stresses or impacts
greater than normally result from a careful use of the vehicle. If the buyer discovers a defect or nonconformity
it must notify Pierce in writing within 30 days after date of discovery. This limited warranty is not transferable
by the first user.
A copy of the Pierce warranty is included with this proposal.
LETI -ERING
Forty -one (4 1) to sixty (60) genuine gold leaf lettering, 3.00" high. outlining and shading will be provided.
RF.FLECI'IVE LETTERING.
15 letters, 6.00" high blue reflective will be installed on on crew cab doors and front of cab.
REFLECTIVE LETTERING
six (6) letters, 6.00" high white reflective letter(s) will be installed on Rear of tiller cab.
DECAL INSTALLATION
There will be one ( I ) pair of decals furnished by the fire department and applied by the apparatus manufacturer.
EMBLEM
There will be one (1) pair of emblems with the words "IIONORING AMERICA'S BRAVEST 9- 11 -01" and a
firefighter's helmet will be mounted N!A.N!A The emblems will be color imaged.
Page 88 of 92
EXHIBIT C
CITY OF NEWPORT BEACH
BOND NO.
FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE BOND
The premium charges on this Bond is $
being at the rate of $ thousand of the Contract
price.
WHEREAS, the City of Newport Beach, State of California, has awarded to
PIERCE MANUFACTURING, INC. hereinafter designated as the "Principal," a contract for
two (2) new GPM Triple Combination Pumpers and one (1) new 100' Heavy Duty Tiller
Ladder Truck in strict conformity with the Contract on file with the office of the City Clerk of
the City of Newport Beach, which is incorporated herein by this reference.
WHEREAS, Principal has executed or is about to execute the Contract and the
terms thereof require the furnishing of a Bond for the faithful performance of the Contract.
NOW, THEREFORE, we, the Principal, and
duly authorized to transact business under the laws of the State of
California as Surety (hereinafter "Surety "), are held and finely bound unto the City of
Newport Beach, in the sum of Two Million Ninety Nine Thousand and Six Hundred
Thirty One Dollars and no /100 ($2,099,631.00) lawful money of the United States of
America, said sum being equal to 100% of the estimated amount of the Contract, to be
paid to the City of Newport Beach, its successors, and assigns; for which payment well
and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and administrators,
successors, or assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these present.
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the Principal, or the
Principal's heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns, fail to abide by, and
well and truly keep and perform any or all the work, covenants, conditions, and
agreements in the Contract Documents and any alteration thereof made as therein
provided on its part, to be kept and performed at the time and in the manner therein
specified, and in all respects according to its true intent and meaning, or fails to indemnify,
defend, and save harmless the City of Newport Beach, its officers, employees and agents,
as therein stipulated, then, Surety will faithfully perform the same, in an amount not
exceeding the sum specked in this Bond; otherwise this obligation shall become null and
void.
As a part of the obligation secured hereby, and in addition to the face amount
specified in this Performance Bond, there shall be included costs and reasonable
expenses and fees, including reasonable attorneys fees, incurred by the City, only in the
event the City is required to bring an action in law or equity against Surety to enforce the
obligations of this Bond.
Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time,
alterations or additions to the terms of the Contract or to the work to be performed
thereunder shall in any way affect its obligations on this Bond, and R does hereby waive
notice of any such change, extension of time, alterations or additions of the Contract or to
the work or to the specifications.
This Faithful Performance Bond shall be extended and maintained by the Principal
in full force and effect for one (1) year following the date of formal acceptance of the
Project by the City.
In the event that the Principal executed this bond as an individual, it is agreed that
the death of any such Principal shall not exonerate the Surety from its obligations under
this Bond.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed by the Principal
and Surety above named, on the day of 2010.
Name of Vendor (Principal)
Name of Surety
Address of Surety
Telephone
Authorized Signature(fftle
Authorized Agent Signature
Print Name and Title
NOTARY ACKNOWLEDGMENTS OF VENDOR AND SURETY MUST BE ATTACHED
Page 12